FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 802.11a/b/g/n/ac + BT 4.1 Module

 

 

 

 

 

Owners Manual BL00004999-200 EN Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents be-

fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be read by all who use the product. For the Latest Information The latest versions of the manuals are available from:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The site can be accessed not only from your computer but also from smartphones and tablets. It also contains information on the software license. For information on fi rmware updates, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software/

ii P Chapter Index Menu List 1 Before You Begin 2 First Steps 3 Basic Photography and Playback 4 Movie Recording and Playback 5 Taking Photographs 6 The Shooting Menus 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 8 The Setup Menus 9 Shortcuts 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 Connections 12 Technical Notes iv 1 37 55 61 67 103 171 197 249 263 281 295 iii Menu List Camera menu options are listed below. Shooting Menus Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies. N See page 103 for details. H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING G AF/MF SETTING M e n u L i s t 1313 2323 P FOCUS AREA 119 AF MODE 120 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 121 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 124 AF POINT DISPLAYyz 124 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 125 PRE-AF 125 AF ILLUMINATOR 125 FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 126 AF+MF 128 MF ASSIST 129 FOCUS CHECK 129 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 130 INSTANT AF SETTING 130 DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 131 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 131 132 3333 TOUCH SCREEN MODE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION LONG EXPOSURE NR LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER COLOR SPACE PIXEL MAPPING SELECT CUSTOM SETTING EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING P 104 105 106 107 108 108 109 109 110 111 112 115 115 115 115 116 116 116 116 117 117 118 1313 2323 3333 iv A SHOOTING SETTING B MOVIE SETTING SELF-TIMER SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING AE BKT SETTING FILM SIMULATION BKT FOCUS BKT PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO IS MODE MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING 35mm FORMAT MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 1212 2222 F FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING M e n u L i s t Menu List P 135 135 136 137 138 138 139 140 141 142 142 143 144 146 147 P 148 148 149 149 150 150 P MOVIE MODE 151 H.265(HEVC)/H.264 153 MOVIE COMPRESSION 153 F FILM SIMULATION 154 F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) 154 F DYNAMIC RANGE 155 F WHITE BALANCE 155 F HIGHLIGHT TONE 156 F SHADOW TONE 156 F COLOR 156 F SHARPNESS 157 F NOISE REDUCTION 157 V INTERFRAME NR 157 F-Log/HLG RECORDING 158 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 159 F FOCUS AREA 159 MOVIE AF MODE 159 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING 160 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 161 F MF ASSIST 161 F FOCUS CHECK 161 4K MOVIE OUTPUT 162 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT 162 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY 163 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY 163 HDMI REC CONTROL 163 ZEBRA SETTING 164 ZEBRA LEVEL 164 AUDIO SETTING 165 TIME CODE SETTING 167 TALLY LIGHT 169 MOVIE SILENT CONTROL 170 1144 2244 3344 4444 v P 177 178 180 182 182 183 184 185 C PLAY BACK MENU RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING COPY IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PHOTOBOOK ASSIST PRINT ORDER (DPOF) instax PRINTER PRINT 2323 3333 DISP ASPECT P 186 187 188 189 190 191 193 194 195 The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. N See page 177 for details. C PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION ERASE SIMULTANEOUS DELETE

(RAW SLOT1/JPG SLOT2) CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE M e n u L i s t 1313 vi Setup Menus Adjust basic camera settings. N See page 197 for details. D USER SETTING 1212 FORMAT DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE Qa MY MENU SETTING SENSOR CLEANING BATTERY AGE RESET 2222 REGULATORY D SOUND SETTING AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. SHUTTER VOLUME SHUTTER SOUND PLAYBACK VOLUME P 198 199 199 200 200 201 201 202 202 P 203 203 204 204 204 204 Menu List M e n u L i s t 1313 D SCREEN SETTING P EVF BRIGHTNESS 205 EVF COLOR 205 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 205 LCD BRIGHTNESS 206 LCD COLOR 206 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 206 IMAGE DISP. 207 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 207 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 208 NATURAL LIVE VIEW 208 FRAMING GUIDELINE 209 AUTOROTATE PB 209 FOCUS SCALE UNITS 210 DUAL DISPLAY SETTING 210 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 211 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 212 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 213 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 214 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 214 SUB MONITOR SETTING 215 REAR SUB MONITOR SETTING 218 SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR 220 REAR SUB MONITOR BRIGHTNESS 220 2323 3333 vii Menu List D SAVE DATA SETTING P FRAME NO. 236 SAVE ORG IMAGE 237 EDIT FILE NAME 237 CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE) 237 SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) 238 SELECT SLOT(FSEQUENTIAL) 238 SELECT FOLDER 238 COPYRIGHT INFO 239 D CONNECTION SETTING P Bluetooth SETTINGS 240 NETWORK SETTING 242 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING 243 PC CONNECTION MODE 244 WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING 245 GENERAL SETTINGS 246 INFORMATION 247 RESET WIRELESS SETTING 247 P 221 222 223 226 227 227 228 228 229 229 230 230 230 231 232 P 233 234 235 235 1212 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT CARD FOCUS RING FOCUS RING OPERATION AE/AF-LOCK MODE AWB-LOCK MODE EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING TOUCH SCREEN SETTING LOCK 2222 M e n u L i s t D POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE SHOOTING STAND BY MODE AUTO POWER SAVE viii P Table of Contents Introduction ........................................................................................................... ii For the Latest Information ............................................................................................ ii Menu List................................................................................................................iv Shooting Menus ................................................................................................................iv The Playback Menu .........................................................................................................vi Setup Menus .......................................................................................................................vii Supplied Accessories .......................................................................................xix About This Manual .............................................................................................xx Symbols and Conventions .........................................................................................xx Terminology ........................................................................................................................xx 1 Before You Begin Before You Begin 1 1 Parts of the Camera .............................................................................................2 The Serial Number Plate ................................................................................................5 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) .....................................................................................5 The DRIVE mode dial .......................................................................................................6 The DRIVE Button ...............................................................................................................7 The Command Dials ........................................................................................................8 The Indicator Lamp ..........................................................................................................9 The LCD Monitor .............................................................................................................10 The Viewfi nder ....................................................................................................12 Attaching the Viewfi nder ...........................................................................................13 The Eye Cup .......................................................................................................................14 Focusing the Viewfi nder .............................................................................................15 Camera Displays .................................................................................................16 The Electronic Viewfi nder ..........................................................................................16 The LCD Monitor .............................................................................................................18 Choosing a Display Mode .........................................................................................20 Adjusting Display Brightness ...................................................................................21 The DISP/BACK Button ................................................................................................22 The Dual Display ..............................................................................................................23 Customizing the Standard Display ......................................................................24 The Secondary LCD Monitor ....................................................................................26 The Rear Secondary Monitor ...................................................................................29 Using the Menus ................................................................................................30 Touch Screen Mode ...........................................................................................31 Shooting Touch Controls ...........................................................................................31 Playback Touch Controls ............................................................................................35 ix Taking Pictures in Portrait Orientation .......................................................36 Display Rotation ...............................................................................................................36 2 First Steps First Steps 37 37 Attaching the Strap ...........................................................................................38 Attaching a Lens .................................................................................................40 Charging the Batteries .....................................................................................41 Inserting the Batteries ......................................................................................45 Inserting Memory Cards ..................................................................................47 Using Two Cards ..............................................................................................................48 Compatible Memory Cards ......................................................................................49 Turning the Camera On and Off ...................................................................50 Checking the Battery Level.............................................................................51 Basic Setup ...........................................................................................................52 Choosing a Diff erent Language.............................................................................54 Changing the Time and Date ..................................................................................54 3 Basic Photography and Playback Basic Photography and Playback 55 55 Taking Photographs (Mode P) .......................................................................56 Viewing Pictures .................................................................................................59 Deleting Pictures ................................................................................................60 4 Movie Recording and Playback Movie Recording and Playback 61 61 Recording Movies ..............................................................................................62 Adjusting Movie Settings ...........................................................................................64 Viewing Movies ...................................................................................................65 5 Taking Photographs Taking Photographs 67 67 P, S, A, and M Modes ..........................................................................................68 Mode P: Program AE .....................................................................................................68 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE ......................................................................................70 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ..................................................................................73 Mode M: Manual Exposure .......................................................................................75 Autofocus ..............................................................................................................77 Focus Mode ........................................................................................................................78 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ................................................................................80 Focus-Point Selection...................................................................................................82 Manual Focus.......................................................................................................85 Checking Focus ................................................................................................................87 x Table of Contents Sensitivity..............................................................................................................90 AUTO .......................................................................................................................................91 Metering ................................................................................................................92 Exposure Compensation .................................................................................93 Focus/Exposure Lock ........................................................................................94 Other Controls ..................................................................................................................95 Bracketing .............................................................................................................96 O AE BKT .............................................................................................................................97 W ISO BKT ..........................................................................................................................97 X FILM SIMULATION BKT ........................................................................................97 V WHITE BALANCE BKT ............................................................................................98 Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ..........................................................................................98 Z FOCUS BKT .................................................................................................................98 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) ............................................................99 Multiple Exposures ......................................................................................... 101 6 The Shooting Menus 103 The Shooting Menus 103 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING ............................................................................. 104 IMAGE SIZE ....................................................................................................................... 104 IMAGE QUALITY ............................................................................................................ 105 RAW RECORDING ......................................................................................................... 106 FILM SIMULATION ........................................................................................................ 107 B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) ............................................................................. 108 GRAIN EFFECT ................................................................................................................ 108 COLOR CHROME EFFECT......................................................................................... 109 SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT .............................................................................................. 109 DYNAMIC RANGE ......................................................................................................... 110 D RANGE PRIORITY ...................................................................................................... 111 WHITE BALANCE ........................................................................................................... 112 HIGHLIGHT TONE ......................................................................................................... 115 SHADOW TONE ............................................................................................................. 115 COLOR ................................................................................................................................. 115 SHARPNESS ...................................................................................................................... 115 NOISE REDUCTION ...................................................................................................... 116 LONG EXPOSURE NR .................................................................................................. 116 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ......................................................................... 116 COLOR SPACE ................................................................................................................. 116 PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................................. 117 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................................................... 117 xi EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................... 118 AF/MF SETTING ................................................................................................ 119 FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................... 119 AF MODE ........................................................................................................................... 120 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ......................................................................................... 121 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................... 124 AF POINT DISPLAY yz ........................................................................................ 124 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS ................................................................................. 125 PRE-AF ................................................................................................................................. 125 AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................................... 125 FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 126 AF+MF ................................................................................................................................ 128 MF ASSIST ......................................................................................................................... 129 FOCUS CHECK ................................................................................................................ 129 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA................................................................ 130 INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................................. 130 DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE ........................................................................................... 131 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ..................................................................................... 131 TOUCH SCREEN MODE ............................................................................................. 132 SHOOTING SETTING ....................................................................................... 135 SELF-TIMER ....................................................................................................................... 135 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING...................................................................................... 136 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING .................................................................................. 136 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING ......................... 137 AE BKT SETTING ............................................................................................................ 138 FILM SIMULATION BKT .............................................................................................. 138 FOCUS BKT ....................................................................................................................... 139 PHOTOMETRY ................................................................................................................. 140 SHUTTER TYPE ............................................................................................................... 141 FLICKER REDUCTION .................................................................................................. 142 ISO ......................................................................................................................................... 142 IS MODE ............................................................................................................................. 143 MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING ................................................................................... 144 35mm FORMAT MODE ............................................................................................. 146 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 147 FLASH SETTING ................................................................................................ 148 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................... 148 RED EYE REMOVAL ...................................................................................................... 148 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n xii 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents TTL-LOCK MODE ........................................................................................................... 149 LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................... 149 MASTER SETTING ......................................................................................................... 150 CH SETTING ..................................................................................................................... 150 MOVIE SETTING ............................................................................................... 151 MOVIE MODE .................................................................................................................. 151 H.265(HEVC)/H.264 ..................................................................................................... 153 MOVIE COMPRESSION .............................................................................................. 153 F FILM SIMULATION ................................................................................................. 154 F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) ...................................................................... 154 F DYNAMIC RANGE .................................................................................................. 155 F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................... 155 F HIGHLIGHT TONE .................................................................................................. 156 F SHADOW TONE ...................................................................................................... 156 F COLOR ......................................................................................................................... 156 F SHARPNESS .............................................................................................................. 157 F NOISE REDUCTION .............................................................................................. 157 V INTERFRAME NR ................................................................................................... 157 F-Log/HLG RECORDING ........................................................................................... 158 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................... 159 F FOCUS AREA ............................................................................................................ 159 MOVIE AF MODE .......................................................................................................... 159 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................... 160 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 161 F MF ASSIST .................................................................................................................. 161 F FOCUS CHECK ......................................................................................................... 161 4K MOVIE OUTPUT ...................................................................................................... 162 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT ........................................................................................ 162 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY............................................................................... 163 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY ................................................................................. 163 HDMI REC CONTROL .................................................................................................. 163 ZEBRA SETTING ............................................................................................................. 164 ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................... 164 AUDIO SETTING ............................................................................................................ 165 TIME CODE SETTING .................................................................................................. 167 TALLY LIGHT ..................................................................................................................... 169 MOVIE SILENT CONTROL ......................................................................................... 170 xiii 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n 7 Playback and the Playback Menu Playback and the Playback Menu 171 171 The Playback Display ..................................................................................... 172 The DISP/BACK Button ............................................................................................. 173 Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................. 175 Playback Zoom .............................................................................................................. 176 Multi-Frame Playback ................................................................................................ 176 The Playback Menu ........................................................................................ 177 SWITCH SLOT .................................................................................................................. 177 RAW CONVERSION ...................................................................................................... 178 ERASE ................................................................................................................................... 180 SIMULTANEOUS DELETE(RAW SLOT1/JPG SLOT2) ................................... 182 CROP .................................................................................................................................... 182 RESIZE .................................................................................................................................. 183 PROTECT ............................................................................................................................ 184 IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................... 185 RED EYE REMOVAL ...................................................................................................... 186 VOICE MEMO SETTING ............................................................................................. 187 COPY .................................................................................................................................... 188 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER ........................................................................................ 189 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 190 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST .................................................................................................. 191 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ................................................................................................. 193 instax PRINTER PRINT ................................................................................................. 194 DISP ASPECT ................................................................................................................... 195 8 The Setup Menus The Setup Menus 197 197 USER SETTING .................................................................................................. 198 FORMAT ............................................................................................................................. 198 DATE/TIME ........................................................................................................................ 199 TIME DIFFERENCE ........................................................................................................ 199 Qa ................................................................................................................. 200 MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................................... 200 SENSOR CLEANING ..................................................................................................... 201 BATTERY AGE .................................................................................................................. 201 RESET ................................................................................................................................... 202 REGULATORY .................................................................................................................. 202 SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................. 203 AF BEEP VOL. .................................................................................................................. 203 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. .............................................................................................. 203 xiv 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents OPERATION VOL. .......................................................................................................... 204 SHUTTER VOLUME ....................................................................................................... 204 SHUTTER SOUND ......................................................................................................... 204 PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................... 204 SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................. 205 EVF BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................... 205 EVF COLOR ....................................................................................................................... 205 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................... 205 LCD BRIGHTNESS .......................................................................................................... 206 LCD COLOR ...................................................................................................................... 206 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................... 206 IMAGE DISP. ..................................................................................................................... 207 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS ............................................................................................ 207 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ............................................................. 208 NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................... 208 FRAMING GUIDELINE ................................................................................................. 209 AUTOROTATE PB ........................................................................................................... 209 FOCUS SCALE UNITS .................................................................................................. 210 DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ........................................................................................... 210 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................................ 211 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ......................................................................... 212 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ........................................................................ 213 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................... 214 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. ......................................................................... 214 SUB MONITOR SETTING ........................................................................................... 215 REAR SUB MONITOR SETTING .............................................................................. 218 SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR ............................................................ 220 REAR SUB MONITOR BRIGHTNESS ..................................................................... 220 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING ................................................................................ 221 FOCUS LEVER SETTING ............................................................................................. 221 EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.......................................................................................... 222 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ......................................................................................... 223 COMMAND DIAL SETTING ..................................................................................... 226 SHUTTER AF..................................................................................................................... 227 SHUTTER AE..................................................................................................................... 227 SHOOT WITHOUT LENS ............................................................................................ 228 SHOOT WITHOUT CARD .......................................................................................... 228 FOCUS RING .................................................................................................................... 229 FOCUS RING OPERATION ........................................................................................ 229 xv 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n AE/AF-LOCK MODE ..................................................................................................... 230 AWB-LOCK MODE ........................................................................................................ 230 EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING .......................................................................... 230 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ........................................................................................ 231 LOCK..................................................................................................................................... 232 POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................. 233 AUTO POWER OFF ....................................................................................................... 233 PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................................. 234 SHOOTING STAND BY MODE ................................................................................ 235 AUTO POWER SAVE ..................................................................................................... 235 SAVE DATA SETTING ....................................................................................... 236 FRAME NO. ...................................................................................................................... 236 SAVE ORG IMAGE ......................................................................................................... 237 EDIT FILE NAME ............................................................................................................. 237 CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE) .................................................................. 237 SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ............................................................................. 238 SELECT SLOT(FSEQUENTIAL) ............................................................................. 238 SELECT FOLDER ............................................................................................................ 238 COPYRIGHT INFO ......................................................................................................... 239 CONNECTION SETTING ................................................................................. 240 Bluetooth SETTINGS ................................................................................................... 240 NETWORK SETTING .................................................................................................... 242 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING ......................................................... 243 PC CONNECTION MODE.......................................................................................... 244 SMARTPHONE WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING ......................... 245 GENERAL SETTINGS .................................................................................................... 246 INFORMATION ................................................................................................................ 247 RESET WIRELESS SETTING ....................................................................................... 247 9 Shortcuts Shortcuts 249 249 Shortcut Options ............................................................................................. 250 MY MENU ........................................................................................................... 251 MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................................... 251 The Q (Quick Menu) Button ......................................................................... 253 The Quick Menu Display ......................................................................................... 253 Viewing and Changing Settings ......................................................................... 254 Editing the Quick Menu ........................................................................................... 255 The Fn (Function) Buttons ........................................................................... 256 Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons ...................................................... 259 xvi 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories Peripherals and Optional Accessories 263 263 Lenses .................................................................................................................. 264 Lens Parts .......................................................................................................................... 264 Lens Care ........................................................................................................................... 265 Removing Lens Caps ................................................................................................. 265 Attaching Lens Hoods .............................................................................................. 265 Aperture ring .................................................................................................................. 266 Viewfi nder Tilt Adapters ............................................................................... 267 Attaching the EVF-TL1 .............................................................................................. 268 Using the EVF-TL1 ........................................................................................................ 269 External Flash Units ........................................................................................ 270 Flash Settings ................................................................................................................. 271 SYNC TERMINAL ............................................................................................................ 272 SHOE MOUNT FLASH ................................................................................................ 273 MASTER(OPTICAL) ....................................................................................................... 276 11 Connections 281 Connections 281 HDMI Output .................................................................................................... 282 Connecting to HDMI Devices .............................................................................. 282 Shooting ............................................................................................................................ 283 Playback ............................................................................................................................. 283 Wireless Connections (Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) ................... 284 Smartphones and Tablets: FUJIFILM Camera Remote .......................... 284 Tethered Shooting: Capture One Pro Fujifi lm/

Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX/FUJIFILM X Acquire ............................. 286 Connecting to Computers via USB ........................................................... 287 Tethered Shooting: Capture One Pro Fujifi lm/

Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX/FUJIFILM X Acquire ............................. 290 Copying Pictures to a Computer ........................................................................ 291 Converting RAW Images: FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ............................... 292 Backing up and Restoring Camera Settings

(FUJIFILM X Acquire)................................................................................................ 292 instax SHARE Printers .................................................................................... 293 Establishing a Connection ..................................................................................... 293 Printing Pictures ............................................................................................................ 294 xvii Table of Contents 12 Technical Notes Technical Notes 295 295 Accessories from Fujifi lm.............................................................................. 296 Software for Use with Your Camera .......................................................... 298 FUJIFILM Camera Remote ...................................................................................... 298 MyFinePix Studio .......................................................................................................... 298 Capture One Express Fujifi lm ............................................................................... 298 RAW FILE CONVERTER EX ........................................................................................ 298 Capture One PRO Fujifi lm ....................................................................................... 299 Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX ........................................................................... 299 FUJIFILM X Acquire ..................................................................................................... 299 FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ......................................................................................... 299 For Your Safety ................................................................................................. 300 Product Care ..................................................................................................... 309 Cleaning the Image Sensor ......................................................................... 310 Firmware Updates ........................................................................................... 311 Checking the Firmware Version .......................................................................... 311 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 312 Warning Messages and Displays ............................................................... 321 Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................. 324 Specifi cations ................................................................................................... 325 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n xviii Supplied Accessories The following are included with the camera:

NP-T125 rechargeable batteries ( 2) BC-T125 battery charger Plug adapter EVF-GFX2 interchangeable electronic viewfi nder Body cap (comes attached to camera) Metal strap clips ( 2) Clip attaching tool Protective covers ( 2) Shoulder strap Cable protector Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe) Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera) Owners Manual (this manual) N The plug adapter supplied with the camera varies with the country or region of purchase; be sure to use the adapter appropriate to your country or region as described in the enclosed notice. For information on compatible computer software, see Software for Use with Your Camera (P 298). 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n xix 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM GFX100 digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual:

O N Additional information that may be helpful when using the P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplifi ed, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. product. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as memory cards. The electronic viewfi nder may be referred to as the EVF and the LCD monitor as the LCD. xx Before You Begin 1 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i A Fn2 button .....................................................256 B Secondary LCD monitor mode button .....27 C Secondary LCD monitor................................26 D Secondary monitor backlight button .......28 E Hot shoe .........................................................271 F DRIVE mode dial release button ...................6 G DRIVE button ......................................................7 H DRIVE mode dial ...............................................6 I AF-assist illuminator...................................125 Self-timer lamp ............................................135 J Strap eyelet .......................................................38 K Connector cover 1 L Connector cover 2 M Sync terminal ................................................272 N Lens signal contacts O Battery tray latch ............................................45 P Battery tray .......................................................45 2 Q Vertical grip front command dial

............................................................8, 36, 226 R Vertical grip Fn3 button ................................36 S Lens release button ........................................40 T Fn3 button .....................................................256 U Front command dial ...............................8, 226 V ON/OFF switch .................................................50 W Shutter button .................................................58 X Fn1 button d (exposure compensation) button ......93 Y Microphone jack ..........................................165 Z Headphone jack ...........................................166 a USB connector (Type-C) ..................... 44, 287 b HDMI Micro connector (Type D) .............282 c 15 V DC-IN connector ....................................43 d Hot shoe cover ..............................................273 e Body cap ............................................................40 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i f b (delete) button ...........................................60 g AE-L (exposure lock) button ............... 95, 256 h Focus stick (focus lever)...................5, 82, 221 i Focus mode selector ......................................78 j AF-ON button ......................................... 95, 256 k Rear command dial .......................8, 175, 226 l Fn4 button .....................................................256 m Q (quick menu) button ...............................253 n Indicator lamp1 ...............................................9 o Memory card slot cover ................................47 p Memory card slot cover latch ......................47 q Remote release connector cover ................72 r Indicator lamp2 ........................................9, 43 s Rear secondary monitor ...............................29 t LCD monitor ................................10, 18, 20, 21 Touch screen .................................31, 132, 231 u a (playback) button ...................................59 v DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 22, 173 w MENU/OK button .............................................30 x Memory card slot1 ........................................47 y Memory card slot2 ........................................47 z Remote release connector ............................72 3 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 6 Vertical grip control lock ...............................36 7 Speaker .................................................... 65, 204 8 Vertical grip Fn4 button ...................... 36, 256 9 Vertical grip Q (quick menu) button

................................................................ 36, 253

- Tripod mount

^ Fn5 button .............................................. 80, 256

\ Vertical grip AE-L (exposure lock) button .............................................36, 95, 256 A B 0 Vertical grip focus stick (focus lever)

.....................................................................5, 36 1 Vertical grip AF-ON button ................. 36, 256 2 Vertical grip rear command dial

............................................................8, 36, 226 3 Vertical grip Fn2 button ...................... 36, 256 4 Vertical grip Fn1 button d (exposure compensation) button

..........................................................36, 93, 256 5 Vertical grip shutter button ..................36, 58 The Cable Protector A The cable protector prevents accidental disconnection of the USB cable or AC adapter. Attach the protector as shown and tighten the lock screw. B Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown. 4 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Parts of the Camera Serial number plate The Serial Number Plate Do not remove the serial number plate, which provides the FCC ID, KC mark, CMIIT ID, serial number, and other im-

portant information. The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-

cus area. The focus stick can also be used to navigate the menus. 5 The DRIVE mode dial The DRIVE mode dial is used to select the drive mode. Hold the DRIVE mode dial release button while rotating the dial to select the desired mode. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Option Option STILL MULTI MOVIE Description Description Take pictures one at a time or in bursts (P 56, 99). Record a multiple exposures or take a series of photographs using bracketing (P 96, 101). Shoot movies (P 62). 6 Parts of the Camera The DRIVE Button Pressing the DRIVE button when STILL or MULTI is selected with the DRIVE mode dial displays drive mode options. Pressing the button when MOVIE is selected displays movie mode options (P 151). Drive mode options (STILL) Drive mode options (MULTI) 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i STILL IMAGE AE BKT MOVIE MODE 16:9 Drive mode options (MOVIE) 7 The Command Dials Rotate or press the command dials to:

Front command dial Rear command dial 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Select menu tabs or page through menus Choose the desired combina-

tion of shutter speed and aper-

ture (program shift) Adjust aperture 1, 2 View other pictures during playback Switch between aperture and ISO sensitivity 2 Press and hold to choose the op-

tion selected for D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING in the D(setup) menu Rotate Rotate Press Press Highlight menu items Choose the desired combina-

tion of shutter speed and aper-

ture (program shift) Choose a shutter speed 1, 4 Adjust exposure compensation by pressing the d button and rotat-

ing the dial 1 Adjust settings in the quick menu Choose the size of the focus frame Zoom in or out in full frame play-

back Zoom in or out in multi-frame playback Zoom in on the active focus point 3 Press and hold to choose the manual focus mode focus display 3 Zoom in on the active focus point during playback 1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 2 If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with a C position, the camera command dials can be used to adjust aperture when the aperture ring is rotated to C. 3 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button. 4 Only if a value other than auto is selected for shutter speed. 8 The Indicator Lamp Camera status is shown by the indicator lamp1. Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera status Camera status Indicator lamp Indicator lamp11 Glows green Blinks green orange Blinks green and Focus locked. Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken. Camera on: Recording pictures. Additional pictures can be taken. Camera off : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. *

Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at this time. Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload. N Warnings may also appear in the display. The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfi nder. Glows orange Blinks red If the camera is off , the two lamps des-

ignated as indicator lamp 2 light green while the batteries are charging. The lamp on the right shows the status of the battery in the right battery chamber, that on the left the status of the battery in the left battery chamber (P 43). 9 The LCD Monitor The LCD monitor can be tilted for eas-

ier viewing, but be careful not to touch the wires or trap fi ngers or other objects behind the monitor. Touching the wires could cause camera malfunction. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:

Touch photography (P 32) Focus area selection (P 31) Function selection (P 34) Muting camera controls during movie recording (P 33) Full-frame playback (P 35) 10 Parts of the Camera Tall (Portrait) Orientation The display can also be tilted to take pictures from high or low angles when the camera is rotated to take pictures in tall (portrait) orientation. Press the tilt lock release and tilt the display as shown in Figure 1. To take high-angle shots, hold the camera in the orientation shown in Figure 2. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Figure 1 Figure 2 11 The Viewfi nder 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i F Eye cup ..............................................................14 G Diopter adjustment control ........................15 H Connectors .......................................................13 I Hot shoe cover J Connector cover A Hot shoe .................................................267, 273 B View nder lock releases ...............................13 C VIEW MODE button .........................................20 D Eye sensor .........................................................20 E Electronic view nder (EVF) ................... 16, 20 The EVF-TL1 The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel the viewfi nder left or right 45 or up or down between 0 and 90 (P267). 12 Attaching the Viewfi nder Using the viewfi nder makes it easier to frame your subject accurately. Remove the hot shoe cover from the camera and slide the viewfi nder onto the hot shoe, stopping when it clicks into place. Removing the Viewfi nder Keeping the lock releases pressed (A), press down on the front of the viewfi nder (B) and slide it off as shown. The Viewfi nder 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 13 The Eye Cup To remove the eye cup, press the bottom in with both thumbs and slide eye cup up. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 14 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Viewfi nder Focusing the Viewfi nder If the indicators displayed in the viewfi nder are blurred, put your eye to the viewfi nder and rotate the diopter adjustment control until the display is in sharp focus. To focus the viewfi nder:

A Lift the diopter adjustment control. B Rotate the control to adjust viewfi nder focus. C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place. O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could cause product malfunction. 15 Camera Displays This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during shooting. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. The Electronic Viewfi nder 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i D E ALL-Intra K L M N O P CA B FGHIJ Q R S T U V W X 01/01/2019 10:00 AM Y Z a b H.264 x w v u t s r 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0

-1

-1

-2

-2

-3

-3

-4

-4

-5

-5 1.0 ilm gh f ce d nopq jk 16 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays A IS mode 2 .........................................................143 B Flash (TTL) mode .........................................273 C Flash compensation ...................................273 D 35mm format mode ...................................146 E Movie compression .....................................153 F Self-timer indicator .....................................135 G Continuous mode ...........................................99 H Shutter type ...................................................141 I AF+MF indicator 2 ........................................128 J Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................240 K White balance ..............................................112 L AWB lock ........................................................230 M Film simulation ............................................107 N F-Log/HLG recording ..................................158 O Dynamic range ............................................110 P D-range priority ...........................................111 Q Image transfer status ........................240, 284 R Date and time ..................................52, 54, 199 S Movie mode 3 .......................................... 62, 151 T Time remaining 3 .............................................63 U Card slot options ................................... 48, 237 V Number of available frames 1 ...................324 W Image size ......................................................104 X Image quality................................................105 Y Touch screen mode .............................. 31, 132 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF). 3 Displayed during movie recording only. Z Temperature warning ................................323 a Virtual horizon .................................................25 b Focus frame ...............................................82, 94 c Histogram .........................................................25 d External power source in use .......................43 e Battery level ......................................................51 f Sensitivity ..........................................................90 g Exposure compensation ...............................93 h Aperture ...............................................69, 73, 75 i Shutter speed .....................................69, 70, 75 j TTL lock .........................................149, 225, 261 k AE lock ...................................................... 95, 230 l Metering ............................................................92 m Shooting mode ...............................................68 n Focus mode 2 ....................................................78 o Focus indicator 2 ..............................................79 p Manual focus indicator 2 ........................78, 85 q AF lock ...................................................... 95, 230 r Distance indicator 2 ........................................87 s Recording level 2, 3 .........................................165 t Exposure indicator ...................................75, 93 u Location data download status .....246, 284 v Depth-of- eld preview ...........................74, 87 w H.265(HEVC)/H.264 ....................................153 x Focus check ............................................ 88, 129 17 R S T U V W X Y Z a The LCD Monitor D E G H ALL-Intra H.264 BA C F I J K L M N O P Q 1 01/01/2019 10:00 AM B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i x w v u t s r lm i h g f c bde jknopq 18 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays Z Focus frame ...............................................82, 94 a Histogram .........................................................25 b External power source in use .......................43 c Battery level ......................................................51 d Distance indicator 2 ........................................87 e Sensitivity ..........................................................90 f Exposure compensation ...............................93 g Aperture ...............................................69, 73, 75 h Time code .......................................................167 i Shutter speed .....................................69, 70, 75 j TTL lock .........................................149, 225, 261 k AE lock ...................................................... 95, 230 l Metering ............................................................92 m Shooting mode ...............................................68 n Focus mode 2 ....................................................78 o Focus indicator 2 ..............................................79 p Manual focus indicator 2 ........................78, 85 q AF lock ...................................................... 95, 230 r AF+MF indicator 2 ........................................128 s Shutter type ...................................................141 t Recording level 2, 3 .........................................165 u Continuous mode ...........................................99 v Self-timer indicator .....................................135 w Exposure indicator ...................................75, 93 x Flash compensation ...................................273 A Flash (TTL) mode .........................................273 B IS mode 2 .........................................................143 C Focus check ............................................ 88, 129 D Depth-of- eld preview ...........................74, 87 E H.265(HEVC)/H.264 ....................................153 F Location data download status .....246, 284 G 35mm format mode ...................................146 H Movie compression .....................................153 I Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................240 J Image transfer status ........................240, 284 K Movie mode 3 .......................................... 62, 151 L Time remaining 3 .............................................63 M Card slot options ................................... 48, 237 N Number of available frames 1 ...................324 O Image size ......................................................104 P Image quality................................................105 Q Date and time ..................................52, 54, 199 R Touch screen mode 4 ............................ 31, 132 S AWB lock ........................................................230 T White balance ..............................................112 U Film simulation ............................................107 V F-Log/HLG recording ..................................158 W Dynamic range ............................................110 X D-range priority ...........................................111 Y Temperature warning ................................323 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). 3 Displayed during movie recording only. 4 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls. 19 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Choosing a Display Mode Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle through the following display modes. Option Option EE EYE SENSOR EYE SENSOR EVF ONLY EVF ONLY LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY +

EVF ONLY + EE EE EYE SENSOR +

EYE SENSOR +

LCD IMAGE DISP. LCD IMAGE DISP. Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. View nder on, LCD monitor o . LCD monitor on, view nder o . Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on; tak-

ing it away turns the view nder o . The LCD monitor remains o . Putting your eye to the view nder during shooting turns the view nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for the display of images once you remove your eye from the view nder after shooting. The Eye Sensor The eye sensor may respond to objects other than your eye or to light shining directly on the sensor. The eye sensor is disabled while the LCD mon-

itor is tilted. Eye sensor 20 Camera Displays Adjusting Display Brightness The brightness and hue of the viewfi nder and LCD monitor can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu. Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfi nder brightness or hue, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do the same for the LCD monitor. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 21 The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor. N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose the EVF dis-

play, place your eye to the viewfi nder while using the DISP/BACK button. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i View nder Full screen Full screen

(no indicators) Dual display

(manual focus mode only) Standard indicators Standard (no indicators) 22 LCD Monitor Standard indicators Camera Displays No indicators 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Dual display

(manual focus mode only) Info display The Dual Display The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a smaller close-up of the focus area. 23 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Customizing the Standard Display To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. 2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING. Select D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the setup menu. 3 Choose items. Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. FRAMING GUIDELINE ELECTRONIC LEVEL FOCUS FRAME AF DISTANCE INDICATOR MF DISTANCE INDICATOR HISTOGRAM LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT SHOOTING MODE APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO INFORMATION BACKGROUND Expo. Comp. (Digit) Expo. Comp. (Scale) FOCUS MODE PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLASH CONTINUOUS MODE DUAL IS MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE BOOST MODE FRAMES REMAINING IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME 35mm FORMAT MODE IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER MIC LEVEL GUIDANCE MESSAGE BATTERY LEVEL FRAMING OUTLINE 4 Save changes. Press DISP/BACK to save changes. 5 Exit the menus. Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 24 Virtual Horizon Selecting ELECTRONIC LEVEL displays a virtu-

al horizon. The camera is level when the two lines overlap. Note that the virtual horizon may not be displayed if the camera lens is pointed up or down. For a 3D display (shown), press the function button to which ELECTRONIC LEVEL is assigned (P 223, 259). Camera Displays Pitch Roll 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Framing Outline Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see against dark backgrounds. Histograms Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis. Number of pixels Shadows Highlights Pixel brightness Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve throughout the tone range. Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of the graph. Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of the graph. To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-

play showing areas of the frame that will be overexposed at current settings superimposed on the view through the lens, press the func-

tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned

(P 223, 259). A Overexposed areas blink B RGB histograms 25 The Secondary LCD Monitor Among the settings that can be viewed in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i KK E L A F L T T L S.S. F ISO M 4000 2.8 102400 L L V R 9999 L 1 AA BB CC Secondary LCD monitor DD EE FF GG M 1 L L 9999 L V R A SHUTTER SPEED B APERTURE C ISO D SHOOTING MODE E IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY F WHITE BALANCE HHIIJJ Default Default G FILM SIMULATION H BATTERY LEVEL I FRAMES REM. J CARD SLOT OPTIONS K d Scale N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >

SUB MONITOR SETTING. 26 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays Cycling Through Indicators in the Secondary LCD Monitor The indicators displayed in the second-

ary LCD monitor change each time the secondary LCD monitor mode button is pressed. INFORMATION 4000 2.8 102400 L L V R 9999 S.S. F ISO M L 1 E L A F L T T L DIALS HISTOGRAM 27 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The secondary LCD monitor backlight button To turn on the secondary LCD monitor back-

light when you fi nd the secondary LCD monitor too dark to read, press the secondary LCD mon-

itor backlight button. Press the button again to turn the backlight off . Background Color The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR option in the D(setup) menu. Note that the background is dis-

played in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on. 28 The Rear Secondary Monitor Among the indicators that can be viewed in the rear secondary monitor are histo-

grams and the exposure compensation indicator. Camera Displays 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Rear secondary monitor AA BB CC FF FF EE Default Default DD D WHITE BALANCE E FILM SIMULATION F EXPO. COMP. A APERTURE B SHUTTER SPEED C ISO N Use D SCREEN SET-UP> REAR SUB MONITOR SETTING to choose the indicators displayed or turn the rear secondary monitor off . Putting your eye to the viewfi nder when the eye sensor is enabled turns off the rear secondary monitor. 29 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Using the Menus To display the menus, press MENU/OK. Shooting Shooting IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT

(Warm/Cool) EXIT Playback Playback PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION ERASE SIMULTANEOUS DELETE(RAW SLOT1/JPG SLOT2) CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE EXIT To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left to highlight the tab for the current menu. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT

(Warm/Cool) IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT

(Warm/Cool) EXIT EXIT Tab 3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab (H, G, A, F, B, E, C or D) containing the desired item. 4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu. N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items. 30 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Touch Screen Mode The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen. Shooting Touch Controls To enable touch controls, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS TOUCH SCREEN SETTING DOUBLE TAP SETTING ON TOUCH FUNCTION OFF TOUCH SCREEN SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS EVF The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-

tures are being framed in the electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-

itor employed for touch controls. N If n FACE SELECT op is enabled when FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, the face used for focus can be chosen via touch controls. 31 LCD Monitor Touch controls can be used for such opera-

tions as focusing, choosing the focus area, and taking photographs. The operation performed can be selected by tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display to cycle through the following options. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode AF AFOFF AREAAREA OFFOFF Description Description In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. Touch focus disabled. O Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 134). N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls avail-

able during movie recording, see Movie Recording (TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 133). 32 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Muting Movie Controls Touch Screen Mode Movie settings can be adjusted using touch-screen controls, preventing the sounds made by camera controls being recorded with the movie. When ON is se-

lected for B MOVIE SETTING > MOVIE SILENT CONTROL in the shooting menu, a F SET icon will be displayed in the LCD monitor; tap the icon to access the fol-

lowing controls:

SHUTTER SPEED *

APERTURE *

EXPOSURE COMPENSATION ISO INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

* Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE SILENT CONTROL disables dial controls. WIND FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME F FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE F SET icon 33 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Touch Function Functions can be assigned to the follow-

ing fl ick gestures in much the same way as function buttons (P 256):

Flick up: T-Fn1 Flick left: T-Fn2 Flick right: T-Fn3 Flick down: T-Fn4 N In some cases, touch-function fl ick ges-

tures display a menu; tap to select the desired option. Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function ges-

tures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING>

c TOUCH FUNCTION. INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 25.5 SET CANCEL 34 Touch Screen Mode Playback Touch Controls When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls can be used for the following playback operations:

Swipe: Swipe a fi nger across the display to view other images. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Pinch-out: Place two fi ngers on the display and spread them apart to zoom in. Pinch-in: Place two fi ngers on the display and slide them together to zoom out. further. N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in on the focus point. Drag: View other areas of the image during playback zoom. 35 Taking Pictures in Portrait Orientation The vertical-grip buttons, com-

mand dials, and focus stick (focus lever) make the camera easier to use when rotated to take pictures in portrait (tall) orientation. 1 Landscape

(wide) orientation Portrait

(tall) B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i orientation N To use the vertical-grip buttons, command dials, and focus stick, slide the vertical grip control lock from LOCK to z. Selecting LOCK prevents you accidentally using the vertical-grip controls when the camera is rotated to take pictures in landscape (wide) orientation. The vertical-grip command dials perform the same functions as their landscape-orientation counterparts. Display Rotation When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor au-

tomatically rotate to match camera orientation. 36 First Steps 37 Attaching the Strap Attach the strap clips to the camera and then attach the strap. 1 Attach a protective cover. Place a protective cover over the eye-

let as shown, with the black side of the cover toward the camera. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Open a strap clip. Use the clip attaching tool (A) to open a strap clip (B). Protective cover

(A)

(B) 3 Slide the clip onto the tool. Slide the clip onto the tool so that it hooks over the projection. 38 4 Place the strap clip on an eyelet. Hook the strap eyelet in the clip opening. Remove the tool, using the other hand to keep the clip in place. N Keep the tool in a safe place, as you will need it to open the strap clips when removing the strap. 5 Pass the clip through the eyelet. Rotate the clip fully through the eye-

let until it clicks closed. Attaching the Strap 2 F i r s t S t e p s 6 Fasten the strap. Insert the strap through a protective cover and strap clip and fasten the buckle as shown. O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured. Strap clip Repeat the above steps for the second eyelet. Buckle 39 Attaching a Lens The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM G-mount. Remove the body cap from the camera and the rear cap from the lens. Place the lens on mount, keeping the marks on the lens and camera aligned (A), and then rotate the lens until it clicks into place

(B). O When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the camera. Be careful not to touch the cameras internal parts. Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place. Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens. 2 F i r s t S t e p s Removing Lenses To remove the lens, turn the camera off , then press the lens release button (A) and rotate the lens as shown (B). O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens or inside the camera, replace the lens caps and camera body cap when the lens is not attached. Lenses and Other Optional Accessories The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM G-mount. O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-

changing) lenses. Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter. Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to malfunction. Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses. See the manual provided with the lens for information on use. 40 Charging the Batteries The batteries are not charged at shipment. Before use, charge the batteries in the supplied battery charger. O The camera is supplied with NP-T125 batteries. Charging takes about 140 minutes. 1 Connect the plug adapter. O The plug adapter supplied with the camera varies with the coun-

try or region of purchase; use the adapter appropriate to your country or region as described in the enclosed notice. 2 Place the battery in the charger. Insert the battery in the orientation shown by the arrow. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 3 Plug the charger in. Plug the charger into an indoor pow-

er outlet. The charging indicator will light. 4 Charge the battery. Remove the battery when charging is complete. 41 The Charging Indicator The charging indicator shows battery charge status as follows:

2 F i r s t S t e p s Charging indicator Charging indicator O On Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery not inserted. Battery fully charged. Battery charging. Battery fault. Action Action Insert the battery. Remove the battery. Unplug the charger and remove the battery. O The supplied charger is compatible with power supplies of 100 to 240 volts (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use). Do not affi x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from the camera. Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat. Read the cautions in The Battery and Power Supply. Use only genuine Fujifi lm rechargeable batteries designated for use in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-

uct malfunction. Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel the outer casing. The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its charging life and must be replaced. Unplug the charger when it is not in use. Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging. Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures. 42 Charging the Battery Charging via AC Adapter The battery inserted in the camera will also charge when the camera is powered by an optional AC-15V AC adapter. Charging takes about 120 min-

utes. Battery charge status is shown by battery status icons when the camera is on (playback mode) and by the two lamps designated as indicator lamp 2 when the camera is off . The left lamp shows the status of battery in chamber L, the right lamp that of the battery in chamber R. Battery status icon (camera on) Indicator lamp Battery status icon (camera on) On O Blinks Y (yellow) N (green) Z (red) Indicator lamp 22 (camera off )

(camera off ) 2 F i r s t S t e p s Battery status Battery status Battery charging Charging complete Battery fault O Charging times may increase if the camera is left on during charging. N The camera will display an external power source icon when powered via an AC-15V AC adapter. 43 Charging the Battery Charging from a Computer or Portable Battery The batteries also charge if the camera is connected to a computer or por-

table battery. Turn the camera off , insert the batteries, and connect a USB cable. 2 F i r s t S t e p s Battery status is shown by indicator lamp 2. USB connector (Type-C) Indicator lamp Indicator lamp 22 On O Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery charging Charging complete Battery fault Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable. Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computers current state. Information on supported portable batteries is available on the Fujifi lm website. O If the camera is turned on during charging, charging will end and the battery level will begin to gradually decline. The camera will display an external power source icon when powered via USB. N 44 Inserting the Batteries After charging the batteries, insert them in the camera as described below. 1 Remove the battery tray. Rotate the battery tray latch and re-

move the battery tray. O Do not remove the battery tray when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could damage image fi les or memory cards. Do not use excessive force when handling the battery tray. 2 Insert the batteries as shown. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Insert the battery in the orientations shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the batteries upside down or backwards. Confi rm that the battery are secure. 45 3 Insert the battery tray and hold it in place while rotating the latch to its original position. Inserting the Battery 2 F i r s t S t e p s Removing the Batteries After turning the camera off , rotate the battery tray latch and remove the battery tray. Remove the batteries as shown. O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery. 46 Inserting Memory Cards Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately). N The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots. 1 Open the memory card slot cover. Unlatch and open the cover. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Do not open the memory card-slot cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could damage image fi les or memory cards. 2 Insert the memory card. Holding the card in the orientation shown, slide it in until it clicks into place at the back of the slot. Close and latch the memory card slot cover. O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle or use force. 3 Format the memory card (P 198). O Format memory cards before fi rst use, and be sure to reformat all memory cards after using them in a computer or other device. 47 2 F i r s t S t e p s Removing Memory Cards Before removing memory cards, turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover. Press and release the card to eject it part way (to prevent the card falling from the slot, press the center of the card and release it slowly, without removing your fi nger from the card). The card can then be removed by hand. Using Two Cards The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the sec-

ond slot only when the card in the fi rst slot is full. This can be changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > CARD SLOT SETTING

(STILL IMAGE). Option Option SEQUENTIAL

(default) Description Description Display Display The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the rst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL), re-

cording will start on the card in the second slot and switch to the rst slot when the card in the second slot is full. BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card. RAW / JPEG As for SEQUENTIAL, except that the RAW copy of pic-

tures taken with SUPER FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW, or NORMAL+RAW selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE QUALITY will be saved to the card in the rst slot and the JPEG copy to the card in the second slot. The card used to store movies can be selected using D SAVE DATA SET-UP> SELECT SLOT(FSEQUENTIAL). 48 2 F i r s t S t e p s Inserting Memory Cards Compatible Memory Cards The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces are supported. UHS-II cards are recommended for high-speed burst photography. Use cards with a video speed class of V60 or better to record movies at a bit rate of 400Mbps. To record movies with lower bit rates, use cards with a UHS speed class of 3 or better or a video speed class of V30 or better. A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifi lm website. For details, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/compatibility/. O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-

ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. Memory cards can be locked, making it impossible to format the card or to record or delete images. Before inserting a mem-

ory card, slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance immediately. miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-

era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove the card. Do not affi x labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels can cause camera malfunction. Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card. Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a com-

puter or other device to edit, delete, or rename image fi les. Always use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming fi les, copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the originals. Renaming the fi les on the camera can cause problems during playback. 49 Turning the Camera On and Off Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off . Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera on, or to OFF to turn the camera off . 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfi nder can aff ect pic-

tures or the view through the viewfi nder. Keep the lens and viewfi nd-

er clean. N Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback. Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >

AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF switch to OFF and then back to ON. 50 2 F i r s t S t e p s Checking the Battery Level After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the display. Battery level is shown as follows:

Indicator Indicator Description Description e Battery partially discharged. f Battery about 80% full. g Battery about 60% full. h Battery about 40% full. i Battery about 20% full. i

(red) j Low battery. Charge as soon as pos-

sible. Battery exhausted. Turn camera o and recharge battery.

(blinks red) N The display shows the level of inserted batteries only. When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera, the batteries will be used in the following order:

A The battery (L) B The battery (R) 51 Basic Setup When you turn the camera on for the fi rst time, you can choose a language and set the camera clock. At default settings, you can also pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet so that you can later synchronize the clocks or download pictures. Follow the steps below when turning the camera on for the fi rst time. N If you intend to pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet, install and launch the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote App on the smart device before proceeding. For more information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

1 Turn the camera on. A language-selection dialog will be displayed. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Choose a language. Highlight a MENU/OK. language and press 3 Pair the camera with the smartphone or tablet. Press MENU/OK on the camera and tap PAIRING REGISTRATION in FUJIFILM Camera Remote. N To skip pairing, press DISP/BACK. PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIR WITH SMARTPHONE?

IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED TO SMARTPHONE BY PAIRING SCAN QR CODE OR SEARCH FOR "FUJIFILM Camera Remote" APP ON THE WEB SET SKIP HELP 52 4 Check the time. When pairing is complete, you will be prompted to set the camera clock to the time reported by the smartphone or tablet. Check that the time is cor-

rect. Basic Setup PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIRING COMPLETE 1/ 1/2019 12:00 PM SET DATE/TIME FROM SMARTPHONE?

SET CANCEL N To set the clock manually, press DISP/BACK (P 54). 5 Synchronize the camera settings with the settings con gured on your smart-

phone or tablet. SMARTPHONE SYNC. SETTING LOCATION&TIME LOCATION TIME OFF 2 F i r s t S t e p s SET N The option selected can be changed at any time using D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS. 6 Set the clock. Press MENU/OK to set the camera clock to the time reported by the smartphone or tablet and exit to shooting mode. N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the camera is turned on. Skipping the Current Step If you skip a step, a confi rmation dialog will be displayed; select NO to avoid repeating any steps you skipped the next time the camera is turned on. 53 Basic Setup Choosing a Diff erent Language To change the language:

1 Display language options. Select D USER SETTING> Qa. 2 Choose a language. Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Changing the Time and Date To set the camera clock:

1 Display DATE/TIME options. Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME. 2 Set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 54 Basic Photography and Playback 55 Taking Photographs (Mode P) This section describes how to take pictures using program AE (mode P). See pages 6876 for information on S, A, and M modes. 1 Rotate the DRIVE mode dial to STILL. 3 2 Adjust settings for program AE. B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l A Aperture B Shutter speed C Focus mode Setting Setting A (auto) Auto S (single AF) PP 68 68 78 N Press the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned (at de-

fault settings, the Fn2 button) to switch between shutter speeds of auto and User-selected (manually selected shutter speed). This function can be assigned to a diff erent button if desired (P 259). 56 3 Check the shooting mode. Confi rm that P appears in the display. Taking Photographs (Mode P) 4 Ready the camera. Hold the camera steady with both hands and brace your elbows against your sides. Shaking or un-

steady hands can blur your shots. To prevent pictures that are out of focus or too dark (underexposed), keep your fi ngers and other objects away from the lens and AF-assist illuminator. 5 Frame the picture. Lenses with Zoom Rings Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom out, right to zoom in. 57 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l Taking Photographs (Mode P) 6 Focus. Press the shutter button halfway to focus. Focus indicator Focus frame If the camera is able to focus, it will beep twice and focus frame and focus indicator will glow green. If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white. N If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus operation. Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock). The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro and standard focus ranges for the lens. 7 Shoot. Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture. 58 a Viewing Pictures Pictures can be viewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor. To view pictures full frame, press a. 100-0001 Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame. N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (gift image) icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback zoom may not be available. Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY BACK MENU> SWITCH SLOT option. 59 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l b Deleting Pictures Use the b button to delete pictures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. 1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and select FRAME. 3 ERASE FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confi rmation dialog is not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures. N Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any pictures you wish to delete (P 184). Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK MENU> ERASE option (P 180). 60 Movie Recording and Playback 61 F Recording Movies This section describes how to fi lm movies in auto mode. 1 Rotate the DRIVE mode dial to MOVIE. 2 Adjust settings for program AE. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l A Aperture B Shutter speed C Focus mode Setting Setting A (auto) Auto S (single AF) PP 68 68 78 N Press the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned (at de-

fault settings, the Fn2 button) to switch between shutter speeds of auto and User-selected (manually selected shutter speed). This function can be assigned to a diff erent button if desired (P 259). 62 Recording Movies 3 Press the shutter button to start re-

cording. A recording indicator (V) and the time remaining are displayed while recording is in progress. 4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. O Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording. Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds made by the camera during recording. Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l N Indicator lamp1 lights while recording is in progress. Zoom can be adjusted using the zoom ring on the lens (if available). If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring, select the aperture mode before beginning recording. If an option other than A is select-

ed, shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted while recording is in progress. During recording, you can change exposure compensation by up to 2EV. Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases settings may not apply during recording. 63 Recording Movies Adjusting Movie Settings Frame size and rate can be selected using B MOVIE SETTING>

MOVIE MODE. To choose the card used to store movies, use D SAVE DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(FSEQUENTIAL). Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector; for con-

tinuous focus adjustment, select C, or choose S and enable In-

telligent Face Detection. Intelligent Face Detection is not avail-

able in focus mode M. Depth of Field Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 64 a Viewing Movies View movies on the camera. In full-frame playback, movies are identi-

fi ed by a W icon. Press the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) down to start movie playback. 01/01/2019 10:00 AM The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed:

PLAYPLAY

+1.0 12800 4 Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever) Full-frame playback

(focus lever) Full-frame playback Playback in Playback in progress (

progress (xx)) Playback Playback paused (

paused (yy)) Up Down End playback Start playback Pause playback Start/resume playback Single frame rewind/

advance 29m59s i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed Progress is shown in the display during playback. O Do not cover the speaker during playback. N Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. STOP PAUSE 65 Playback Speed Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to adjust playback speed during playback. Speed is shown by the number of arrows (M or N). Viewing Movies 29m59s 29m59s Arrows 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 66 Taking Photographs 67 P, S, A, and M Modes P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture. Mode P: Program AE Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be selected with program shift. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Setting Setting A DRIVE mode dial B Aperture C Shutter speed Confi rm that P appears in the display. STILL A (auto) Auto O If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed and aperture displays will show . N Press the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned (at default settings, the Fn2 button) to switch between shutter speeds of auto and User-selected (manually selected shutter speed). This function can be assigned to a diff erent button if desired (P 259). 68 P, S, A, and M Modes Program Shift If desired, you can rotate the rear command dial to select other combinations of shutter speed and aperture without altering exposure (pro-

gram shift). Aperture Shutter speed O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:

With fl ash units that support TTL auto When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>

DYNAMIC RANGE In movie mode N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off . 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 69 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for optimal exposure. Setting Setting STILL A (auto) User-selected A DRIVE mode dial B Aperture C Shutter speed Confi rm that S appears in the display. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter speed, aperture will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-

ture display will show . 70 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s P, S, A, and M Modes N Shutter speed can be adjusted while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned (at default settings, the Fn2 button) to switch between shutter speeds of auto and User-selected (manually selected shutter speed). This function can be assigned to a diff erent button if desired (P 259). Shutter speed can be locked by pressing and holding the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned. To unlock shutter speed, press the button again. At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in progress. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 71 Bulb (B) Select a shutter speed of B (bulb) for long time-exposures in which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the ex-

posure. 1 Set shutter speed to B. 2 Press the shutter button all the way down. The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the shutter button is pressed; the display shows the time elapsed since the ex-

posure started. N Selecting an aperture of A fi xes shutter speed at 30 s. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. Using a Remote Release A remote release can be used for long time-ex-

posures. When using an optional RR-100 remote release or an electronic release from third-party suppliers, connect it to the cameras remote re-

lease connector. 72 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s P, S, A, and M Modes Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for optimal exposure. Setting Setting STILL User-selected Auto A DRIVE mode dial B Aperture C Shutter speed Confi rm that A appears in the display. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture, shutter speed will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed display will show . N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned (at default settings, the Fn2 button) to switch between shutter speeds of auto and User-selected (manually selected shutter speed). This function can be assigned to a diff erent button if desired (P 259). 73 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Previewing Depth of Field When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned to a function button, pressing the button dis-

plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the selected setting, allowing depth of fi eld to be previewed in the display. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 74 P, S, A, and M Modes Mode M: Manual Exposure In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture. Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed

(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-

pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-

ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached. Setting Setting STILL User-selected User-selected A DRIVE mode dial B Aperture C Shutter speed Confi rm that M appears in the display. N Press the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned (at default settings, the Fn2 button) to switch between shutter speeds of auto and User-selected (manually selected shutter speed). This function can be assigned to a diff erent button if desired (P 259). Shutter speed can be locked by pressing and holding the button to which SHOOTING MODE is assigned. To unlock shutter speed, press the button again. 75 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Exposure Preview To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select an option other than OFF for D SCREEN SET-UP> PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE. P, S, A, and M Modes N Select OFF when using the fl ash or on other occasions on which ex-

posure may change when the picture is taken. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 76 Autofocus Take pictures using autofocus. 1 Rotate the focus mode selector to S or C (P 78). 2 Choose an AF mode (P 80). 3 Choose the position and size of the focus frame (P 82). 4 Take pictures. N For information on the autofocus system, visit:

http://fujifilm-x.com/af/en/index.html 77 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Focus Mode Use the focus mode selector to choose how the camera focuses. Choose from the following options:

ModeMode S

(AF-S) C

(AF-C) M

(manual) Description Description Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for stationary subjects. Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to re ect changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion. Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (P 85). N Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-

justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button is not pressed. 78 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s

) Focus status Focus status Camera focusing. The Focus Indicator Focus status is shown by the focus indicator. Focus indicator Focus indicator

(

z (lights green) Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S). Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject.

(z) (lights green) A (blinks white) Camera unable to focus. j Manual focus (focus mode M). Autofocus Focus indicator 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 79 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) Choose how the camera focuses in modes S and C. 1 Press a function button (by default, Fn5) to display AF mode options. 2 Choose an AF mode. N The Fn5 button can be assigned other roles using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. The role described above can also be assigned to other function buttons (P 259). AF mode can also be selected using G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE. 5 How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode. Focus Mode S (AF-S) Focus Mode S (AF-S) i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image r SINGLE POINT Camera focuses on subject in selected focus point. Use for pin-

point focus on selected subject. y ZONE Camera focuses on subject in se-

lected focus zone. Focus zones in-

clude multiple focus points, mak-

ing it easier to focus on subjects in motion. 80 Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image Autofocus z WIDE j ALL Camera focuses automatically on high-contrast subjects; display shows areas in focus. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 82, 83) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE. Focus Mode C (AF-C) Focus Mode C (AF-C) Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image r SINGLE POINT Focus tracks subject at selected fo-

cus point. Use for subjects moving toward or away from camera. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s y ZONE Focus tracks subject in selected fo-

cus zone. Use for subjects that are moving fairly predictably. z TRACKING tracks subjects moving Focus through wide area of frame. j ALL Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 82, 83) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING. 81 Focus-Point Selection Choose a focus point for autofocus. Viewing the Focus-Point Display 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the fo-

cus-point display. 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to choose a focus area. N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 31). Selecting a Focus Point Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the focus point and the rear command dial to choose the size of the focus frame. The procedure varies with the option se-

lected for AF mode. Focus stick Focus stick Rear command dial Rear command dial AF mode AF mode rr yy zz TiltTilt Press Press Select focus point Select center focus point Rotate Rotate Choose from 6 frame sizes Choose from 3 frame sizes Press Press Restore original size N Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING is selected in focus mode S. 82 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Autofocus The Focus-Point Display The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF mode. N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large squares. rr SINGLE POINT SINGLE POINT AF mode AF mode yy ZONE ZONE zz WIDE/TRACKING WIDE/TRACKING i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Number of points avail-

able can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING >

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Choose from zones with 7 7, 5 5, or 3 3 focus points. Position focus frame over subject you want to track. 5 Autofocus Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be unable to focus on the subjects listed below. Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies. Subjects photographed through a window or other refl ective object. Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than refl ect light, such as hair or fur. Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or fl ame. Subjects that show little contrast with the background. Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a backdrop of highly contrasting elements). 83 Autofocus Checking Focus To zoom in on the current focus area for precise focus, press the center of the rear command dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. Press the center of the rear command dial again to cancel zoom. Normal display Focus zoom N In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in eff ect. In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE. Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF is on. Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to change the function performed by the center of the rear command dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 259). 84 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Manual Focus Adjust focus manually. 1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M. j will appear in the display. 2 Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce the focus distance, right to increase. 3 Take pictures. N Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS RING to reverse the direc-

tion of rotation of the focus ring. Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. 85 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Quick Focus To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial). In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-

sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option chosen for G AF/MF SETTING> INSTANT AF SETTING. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 86 Manual Focus Checking Focus A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual focus mode. The Manual Focus Indicator

(white line) Focus distance The manual focus indicator indicates how closely the focus distance matches the distance to the subject in the focus brackets. The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area

(in meters or feet according to the option selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu), the blue bar the depth of fi eld, or in other words the distance in front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus. N If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-

of-fi eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. Use the G AF/MF SETTING > DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option to choose how depth of fi eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. Depth of fi eld 87 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Focus Zoom If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, the camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear com-

mand dial to exit zoom. N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. If STANDARD or FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom cannot be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL MICROPRISM is selected. MF Assist Use G AF/MF SETTING> MF ASSIST to choose a focus check option. N The MF ASSIST menu can be displayed by pressing and holding the center of the rear command dial. The following options are available:

FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-

trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until the subject is highlighted. DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and ro-

tate the focus ring until the four parts of the split image are correctly aligned. 88 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Manual Focus DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when the subject is in focus. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 89 N Sensitivity Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Set sensitivity using A SHOOTING SETTING> ISO. Option Option AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO3 12800100 H(102400/51200/25600), L(50) Description Description Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting conditions according to combination of standard and max-

imum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed chosen for A SHOOTING SETTING >ISO. Choose from AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 91). Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display. Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may ap-

pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range. N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off . If desired, you can use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING to confi gure the camera so that ISO sensitivity can be adjusted using the front or rear command dial. Adjusting Sensitivity High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities. 90 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s AUTO Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3. Sensitivity Default Default AUTO2 AUTO2 100 1600 SEC ItemItem Options Options AUTO1 AUTO1 AUTO3 AUTO3 800 3200 SEC, AUTO 12800100 12800200 DEFAULT SENSITIVITY MAX. SENSITIVITY MIN. SHUTTER SPEED The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-

fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED. N If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 91 C Metering Choose how the camera meters exposure. A SHOOTING SETTING> PHOTOMETRY off ers a choice of the following metering options:

O The selected option will only take eff ect when G AF/MF SETTING>

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is OFF. ModeMode o

(multi) p

(center-

weighted) v

(spot) w

(average) Description Description The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recommended in most situations. The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the area at the center. The camera meters lighting conditions in an area at the center of the frame equivalent to 2% of the total. Recommended with backlit sub-

jects and in other cases in which the background is much brighter or darker than the main subject. Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides consis-

tent exposure across multiple shots with the same lighting, and is particularly e ective for landscapes and portraits of subjects dressed in black or white. 92 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s d Exposure Compensation Adjust exposure. Hold the d button and rotate the rear command dial until the desired value is displayed in the viewfi nder or LCD mon-

itor. O The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode. The d Button If ON/OFF SWITCH is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING, exposure compensation can be set by pressing the d button once, rotating the rear command dial, and then pressing the d button again. Exposure compensation can be assigned to other con-

trols using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 93 Focus/Exposure Lock Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. 1 Position the subject in the focus frame and press the shutter button halfway to lock focus and exposure. Focus and exposure will remain locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway (AF/AE lock). 2 Press the button all the way down. N Focus lock using the shutter button is only available when ON is se-

lected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF, SHUTTER AE. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 94 Other Controls Focus and exposure can also be locked using function buttons. At default set-

tings, you can use the AE-L button to lock exposure without locking focus. If the AF-ON button is assigned AF LOCK ONLY

(P 223, 256), it can similarly be used to lock focus without locking exposure. While the assigned control is pressed, pressing the shutter button halfway will not end the lock. If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/

AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be ended by pressing the control a second time. Focus/Exposure Lock AE-L button

(exposure lock) AF-ON button 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s N Function buttons can be assigned other roles using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure and focus lock can also be assigned to other function buttons (P 259). 95 BKT Bracketing Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures. 1 Rotate the DRIVE mode dial to MULTI. 2 Press the DRIVE button to display drive mode options. 3 Highlight the desired bracketing option using the focus stick and press MENU/OK. 4 Take photographs. 96 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Bracketing O AE BKT Use A SHOOTING SETTING > AE BKT SETTING to choose the bracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera will take the spec-

ifi ed number of shots: one using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or under-exposed by multiples of the select-

ed bracketing amount. N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the limits of the exposure metering system. W ISO BKT Select a bracketing amount (13, 23, or 1) in the drive mode display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with sensitivity lowered by the selected amount. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s X FILM SIMULATION BKT Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create copies with diff erent fi lm simulation settings, chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING> FILM SIMULATION BKT. 97 Bracketing V WHITE BALANCE BKT Select a bracketing amount (1, 2, or 3) in the drive mode dis-

play. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white balanced setting, one with fi ne-tuning increased by the selected amount, and another with fi ne-tuning decreased by the selected amount. Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three shots with diff erent dynamic ranges: 100% for the fi rst, 200% for the second, and 400% for the third. N While dynamic range bracketing is in eff ect, sensitivity will be restrict-

ed to a minimum of ISO 400; the sensitivity previously in eff ect is re-

stored when bracketing ends. Z FOCUS BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series of photos, varying focus with each shot. The number of shots, the amount focus changes with each shot, and the interval between shots can be selected using A SHOOTING SETTING > FOCUS BKT. 98 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s I Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) Capture motion in a series of pictures. 1 Rotate the DRIVE mode dial to STILL. 2 Press the DRIVE button to display drive mode options. 3 If CL LOW SPEED BURST or CH HIGH SPEED BURST is se-

lected, the camera will take pictures continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed. Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the memory card is full. O If fi le numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the re-

maining pictures will be recorded to a new folder. Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the space available on the memory card is insuffi cient. Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken. Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus mode. Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the fl ash may not fi re. Recording times may increase during burst shooting. 99 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) Exposure To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AE. N Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-

pensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 100 j Multiple Exposures Create a photograph that combines two exposures. 1 Rotate the DRIVE mode dial to MULTI. 2 Press the DRIVE button to display drive mode options. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 3 Select j MULTIPLE EXPOSURE. 4 Take the fi rst shot. 101 Multiple Exposures NEXT RETRY EXIT EXIT 30 2.0 5 Press MENU/OK. The fi rst shot will be shown superimposed on the view through the lens and you will be prompted to take the second shot. N To return to Step 4 and retake the fi rst shot, press the focus stick (focus lever) left. To save the fi rst shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK. 6 Take the second shot, using the fi rst frame as a guide. 7 Press MENU/OK to create the multiple exposure, or press the focus stick left to return to Step6 and retake the sec-

ond shot. O Multiple exposures cannot be recorded via tethered shooting (P 244). RETRY EXIT 102 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s The Shooting Menus 103 H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING Adjust image quality settings. To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and se-

lect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT

(Warm/Cool) EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. IMAGE SIZE Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded. Option Option O 4 : 3 O 3 : 2 O 16 : 9 O 1 : 1 Option Option P 4 : 3 P 3 : 2 P 16 : 9 P 1 : 1 Option Option Q 4 : 3 Q 3 : 2 Q 16 : 9 Q 1 : 1 Image size Image size 11648 8736 11648 7768 11648 6552 8736 8736 Image size Image size 8256 6192 8256 5504 8256 4640 6192 6192 Image size Image size 4000 3000 4000 2664 4000 2248 2992 2992 Option Option O 65 : 24 O 5 : 4 O 7 : 6 Option Option P 65 : 24 P 5 : 4 P 7 : 6 Option Option Q 65 : 24 Q 5 : 4 Q 7 : 6 Image size Image size 11648 4304 10928 8736 10192 8736 Image size Image size 8256 3048 7744 6192 7232 6192 Image size Image size 4000 1480 3744 3000 3504 3000 N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another shooting mode is selected. 104 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE QUALITY Choose a fi le format and compression ratio. Description Description Option Option SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL Very low compression ratios are used for maximum image quality. Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images. Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of images that can be stored. SUPER FINE + RAW Record both RAW and super- ne quality JPEG pictures. FINE + RAW Record both RAW and ne-quality JPEG images. NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG images. RAW Record RAW images only. The Function Buttons To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a function button (P 259). Press the button once to select the option in the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column). Option currently selected for Option currently selected for IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY Option selected by pressing function Option selected by pressing function button to which RAWRAW is assigned button to which is assigned SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL SUPER FINE + RAW FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW RAW SUPER FINE + RAW FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL FINE 105 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s RAW RECORDING Choose whether to compress RAW images. RECORDING TYPE RECORDING TYPE Option Option UNCOMPRESSED LOSSLESS COMPRESSED OUTPUT DEPTH(bit) OUTPUT DEPTH(bit) Description Description RAW images are not compressed. RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm that reduces le size with no loss of image data. The images can be viewed in Capture One Express Fuji lm

(P 298), RAW FILE CONVERTER EX (P 298), FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO (P 299), or other software that supports lossless RAW compression. Option Option 16bit 14bit Description Description RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 16 bits. RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits. O When selected, 16bit only takes eff ect in single-frame drive mode. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 106 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING FILM SIMULATION Simulate the eff ects of diff erent kinds of fi lm, including black-

and-white (with or without color fi lters). Choose a palette ac-

cording to your subject and creative intent. Option Option c PROVIA/STANDARD d Velvia/VIVID e ASTIA/SOFT i CLASSIC CHROME g PRO Neg. Hi h PRO Neg. Std X ETERNA/CINEMA Description Description Standard color reproduction. Suited to a wide range of subjects, from portraits to landscapes. A high-contrast palette of saturated colors, suited to na-

ture photos. Enhances the range of hues available for skin tones in por-

traits while preserving the bright blues of daylight skies. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography. Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look. O ers slightly more contrast than h PRO Neg. Std. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography. A soft-toned palette. The range of hues available for skin tones is enhanced, making this a good choice for studio portrait photography. Film movies using a palette that features subdued colors and deep shadows. Take black-and-white photos with rich gradation and out-

standing sharpness. Take pictures in standard black and white. Take pictures in sepia. a ACROS *

b MONOCHROME *

f SEPIA

* Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) lters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color. The yellow (Ye) lter deepens purples and blues and the red (R) lter blues and greens. The green

(G) lter deepens reds and browns, including skin tones, making it a good choice for portraits. N Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness settings. Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 250). For more information, visit:

http://fujifilm-x.com/en/x-stories/the-world-of-film-simulation-episode-1/

107 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or cool color cast) to mono-

chrome pictures taken with the a ACROS or b MONOCHROME fi lm simulation. Option Option

+9 +1 0

-1 -9 Description Description Higher positive values equate to a redder color cast. Normal monochrome (grayscale). Lower negative values equate to a bluer color cast. GRAIN EFFECT Add a fi lm grain eff ect. Select an amount (STRONG or WEAK) or choose OFF to turn fi lm grain off . STRONG Options Options WEAK OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 108 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING COLOR CHROME EFFECT Deepen colors in shadows. Select an amount (STRONG or WEAK) or choose OFF to turn the eff ect off . Options Options WEAK STRONG OFF SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT Smooth complexions. STRONG Options Options WEAK OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 109 DYNAMIC RANGE Control contrast. Choose lower values to increase contrast when shooting indoors or under overcast skies, higher values to reduce loss of detail in highlights when photographing high-contrast scenes. Higher values are recommended for scenes that include both sunlight and deep shade, for such high-contrast subjects as sunlight on water, brightly-lit autumn leaves, and portraits taken against a blue sky, and for white objects or people wearing white. Options Options AUTO V 100%

W 200%

X 400%

O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a val-

ue according to the scene. N If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-

ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-

ter button is pressed halfway. W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO200 to ISO12800, X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO400 to 12800. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 110 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING D RANGE PRIORITY Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-

ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes. Option Option AUTO STRONG WEAK OFF Description Description Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-

ditions. Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast scenes. Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately high-contrast scenes. Contrast reduction off. N WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 200 to ISO 12800, STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO400 to 12800. When an option other than OFF is selected, HIGHLIGHT TONE, SHADOW TONE, and DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automat-

ically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 111 WHITE BALANCE For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches the light source. Option Option AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically. Description Description k/l/m Measure a value for white balance. k i j k l m n g Choose a color temperature. For subjects in direct sunlight. For subjects in the shade. Use under daylight uorescent lights. Use under warm white uorescent lights. Use under cool white uorescent lights. Use under incandescent lighting. Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater light-

ing. N In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired resultsfor example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait subjectsuse custom white balance or choose a white balance op-

tion suited to the light source. White balance is adjusted for fl ash lighting only in AUTO and g modes. Turn the fl ash off using other white balance options. White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 250). 112 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s IMAGE QUALITY SETTING Fine-Tuning White Balance Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white balance option displays a fi ne-tuning dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to fi ne-tune white balance. WB SHIFT SET N To exit without fi ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-

lecting a white balance option. The focus stick (focus lever) does not tilt diagonally. Custom White Balance CUSTOM 1 NOT CHANGE SHUTTER : NEW WB SHIFT Choose k, l, or m to adjust white balance for unusual lighting conditions using a white object as a reference (col-

ored objects can also be used to lend photos a color cast). A white balance tar-

get will be displayed; position and size the target so that it is fi lled by the reference object and press the shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most recent value and display the fi ne-tuning dialog). If COMPLETED ! is displayed, press MENU/OK to set white balance to the measured value. If UNDER is displayed, raise exposure compensation and try again. If OVER is displayed, lower exposure com-

pensation and try again. COMPLETED !

CANCEL SET 113 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s k: Color Temperature Selecting k in the white balance menu displays a list of color temperatures;

highlight a color temperature and press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option and display a fi ne-tuning dialog, then highlight the desired value and press MENU/OK again. The selected color tem-

perature will be shown in the display. WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMPERATURE R:0 B:0 SET SHIFT 10000K 9100K 8300K 7700K 7100K Color Temperature Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color tempera-

ture have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are tinged with blue. You can match color temperature to the light source, or choose options that diff er sharply from the color of the light source to make pictures warmer or colder. 114 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s IMAGE QUALITY SETTING HIGHLIGHT TONE Adjust the appearance of highlights.

+4

+3

+2 Options Options

+1 SHADOW TONE Adjust the appearance of shadows.

+4

+3

+2 COLOR Adjust color density.

+4

+3

+2

+1 SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options

+1 Options Options 0 Options Options 0 0 0 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 115 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s NOISE REDUCTION Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 LONG EXPOSURE NR Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures. Options Options ON OFF LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER Select ON to improve defi nition by adjusting for diff raction and the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. Options Options ON OFF COLOR SPACE Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option sRGB Adobe RGB Description Description Recommended in most situations. For commercial printing. 116 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING PIXEL MAPPING Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures. 1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab. 2 Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pix-

el mapping. O Results are not guaranteed. Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping. Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-

vated. Processing may take a few seconds. SELECT CUSTOM SETTING Settings can be recalled from any of the seven custom settings banks. CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 6 Banks Banks T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 117 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING Save up to 7 sets of custom camera settings for commonly-en-

countered situations. Saved settings can be recalled using H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> SELECT CUSTOM SETTING. 1 Press MENU/OK in shooting mode to display the shooting menu. Select the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab, then highlight EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING and press MENU/OK. 2 Highlight a custom settings bank and press MENU/OK to select. 3 Adjust the following as desired:

ISO DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. ab

(Warm/Cool) GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT WHITE BALANCE HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION IMAGE QUALITY SETTING CUSTOM 1 LONG EXPOSURE NR CUSTOM 2 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER CUSTOM 3 COLOR SPACE CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 PIXEL MAPPING CUSTOM 6 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 7 EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS ISO DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT

(Warm/Cool) 4 Press DISP/BACK. A confi rmation dia-

log will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK. SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 SET OK?

OK CANCEL N To store current camera settings in the selected bank, highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS in Step 3 and press MENU/OK. To restore default settings for the current bank, select RESET. Banks can be renamed using EDIT CUSTOM NAME. 118 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s G AF/MF SETTING Adjust focus settings. To display focus settings, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. AF/MF SETTING FOCUS AREA AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION AF POINT DISPLAY NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS PRE-AF AF ILLUMINATOR EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. FOCUS AREA Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus zoom. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 119 AF MODE Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C. Option Option r SINGLE POINT y ZONE z WIDE/TRACKING j ALL Description Description The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus point. The number of focus points available can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING> NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Use for pin-point focus on a selected subject. The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects that are in motion. In focus mode S, the camera automatically focuses on high-contrast subjects; the areas in focus are shown in the display. In focus mode C, the camera tracks focus on the subject in the selected focus point while the shutter button is pressed halfway. The camera may be unable to focus on small objects or subjects that are moving rapidly. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 82, 83) to cycle through AF modes in the fol-

lowing order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE/

TRACKING. 120 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS Select focus-tracking options for focus mode C. Choose from Sets 15 according to your subject or select Set 6 for custom focus-tracking options. AF/MF SETTING AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO OK Option Option SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES &

CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/

DECELERATING SUBJECT SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING SUBJECT SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING

& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT SET 6 CUSTOM Description Description A standard tracking option that works well with the typical range of moving subjects. The focus system attempts to track the chosen subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely to enter the focus area with the subject. The focus system attempts to compensate for subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity. The focus system attempts to focus quickly on subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subjects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects. Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only to sudden changes in velocity but also to large movements front to back and left to right. Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on the values for Sets 15 (P 122, 124). 121 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Focus Tracking Options The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are described below. TRACKING SENSITIVITY TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. The higher the value, the longer the camera will wait. SETS THE TRACKING SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT TRACKING SENSITIVITY LOCKED ON QUICK ADJUST SWITCH 0 1 Options Options 2 3 4 O The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when you attempt to switch subjects. The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus from your subject to other objects in the focus area. SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how sensi-

tive the tracking system is to changes in subject velocity. The higher the value, the greater the precision with which the system attempts to respond to sudden movement. SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY STEADY ACCEL./DECEL. SETS THE SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT ADJUST SWITCH 0 Options Options 1 2 O The higher the value, the more diffi culty the camera will have focusing in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when the subject is highly refl ective or low in contrast. 122 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s ZONE AREA SWITCHING ZONE AREA SWITCHING This parameter determines the focus area given priority in zone AF. AF/MF SETTING ZONE AREA SWITCHING CENTER AUTO FRONT SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA ADJUST SWITCH Option Option FRONT AUTO CENTER Description Description Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera. The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it. Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone. O This option takes eff ect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode. Set Values Parameter values for the diff erent sets are listed below. SPEED TRACKING SPEED TRACKING TRACKING TRACKING SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SET 1 SET 1 SET 2 SET 2 SET 3 SET 3 SET 4 SET 4 SET 5 SET 5 2 3 2 0 3 0 0 2 1 2 ZONE AREA ZONE AREA SWITCHING SWITCHING AUTO CENTER AUTO FRONT AUTO 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 123 Custom Focus Tracking Options Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6. 1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 6 CUSTOM SET 6 CUSTOM. TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING ADJUST AUTO SET DETAIL RESET 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their original values, press b. 3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete. STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION Choose whether the focus mode and focus area used when the camera is in portrait orientation are stored separately from those used when the camera is in landscape orientation. Option Option OFF The same settings are used in both orientations. Description Description FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately. ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately. AF POINT DISPLAY yz Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >

AF MODE. Options Options ON OFF 124 AF/MF SETTING NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se-

lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE. Option Option 117 POINTS

(9 13) 425 POINTS

(17 25) Description Description Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point grid. Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point grid. PRE-AF If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps prevent missed shots. Options Options ON OFF O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery. AF ILLUMINATOR If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist autofocus. Options Options ON OFF O The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator in some cases. If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the subject. Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subjects eyes. 125 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING Intelligent Face Detection sets focus and exposure for human faces anywhere in the frame, preventing the camera from focusing on the background in group portraits. Choose for shots that empha-

size portrait subjects. You can also choose whether the camera detects and focuses on either the left or right eye when Intelligent Face Detection is on. Option Option Description Description FACE DETECTION ON Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust eye detection settings. g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only. u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye to focus on when a face is detected. w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority o . O If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture is taken. In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a whole rather than the portrait subject. 126 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AF/MF SETTING N The face selected by the camera is indicated by a green border. Any other faces detected by the camera are indicated by gray borders. To have the camera focus on a diff erent subject, tap inside the gray border. The g icon will change from white to green. You can also switch subjects by pressing the function button to which n FACE SELECT op is assigned and then using the focus stick (focus lever) or (during viewfi nder photography) touch controls

(P 225). To switch from face detection to manual focus-area selection, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever). Press again to re-enable face detection. If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set time for its return and consequently the green frame may sometimes appear in locations where no face is seen. You cannot switch subjects during burst photography. Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspend-

ed at the close of burst shooting. Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-

entation. If the camera is unable to detect the subjects eyes because they are hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus on faces. Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts

(P 250). 127 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AF+MF If ON is selected in focus mode S and focus has been locked

(whether by pressing the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring. Options Options ON OFF O Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the focus distance indicator. If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to infi nity or the minimum focus distance. N Standard and focus peaking MF assist options are supported. AF + MF Focus Zoom When ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK and SINGLE POINT selected for AF MODE, focus zoom can be used to zoom in on the selected focus area. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear com-

mand dial. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 128 AF/MF SETTING MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Option Option STANDARD DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE DIGITAL MICROPRISM FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT Description Description Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, and digital microprism are not available). Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR) split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of the split image are correctly aligned. A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when the subject is in focus. The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level. N You can also choose MF assist options by holding the center of the rear command dial. FOCUS CHECK If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-

cus mode. Options Options ON OFF N Pressing the center of the rear command dial cancels focus zoom. The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes when the focus area is changed. 129 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA Select ON to meter the current focus frame when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE and SPOT is selected for PHOTOMETRY. Options Options ON OFF INSTANT AF SETTING Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode. Options Options AF-S AF-C 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 130 AF/MF SETTING DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assess-

ments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. PIXEL BASIS FILM FORMAT BASIS Options Options RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY Choose how the camera focuses in focus mode AF-S or AF-C. Option Option RELEASE FOCUS Description Description Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken when the camera is not in focus. Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only taken when the camera is in focus. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 131 TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. Still Photography ModeMode AF AFOFF AREAAREA OFFOFF Descripti Descriptionon In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. Touch focus disabled. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 132 AF/MF SETTING Movie Recording ModeMode Descriptio Descriptionn AAFF AREAAREA Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping your subject in the display. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-

lected by tapping the display. In manual focus mode (MF), the camera will focus using auto-

focus when you tap the display; during recording, you can tap the display again to move the focus area to a new location. Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use the button to which AF-ON is assigned. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-

lected by tapping the display. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to posi-

tion the focus area over your subject. OFFOFF Touch focus disabled. N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-

lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING>

x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. 133 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AF/MF SETTING Touch Controls for Focus Zoom Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled). Central Area Central Area Tapping the center of the display performs the operations below. ModeMode AAFF AREAAREA OFFOFF Still Photography Still Photography Movie Recordi Movie Recordingng AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF Other Areas Other Areas Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display, whether during still photography or movie re-

cording and regardless of the option selected for touch screen mode. 134 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s A SHOOTING SETTING Adjust shooting options. To display shooting options, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and se-

lect the A(SHOOTING SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. SELF-TIMER Choose a shutter release delay. SHOOTING SETTING SELF-TIMER SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING AE BKT SETTING FILM SIMULATION BKT FOCUS BKT PHOTOMETRY EXIT Option Option R 2 SEC S 10 SEC OFF Description Description The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts down. The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken. Self-timer o . 9 If an option other than OFF is select-

ed, the timer will start when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The display shows the number of seconds re-

maining until the shutter is released. To stop the timer before the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK. O Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure. The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off . 135 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING If ON is selected, the chosen self-timer setting will remain in ef-

fect after a picture is taken or the camera is turned off . Options Options ON OFF INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING Confi gure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset interval. 1 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab and press MENU/OK. INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES NUMBER OF TIMES INTERVAL END CANCEL START WAITING TIME LATER ESTIMATED START TIME 11 : 00 PM START CANCEL CANCEL 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the interval and number of shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 3 Use the focus stick to choose the starting time and then press MENU/OK. Shooting will start automatically. 136 SHOOTING SETTING O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of B(bulb) or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released. N Use of a tripod is recommended. We recommend using an AC-15V AC power adapter. The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before the next shot is taken. The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button. To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photogra-

phy started, set the number of shots to . INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots. Options Options ON OFF N Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-

ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING> INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim dramatically during shooting. In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an AUTO option is selected for ISO. 137 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AE BKT SETTING Adjust exposure bracketing settings. Option Option Description Description FRAMES/STEP SETTING 1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the amount exposure is varied with each shot. FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each shot. 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken one at a time. CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken in a single burst. SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken. FILM SIMULATION BKT Choose the three fi lm simulation types used for fi lm simulation bracketing (P 107). cPROVIA/STANDARD iCLASSIC CHROME XETERNA/CINEMA fSEPIA Options Options dVelvia/VIVID gPRO Neg. Hi aACROS *

eASTIA/SOFT hPRO Neg. Std bMONOCHROME *

* Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) lters. 138 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SHOOTING SETTING FOCUS BKT Adjust focus bracketing settings. Option Option FRAMES STEP INTERVAL Description Description Choose the number of shots. Choose the amount focus changes with each shot. Choose the interval between shots. N Do not adjust zoom during shooting. Focus and FRAMES/STEP The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP is shown in the illustration.

:

Step Frames 1 2 3 4 5 Starting focus position 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Focus proceeds from the starting position toward in nity. Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger changes. Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reach-

es in nity. 139 PHOTOMETRY Choose how the camera meters exposure. O The selected option will only take eff ect when G AF/MF SETTING>

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is OFF. ModeMode o

(multi) p

(center-weighted) v

(spot) w

(average) Description Description The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recommend-

ed in most situations. The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the area at the center. The camera meters lighting conditions in an area at the center of the frame equivalent to 2% of the total. Recommended with backlit subjects and in other cases in which the background is much brighter or darker than the main subject. Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides con-

sistent exposure across multiple shots with the same lighting, and is particularly e ective for landscapes and portraits of sub-

jects dressed in black or white. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 140 SHOOTING SETTING SHUTTER TYPE Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute the shutter sound. Option Option Description Description t MECHANICAL SHUTTER Take pictures with the mechanical shutter. s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Take pictures with the electronic shutter. t E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER u MECHANICAL+

ELECTRONIC r E-FRONT+ ELECTRONIC The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions. The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic shutter according to shooting conditions. The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions. If t E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER is selected, t MECHANICAL SHUTTER will automatically take eff ect at high shutter speeds. O When using the electronic shutter, note the following:

- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.

- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high

- Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fl uorescent lights

- When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 204), respect shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended. or other fl ickering or erratic illumination. your subjects image rights and right to privacy. When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:

- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame. N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:

Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 12800100 Long exposure noise reduction has no eff ect The fl ash cannot be used 141 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s FLICKER REDUCTION Select ON to reduce fl icker in pictures and the display when shoot-

ing under fl uorescent lighting and other similar light sources. Options Options ON OFF O Enabling fl icker reduction disables the electronic shutter and increas-

es the time needed to record pictures. Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording. ISO Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Option Option AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO3 Description Description Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting con-

ditions. 12800100 Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display. H (102400) H (51200) H (25600) Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may appear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range. L (50) N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off . Adjusting Sensitivity High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities. 142 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SHOOTING SETTING IS MODE Reduce blur. Option Option CONTINUOUS SHOOTING ONLY OFF Description Description Image stabilization on. Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released. Image stabilization o ; x appears in the display. Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod or otherwise xed in place. N The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE. Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image stabilization takes eff ect. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 143 MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. Shutter Select When using lenses with an internal shutter, choose whether to use the shutter on the camera (BODY) or the lens (LENS). O This option may have no eff ect with some lenses. Saved Settings Store settings for up to 6 lenses, or choose OFF to disable correc-

tions for focal length, distortion, color shading, and peripheral illumination. Choosing a Focal Length Choosing a Focal Length Use the focus stick (focus lever) to enter the focal length. INPUT FOCAL LENGTH LENS 5 Distortion Correction Distortion Correction Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or WEAK options to correct BARREL or PINCUSHION distortion. SET CANCEL LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION BARREL STRONG BARREL MEDIUM BARREL WEAK OFF PINCUSHION WEAK PINCUSHION MEDIUM PINCUSHION STRONG 144 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SHOOTING SETTING Color Shading Correction Color Shading Correction Color (shading) variations between the center and edges of the frame can be ad-

justed separately for each corner. To use color shading correction, follow the steps below. 1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The select-

NEXT SET ed corner is indicated by a triangle. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is no visible diff erence in color between the selected corner and the center of the image. Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the cyanred axis. Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the blueyellow axis. N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Peripheral Illumination Correction Peripheral Illumination Correction Choose from values between 5 and

+5. Choosing positive values increases peripheral illumination, while choosing negative values reduces peripheral il-

lumination. Positive values are recom-

mended for vintage lenses, negative val-

ues to create the eff ect of images taken with an antique lens or a pinhole camera. N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination cor-

rection while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. CANCEL SET 145 35mm FORMAT MODE Enabling A SHOOTING SETTING> 35mm FORMAT MODE in the shooting menu sets the picture angle to 35 mm; the change is refl ected in the display. Option Option ON OFF AUTO Description Description The picture angle is set to 35mm; the change is re ected in the display. 35mm format mode disabled. 35 mm format mode is enabled automatically when a mount adapter that supports automatic detection is attached. N The D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING item in the setup menu (P 24, 211) includes an option (enabled by default) for dis-

playing a 35mm FORMAT MODE icon. The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-

ing menu is fi xed at O 3 : 2. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 146 SHOOTING SETTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. The smartphone can then be used to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-

tures Upload location data to the camera N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 147 F FLASH SETTING Adjust fl ash-related settings. To display fl ash-related settings, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and se-

lect the F (FLASH SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Choose a fl ash control mode, fl ash mode, or sync mode or adjust the fl ash level. The options available vary with the fl ash. N For more information on fl ash settings, see External Flash Units (P 270) in Periph-

erals and Optional Accessories. MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH ADJUST END 6 RED EYE REMOVAL Remove red-eye eff ects caused by the fl ash. T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option Description Description FLASH+REMOVAL A red-eye reduction pre- ash is combined with digital red-eye FLASH REMOVAL removal. Flash red-eye reduction only. Digital red-eye removal only. Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal o . N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL fl ash control mode. Digital red-eye removal is performed only when a face is detected. Digital red-eye removal is not available with RAW images. OFF 148 FLASH SETTING TTL-LOCK MODE Instead of adjusting fl ash level with each shot, TTL fl ash control can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-

graphs. Option Option Description Description LOCK WITH LAST FLASH Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most recent photo. LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre- ashes and locks ash output at the metered value. FLASH N To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 259). Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in eff ect. Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no previously metered value exists. LED LIGHT SETTING Choose whether to use the fl ash units LED video light (if avail-

able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. Option Option CATCHLIGHT AF ASSIST Role of LED video light in still photography Role of LED video light in still photography Catchlight AF-assist illuminator AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight OFF None N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. 149 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s FLASH SETTING MASTER SETTING Choose a fl ash group (A, B, or C) for the fl ash mounted on the camera hot shoe when it functions as a master fl ash controlling remote fl ash units via Fujifi lm wireless optical fl ash control, or choose OFF to limit master fl ash output to a level that does not aff ect the fi nal picture. Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF Options Options N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. CH SETTING Choose the channel used for communication between the mas-

ter fl ash and remote fl ash units when using Fujifi lm optical wire-

less fl ash control. Separate channels can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Options Options 150 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s B MOVIE SETTING Adjust movie-recording options. To display options for movie recording, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE H.265(HEVC)/H.264 MOVIE COMPRESSION FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. DYNAMIC RANGE WHITE BALANCE HIGHLIGHT TONE

(Warm/Cool) EXIT MOVIE MODE Before shooting movies, choose the frame rate, bit rate, and frame size and aspect ratio. MOVIE MODE 16:9 1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-

light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the desired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stick right. Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ra-

tios of 16 or 17 to 9. Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9. 151 3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a frame rate (B) and press the stick right. Options Options 59.94P 50P 29.97P 25P 24P 23.98P 4 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight a bit rate (C) and press MENU/OK. 400Mbps 200Mbps 100Mbps 50Mbps N The choice of frame and bit rates varies with the movie mode. Options Options 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 152 MOVIE SETTING H.265(HEVC)/H.264 Choose a codec for movie recording. Option Option H.265(HEVC) H.264 Description Description Use for higher quality footage with a high compression ra-

tio. Movies can be viewed only on devices that support H.265(HEVC). Movies lmed using this widely-supported codec can be viewed on a variety devices. MOVIE COMPRESSION Choose type of compression used to record movies. Option Option ALL-Intra Long GOP Description Description Each frame is compressed separately. Files are larger, but the fact that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good choice for footage that will be further processed. Balances good image quality with high compression. Files are smaller, making this a good choice for longer movies. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 153 F FILM SIMULATION Choose a fi lm simulation eff ect for movie recording. Description Description See FILM SIMULATION (P 107). Option Option c PROVIA/STANDARD d Velvia/VIVID e ASTIA/SOFT i CLASSIC CHROME g PRO Neg. Hi h PRO Neg. Std X ETERNA/CINEMA a ACROS b MONOCHROME f SEPIA F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or cool color cast) to mono-

chrome pictures taken with the a ACROS or b MONOCHROME fi lm simulation. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option

+9 +1 0

-1 -9 Description Description Higher positive values equate to a redder color cast. Normal monochrome (grayscale). Lower negative values equate to a bluer color cast. 154 MOVIE SETTING F DYNAMIC RANGE Choose a dynamic range for movie recording. Option Option V100%

W200%

X400%

Description Description See DYNAMIC RANGE (P 110). N Auto dynamic range adjustment (AUTO) is not supported. W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 400 to ISO 12800, X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 800 to 12800. The B MOVIE SETTING> F DYNAMIC RANGE option is available when b P Y P is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> F-Log/HLG RECORDING. F WHITE BALANCE Adjust white balance for movie recording. Option Option AUTO k/l/m k i j k l m n g Description Description 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s See WHITE BALANCE (P 112). 155 F HIGHLIGHT TONE Choose how the camera records highlights when shooting movies.

+4

+3

+2 Options Options

+1 0 1 2 F SHADOW TONE Choose how the camera records shadows when shooting movies.

+4

+3

+2 Options Options

+1 0 1 2 F COLOR Adjust color density for movie recording.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 156 MOVIE SETTING F SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines in movies.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 F NOISE REDUCTION Reduce noise in movies shot at high sensitivities.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 V INTERFRAME NR Select ON to enable interframe noise reduction. Options Options ON OFF N Interframe noise reduction is available only when frame rates of 29.97P or slower are selected at a frame size of V or d. Ghosting may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved during shooting. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 157 F-Log/HLG RECORDING Choose the destination for FLog and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device. Option Option b P Y P b F-Log Y F-Log b P Y F-Log b F-Log Y P b HLG Y HLG Description Description The footage is processed using lm simulation and both saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device. The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to the HDMI device in F-Log format. The footage is output to the HDMI device in F-Log format but saved to the memory card with lm simulation applied. The footage is recorded to the memory card in F-Log format but output to the HDMI device with lm simulation applied. The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to the HDMI device in HLG format. N F-Log off ers a gentle gamma curve with a wide gamut suitable for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 800 and ISO 12800. The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the inter-

national ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible dis-

plays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO1250 and ISO12800. HLG recording is available when H.265 (HEVC) is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> H.265 (HEVC)/H.264 in the shooting menu. Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected for B MOVIE SETTING> F FILM SIMULATION in the shooting menu. Footage shot with b P Y F-Log or b F-Log Y P cannot be recorded to the memory card and output to the HDMI at diff erent frame sizes

(4K, Full HD). In addition, the following B MOVIE SETTING options are unavailable:

- MOVIE MODE frame rate options of 59.94P and 50P

- V INTERFRAME NR

- HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY 158 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s MOVIE SETTING F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF N If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera is attached using a FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER (available separately), peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the option selected for A SHOOTING SETTING > MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION in the shooting menu (P 145). Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this op-

tion. F FOCUS AREA Choose the focus area for movies shot using autofocus. You can also choose the focus area (and consequently also the focus zoom position) for movies shot using manual focus. MOVIE AF MODE Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording. Option Option MULTI AREA Description Description Automatic focus-point selection. The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area. 159 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus mode C. TRACKING SENSITIVITY Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-

ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-

ject. See TRACKING SENSITIVITY (P 122). 0 1 AF SPEED Options Options 2 3 4 Adjust the autofocus response speed. Options Options 5 4 3 2 1 0

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 160

 

 

MOVIE SETTING F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording movies. Option Option FACE DETECTION ON OFF Description Description See FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING (P 126). Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority o . O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus using continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual focus mode. F MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Option Option Description Description STANDARD Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking is not available). FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level. F FOCUS CHECK If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-

cus mode. Options Options ON OFF 161 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 4K MOVIE OUTPUT Choose the destination for 4K movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI recorder or other device that supports 4K. Option Option b 4K Y 4K b 4K Y FHD b FHD Y 4K b Y 4K Description Description 4K movies are recorded to the camera memory card and out-

put to the HDMI device in 4K. 4K movies are recorded to a camera memory card in 4K and output to the HDMI device in Full HD. 4K movies are output to the HDMI device in 4K and recorded to the camera memory card in Full HD. 4K movies are output to the HDMI device in 4K. The camera does not record 4K movies to a memory card. N This option is only available when V 16 : 9 or d 17 : 9 is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE MODE in the shooting menu. FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT Choose the destination for Full HD movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device. Option Option Description Description b FHD Y FHD Full HD movies are output to the HDMI device and recorded to the camera memory card. Full HD movies are not recorded to the camera memory card but are output to the HDMI device. b Y FHD N This option is only available when W 16 : 9 or W 17 : 9 is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE MODE in the shooting menu. When OFF is selected for HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY, movies will be output to the HDMI device in 4:2:2 10-bit format. 162 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s MOVIE SETTING HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected will mirror the information in the camera display. Options Options ON OFF 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY Choose whether output to connected HDMI devices switches from 4K to Full HD during standby. Option Option V Output to HDMI devices continues at 4K during standby. Description Description W Output to HDMI devices switches to Full HD during standby, reducing the drain on the battery. HDMI REC CONTROL Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start and stop movie recording. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Options Options ON OFF 163 ZEBRA SETTING Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes in the movie mode display. Option Option ZEBRA RIGHT ZEBRA LEFT Right-slanting stripes. Left-slanting stripes. OFF Stripes o . Description Description ZEBRA LEVEL Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display. 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 Options Options 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 164 MOVIE SETTING AUDIO SETTING Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording. INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Turn the built-in microphone o . EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for external microphones. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Disable recording using external microphones. MIC LEVEL LIMITER Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the microphones audio circuits. Options Options ON OFF 165 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s WIND FILTER Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie recording. ON LOW CUT FILTER Options Options OFF Choose whether to enable the low-cut fi lter, reducing low-fre-

quency noise during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF HEADPHONES VOLUME Adjust the headphone volume. Option Option 101 0 Description Description Choose a volume of from 1 to 10. Mute output to the headphones. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 166 MOVIE SETTING TIME CODE SETTING Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) dis-

play settings for movie recording. TIME CODE DISPLAY Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and playback. Options Options ON OFF START TIME SETTING Choose the time code starting time. Option Option Description Description MANUAL INPUT Highlight this option and press the focus stick (focus lever) CURRENT TIME right to choose a start time manually. Set the start time to the current time. Set the start time to 00:00:00. RESET COUNT UP SETTING Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during movie recording. Option Option REC RUN FREE RUN Description Description Time is clocked only during movie recording. Time is clocked continuously. 167 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s DROP FRAME At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-

ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second). Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match the recording time to the time code. Option Option ON OFF Description Description The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict match between the time code and the actual recording time. Frames are not dropped. N The time code display varies with the option selected. ON OFF Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop. HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices. Options Options ON OFF 168 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s TALLY LIGHT Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. MOVIE SETTING Option Option FRONT OFF REAR z FRONT OFF REAR y FRONT z REAR z FRONT z REAR OFF FRONT y REAR y FRONT y REAR OFF FRONT OFF REAR OFF Indicator lamp1 AF-assist illuminator Description Description The indicator lamp lights during movie recording. The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain o during movie recording. 169 MOVIE SETTING MOVIE SILENT CONTROL Select ON to disable camera dials and adjust movie settings us-

ing touch-screen controls, preventing the sounds made by cam-

era controls being recorded with the movie (P 33). Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 170 Playback and the Playback Menu 171 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 The Playback Display This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during playback. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. A CB D E F G H 01/01/2019 10:00 AM b a Z Y X W V U T S R Q A Date and time ..................................52, 54, 199 B Face detection indicator ............................126 C Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................240 D Image transfer order ...................................189 E Image transfer status ........................240, 284 F Number of frames selected for upload ...189 G Card slot..........................................................177 H Frame number ..............................................236 I Protected image ...........................................184 J Location data.......................................246, 285 K Image quality................................................105 L Image size ......................................................104 M Film simulation ............................................107 N Dynamic range ............................................110 172 I J P KLMNO O White balance ..............................................112 P Sensitivity .......................................................142 Q Exposure compensation ...............................93 R Aperture ...............................................69, 73, 75 S Shutter speed .....................................69, 70, 75 T Playback mode indicator .............................59 U Movie icon ........................................................65 V Time code .......................................................167 W Red-eye removal indicator ...............148, 186 X Gift image .........................................................59 Y Photobook assist indicator .......................191 Z DPOF print indicator ...................................193 a Voice memo ..................................................187 b Rating ..............................................................173 The Playback Display The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators during playback. Standard Information off 01/01/2019 10:00 AM 1/1000 5.6 12800

+1.0 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l FAVORITES Favorites Info display NEXT 7 Favorites: Rating Pictures To rate the current picture, press DISP/BACK and press the focus stick (focus lever) up and down to select from zero to fi ve stars. 173 Viewing Photo Information The photo information display changes each time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up. The Playback Display Basic data 01/01/2019 10:00 AM 1/1000 5.6 12800

+1.0 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 1/1000 S.S 5.6 F ISO 12800

+1.0 BACK Info display 2 Info display 1 NEXT Zooming in on the Focus Point Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point. Press again to return to full-frame playback. 174 Viewing Pictures Read this section for information on playback zoom and multi-frame playback. Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Full-frame playback 100-0001 Multi-frame playback Playback zoom DISP/BACK MENU/OK Nine-frame view Medium zoom l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Hundred- frame view Maximum zoom 175 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Viewing Pictures Playback Zoom Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK, or the center of the rear command dial. N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE. Playback zoom is not available with cropped or resized copies saved at a size of a. Scroll When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick

(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the image not currently visible in the display. Navigation window Multi-Frame Playback To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-

mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame. N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK to view the highlighted image full frame. In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or down to view more pictures. 176 C The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. The playback menu is displayed when you press MENU/OK in playback mode. PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION ERASE SIMULTANEOUS DELETE(RAW SLOT1/JPG SLOT2) CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE EXIT SWITCH SLOT Choose the card from which images will be played back. N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a but-

ton to choose a card for playback. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 177 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 RAW CONVERSION Even if you dont have a computer, you can use the camera to modify RAW pictures and save them in JPEG or TIFF format. Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format 1 Display a RAW picture. 2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu. 3 Press MENU/OK. RAW CONVERSION A list of settings will be displayed. REFLECT SHOOTING COND. FILE TYPE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY PUSH/PULL PROCESSING DYNAMIC RANGE CREATE CANCEL 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a 5 Press the focus stick right to display setting. options. RAW CONVERSION 100%

/

200%

400%

WB 6 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option. 7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to adjust additional settings. 8 Press the Q button. A preview of the JPEG or TIFF copy will be displayed. 9 Press MENU/OK. The JPEG or TIFF copy will be saved. N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-

ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback. 178 The Playback Menu The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from RAW to another format are:

Setting Setting REFLECT SHOOTING COND. REFLECT SHOOTING COND. FILE TYPE FILE TYPE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY PUSH/PULL PROCESSING PUSH/PULL PROCESSING DYNAMIC RANGE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY D RANGE PRIORITY FILM SIMULATION FILM SIMULATION Description Description Create a JPEG copy using the settings in e ect at the time the photo was taken. Choose a le format. Choose an image size. Adjust image quality. Adjust exposure. Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast. Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes. Simulate the e ects of di erent types of lm. B & W ADJ. B & W ADJ. aabb(Warm/Cool)

(Warm/Cool) Add a warm or cool cast to monochrome pictures. GRAIN EFFECT GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE WB SHIFT WB SHIFT HIGHLIGHT TONE HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR COLOR SHARPNESS SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION NOISE REDUCTION Add a lm grain e ect. Deepen colors in shadows. Smooth complexions. Adjust white balance. Fine-tune white balance. Adjust highlights. Adjust shadows. Adjust color density. Sharpen or soften outlines. Process the copy to reduce mottling. LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER Improve de nition by adjusting for di raction and LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. Choose the color space used for color reproduction. COLOR SPACE COLOR SPACE 179 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 ERASE Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-

tures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. Option Option FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES Description Description Delete pictures one at a time. Delete multiple selected pictures. Delete all unprotected pictures. FRAME 1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. N A confi rmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK. Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the fo-

cus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 180 The Playback Menu SELECTED FRAMES 1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select. Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R). To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again. 3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a confi rmation dialog. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-

tures. N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S. ALL FRAMES 1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures. N Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted before the button was pressed cannot be recovered. If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures. 181 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 SIMULTANEOUS DELETE(RAW SLOT1/JPG SLOT2) Taking photos with RAW / JPEG selected for D SAVE DATA SET-UP>CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE) creates two copies. Choose whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG copy. Option Option ON OFF Description Description Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the JPEG copy from the card in Slot 2. Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete the JPEG copy from the card in Slot 2. CROP Create a cropped copy of the current picture. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select CROP in the playback menu. 3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the picture until the desired portion is displayed. 4 Press MENU/OK to display a confi rmation dialog. 5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate fi le. N The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the cropped copy. If the size of the fi nal copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow. All copies have an aspect ratio of 43. 182 The Playback Menu RESIZE Create a small copy of the current picture. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu. 3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confi rmation dialog. 4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate fi le. N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 183 PROTECT Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK. Option Option FRAME SET ALL RESET ALL Description Description Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete. Protect all pictures. Remove protection from all pictures. O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted. N Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smart-

phones or tablets removes upload marking. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 184 The Playback Menu IMAGE ROTATE Rotate pictures. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu. 3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture 90 clockwise, up to rotate it 90 counterclockwise. 4 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the camera. N Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-

tating pictures. The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when viewed on a computer or on other cameras. Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB are auto-

matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 185 RED EYE REMOVAL Remove red-eye from portraits. The camera will analyze the im-

age; if red-eye is detected, the image will be processed to create a copy with reduced red-eye. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select RED EYE REMOVAL in the playback menu. 3 Press MENU/OK. N Results vary depending on the scene and the cameras success in de-

tecting faces. The amount of time needed to process the image varies with the number of faces detected. Red eye cannot be removed from pictures that have already been processed using red-eye removal, which are indicated by a e icon during playback. Red eye removal cannot be performed on RAW images. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 186 The Playback Menu VOICE MEMO SETTING Add a voice memo to the current photograph. 1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu. 2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo. 3 Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-

cord the memo. Recording ends after 30s or when you re-

lease the dial. N The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos. Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures. Deleting the picture also deletes the memo. Playing Voice Memos Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback. To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front com-

mand dial. A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back. Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume. Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-

ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. 187 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 COPY Copy pictures between the cards in the fi rst and second slots. 1 Select COPY in the playback menu. 2 Highlight one of the following options. Option Option Description Description SLOT1 y SLOT2 Copy pictures from the card in the rst slot to the card in SLOT2 y SLOT1 Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card the second slot. in the rst slot. 3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) right. 4 Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK. Option Option FRAME ALL FRAMES Description Description Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture. Copy all pictures. O Copying ends when the destination is full. If you attempt to copy a fi le over 4GB in size to a memory card with a capacity of 32GB or less, copying will end and the fi le will not be copied. 188 The Playback Menu IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet. 1 Select IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER> SELECT FRAMES in the playback menu. 2 Highlight photos and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Re-

peat until all the desired photos have been selected. 3 Press DISP/BACK to exit to playback. N If ON is selected for both D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> Bluetooth ON/OFF and AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER, upload will begin shortly after you exit to playback or turn the camera off . N Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures. The following cannot be selected for upload:

- Protected pictures

- Movies

- RAW images

- Gift pictures (pictures taken with other cameras) If PAIRING/TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D CONNECTION SETTING > GENERAL SETTINGS > r BUTTON SETTING, photos can also be marked for upload using the Fn1 button. To remove upload marking from all pictures in the current order, se-

lect IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER> RESET ORDER. If ON is selected for D CONNECTION SETTING > Bluetooth SETTINGS> AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER, photos will automatically be marked for upload as they are taken. 189 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. The smartphone can then be used to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-

tures Upload location data to the camera N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 190 The Playback Menu PHOTOBOOK ASSIST Create books from your favorite photos. Creating a Photobook 1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU> PHOTOBOOK ASSIST. 2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-

ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the book is complete. N Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected for photobooks. The fi rst picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-

cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead. 3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-

lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu. N Books can contain up to 300 pictures. Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l Photobooks Photobooks can be copied to a computer using MyFinePix Studio software. 7 191 Viewing Photobooks Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through the pictures. Editing and Deleting Photobooks Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-

screen instructions. EDIT: Edit the book as described in Creating a Photobook. ERASE: Delete the book. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 192 The Playback Menu PRINT ORDER (DPOF) Create a digital print order for DPOF-compatible printers. 1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> PRINT ORDER (DPOF). 2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-

tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before proceeding. 3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the print order. 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to choose the number of copies (up to 99). N To remove a picture from the order, press the focus stick down until the number of copies is 0. PRINT ORDER (DPOF) DPOF: 00001 SHEETS 01 FRAME SET Total number of prints Number of copies l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l N Repeat steps 34 to complete the print order. 7 5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press MENU/OK to exit. N The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon during playback. Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single memory card. If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-

other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as described above. 193 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 instax PRINTER PRINT To print pictures to optional Fujifi lm instax SHARE printers, fi rst se-

lect D CONNECTION SETTING> instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and password, then follow the steps below. 1 Turn the printer on. 2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. instax-12345678 CONNECTING PRINTER PRINT 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 194 The Playback Menu DISP ASPECT Choose how High Defi nition (HD) devices display pictures with an aspect ratio of 43 (this option is available only when an HDMI cable is connected). 16:9 4:3 Option Option 161699 4433 Display N Select 169 to display the image so that it fi lls the screen with its top and bottom cropped out, 43 to display the entire image with black bands at either side. 195 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 MEMO 196 The Setup Menus 197 D USER SETTING Adjust basic camera settings. To access basic camera settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose USER SETTING. USER SETTING FORMAT DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE MY MENU SETTING SENSOR CLEANING BATTERY AGE RESET EXIT FORMAT To format a memory card:

1 Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. To format the memory card, highlight OK and press MENU/OK. N To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK. FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?

ERASE ALL DATA FORMAT CANCEL OK O All dataincluding protected pictureswill be deleted from the memory card. Be sure important fi les have been copied to a comput-

er or other storage device. Do not remove the battery tray during formatting. N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding the b button. 198 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 USER SETTING DATE/TIME To set the camera clock:

1 Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. To change the order in which the year, month, and day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the focus stick up or down. 3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock. TIME DIFFERENCE Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the diff erence between your local and home time zone:

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the time diff erence between local time and your home time zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete. To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time zone, select h HOME. g LOCAL h HOME Options Options N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three seconds when the camera is turned on. 199 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Qa Choose a language. MY MENU SETTING Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-

tom menu of frequently-used options. 1 Highlight D USER SETTING > MY MENU SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab and press MENU/OK. MY MENU SETTING ADD ITEMS RANK ITEMS REMOVE ITEMS N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS. To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and press MENU/OK. Options that can be added to my menu are highlighted in blue. MY MENU SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE WHITE BALANCE OK SELECT CANCEL N Items currently in my menu are indicated by check marks. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 3 Choose a position for the item and press MENU/OK. The item will be added to my menu. SELECT ITEM LOCATION 1IMAGE SIZE 2IMAGE QUALITY 4 Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been added. N My menu can contain up to 16 items. MOVE SAVE 200 USER SETTING SENSOR CLEANING Remove dust from the camera image sensor. Option Option OK Clean the sensor immediately. Description Description WHEN SWITCHED ON Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is turned on. Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns o (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-

era turns o in playback mode). WHEN SWITCHED OFF N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed using a blower (P 310). BATTERY AGE Check battery age. Age is expressed as a number between 0 and 4. The higher the number, the older the battery. BATTERY AGE BATTERY L BATTERY R N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that batteries be replaced as they wear out. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 201 USER SETTING RESET Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values. 1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Option Option SHOOTING MENU RESET SET-UP RESET Description Description Reset all shooting menu settings other than custom white balance and custom settings banks created using EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values. Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME, TIME DIFFERENCE, COPYRIGHT INFO, and con-

nection-related CONNECTION SETTING options to default values. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK. REGULATORY Display product certifi cates. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 202 D SOUND SETTING Make changes to camera sounds. To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SOUND SET-UP. SOUND SETTING AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. SHUTTER VOLUME SHUTTER SOUND PLAYBACK VOLUME EXIT AF BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 203 SOUND SETTING OPERATION VOL. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-

trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SHUTTER VOLUME Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SHUTTER SOUND Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter. i SOUND 1 Options Options j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3 PLAYBACK VOLUME Adjust the volume for movie playback. Options Options 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 204 D SCREEN SETTING Make changes to display settings. To access display settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SCREEN SET-UP. SCREEN SETTING EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF COLOR EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT LCD BRIGHTNESS LCD COLOR LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT IMAGE DISP. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS EXIT EVF BRIGHTNESS Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfi nder. Option Option AUTO MANUAL Description Description Automatic brightness adjustment. Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between +5 and 7. EVF COLOR Adjust the hue of the display in the electronic viewfi nder.

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Options Options EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfi nder. 1 Adjust colors using the focus stick EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT

(focus lever). 2 Press MENU/OK. SET CANCEL 205 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 LCD BRIGHTNESS Adjust monitor brightness.

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Options Options LCD COLOR Adjust monitor hue.

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Options Options LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor. 1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever). 2 Press MENU/OK. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 206 SCREEN SETTING IMAGE DISP. Choose how long images are displayed after shooting. Option Option CONTINUOUS 1.5 SEC 0.5 SEC OFF Description Description Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus point, press the center of the rear command dial; press again to cancel zoom. Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter button is pressed halfway. Pictures are not displayed after shooting. N Colors may diff er slightly from those in the fi nal image. Noise mottling may be visible at high sensitivities. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS Choose whether the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor rotate to match camera orientation. Options Options ON OFF T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 207 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview in manual exposure mode. Option Option Description Description PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview. PREVIEW WB OFF Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in which exposure and white balance are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when you use a ash with an incandescent monitoring lamp. Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-

tion when using a ash or on other occasions on which expo-

sure may change when the picture is taken. NATURAL LIVE VIEW Choose whether the eff ects of fi lm simulation, white balance, and other settings are visible in the monitor. Option Option ON OFF Description Description The e ects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor, but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-

to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will di er from those in the nal picture. The display will however be adjusted to show the e ects of monochrome and sepia settings. The e ects of lm simulation, white balance, and other settings can be previewed in the monitor. 208 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SCREEN SETTING FRAMING GUIDELINE Choose a framing grid for shooting mode. FF GRID 9 GRID 9 Option Option GG GRID 24 GRID 24 HH HD FRAMING HD FRAMING D i s p l y P a P For rule of thirds compo-

A six-by-four grid. sition. P Frame HD pictures in the crop shown by the lines at the top and bottom of the display. N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed using D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 211). AUTOROTATE PB Choose ON to automatically rotate tall (portrait-orientation) pictures during playback. Options Options ON OFF T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 209 FOCUS SCALE UNITS Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator. METERS FEET Options Options DUAL DISPLAY SETTING Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display. Option Option Description Description R:FOCUS L:FRAME The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area, R:FRAME L:FOCUS The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.

(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 210 SCREEN SETTING DISP. CUSTOM SETTING Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display. 1 In shooting mode, use the DISP/BACK button to display stan-

dard indicators. 2 Press MENU/OK and select D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab. 3 Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Default Default Default Default ItemItem FRAMING GUIDELINE ELECTRONIC LEVEL FOCUS FRAME AF DISTANCE INDICATOR MF DISTANCE INDICATOR HISTOGRAM LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT SHOOTING MODE APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO INFORMATION BACKGROUND Expo. Comp. (Digit) Expo. Comp. (Scale) FOCUS MODE PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLASH ItemItem CONTINUOUS MODE DUAL IS MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE BOOST MODE FRAMES REMAINING IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME 35mm FORMAT MODE IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER MIC LEVEL GUIDANCE MESSAGE BATTERY LEVEL FRAMING OUTLINE R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes. 5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 211 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfi nd-

er. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 17). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 223, 259). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 212 SCREEN SETTING LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-

dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 19). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 223, 259). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 213 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Choose the indicators displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP>

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Expo. DISP. Scale Option Option AExpo. DISP. Bd Scale CL1, L2, L3, L4 DR1, R2, R3, R4 Description Description Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display. Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK. Select ON to display the exposure indicator. Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side of the screen. Choose up to four large icons for display on the right side of the screen. INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. Adjust display contrast. Option Option HIGH CONTRAST STANDARD LOW CONTRAST High contrast. Normal contrast. Low contrast. Description Description DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting. 214 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SCREEN SETTING SUB MONITOR SETTING Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor. Separate displays are available for still photography and movie recording. Choose from the following:

Option Option INFORMATION DIALS HISTOGRAM Description Description Display camera settings. You can choose the settings displayed. Display dials showing ISO sensitivity and shutter speed. Display a histogram. N You can switch between displays by pressing the secondary LCD mon-

itor mode button. The INFORMATION Display Follow the steps below to choose the indicators shown in the INFORMATION display. 1 Select D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR SETTING in the setup menu. 2 Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight INFORMATION and press SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL) MENU/OK. T h e S e t u p M e n u s INFORMATION DIALS HISTOGRAM 8 215 4 Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK. SUB MONITOR SETTING INFORMATION(STILL) SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE ISO SHOOTING MODE IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION BATTERY LEVEL 5 Highlight the indicator you wish to display and press MENU/OK. DISPLAY 1 SETTING SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPO. COMP. ISO MOVIE MODE SHOOTING MODE PHOTOMETRY DRIVE MODE SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPO. COMP. ISO MOVIE MODE SHOOTING MODE PHOTOMETRY DRIVE MODE FOCUS MODE WHITE BALANCE IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY SHUTTER TYPE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE 35mm FORMAT MODE BOOST MODE DUAL IS MODE SELF-TIMER NONE 216 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SCREEN SETTING 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to change additional indicators. N The d Scale indicator can only be enabled or disabled. E L A F L T T L S.S. F ISO M 4000 2.8 102400 L L V R 9999 L 1 d Scale T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 217 REAR SUB MONITOR SETTING Choose the indicators displayed in the rear secondary monitor. Separate displays are available for still photography and movie recording. Choose from the following:

Option Option INFORMATION 1 INFORMATION 2 Description Description Display a preset selection of indicators (INFORMATION 1 or INFORMATION 2). d Scale HISTOGRAM OFF Display an exposure indicator. Display a histogram. Turn the rear secondary monitor o . The INFORMATION 1 and INFORMATION 2 Displays Follow the steps below to choose the indicators shown in the INFORMATION 1 or INFORMATION 2 display. 1 Select D SCREEN SET-UP> REAR SUB MONITOR SETTING in the setup menu. 2 Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight INFORMATION 1 or INFORMATION 2 and press MENU/OK. 4 Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK. REAR SUB MONITOR SETTING INFORMATION 1(STILL) APERTURE SHUTTER SPEED ISO EXPO. COMP. FILM SIMULATION WHITE BALANCE 218 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 5 Highlight the indicator you wish to display and press MENU/OK. SCREEN SETTING DISPLAY 1 SETTING SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPO. COMP. ISO MOVIE MODE FRAMES REM. REC. TIME SHOOTING MODE SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPO. COMP. ISO MOVIE MODE FRAMES REM. REC. TIME SHOOTING MODE PHOTOMETRY DRIVE MODE FOCUS MODE WHITE BALANCE IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY BATTERY LEVEL SHUTTER TYPE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER 35mm FORMAT MODE H.265(HEVC)/H.264 MOVIE COMPRESSION HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT BOOST MODE DUAL IS MODE FLASH SELF-TIMER NONE 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to change additional indicators. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 219 SCREEN SETTING SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read. Option Option BLACK WHITE Description Description Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting. Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting. N The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD moni-

tor backlight is on. REAR SUB MONITOR BRIGHTNESS Adjust the brightness of the rear secondary monitor.

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Options Options T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 220 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING Access options for camera controls. To access control options, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT CARD EXIT FOCUS LEVER SETTING Choose the functions performed by the focus stick (focus lever). Option Option LOCK (OFF) The focus stick cannot be used during shooting. Description Description PUSH n TO UNLOCK Press the stick to view the focus-point display and tilt the stick to select a focus point. Tilt the stick to view the focus-point display and select a focus point. ON T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 221 EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU Choose the items displayed in the quick menu. 1 Select D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick

(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected position. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY FILM SIMULATION*

B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool)*

GRAIN EFFECT*

COLOR CHROME EFFECT*

SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT*

DYNAMIC RANGE*

D RANGE PRIORITY*

WHITE BALANCE*

HIGHLIGHT TONE*

SHADOW TONE*

COLOR*

SHARPNESS*

NOISE REDUCTION*

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING*

AF MODE (MOVIE AF MODE)

* Stored in custom settings bank. N Select NONE to assign no option to the selected position. AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING MF ASSIST TOUCH SCREEN MODE SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO*

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING FLASH COMPENSATION MOVIE MODE INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS EVF/LCD COLOR NONE When SELECT CUSTOM SETTING is selected, current settings are shown in the quick menu by the label BASE. N The quick menu can also be accessed in shooting mode by holding the Q button. 222 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the function buttons. 1 Select D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 Highlight the desired control and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected control. N AE LOCK ONLY, AF LOCK ONLY, AE/AF LOCK, AF-ON, and AWB LOCK ONLY cannot be assigned to the touch function buttons (T-Fn1 through T-Fn4). Function button assignment options can also be accessed by hold-

ing the DISP/BACK button. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 223 Roles That Can Be Assigned to the Function Buttons WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FLASH FUNCTION SETTING TTL-LOCK MODELING FLASH ZEBRA SETTING INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MOVIE SILENT CONTROL PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW HISTOGRAM ELECTRONIC LEVEL LARGE INDICATORS MODE AE LOCK ONLY AF LOCK ONLY AE/AF LOCK AF-ON AWB LOCK ONLY LOCK SETTING PERFORMANCE AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION Bluetooth ON/OFF PLAYBACK SHOOTING MODE NONE (control disabled) Choose from:

EXPO. COMP. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE SELECT CUSTOM SETTING FOCUS AREA FOCUS CHECK AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE SELECT op FACE DETECTION ON/OFF SELF-TIMER AE BKT SETTING FOCUS BKT SETTING PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO IS MODE 35mm FORMAT MODE 224 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING AF-ON If AF-ON is selected, you can press the control instead of keeping the shutter button pressed halfway. MODELING FLASH If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-

ed fl ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fi re the fl ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling fl ash). TTL-LOCK If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock fl ash output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>

TTL-LOCK MODE (P 149). n FACE SELECT op FACE SELECT ON n FACE SELECT op can be enabled or disabled by pressing the button to which n FACE SELECT op is assigned. Enabling n FACE SELECT op allows the focus stick (focus lever) or (during viewfi nder photography) touch controls

(P 31) to be used to select the face that will be used for focus. The following features can be accessed using the focus stick or during viewfi nder photography when n FACE SELECT op is enabled:

The face used to set focus can be selected using the focus stick. To switch from face detection to manual focus-area selection, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever) (P 82). Press again to re-enable face detection. The touch screen (monitor) or focus stick can be used to select the face used to set focus during viewfi nder photography. 225 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 COMMAND DIAL SETTING Choose the roles played by the command dials. Option Option FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1 FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3 REAR COMMAND DIAL EXP. COMPENSATION ASSIGNMENT Description Description Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or ap-

erture (APERTURE (PROGRAM SHIFT)) * to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aperture

(APERTURE (PROGRAM SHIFT)) *, sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aperture

(APERTURE (PROGRAM SHIFT)) *, sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to the rear command dial. Exposure compensation can be adjusted using either or both of the front and rear command dials while the d (ex-

posure compensation) button is pressed.

* Aperture ring rotated to C. N COMMAND DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and holding the center of the front command dial. You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3. The selected option also applies to the vertical-grip command dials. 226 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Option Option AF-S AF-C Description Description ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway. OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed half-

way. OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. SHUTTER AE If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Option Option AF-S/MF AF-C Description Description ON: Exposure locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway. OFF: Exposure does not lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ON: Exposure locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. OFF: Exposure does not lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. T h e S e t u p M e n u s N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot taken in burst mode. 8 227 SHOOT WITHOUT LENS Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is at-

tached. Options Options ON OFF SHOOT WITHOUT CARD Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory card inserted in the camera. Option Option ON OFF Description Description When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be displayed. The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 228 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS RING Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-

crease the focus distance. X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise) Options Options FOCUS RING OPERATION Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-

ment of the focus ring. Option Option NONLINEAR LINEAR Description Description Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated. Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is ro-

tated, but the focusing speed is una ected by the speed the ring is rotated. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 229 AE/AF-LOCK MODE This option determines the behavior of the button to which exposure and/or focus lock is assigned. Option Option AE&AF ON WHEN PRESSING AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH Description Description Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed. Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and re-

main locked until it is pressed again. AWB-LOCK MODE Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance (AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at the value metered by the camera when AUTO is se-

lected for white balance. Option Option Description Description AWB ON WHEN PRESSING AWB ON/OFF SWITCH Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed. Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end the lock. EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING Control the behavior of the rear command dial and the button to which exposure compensation is assigned. If d ON WHEN PRESSING is selected, exposure compensation can be adjusted by holding the button while rotating dial; if d ON/OFF SWITCH is selected, exposure compensation can be set by pressing the button once, rotating the dial, and then pressing the button again. ON WHEN PRESSING ON/OFF SWITCH Options Options 230 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Enable or disable touch-screen controls. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING c TOUCH FUNCTION Enable or disable touch function gestures. Option Option x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING x DOUBLE TAP SETTING a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS Description Description ON: The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting. OFF: Touch controls disabled. ON: Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your sub-

ject during shooting. OFF: Touch zoom disabled. ON: The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback. OFF: Touch controls disabled. Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while the view nder is active. The area used for touch controls can be selected from:

6 (all) 0 (right half) 2 (top right quarter) 4 (bottom right quarter) Choose OFF to disable touch controls while the view-

nder is active. 1 (left half) 3 (top left quarter) 5 (bottom left quarter) T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 231 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING LOCK Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation. Option Option Description Description Choose from the following:

UNLOCK: Reset lock options. ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION SELECTION list. SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in the FUNCTION SELECTION list. Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is chosen for LOCK SETTING. LOCK SETTING FUNCTION SELECTION T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 232 D POWER MANAGEMENT Adjust power management settings. To access power management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE SHOOTING STAND BY MODE AUTO POWER SAVE EXIT AUTO POWER OFF Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automati-

cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off manually. 5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF Options Options T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 233 PERFORMANCE Select BOOST to improve focus and viewfi nder display perfor-

mance. Option Option BOOST NORMAL Description Description Boost camera focus and/or view nder display performance. The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected. You can choose to assign priority to:

AF PRIORITY: Focus speed. EVF RESOLUTION PRIORITY: View nder resolution. EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY: View nder frame rate for smoother motion. N Regardless of the option selected, the camera func-

tions in AF PRIORITY mode while the monitor is on. Choose for standard focus and view nder display performance and battery endurance. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 234 POWER MANAGEMENT SHOOTING STAND BY MODE Choose the delay before the camera enters shooting standby mode. Option Option 5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF Description Description The camera will suspend all functions and enter power-

ing-saving (standby) mode if no operations are performed for the selected period. Shooting standby mode disabled. AUTO POWER SAVE If ON is selected, the display frame rate will drop to save power if no operations are performed for a short period, but the normal frame rate can be restored by operating camera controls. Options Options ON OFF T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 235 D SAVE DATA SETTING Make changes to fi le management settings. To access fi le management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. SAVE DATA SETTING FRAME NO. SAVE ORG IMAGE EDIT FILE NAME CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE) SELECT SLOT(

SELECT SLOT(

SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO SEQUENTIAL) SEQUENTIAL) EXIT FRAME NO. New pictures are stored in image fi les named using a four-digit fi le number assigned by adding one to the last fi le number used. The File fi le number is displayed during playback as number shown. FRAME NO. controls whether fi le num-

bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or the current memory card is formatted. Directory number Frame number T h e S e t u p M e n u s Option Option CONTINUOUS Description Description Numbering continues from the last le number used or the rst available le number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to reduce the number of pictures with duplicate le names. Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new memory card is inserted. RENEW 8 N If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be dis-

abled. Format the memory card after transferring to a computer any pictures you wish to keep. Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. CONTINUOUS but does not reset the fi le number. Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may diff er. to 236 SAVE DATA SETTING SAVE ORG IMAGE Choose ON to save unprocessed copies of pictures taken using RED EYE REMOVAL. Options Options ON OFF EDIT FILE NAME Change the fi le name prefi x. sRGB images use a four-letter prefi x

(default DSCF), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefi x (DSF) preceded by an underscore. Option Option sRGB AdobeRGB Default prefi x Default prefi x DSCF _DSF Sample fi le name Sample fi le name ABCD0001 _ABC0001 CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE) Choose the role played by the card in the second slot. Option Option SEQUENTIAL BACKUP RAW / JPEG Description Description The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the rst slot is full. Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card. RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the rst slot and JPEG pictures to the card in the second slot. 237 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) Choose the card that is recorded to fi rst when SEQUENTIAL is selected for CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE). Options Options SLOT 1 SELECT SLOT(FSEQUENTIAL) Choose the slot used to store movies. Options Options SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 2 SELECT FOLDER Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent pictures. Option Option SELECT FOLDER CREATE FOLDER Description Description To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight an ex-

isting folder and press MENU/OK. Enter a ve-character folder name to create a new folder in which to store subsequent pictures. The new folder will be cre-

ated with the next picture you take and subsequent pictures will be stored in that folder. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 238 SAVE DATA SETTING COPYRIGHT INFO Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information are refl ected only in images taken after the changes are made. Option Option Description Description DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information. ENTER AUTHORS INFO Enter the creators name. ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder. DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO Delete the current copyright information. This change applies only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright information recorded with existing images is not a ected. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 239 D CONNECTION SETTING Adjust settings for connection to other devices. To access connection settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose CONNECTION SETTING. CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS NETWORK SETTING PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING PC CONNECTION MODE WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING EXIT N For more information on wireless connections, visit:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/wifi/

Bluetooth SETTINGS Adjust Bluetooth settings. Option Option PAIRING REGISTRATION SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION DELETE PAIRING REG. Bluetooth ON/OFF AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER Description Description To pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet, select this op-

tion, then launch FUJIFILM Camera Remote on the smart device and tap PAIRING REGISTRATION. Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the camera has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO CONNECTION to exit without connecting. Delete pairing information for selected devices. Choose the de-

vice in the device list. The selected device will also be removed from the devices listed in SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION. ON: The camera automatically establishes a Bluetooth con-

nection with paired devices when turned on. OFF: The camera does not connect via Bluetooth. ON: Mark photos for upload as they are taken. Mark JPEG photos for upload as they are taken. OFF: Photos are not marked for upload as they are taken. 240 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 CONNECTION SETTING Option Option Description Description SMARTPHONE SYNC. SETTING Choose whether to synchronize the camera to the time and/or location provided by a paired smartphone. LOCATION&TIME: Synchronize the time and location. LOCATION: Synchronize the location. TIME: Synchronize the time. OFF: Synchronization o . N Install the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app on your smartphone or tablet before pairing the device with your camera or uploading images. When ON is selected for both Bluetooth ON/OFF and AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER or images are currently selected for upload using the IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER option in the C(playback) menu, upload to paired devices will begin shortly after you exit to playback or turn the camera off . IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER can also be used to select pictures for upload when AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER is off . T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 241 NETWORK SETTING Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Option Option WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SETTING WIRELESS IP ADDRESS SETTING Description Description SIMPLE SETUP: Connect to an access point using simple settings. MANUAL SETUP: Manually adjust settings for connec-

tion to a wireless network. Choose the network from a list

(SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manu-

ally (ENTER SSID). AUTO: The IP address is assigned automatically. MANUAL: Assign an IP address manually. Manually choose the IP address (IP ADDRESS), network mask (NETMASK), and gateway address (GATEWAY ADDRESS). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 242 CONNECTION SETTING instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifi lm instax SHARE printers. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 243 PC CONNECTION MODE Adjust settings for connection to a computer. Option Option Description Description Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically enables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to the computer. The camera functions normally when not con-

nected. Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically enables tethered shooting mode. You can also use FUJIFILM X Acquire to save and load camera settings, allowing you to recon gure the camera in an instant or share settings with other cameras of the same type. The camera functions nor-

mally when not connected. The camera functions in tethered shooting mode even when not connected to a computer. At default settings, pictures are not saved to the memory card, but pictures taken while the camera is not connected will be transferred to the computer when it is connected. Choose this option for wireless remote photography. Select a network using D CONNECTION SETTING> NETWORK SETTING. Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatical-

ly enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The camera functions normally when not connected. USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the cameras image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW les to high-quality JPEG images. BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and load camera settings. Recon gure the camera in an instant or share settings with other cameras of the same type. USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 USB RAW CONV./

BACKUP RESTORE 244 CONNECTION SETTING O D POWER MANAGEMENT> AUTO POWER OFF settings also apply during tethered shooting. Select OFF to prevent the camera turning off automatically. N Tethered shooting is available with software such as Capture One Pro Fujifi lm or Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC. If you use Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC, download FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX from the Adobe Exchange web-

site. FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX is available free of charge. FUJIFILM X Acquire also supports tethered shooting using camera controls. FUJIFILM X Acquire can be downloaded free of charge from the Fujifi lm website. SMARTPHONE WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING Choose a wireless band for use with Camera Remote. Options Options 2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n) 5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac) O Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels in the 5GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2GHz (W52) band is permitted before selecting the 5GHz option. The options available vary with the country or region of sale. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 245 GENERAL SETTINGS Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Option Option NAME RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE H GEOTAGGING Description Description Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default). Choose whether to resize images for upload to smartphones. Resizing applies only to the copy uploaded to the smartphone;

the original is not a ected. ON: Larger images are resized to H for upload. This setting is recommended. OFF: Images are uploaded at their original size. Choose whether location data downloaded from a smartphone are embedded in pictures as they are taken. LOCATION INFO Display the location data last downloaded from a smartphone. r BUTTON SETTING Choose the role played by function buttons assigned the WIRELESS COMMUNICATION function. s PAIRING/TRANSFER ORDER: The buttons can be used for pairing and selecting images for transfer. r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION: The buttons can be used for wireless connections. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 246 CONNECTION SETTING INFORMATION View the cameras MAC and Bluetooth address. RESET WIRELESS SETTING Restore wireless settings to their default values. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 247 MEMO 248 Shortcuts 249 Shortcut Options Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation. Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-

tom my menu or assigned to an Fn (function) button for direct access:

Shortcut Option Shortcut Option My menu The Q menu Description Description Add frequently-used options to this custom menu, which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and se-

lecting the E (MY MENU) tab. The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button. Use the Q menu to view or change the options se-

lected for frequently-used menu items. The function buttons Use the function buttons for direct access to select-

ed features. PP 251 253 256 S h o r t c u t s 9 250 E MY MENU Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options. To display my menu, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the E (MY MENU) tab. MY MENU SELF-TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT SHUTTER TYPE IS MODE FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ISO EXIT N The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to MY MENU. MY MENU SETTING To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 Highlight D USER SETTING > MY MENU SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab and press MENU/OK. N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS. To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS. ADD ITEMS RANK ITEMS REMOVE ITEMS MY MENU SETTING 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and press MENU/OK. Options that can be added to my menu are highlighted in blue. MY MENU SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE WHITE BALANCE OK SELECT CANCEL S h o r t c u t s 9 N Items currently in my menu are indicated by check marks. 251 3 Choose a position for the item and press MENU/OK. The item will be added to my menu. SELECT ITEM LOCATION 1IMAGE SIZE 2IMAGE QUALITY MY MENU 4 Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been added. MOVE SAVE N My menu can contain up to 16 items. S h o r t c u t s 9 252 The Q (Quick Menu) Button Press Q for quick access to selected options. The Quick Menu Display At default settings, the quick menu contains the following items:

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING BASE 400 SET END I HIGHLIGHT TONE J SHADOW TONE K COLOR L SHARPNESS M SELF-TIMER N AF MODE O FLASH FUNCTION SETTING P EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS A SELECT CUSTOM SETTING B ISO C DYNAMIC RANGE D WHITE BALANCE E NOISE REDUCTION F IMAGE SIZE G IMAGE QUALITY H FILM SIMULATION The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items BP, which can be changed as described on page 255. SELECT CUSTOM SETTING The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> SELECT CUSTOM SETTING item (item A) shows the current custom settings bank:

q: No custom settings bank selected. tu: Select a bank to view the settings saved using the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING option. rs: The current custom settings bank. S h o r t c u t s 9 253 Viewing and Changing Settings 1 Press Q to display the quick menu during shooting. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight items and rotate the rear command dial to change. Changes are not saved to the cur-

rent settings bank. Settings that diff er from those in the current settings bank (tu) are shown in red. SELECT CUSTOM SETTING BASE 400 SET END 3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete. N The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls. S h o r t c u t s 9 254 The Q (Quick Menu) Button Editing the Quick Menu To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during shooting. 2 The current quick menu will be dis-

played; use the focus stick (focus le-

ver) to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected position. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY FILM SIMULATION*

B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool)*

GRAIN EFFECT*

COLOR CHROME EFFECT*

SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT*

DYNAMIC RANGE*

D RANGE PRIORITY*

WHITE BALANCE*

HIGHLIGHT TONE*

SHADOW TONE*

COLOR*

SHARPNESS*

NOISE REDUCTION*

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING*

AF MODE (MOVIE AF MODE)

* Stored in custom settings bank. N Select NONE to assign no option to the selected position. AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING MF ASSIST TOUCH SCREEN MODE SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO*

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING FLASH COMPENSATION MOVIE MODE INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS EVF/LCD COLOR NONE When SELECT CUSTOM SETTING is selected, current settings are shown in the quick menu by the label BASE. N The quick menu can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU. 255 S h o r t c u t s 9 The Fn (Function) Buttons Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature. N The functions assigned to T-Fn1 through T-Fn4 can be accessed by fl icking the monitor. Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION. The default assignments are:

Touch-Function Gestures Touch-Function Gestures S h o r t c u t s 9 Function buttons Function buttons Default Default AA T-Fn1 (fl ick up) BB T-Fn2 (fl ick left) CC T-Fn3 (fl ick right) DD T-Fn4 (fl ick down) HISTOGRAM FILM SIMULATION WHITE BALANCE ELECTRONIC LEVEL 256 Back-of-Camera Function Buttons Back-of-Camera Function Buttons The Fn (Function) Buttons Function buttons Function buttons AA Fn1 button BB AE-L button CC Fn5 button DD Fn2 button EE Center of rear command dial FF Fn4 button GG AF-ON button Default Default EXPO. COMP. AE LOCK ONLY AF MODE SHOOTING MODE FOCUS CHECK FACE DETECTION ON/OFF AF-ON S h o r t c u t s 9 257 Back-of-Camera Function Buttons (Portrait Orientation) Back-of-Camera Function Buttons (Portrait Orientation) Function buttons Function buttons AF-ON button button Vertical grip center of rear command dial AA Vertical grip ertical grip AF-ON BB VVertical grip Vertical grip AE-LAE-L button CC Vertical grip button DD Vertical grip Fn2 button ertical grip Fn1Fn1 button EE VVertical grip button FF Vertical grip Fn4 button Front-of-Camera Function Buttons Front-of-Camera Function Buttons Default Default FOCUS CHECK AF-ON AE LOCK ONLY SHOOTING MODE EXPO. COMP. FACE DETECTION ON/OFF S h o r t c u t s 9 Function buttons Function buttons AA Fn3Fn3 button button BB Vertical grip Fn3 button Vertical grip Fn3 button Default Default PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE 258 The Fn (Function) Buttons Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons To assign roles to the buttons:

1 Press and hold the DISP/BACK button until a control selection menu is dis-

played. 2 Highlight the desired control and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected control. N AE LOCK ONLY, AF LOCK ONLY, AE/AF LOCK, AF-ON, and AWB LOCK ONLY cannot be assigned to the touch function buttons (T-Fn1 through T-Fn4). Button assignments can also be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. S h o r t c u t s 9 259 Roles That Can Be Assigned to the Function Buttons WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FLASH FUNCTION SETTING TTL-LOCK MODELING FLASH ZEBRA SETTING INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MOVIE SILENT CONTROL PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW HISTOGRAM ELECTRONIC LEVEL LARGE INDICATORS MODE AE LOCK ONLY AF LOCK ONLY AE/AF LOCK AF-ON AWB LOCK ONLY LOCK SETTING PERFORMANCE AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION Bluetooth ON/OFF PLAYBACK SHOOTING MODE NONE (control disabled) Choose from:

EXPO. COMP. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE SELECT CUSTOM SETTING FOCUS AREA FOCUS CHECK AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE SELECT op FACE DETECTION ON/OFF SELF-TIMER AE BKT SETTING FOCUS BKT SETTING PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO IS MODE 35mm FORMAT MODE S h o r t c u t s 9 260 The Fn (Function) Buttons AF-ON If AF-ON is selected, you can press the control instead of keeping the shutter button pressed halfway. MODELING FLASH If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-

ed fl ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fi re the fl ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling fl ash). TTL-LOCK If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock fl ash output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>

TTL-LOCK MODE (P 149). S h o r t c u t s 9 261 The Fn (Function) Buttons n FACE SELECT op FACE SELECT ON n FACE SELECT op can be enabled or disabled by pressing the button to which n FACE SELECT op is assigned. Enabling n FACE SELECT op allows the focus stick (focus lever) or (during viewfi nder photography) touch controls

(P 31) to be used to select the face that will be used for focus. The following features can be accessed using the focus stick or during viewfi nder photography when n FACE SELECT op is enabled:

The face used to set focus can be selected using the focus stick. To switch from face detection to manual focus-area selection, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever) (P 82). Press again to re-enable face detection. The touch screen (monitor) or focus stick can be used to select the face used to set focus during viewfi nder photography. S h o r t c u t s 9 262 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 263 Lenses The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM G-mount. Lens Parts P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 A Lens hood B Mounting marks C Focus ring D Aperture ring lock release E Mounting marks (focal length) N A GF63mmF2.8 R WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes. F Aperture ring G Lens signal contacts H Front lens cap I Rear lens cap 264 Lenses Lens Care Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifi lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fl uid has been applied. Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use. Removing Lens Caps Remove lens caps as shown. N Lens caps may diff er from those shown. Attaching Lens Hoods When attached, lens hoods reduce glare and protect the front lens element. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 265 Aperture ring Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose the aperture (f-number). Lenses Aperture ring lock release Aperture ring Description Description Setting Setting C (C (

A (A (

))

)) Set aperture to the value chosen with the camera command dial. Set aperture to the value chosen automatically by the camera.

)) Set aperture to the selected value. Other values (

Other values (

N To select C or A, or to select another value after selecting C or A, press the aperture ring lock release while rotating the aperture ring. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 266 Viewfi nder Tilt Adapters The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel the view-

fi nder left or right 45 or up or down between 0 and 90. A Hot shoe B Tilt lock knob C Adapter lock release D Horizontal swivel lock E Connectors F Connector cover G Hot shoe cover P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 267 Attaching the EVF-TL1 Slide the EVF-TL1 onto the camera hot shoe and then attach the EVF-GFX2 elec-

tronic viewfi nder. N Remove the hot shoe covers from the camera and EVF-TL1 before attaching the adapter and viewfi nder. Removing the EVF-TL1 Remove the viewfi nder and then, keeping the lock releases (A) pressed, press down on the front of the adapter (B) and slide it from the camera as shown. O Use only one tilt adapter at a time. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 268 Viewfi nder Tilt Adapters Using the EVF-TL1 Swivel the viewfi nder into the desired position. Swiveling the View nder Up or Down Loosen the tilt lock knob and swivel the viewfi nder up or down from 0 to 90. With the viewfi nder in the desired posi-

tion (A), tighten the tilt lock knob (B) to lock the viewfi nder in place. Swiveling the View nder Left or Right Release the horizontal swivel lock as shown and swivel the viewfi nder left or right 45. With the viewfi nder in the desired po-

sition (A), return the horizontal swivel lock to the latched position (B) to lock the viewfi nder in place. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 269 External Flash Units Flash units can be mounted on the hot shoe or connected via the sync terminal. Use optional external fl ash units for fl ash photography. Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used at shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync speed, while others can func-

tion as master fl ash units controlling remote units via optical wireless fl ash control. O You may be unable to test-fi re the fl ash in some circumstances, for ex-

ample when a setup menu is displayed on the camera. Red-Eye Removal Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected for F FLASH SETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL and a FACE DETECTION ON option is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING. Red-eye removal minimizes red-eye caused when light from the fl ash is refl ected from the subjects retinas. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 270 External Flash Units Flash Settings To adjust settings for a fl ash unit mounted on the hot shoe or connected via the sync terminal:

1 Connect the unit to the camera. 2 In shooting mode, select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH SETTING) menu tab. The options available vary with the fl ash unit. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING MenuMenu SYNC TERMINAL SHOE MOUNT FLASH MASTER

(OPTICAL) Description Description Displayed when no compatible ash unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe. Displayed when an optional ash unit is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on. Displayed if an optional ash unit functioning as a master ash for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control is connected and turned on. EXIT PP 272 273 276 N SYNC TERMINAL will be also displayed if an incompatible fl ash unit or no fl ash unit is connected. 3 Highlight items using the focus stick

(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-

mand dial to change the highlighted setting. MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH 4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into eff ect. ADJUST END P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 271 SYNC TERMINAL The following options are available when no compatible fl ash unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe. MODE SYNC TERMINAL Setting Setting A Flash control mode B Sync ADJUST END Description Description Choose from the following options:

M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the unit uses long ashes or has a slow response time. D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled. Choose whether the ash is timed to re immediately after the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances. The Sync Terminal Use the sync terminal to connect fl ash units that require a sync cable. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 272 SHOE MOUNT FLASH The shoe-mounted fl ash unit is attached and turned on. following options are available when an optional External Flash Units MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH Setting Setting ADJUST END Description Description A Flash control mode The ash control mode selected with the ash unit. This can in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-

able vary with the ash. TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ash compensation (B). M: The ash res at the selected output regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be adjusted from the camera (B). MULTI: Repeating ash. Compatible shoe-mounted ash units will re multiple times with each shot. D (OFF): The ash does not re. Some ash units can be turned o from the camera. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 273 Setting Setting Description Description The options available vary with ash control mode. TTL: Adjust ash compensation (the full value may not be applied if the limits of the ash control system are exceed-

ed). In the cases of the EF-X500, EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the ash unit. M/MULTI: Adjust ash output (compatible units only). Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power, from (mode M) or (MULTI) down to in increments equivalent to EV. The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the ash control system; take a test shot and check the results. Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options avail-

able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash lev-

el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-

cates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possible;

ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Control ash timing. H (1ST CURTAIN): The ash res immediately after the shut-

ter opens (generally the best choice). I (2ND CURTAIN): The ash res immediately before the shutter closes. R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-

speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for ash control mode. B Flash compensation/

output C Flash mode (TTL) D Sync 274 P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 Setting Setting Description Description External Flash Units E Zoom F Lighting G LED light The angle of illumination ( ash coverage) for units that sup-

port ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-

matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage. K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-

raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT), as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-

light and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT). Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography. G Number of fl ashes * Choose the number of times the ash res each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the frequency at which the ash res in MULTI mode. H Frequency *

* Full value may not be applied if limits of ash control system are exceeded. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 275 MASTER(OPTICAL) The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning as master fl ash for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control. MODE MASTER(OPTICAL) ADJUST END The master and remote units can be placed in up to three groups (A, B, and C) and fl ash mode and fl ash level adjusted separately for each group. Four chan-

nels are available for communication be-

tween the units; separate channels can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent interference when multiple sys-

tems are operating in close proximity. C A BB P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 276 Setting Setting Description Description External Flash Units A Flash control mode

(group A) B Flash control mode

(group B) C Flash control mode

(group C) D Flash compensation/

output (group A) E Flash compensation/

output (group B) F Flash compensation/

output (group C) Choose ash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%

is available for groups A and B only. TTL: The units in the group re in TTL mode. Flash com-

pensation can be adjusted separately for each group. TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can specify the output of the selected group as a percent-

age of the other and adjust overall ash compensation for both groups. M: In mode M, the units in the group re at the selected output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units in all groups to repeating ash mode. All units will re multiple times with each shot. D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will not re. Adjust ash level for the selected group according to option selected for ash control mode. Note that the full value may not be applied if the limits of the ash control system are exceeded. TTL: Adjust ash compensation. M/MULTI: Adjust ash output. TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and adjust overall ash compensation. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 277 Setting Setting Description Description Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-

lected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A picon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possi-

ble; ash level is adjusted according to subject bright-

ness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Control ash timing. H (1ST CURTAIN): The ash res immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice). I (2ND CURTAIN): The ash res immediately before the shutter closes. R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-

speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for ash control mode. The angle of illumination ( ash coverage) for units that support ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. G Flash mode (TTL) P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 H Sync I Zoom 278 Setting Setting Description Description External Flash Units J Lighting K Master K Number of fl ashes L Channel L Frequency If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-

ducing coverage. K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. Assign the master ash to group A (Gr A), B (Gr B), or C(Gr C). If OFF is selected, output from the master ash will be held to a level that does not a ect the nal picture. Available only if the unit is mounted on the camera hot shoe as a master ash for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control in TTL, TTL%, or M mode. Choose the number of times the ash res each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the channel used by the master ash for commu-

nication with the remote ash units. Separate channels can be used for di erent ash systems or to prevent in-

terference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. Choose the frequency at which the ash res in MULTI mode. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 279 MEMO 280 Connections 281 HDMI Output Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI devices. Connecting to HDMI Devices Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a third-party HDMI cable. 1 Turn the camera off . 2 Connect the cable as shown below. Insert into HDMI connector Insert into HDMI Micro connector (Type D) 3 Confi gure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-

umentation supplied with the device. 4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off in playback mode (P 283). O Making sure the connectors are fully inserted. The USB cable cannot be used while an HDMI cable is connected. Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 282 HDMI Output Shooting Shoot photos and record movies while viewing the scene through the camera lens on or saving footage to the HDMI device. N This feature can be used to save 4K and Full HD movies to an HDMI recorder. Playback To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera mon-

itor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI device. Note that the camera volume controls have no eff ect on sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to adjust the volume. O Some televisions may briefl y display a black screen when movie play-

back begins. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 283 Wireless Connections

(Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) Access wireless networks and connect to computers, smartphones, or tablets. For more information, visit:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/wifi/

Smartphones and Tablets: FUJIFILM Camera Remote Connect to the camera via Bluetooth or wireless LAN. N To establish a wireless connection to the camera, you will need to in-

stall the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app on your smartphone or tablet. FUJIFILM Camera Remote Once a connection has been established, you can use FUJIFILM Camera Remote to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures Upload location data to the camera Release the camera shutter Update camera fi rmware For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

C o n n e c t i o n s 11 284 Wireless Connections SmartPhones and Tablets: Bluetooth Pairing Use D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> PAIRING REGISTRATION to pair the camera with smartphones or tablets. Pairing off ers a simple method for downloading photos from the camera. O Photos are downloaded via a wireless connection. Once pairing is complete, you will be able to synchronize the camera clock and location data with the smartphone or tablet (P 240). You can choose a connection from up to 7 paired smartphones or tablets. Smartphones and Tablets: Wireless LAN Use the WIRELESS COMMUNICATION options in A SHOOTING SETTING or the playback menu to connect to a smartphone or tab-

let via a Wireless LAN. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 285 Wireless Connections N CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS u NETWORK SETTING ET Tethered Shooting: Capture One Pro Fujifi lm/

Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX/FUJIFILM X Acquire Before proceeding, select WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED for D CON-

NECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. Tethered shooting can be performed us-

ing software such as Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC and FUJIFILM X Acquire. If you use Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC, download FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX from the Adobe Exchange website. FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX is available free of charge. N For more information, visit the following website:

PC CONNECTION MODE C IR WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS EN INFORMATION F ESET WIRELESS SETTING RESET WIRELESS SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/#tether For more information on FUJIFILM X Acquire and FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX, see Software for Use with Your Camera

(P 298). C o n n e c t i o n s 11 286 Connecting to Computers via USB Connect the camera to a computer to download pictures or take pictures remotely. N Before downloading pictures or taking pictures remotely, connect the camera to a computer and check that it functions normally. 1 Turn the computer on. 2 Adjust settings according to whether you will be using the camera for tethered shooting (P 290), copying pictures to a computer (P 291), save RAW pictures in other formats

(P 292), or Saving and Loading Camera Settings (P 292). 3 Turn the camera off . 4 Connect a USB cable. USB connector (Type-C) O The USB cable must be no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long and be suitable for data transfer. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 287 5 Turn the camera on. 6 Copy pictures to your computer. Tethered shooting: During tethered shooting, you can copy pictures using tethered shooting software such as the Capture One Pro Fujifi lm/Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX/

FUJIFILM X Acquire. Image transfer: Use MyFinePix Studio or applications provid-

ed with your operating system. RAW conversion: Process RAW images using FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO. The power of the cameras image processing en-

gine is used for rapid processing. Saving and loading camera settings: Use FUJIFILM X Acquire to save or load camera settings. Save your preferred settings to a fi le in a single operation and copy them to multiple cameras. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 288 Connecting to Computers via USB O Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable. When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-

serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-

necting the camera. If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted, there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-

able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer pictures. Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning the camera off . Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-

alone computer. Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-

connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has ceased to be displayed. The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet connection. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 289 N CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS u NETWORK SETTING ET USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE PC CONNECTION MODE C WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING IR GENERAL SETTINGS EN INFORMATION F ESET WIRELESS SETTING RESET WIRELESS SETTING Tethered Shooting: Capture One Pro Fujifi lm/

Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX/FUJIFILM X Acquire Before proceeding, select USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO for D CONNECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. Capture One Pro Fujifi lm, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC +

FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX, and FUJIFILM X Acquire can be used for tethered shooting. N Choose USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED if the camera will be used solely for tethered shooting. Note that if the USB cable is disconnect-

ed, the camera will continue to function in tethered mode and pic-

tures will not be saved to the camera memory card. For more information, visit the following website:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/#tether For more information on Capture One Pro Fujifi lm, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX, and FUJIFILM X Acquire, see Software for Use with Your Camera (P 298). C o n n e c t i o n s 11 290 Connecting to Computers via USB Copying Pictures to a Computer Before copying pictures to a computer, select USB CARD READER for D CON-

NECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE. The software that can be used to copy pictures varies with your computer op-

erating system. Mac OS X/macOS N CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS u NETWORK SETTING ET USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE PC CONNECTION MODE C WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING IR GENERAL SETTINGS EN INFORMATION F ESET WIRELESS SETTING RESET WIRELESS SETTING Pictures can be copied to your computer using Image Capture

(supplied with your computer) or other software. O Use a card reader to copy fi les over 4GB in size. Windows Use MyFinePix Studio to copy pictures to your computer, where they can be stored, viewed, organized, and printed. N For more information on MyFinePix Studio, see Software for Use with Your Camera (P 298). C o n n e c t i o n s 11 291 Connecting to Computers via USB Converting RAW Images:

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO Before proceeding, select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for D CON-

NECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO can be used to convert RAW images to JPEG or TIFF images. N For more information on FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO, see Software for PC CONNECTION MODE C WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING IR GENERAL SETTINGS EN INFORMATION F ESET WIRELESS SETTING RESET WIRELESS SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE N CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS u NETWORK SETTING ET Use with Your Camera (P 298). Backing up and Restoring Camera Settings

(FUJIFILM X Acquire) Before proceeding, select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for D CON-

NECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. FUJIFILM X Acquire can be used to backup and restore camera settings. N For more information on FUJIFILM X Acquire, see Software for C PC CONNECTION MODE IR WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS EN F INFORMATION ESET WIRELESS SETTING RESET WIRELESS SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE CONNECTION SETTING N u Bluetooth SETTINGS ET NETWORK SETTING Use with Your Camera (P 298). C o n n e c t i o n s 11 292 instax SHARE Printers Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE printers. Establishing a Connection Select D CONNECTION SETTING> instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and pass-

word. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 293 Printing Pictures 1 Turn the printer on. 2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. instax SHARE Printers PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 4 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 294 Technical Notes 295 Accessories from Fujifi lm The following optional accessories are available from Fujifi lm. For the latest information on the accessories available in your region, check with your local Fujifi lm representative or visit http://www.fujifilm.com/products/digital_cameras/index.html. Rechargeable Li-ion batteries Rechargeable Li-ion batteries NP-T125: Additional high-capacity NP-T125 rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required. Battery chargers Battery chargers BC-T125: Replacement battery chargers can be purchased as required. AC power adapters AC power adapters AC-15V: Use this 100240V, 50/60Hz AC power adapter for extended shooting and playback, when copying pictures to a computer. It can also be used to charge the battery without removing it from the camera. FUJINON lenses FUJINON lenses GF-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM G-mount. Tilt adapters Tilt adapters EVF-TL1: This adapter lets you swivel the view nder left or right 45 or up or down between 0 and 90 to take shots from di erent angles. Eye cups Eye cups EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach view nder eyecups to prevent light leaking into the view nder window. Mount adapters Mount adapters H MOUNT ADAPTER G: This mount adapter allows the camera to be used with SUPEREBC FUJINON accessories for the GX645AF, giving you the use of one addi-

tional teleconverter and nine di erent lenses. Macro extension tubes Macro extension tubes MCEX-18G WR/MCEX-45G WR: Mount this adapter between the lens and the camera body for macro photography with large reproduction ratios. View camera adapters View camera adapters VIEW CAMERA ADAPTER G: This adapter is for use with lenses for older FUJINON large-format cameras, including lenses in the CM FUJINON series. 296 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Accessories from Fujifi lm Shoe-mounted fl ash units Shoe-mounted fl ash units EF-X500: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ash sync speed. Powered by four AA batteries or an optional EF-BP1 battery pack, it supports manual and TTL ash control and auto power zoom in the range 24105mm (35mm format equivalent) and features Fuji lm optical wireless ash control, allowing it to be used as a master or remote ash unit for remote wireless ash photography. The ash head can be rotated 90 up, 10 down, 135 left, or 180 right for bounce lighting. EF-42: This clip-on ash unit (powered by four AA batteries) has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports manual and TTL ash control and auto power zoom in the range 24105 mm (35 mm format equivalent). The ash head can be rotated 90 up, 180 left, or 120 right for bounce lighting. EF-X20: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.). Pow-

ered by two AAA batteries, this light, compact unit features a dial for adjusting TTL ash compensation or manual ash output. EF-20: This clip-on ash unit (powered by two AA batteries) has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports TTL ash control (manual ash control is not supported). The ash head can be rotated upwards 90 for bounce lighting. Remote releases Remote releases RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time ex-

posure. Stereo microphones Stereo microphones MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording. Grip belts Grip belts GB-001: Improves grip. Body caps Body caps BCP-002: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached. instax SHARE printers instax SHARE printers SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax lm. 297 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Software for Use with Your Camera The camera can be used with the following software. FUJIFILM Camera Remote Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a smartphone or tablet (P 284). http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

MyFinePix Studio Manage, view, print, and edit the many images downloaded from your digital camera (P 291). http://fujifilm-dsc.com/mfs/

Once download is complete, double-click the downloaded fi le

(MFPS_Setup.EXE) and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation. Capture One Express Fujifi lm Capture One Express Fujifi lm is image edit software from Phase One A/S. View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. Capture One Express Fujifi lm is available free of charge from Phase One. https://www.phaseone.com/fujifilm/

RAW FILE CONVERTER EX RAW FILE CONVERTER EX is RAW conversion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. RAW FILE CONVERTER EX is available free of charge from the Fujifi lm web-

site. http://fujifilm-dsc.com/rfc/

298 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Software for Use with Your Camera Capture One PRO Fujifi lm Capture One PRO Fujifi lm is workfl ow software from Phase One A/S. Capture One PRO Fujifi lm supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other formats. https://www.phaseone.com/fujifilm/

Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX Installing this dedicated plug-in allows tethered shooting us-

ing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic CC. FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in Pro for GFX is available free of charge from the Adobe Exchange website. FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO for GFX http://fujifilm-x.com/x-stories/fujifilm-tether-plug-in-pro-features/

FUJIFILM X Acquire This application for Windows and macOS lets you connect to the camera via USB or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specifi ed folder as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB. http://fujifilm-x.com/x-stories/fujifilm-x-acquire-features-users-guide/

O Auto download (tethered shooting) is not supported with some cam-

eras. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO can use the cameras unique image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW fi les to create high-quality images in other formats. http://fujifilm-x.com/x-stories/fujifilm-x-raw-studio-features-users-guide/

299 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-

tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Antennas Antennas Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-

tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-

ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Ground Clamp Electric Service Equipment t e Equipment Ground Clamps Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC ART 250. PART H) AAntenna Lead in Wire AAAntenna An Discharge Unit D

(NEC SECTION N 810-20) 8 Grounding Conductors (NEC SECTION 810-21) Read Instructions Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. Retain Instructions Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions Follow Instructions: All operating and use should be followed. instructions Installation Installation Power Sources: This video product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-

bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-

pany. For video products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will t into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to t, contact your electri-

cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third

(grounding) pin. This plug will only t into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-

place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of re or electric shock. Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-

uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been ad-

hered to. This video product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-

terfor example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 300 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-

ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. UseUse Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-

fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into this video product through openings as they may touch dan-

gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the video product. Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-

ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and power-line surges. Service Service Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali ed service personnel. Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to quali ed service person-

nel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the video product. If the video product has been exposed to rain or water. If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. If the video product does not operate normally follow the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-

ment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali ed technician to restore the video product to its normal operation. When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-

i ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to this video product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-

er operating condition. Be sure to read these notes before use Safety Notes Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these safety notes and your Owners Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious in-

WARNING jury can result if the information is ignored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION Unplug from power socket The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-

resent the following:

AC DC Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.) WARNING WARNING If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC unplug the AC power adapter. power adapter. Continued use of the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

era or connecting cables. era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids. Should liquid nd its way into the camera or con-

necting cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 301 WARNING WARNING Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This can cause a re or electric shock. Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord. tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and cause a re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not use cables with bent connectors. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause injury. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not use the camera while walking or driving. This can result in you falling down or being involved in a tra c accident. Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a thunderstorm. thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due to induced current from the lightning discharge. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Load the battery as shown by the indicator. Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Fail-

ure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking, causing re, burns, or other injury. Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the power supply voltage shown. power supply voltage shown. The use of other power sources can cause a re. If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean water and seek medical attention or call an emergency water and seek medical attention or call an emergency number right away. number right away. Do not use in the bathroom or shower Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 302 WARNING WARNING Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than those specifi ed here. those specifi ed here. The supplied charger is for use only with batteries of the type supplied with the camera. Using the charger to charge conventional batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst. Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual impairment. impairment. Take particular care when photograph-

ing infants and young children. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly at high ambient temperatures or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the product for prolonged periods while the product is on. product for prolonged periods while the product is on. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-

longed use, at high ambient temperatures, or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

sive gases, or dust. sive gases, or dust. When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the battery terminals with insulation tape. battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with other metallic objects or batteries could cause the battery to ignite or burst. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out of the reach of small children. of the reach of small children. Children may swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical attention or call emergency. Keep out of reach of small children. Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-

ments that could cause injury are the strap, which could become entangled about a childs neck, caus-

ing strangulation, and the ash, which could cause visual impairment. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. This product generates radio-frequency emissions that could interfere with navigational or medical equipment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, steam, humidity or dust. steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a re or elec-

tric shock. Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely high temperatures. high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-

tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight. This can cause a re. CAUTION CAUTION Do not place heavy objects on the camera. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause injury. Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still connected. connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to dis-

connect the AC power adapter. This can damage the power cord or cables and cause a re or electric shock. Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build up and distort the casing or cause a re. Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t securely into the outlet. securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precau-

tion could result in re or electric shock. When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Failure to do so can cause a re or electric shock. For Your Safety CAUTION CAUTION When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power socket. socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the power socket can cause a re. When a memory card is removed, the card could come When a memory card is removed, the card could come out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. gently release the card. Injury could result to those struck by the ejected card. Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your camera. camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer to request internal cleaning every two years. Please note that this service is not free of charge. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. The Battery and Power Supply Battery Life Battery Life At normal temperatures, the battery can be recharged about 300 times. A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced. Storage Storage Performance may be impaired if the battery is left unused for extended periods when fully charged. Run the battery at before storing it. If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-

move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient temperature of from +15 C to +25 C (+59 F to +77 F). Do not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature. Cautions: Handling the Battery Cautions: Handling the Battery Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-

laces or hairpins. Do not expose to ame or heat. Do not disassemble or modify. Use with designated chargers only. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks. Do not expose to water. Keep the terminals clean. The battery and camera body may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal. Caution: Disposal Disposal Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate. Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read the appropriate sections. WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. The following describes the proper use of batteries and how to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or cause leakage, overheating, re, or explosion. Li-ion Batteries Li-ion Batteries Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. Notes on the Battery Notes on the Battery The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. Battery life can be extended by turning the camera o when not in use. Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating devices. Charging the Battery Charging the Battery Charge the battery in the supplied battery charger. Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below +10 C

(+50 F) or above +35 C (+95 F). Do not attempt to charge the battery at temperatures above +40 C (+104 F); at tem-

peratures below +5 C (+41 F), the battery will not charge. Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery does not however need to be fully discharged before charging. The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after charging or use. This is normal. 303 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 AC Power Adapters AC Power Adapters Use only Fuji lm AC power adapters designated for use with this camera. Other adapters could damage the camera. The AC power adapter is for indoor use only. Be sure the DC plug is securely connected to the camera. Turn the camera o before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-

connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable. Do not use with other devices. Do not disassemble. Do not expose to high heat and humidity. Do not subject to strong physical shocks. The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during use. This is normal. If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Using the Camera Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, including arti cial light sources or natural light sources such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera image sensor. Strong sunlight focused through the view nder may dam-

age the panel of electronic view nder (EVF). Do not aim the electronic view nder at the sun. Take Test Shots Take Test Shots Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept liability for damages or lost pro ts incurred as a result of product malfunction. Notes on Copyright Notes on Copyright Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-

er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. Handling Handling To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are being recorded. Liquid Crystal Liquid Crystal In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-

en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action indicated should any of the following situations arise:

If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and running water. If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ush the a ected eye with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-

iting, then seek medical assistance. Although the display is manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and images recorded with the product are una ected. Trademark Information Trademark Information Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiwan Inc. Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a regis-

tered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Fuji lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. The HDMI logo is a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Electrical Interference Electrical Interference This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-

ment. Consult with hospital or airline sta before using the camera in a hospital or on an aircraft. Color Television Systems Color Television Systems NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-

vision telecasting speci cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A., Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color television system adopted mainly in European countries and China. Exif Print (Exif Version 2.3) Exif Print (Exif Version 2.3) Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera le format in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-

or reproduction during printing. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-

ware without the permission of the applicable governing bodies is prohibited. 304 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety NOTICES To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Please read the Safety Notes and make sure you understand them before using the camera. Perchlorate Materialspecial handling may apply. See:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate For Customers in the U. S. A. For Customers in the U. S. A. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25 Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25 FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-

vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-

lowing measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and re-

ceiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di erent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modi cations not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-

ernments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci c Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certi ed power level in all tested frequency bands. Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this product must be used with a Fuji lm-speci ed fer-

rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord. A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 305 For Customers in Canada For Customers in Canada CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-

dian ICES-003. Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-

try Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-

terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-

erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scienti c evi-

dence does not show that any health problems are asso-

ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health e ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating e ects causes no known adverse health e ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological e ects. Some studies have suggested that some biological e ects might occur, but such ndings have not been con rmed by additional research. GFX100 has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-

nel mobile satellite systems. Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-

vironment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. This symbol on the batteries or accumulators indicates that those batteries shall not be treated as household waste. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-

mulators please dispose these separately according to your local requirements. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-

sources. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city o ce, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-

thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal. In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates that they are to be disposed of separately. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 306 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions For Your Safety This product complies with the following EU Directives:

RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU RE Directive 2014/53/EU Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF180005 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.fujifilm.com/

products/digital_cameras/gfx/fujifilm_gfx_100/pdf/index/

fujifilm_gfx_100_cod.pdf This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmo-

nized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth). IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the cam-

eras built-in wireless transmitter. Q This product, which contains encryption function de-

veloped in the United States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.. Fuji lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unautho-

rized use. Do not use in applications requiring a high de-

gree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater degree of reliability than o ered by wire-

less network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all neces-

sary precautions to ensure safety and prevent malfunction. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was pur-

chased. Observe all location regulations when using the device. Fuji lm does not accept liability for problems aris-

ing from use in other jurisdictions. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the trans-

mitter in the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other loca-

tions subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference that may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires great-

er attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks.

- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed on your device, as such access may be consid-

ered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access rights. to interception by third parties.

- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable The following may be punishable by law:

The following may be punishable by law:

- Disassembly or modi cation or this device

- Removal of device certi cation labels This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, edu-

This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, edu-

cational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. cational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking systems for assembly lines and in other sim-

ilar applications. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the fol-

To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the fol-

lowing precautions. lowing precautions. Con rm that the RFID transmitter is not in operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the a ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fuji lm representative. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Note that Bluetooth may remain on even when the camera is o . Bluetooth can be disabled by selecting OFF for D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> Bluetooth ON/

OFF. Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/

ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/

SE/CH/UK/HR. 5150 MHz5350 MHz is for indoor use only. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 307 Be sure to read these notes before using the lens For Your Safety WARNING WARNING Do not immerse in or expose to water. Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution can cause a re or electric shock. Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re, electric shock, or injury due to product malfunction. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not place on unstable surfaces. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may fall, causing injury. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

fi nders. fi nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause permanent visual impairment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re. Keep out of the reach of small children. Keep out of the reach of small children. This product could cause injury in the hands of a child. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution can cause electric shock. Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit sub-

Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit sub-

jects. jects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame can cause re or burns. When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and store out of direct sunlight. store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the lens can cause re or burns. Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached to a tripod. to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-

jects, causing injury. Do not immerse Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Safety Notes Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety notes and the camera Owners Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious in-

WARNING jury can result if the information is ignored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 308 Product Care To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals, which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body. Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor, taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-

tly with a piece of Fujifi lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fl uid has been applied. To prevent dust entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in place. Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-

age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING> SENSOR CLEANING. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 309 Cleaning the Image Sensor Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >

SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as de-

scribed below. O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if it is damaged during cleaning. 1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove dust from the sensor. O Do not use a brush or blower brush. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the sensor. 2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Re-

peat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary. 3 Replace the body cap or lens. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 310 Firmware Updates Updates to product fi rmware may result in changes not described in the manual. For more information, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software Checking the Firmware Version O The camera will only display the fi rmware version if a memory card is inserted. 1 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted. 2 Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The current fi rmware version will be displayed; check the fi rm-

ware version. 3 Turn the camera off . N To view the fi rmware version or update fi rmware for optional acces-

sories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted fl ash units, and mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 311 Troubleshooting Consult the table below should you encounter problems using your camera. If you dont fi nd the solution here, con-

tact your local Fujifi lm distributor. Power and Battery Problem Problem The camera does not turn on. The monitor does not turn on. The battery runs down quickly. Solution Solution The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 41). The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-

entation (P 45). The battery tray is not latched: Latch the battery tray (P 45). The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned o and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button pressed halfway until the monitor activates. The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-

et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-

mediately before taking a picture. There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals with a soft, dry cloth. ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF: Turn PRE-AF o (P 125). The batteries have been charged many times: Select BATTERY AGE to view the battery age; if the batteries are old, re-

place them with new batteries (P 201). The camera turns off suddenly. The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 41). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 312 Troubleshooting Problem Problem Charging does not start. Solution Solution Insert the battery (P 45). Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation (P 45). Make sure that the charger is correctly plugged in

(P 41). Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the charger (P 41). Charging is slow. The two lamps designat-

ed as indicator lamp 2 blink, but the battery does not charge. Charge the battery at room temperature. There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals with a soft, dry cloth (P 45). The batteries have been charged many times: Select BATTERY AGE to view the battery age; if the batteries are old, re-

place them with new batteries (P 201). If the battery still fails to charge, contact your Fuji lm dealer (P 296). Menus and Displays Problem Problem Solution Solution Display is not in English. Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING> Qa

(P 54, 200). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 313 Shooting Problem Problem No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed. Solution Solution The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete pictures (P 47, 180). The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card in the camera (P 198). There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card

(P 47). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 41). The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on

(P 50). You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 228). Mottling (noise) appears in the monitor or viewfi nder when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The camera does not focus. Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the displays. Images taken with the camera are una ected. The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manual focus (P 94). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 314 Problem Problem No face is detected. The fl ash does not fi re. The fl ash does not fully light the subject. Troubleshooting Solution Solution The subjects face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 126). The subjects face occupies only a small area of the frame:

Change the composition so that the subjects face occu-

pies a larger area of the frame (P 126). The subjects face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-

ject to face the camera (P 126). The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level. The subjects face is poorly lit: Shoot in bright light. The fl ash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 148). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 41). The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single frame mode (P 6, 7). The subject is not in range of the fl ash: Position the subject in range of the ash. The fl ash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly. Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower shutter speed (P 70, 75, 327). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 315 Problem Problem Pictures are blurred. Pictures are mottled. Solution Solution The lens is dirty: Clean the lens. The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens

(P 57). s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-

played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 58). Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is high: This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel mapping (P 117). The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:

Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool down (P 50, 323). A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool down (P 50, 323). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 316 Troubleshooting Playback Problem Problem Pictures are grainy. Playback zoom is unavailable. No sound in movie playback. Selected pictures are not deleted. Pictures remain after ERASE> ALL FRAMES is selected. File numbering is unexpectedly reset. Solution Solution The pictures were taken with a di erent make or model of camera. The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a di erent make or model of camera. Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume

(P 204). The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during recording. The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during playback. Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected. Remove protection using the device with which it was originally applied (P 184). The battery tray or a memory card was removed while the camera was on. Turn the camera o before removing the battery tray or memory cards (P 236). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 317 Connections Problem Problem The monitor is blank. Both the TV and camera monitor are blank. No picture or sound on TV. The computer does not recognize the camera. Cannot transfer RAW or JPEG fi les to computer. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO or FUJIFILM X Acquire fails to correctly detect the camera. Solution Solution The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 282). The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the view nder. Use the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode

(P 20). The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera properly (P 282). Input on the television is set to TV: Set input to HDMI

(P 282). The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-

vision to adjust the volume (P 282). Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected

(P 287). Use MyFinePix Studio to transfer pictures (Windows only;

P 287). Check the option selected for PC CONNECTION MODE on the camera. Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE before connecting the USB cable (P 292). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 318 Troubleshooting Wireless Transfer For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connec-

tions, visit:

http://digital-cameras.support.fujifilm.com/app?pid=x Problem Problem Cannot connect to smartphone. The camera is slow to connect or upload pictures to the smartphone. Upload fails or is interrupted. Cannot upload images. Smartphone will not display pictures. Solution Solution The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer

(P 284). Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-

era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cord-

less phones (P 284). The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-

phone and camera can connect to only one device at a time. End the connection and try again (P 284). There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make connection di cult (P 284). The image was created on another device: The camera may not be able to upload images created on other devices. The image is a movie: Although you can select movies for upload when viewing the contents of camera memory on your smartphone, upload will take some time. For infor-

mation on viewing the pictures on the camera, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

Select ON for GENERAL SETTINGS> RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE H. Selecting OFF increases up-

load times for larger images; in addition, some phones may not display images over a certain size (P 246). 319 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Troubleshooting Miscellaneous Problem Problem The camera is unresponsive. Solution Solution Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the battery (P 45). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 41). The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the con-

nection. The camera does not func-

tion as expected. Motion in the viewfi nder or monitor appears jerky rather than smooth. No sound. The EVF does not turn on. Remove and reinsert the battery (P 45). If the prob-

lem persists, contact your Fuji lm dealer. When NORMAL is selected for PERFORMANCE, the frame rate will drop if no operations are performed for a set period. The normal frame rate will be restored after you operate camera controls (P 234). Adjust the volume (P 203). The EVF is not correctly attached: Slide the EVF on until it clicks into place (P 13). Pressing the Qbutton does not display the quick menu. TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 149). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 320 Warning Messages and Displays The following warnings appear in the display. Warning Warning i (red) j (blinks red) s (displayed in red with red focus frame) Aperture or shutter speed displayed in red FOCUS ERROR LENS CONTROL ERROR TURN OFF THE CAMERA AND TURN ON AGAIN NO CARD CARD NOT INITIALIZED LENS ERROR Description Description Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery. Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery. The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-

other subject at the same distance, then recompose the picture. The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be over- or under-exposed. Use the ash for additional light-

ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject. Camera malfunction. Turn the camera o and then on again. If the message persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. The shutter can only be released when a memory card is inserted. Insert a memory card. The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory card using D USER SETTING> FORMAT. The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-

tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. Turn the camera o , remove the lens, and clean the mount-

ing surfaces, then replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 321 Warning Warning CARD ERROR PROTECTED CARD BUSY b MEMORY FULL WRITE ERROR FRAME NO. FULL Description Description The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-

mat the card. The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-

sists, replace the card. Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera to format the card. The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded. Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or turn the camera o and then on again. If the message persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:

Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card. The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> FRAME NO.. Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO.. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 322 Warning Warning READ ERROR PROTECTED FRAME CAN NOT CROP DPOF FILE ERROR Warning Messages and Displays Description Description The fi le is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The le cannot be viewed. The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-

tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected pic-

ture. Remove protection and try again. The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera. Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-

ry card and create a second print order. The picture cannot be printed using DPOF. CAN NOT SET DPOF F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF. The selected picture cannot be rotated. CAN NOT ROTATE F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated. F CANNOT EXECUTE m CANNOT EXECUTE MISMATCH: 4K MODE AND EXTERNAL MONITOR CHANGE MOVIE MODE p (yellow) p (red) Red-eye removal cannot be applied to movies. Red-eye removal cannot be applied to pictures created with other devices. The movie mode selected with the camera is not compat-

ible with the device to which the camera is connected via HDMI. Try selecting a di erent movie mode (P 151). Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when this warning is displayed. Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool. While this warn-

ing is displayed, movie recording may not be available, mottling may increase, and performance, including frame advance rate and display quality, may drop. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 323 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the recording time or number of pictures available at diff erent image sizes. All fi gures are approximate; fi le size varies with the scene recorded, pro-

ducing wide variations in the number of fi les that can be stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may not diminish at an even rate. Capacity Capacity TT Photos Photos OO 4 433 RAW RAW

(UNCOMPRESSED)

(UNCOMPRESSED) RAW RAW

(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)

(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) Movies1, 21, 2 100Mbps 100Mbps Movies 8GB8GB FINEFINE NORMAL NORMAL 190 300 16GB 16GB FINEFINE NORMAL NORMAL 390 630 SUPER SUPER FINEFINE 260 SUPER SUPER FINEFINE 120 30 70 70 140 9 minutes 20 minutes 1 Use a UHS speed class 3 card or better. 2 Assumes default bit rate. O If the memory card has a capacity of over 32GB, movies will be recorded in single fi les, regardless of size. If the card has a capacity of 32GB or less, movies over 4GB in size will be recorded uninterrupted across multiple fi les. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 324 Specifi cations System Model Product Number Eff ective pixels Image sensor Storage media Memory card slots File system File format Image size Lens mount FUJIFILM GFX100 FF180005 Approx. 102 million 43.8 mm 32.9 mm Bayer array with primary color lter Fuji lm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards Two SD memory card slots (UHS-II compliant) Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF2.0), Exif 2.3, and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Still pictures: Exif 2.3 JPEG (compressed); RAW (original RAF format, uncompressed or compressed using a lossless algo-

rithm; special purpose software required); RAW+JPEG avail-

able; TIFF (RGB) Movies: H.265/H.264 standard with stereo sound (MOV) Audio (voice memos): Stereo sound (WAV) O 43 (11648 8736) O 32 (11648 7768) O 169 (11648 6552) O 11 (8736 8736) P 43 (8256 6192) P 32 (8256 5504) P 169 (8256 4640) P 11 (6192 6192) Q 43 (4000 3000) Q 32 (4000 2664) Q 169 (4000 2248) Q 11 (2992 2992) RAW (11808 8754) FUJIFILM G mount O 6524 (11648 4304) O 54 (10928 8736) O 76 (10192 8736) P 6524 (8256 3048) P 54 (7744 6192) P 76 (7232 6192) Q 6524 (4000 1480) Q 54 (3744 3000) Q 76 (3504 3000) TIFF (11648 8736) 325 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 System Sensitivity Metering Exposure control Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO100 12800 in increments of EV; AUTO; extended out-

put sensitivity equivalent to ISO 50, 25600, 51200, or 102400 Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO160 12800 in increments of EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-

alent to ISO 25600 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;

MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;

aperture-priority AE; manual exposure Shutter speed Exposure compensation Still pictures: 5EV +5EV in increments of EV Movies: 2EV +2EV in increments of EV MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 60min. to s Bulb: Max. 60min. ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT+ ELECTRONIC Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 60min. to s Bulb: Max. 60min. Continuous T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Focus 326 Available frame advance rates (JPEG) Available frame advance rates (JPEG) CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS MODEMODE CH HIGH SPEED BURST CL LOW SPEED BURST MECHANICAL MECHANICAL SHUTTER SHUTTER 5.0 ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SHUTTER 2.9 2.0 O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-

ies with shooting conditions and type of memory card used. Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/

phase-detection AF) with AF-assist illuminator Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL System White balance Self-timer Flash mode Hot shoe Sync contact Sync terminal Viewfi nder LCD monitor Rear secondary monitor Movies

(with stereo sound) Specifi cations Auto, Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight uorescent, warm white uorescent, cool white uorescent, incandescent, underwater O , 2 sec., 10 sec. MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.), MANUAL, MULTI, OFF SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (high-

speed sync) RED EYE REMOVAL: e FLASH+REMOVAL, L FLASH, d REMOVAL, OFF Accessory shoe with TTL contacts; supports sync speeds as fast as s X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as s Provided EVF-GFX2 interchangeable electronic view nder (supplied) Rear monitor: 3.2-in/8.1 cm, 2360k-dot color LCD touch screen with 3-way tilt Shoulder monitor: 1.80-in/4.57 cm, 303 230-dot memory LCD monitor 2.05-in/5.21 cm, 256 64-dot OLED monitor Movie size: V 169, d 179, W 169, W 179 Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P Bit rate: 400Mbps, 200Mbps, 100Mbps, 50Mbps Recording/output format H.265: SD card, 420, 10-bit/HDMI output, 422, 10-bit H.264: SD card, 420, 8-bit/HDMI output, 422, 10-bit Input/output terminals Microphone connector 3.5 mm mini-stereo jack Headphone jack socket 3.5 mm mini-stereo jack Remote release connector 2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.2Gen1x1 HDMI output DC IN HDMI Micro connector (type D) Provided T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 327 Power supply/other Power supply Battery life Camera size

(W H D) Camera weight Shooting weight NP-T125 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera) AC-15V AC adapter (available separately) Battery type: NP-T125 Lens: GF63mmF2.8 R WR Flash: Disabled Shooting mode: Mode P AUTO POWER SAVE AUTO POWER SAVE ON OFF Number of shots Number of shots LCDLCD Approx. ###

Approx. ###

EVFEVF Approx. ###

Approx. ###

Total length of footage that can be recorded on Total length of footage that can be recorded on a single charge a single charge Actual Battery life of Actual Battery life of movie capture movie capture Approx. ##minutes ModeMode i Continuance Continuance Battery life of movie Battery life of movie capture capture Approx. ###minutes CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera and SD memory card. Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and the gures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-

ance will decline at low temperatures. 156.2 mm 144.0 mm 75.1 mm (48.9 mm excluding projections, measured at thinnest part)/6.15 in. 5.67 in. 2.96 in. (1.93 in.) Approx. 1152.0 g/40.6 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and memory card Approx. 1316.1 g/46.4 oz., including battery and memory card Operating conditions Temperature: 10 C to +40 C/+14 F to +104 F (+5 C to

+40 C/+41 F to +104 F when battery is charging) Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation) T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 328 Specifi cations IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol) Israel, Indonesia

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels) USA, Canada, China, India, Korea, Malaysia

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels)

: 5,180 MHz5,320 MHz (W52, W53)

: 5,745 MHz5,825 MHz (UNII-3) European Union, Japan, Australia, Norway, New zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore, Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain, Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels)

: 5,180 MHz5,320 MHz (W52, W53)

: 5,500 MHz5,700 MHz (W56) 18 dBm Infrastructure Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) 2,402 MHz2,480 MHz 7 dBm Wireless transmitter Wireless LAN Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) Maximum radio-

frequency power

(EIRP) Access protocols Bluetooth Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) Maximum radio-

frequency power

(EIRP) T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 329 EVF-GFX2 interchangeable electronic viewfi nder Type Size Pixel count Magnifi cation OLED 0.5-in/1.3 cm Approximately 5.76 million dots 0.86 with 50 mm lens (35 mm format) at in nity and diop-

ter set to 1.0 m1 Approximately 41 (horizontal angle of view approximately 33) Diagonal angle of view Diopter adjustment 4 to +2 m1 Eye point Dimensions

(W H D) Weight Approx. 94.4 g/3.33 oz. Approximately 23 mm 53.6 mm 36.4 mm 80.1 mm/2.11 in. 1.43 in. 3.15 in. 10.8 V 1250 mAh 10 C to +40 C/+14 F to +104 F NP-T125 rechargeable battery Nominal voltage Nominal capacity Operating temperature Dimensions

(W H D) Weight Approx. 81 g/2.9 oz. 36.0 mm 54.4 mm 26.0 mm/1.4 in. 2.1 in. 1.0 in. 100 V 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 23 31 VA 12.6 V DC, 800 mA BC-T125 battery charger Rated input Input capacity Rated output Supported batteries NP-T125 rechargeable batteries Charging time Operating temperature Dimensions

(W H D) Weight Approx. 140 minutes (+25 C/+77 F)

+5 C to +40 C/+41 F to +104 F 71.4 mm 97.0 mm 34.2 mm/2.8 in. 3.8 in. 1.4 in., excluding projections Approx. 120 g/4.2 oz. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 330 Specifi cations N Weight and dimensions vary with the country or region of sale. O Specifi cations and performance are subject to change without notice. Fujifi lm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain. The appearance of the product may diff er from that described in this manual. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 331 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN http://www.fujifilm.com/products/digital_cameras/index.html

 

 

FF210002 Basic Manual Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual handy for future reference once you have fi nished. The latest versions of the product manuals are available at the website be-

low. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The website above, which provides detailed instruc-

tions and material not covered in this guide, can be accessed from a computer, smartphone, or tablet. It also contains information on the software license. BL00005163-200 EN MEMO ii P Chapter Index 1 Before You Begin 2 First Steps 3 Taking and Viewing Photos 4 Movie Recording and Playback 5 Connections 6 Menu List 7 Notices 1 37 55 91 99 119 143 iii P Table of Contents Chapter Index ................................................................................................iii Supplied Accessories ............................................................................... viii About This Manual .......................................................................................ix Symbols and Conventions ..................................................................................ix Terminology .................................................................................................................ix 1 Before You Begin Before You Begin 1 1 Parts of the Camera ......................................................................................2 The Serial Number Plate ........................................................................................6 The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable) ..............................................6 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) .............................................................................7 The Selector ..................................................................................................................7 The WB Button .............................................................................................................7 The Mode Dial .............................................................................................................8 The DRIVE Button .......................................................................................................9 The Command Dials ............................................................................................. 10 The Indicator Lamp ............................................................................................... 11 The LCD Monitor ..................................................................................................... 12 The Eye Cup ............................................................................................................... 13 Focusing the Viewfi nder..................................................................................... 13 Camera Displays.......................................................................................... 14 The Electronic Viewfi nder .................................................................................. 14 The LCD Monitor ..................................................................................................... 16 Choosing a Display Mode ................................................................................. 18 Adjusting Display Brightness ........................................................................... 20 Display Rotation ...................................................................................................... 20 The DISP/BACK Button ........................................................................................ 21 The Dual Display...................................................................................................... 22 Customizing the Standard Display .............................................................. 23 Virtual Horizon .......................................................................................................... 25 The Secondary LCD Monitor ........................................................................... 26 iv Table of Contents Using the Menus ......................................................................................... 28 The Menus .................................................................................................................. 28 Selecting a Menu Tab ........................................................................................... 30 Touch Screen Mode ................................................................................... 31 Shooting Touch Controls ................................................................................... 31 Playback Touch Controls .................................................................................... 36 2 First Steps First Steps 37 37 Attaching the Strap ................................................................................... 38 Attaching a Lens ......................................................................................... 39 Inserting the Battery ................................................................................. 40 Inserting Memory Cards .......................................................................... 42 Using Two Cards ...................................................................................................... 44 Charging the Battery ................................................................................. 45 Turning the Camera On and Off ............................................................ 49 Basic Setup.................................................................................................... 50 Choosing a Diff erent Language .................................................................... 53 Changing the Time and Date .......................................................................... 53 3 Taking and Viewing Photos 55 55 Taking and Viewing Photos P, S, A, and M Modes .................................................................................. 56 Mode P: Program AE ............................................................................................. 56 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE .............................................................................. 57 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE .......................................................................... 59 Mode M: Manual Exposure ............................................................................... 60 FILTER ............................................................................................................................. 63 Custom Modes ......................................................................................................... 64 Autofocus ...................................................................................................... 72 Focus Mode ................................................................................................................ 73 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ........................................................................ 74 Focus-Point Selection .......................................................................................... 76 v Manual Focus ............................................................................................... 80 Checking Focus........................................................................................................ 81 Sensitivity ...................................................................................................... 83 AUTO............................................................................................................................... 84 Metering ........................................................................................................ 85 Exposure Compensation ......................................................................... 86 Focus/Exposure Lock ................................................................................ 87 Other Controls .......................................................................................................... 88 Viewing Pictures ......................................................................................... 89 Deleting Pictures ........................................................................................ 90 4 Movie Recording and Playback 91 Movie Recording and Playback 91 Recording Movies ....................................................................................... 92 Recording Movies ................................................................................................... 92 Adjusting Movie Settings .................................................................................. 96 Viewing Movies ........................................................................................... 97 5 Connections Connections 99 99 Overview .....................................................................................................100 Supported Features ............................................................................................ 100 Connection Settings .......................................................................................... 101 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) ........................................102 Installing Smartphone Apps ......................................................................... 102 Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................................... 102 Using the Smartphone App .......................................................................... 104 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) ....................................................105 Copying Pictures to a Smartphone .......................................................... 105 Connecting the Camera and Computer ............................................... 108 Using the Camera as a Webcam ..........................................................110 instax SHARE Printers ..............................................................................111 Establishing a Connection ............................................................................. 111 Printing Pictures.................................................................................................... 112 vi Table of Contents Tethered Photography ...........................................................................113 Tethered Photography via USB ................................................................... 113 RAW Processing .........................................................................................115 Saving and Loading Settings ...............................................................116 Recording Movies Remotely from a Web Browser .......................117 6 Menu List 119 119 Menu List The Shooting Menus (Still Photography).........................................120 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING ............................................................................... 120 AF/MF SETTING ..................................................................................................... 122 SHOOTING SETTING ........................................................................................... 123 FLASH SETTING ..................................................................................................... 125 MOVIE SETTING ..................................................................................................... 125 The Shooting Menus (Movies) .............................................................126 MOVIE SETTING ..................................................................................................... 126 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING ............................................................................... 128 AF/MF SETTING ..................................................................................................... 128 AUDIO SETTING .................................................................................................... 130 TIME CODE SETTING .......................................................................................... 131 The Playback Menu ..................................................................................132 The Setup Menus ......................................................................................134 USER SETTING ........................................................................................................ 134 SOUND SET-UP ...................................................................................................... 135 SCREEN SET-UP...................................................................................................... 136 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.................................................................................... 138 POWER MANAGEMENT .................................................................................... 139 SAVE DATA SET-UP ............................................................................................... 140 Network/USB Setting Menus ...............................................................141 7 Notices Notices 143 143 For Your Safety ...........................................................................................144 vii Supplied Accessories The following are included with the camera:

NP-W235 rechargeable battery AC-5VJ AC power adapter Plug adapter USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.) Body cap (comes attached to camera) Shoulder strap Cable protector Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe) Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera) File transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover

(comes attached to camera) Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera) Basic Manual (this manual) O The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use

(P 45). N The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region. Visit the website below for information on the software available for your camera. https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/

viii About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-H2S digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual:

O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. product. N Additional information that may be helpful when using the P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplifi ed, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as memory cards. The electronic viewfi nder may be referred to as the EVF and the LCD monitor as the LCD. Smartphones and tablets are referred to as smartphones. ix MEMO x Before You Begin 1 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 2 S Lens release button ........................................39 T Fn2 button U AF-assist illuminator Self-timer lamp Tally light A ISO button .........................................................83 B WB button ...........................................................7 C Fn1 button D Secondary LCD monitor................................26 E Microphone ......................................................92 F Hot shoe G Diopter adjustment control .........................13 H Dial lock release .......................................56, 92 I Mode dial ............................................................8 J Strap eyelet .......................................................38 K HDMI connector cover L Microphone jack cover M Headphone jack cover N Speaker ..............................................................97 O USB connector cover P Sync terminal Q Fn3 button R Lens signal contacts O b Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long. V Front command dial ......................................10 W ON/OFF switch .................................................49 X Shutter button Y t (movie recording) button .......................92 Z Hot shoe cover a Body cap ............................................................39 b HDMI connector (Type A) c Microphone jack (3.5mm) ........................95 d Headphone jack (3.5mm) e USB connector (Type-C) ...............................45 f Hole to screw USB cable g Hole to screw cable protector Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 3 h DRIVE button ......................................................9 b (delete) button ...........................................90 i a (playback) button ...................................89 j Eye sensor ..........................................................19 k Electronic view nder (EVF)

.....................................................14, 18, 20, 31 l Eye cup (lockable) ...........................................13 m VIEW MODE button .........................................18 n Secondary monitor backlight button .......27 o Focus stick (focus lever)............................ 7, 76 p AFON button .....................................................88 q Rear command dial .......................................10 r Indicator lamp .................................................11 Tally light s Remote release connector cover ................62 t Memory card slot cover latch ......................42 u Memory card slot cover (detachable)

..................................................................... 6, 42 v Battery-chamber cover latch ......................40 w Battery-chamber cover .................................40 x Selector buttons ................................................7 y MENU/OK button .............................................28 z DISP (display)/BACK button .........................21 x(Bluetooth) button ..................................102 0 Q (quick menu) button 1 AEL (exposure lock) button ..........................88 2 Tripod mount 3 Vari-angle LCD monitor ..................12, 16, 18 Touch screen ....................................................31 4 File transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover 5 Remote release connector (2.5mm) .......62 6 Memory card slot2

(for SD memory cards) ...............................42 7 Serial number plate 8 Memory card slot1

- Battery chamber .............................................40

^ Cooling fan connector cover

\ Cooling fan connector

$ Hole to screw cooling fan

% File transmitter/vertical battery grip

(for Type B CFexpress cards) ......................42 9 Battery latch ....................................................41 connector 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 4 Parts of the Camera The Cable Protector Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection. A Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the cover passes through the slot in the protector. B Tighten the lock screw. C Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 5 The Serial Number Plate Do not remove the serial number plate, which provides the CMIITID, serial num-

ber, and other important information. Serial number plate 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable) The memory card slot cover can be re-

moved by lowering the interior latch. Re-

move the cover for ease of access when a camera rig is attached or in other sit-

uations that make it diffi cult to open or close the cover. 6 Parts of the Camera The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-

cus area. The focus stick can also be used to navigate the menus. N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the cen-

ter of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING. The Selector Press the selector up (e), right (h), down (f), or left (g) to highlight items. The up, right, down, and left buttons also double as function buttons Fn4 through Fn7. The WB Button Press the WB button to access white bal-

ance settings. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 7 The Mode Dial To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until the icon for the desired mode aligns with the index. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode A P (PROGRAM AE) B S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE) A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE) M (MANUAL) C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6/C7

(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6/7) D FILTER (FILTER) E F (MOVIE) Description Description Aperture and shutter speed can be adjusted using program shift. Select for full control over camera settings, including aperture (M and A) and/or shutter speed (M and S). Take pictures using previously-stored settings. Take photos with lter e ects. Record movies. PP 56 57 59 60 64 63 92 8 Parts of the Camera The DRIVE Button Pressing the DRIVE button displays drive-

mode menu, where you can choose from the following the drive modes. ModeMode B Single frame J High-speed burst J High-speed burst (1.25 crop) O Low-speed burst W ISO BKT ModeMode V WHITE BALANCE BKT BKT Bracketing h HDR u Panorama j Multiple Exposure 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 9 The Command Dials The rear and front command dials are used for the operations below. Front command dial Rear command dial P Choose the desired combi-

nation of shutter speed and aperture (program shift). S Choose a shutter speed. Adjust aperture. 2 A M Choose a shutter speed. Shooting 1 Shooting FILTER Program shift. Menus Menus Q Menu Q Menu Select menu tabs or page through menus. Select items in the quick menu. Playback Playback View other pictures. Adjust exposure compensa-

tion. Adjust aperture. 2 Adjust exposure compensa-

tion. Highlight menu items. Adjust settings in the quick menu. Zoom in or out (full-frame playback). Zoom in or out (multi-frame playback). 1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 2 Applies if the lens has no aperture ring or if an aperture ring with an A position is in the A position. N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 10 Parts of the Camera The Indicator Lamp Camera status is shown by the indicator lamp. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Indicator lamp Indicator lamp Glows green Blinks green Blinks green and orange Camera status Camera status Focus locked. Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken. Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for con rmation after being taken with option other than OFF selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP.

(additional pictures can be taken). Camera off : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tab-

let. *

Glows orange Blinks orange Blinks red Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at this time. Flash charging; ash will not re when picture is taken. Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload. N Warnings may also appear in the display. The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfi nder. The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-

cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. 11 The LCD Monitor You can adjust the angle of the LCD moni-

tor when framing shots, but be careful not to trap your fi ngers or other objects. O Do not apply excessive force to the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor, as this could damage the hinge. Be careful that the corners of the monitor do not contact the camera body, as this could leave marks. N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:

Touch photography (P 32) Focus area selection (P 31) Function selection (P 34) Movie optimized control oL (P 33) Playback (P 36) 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 12 Parts of the Camera The Eye Cup To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons on either side and slide eye cup up. Focusing the Viewfi nder If the indicators displayed in the viewfi nder are blurred, put your eye to the viewfi nder and rotate the diopter adjustment control until the display is in sharp focus. To focus the viewfi nder:

A Lift the diopter adjustment control. B Rotate the control to adjust viewfi nder focus. C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could cause product malfunction. 13 Camera Displays This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during shooting. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. The Electronic Viewfi nder 3 4 U V W X Y Z a b c d op ijkl h fg e mnqrst 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 5 2 1 0 z y x w v u 14 A Crop factor .....................................................123 B IS mode 2 .........................................................124 C Flash (TTL) mode D Flash compensation E Self-timer indicator .....................................123 F Continuous mode G Shutter type ...................................................124 H AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................122 I Bluetooth ON/OFF J White balance ..............................................120 K AWB lock ........................................................139 L Film simulation ............................................120 M F-Log/HLG recording ..................................126 N Dynamic range ............................................120 O D-range priority ...........................................120 P Movie mode ........................................... 92, 125 Q High-speed recording indicator ..............126 R Recording time available/

elapsed recording time ..............................92 S Card slot options ................................... 44, 140 T Number of available frames 1 U Image size ......................................................120 V File format ......................................................126 W Image quality................................................120 X HEIF format ...................................................120 Y Date and time ..................................50, 53, 134 Z Touch screen mode .............................. 31, 123 a Cooling fan settings ...........................124, 127 b Temperature warning ...................................43 c Control lock 3 .................................................139 Camera Displays d Boost mode ...................................................139 e Power supply ....................................................47 f Histogram .........................................................24 g Battery level h Sensitivity ..........................................................83 i Exposure compensation ...............................86 j Aperture ......................................................59, 60 k Distance indicator 2 ........................................81 l Shutter speed ............................................57, 60 m TTL lock ...........................................................125 n AE lock ...................................................... 88, 138 o Metering ............................................................85 p Shooting mode ...............................................56 q Focus mode 2 ....................................................73 r Focus indicator 2 s Manual focus indicator 2 .......................73, 80 t AF lock ...................................................... 88, 138 u Time code .......................................................131 v Microphone input channel w Recording level 2 ...........................................130 x Exposure indicator ...................................60, 86 y Virtual horizon .................................................25 z Focus frame ...............................................76, 87 0 Image transfer status ........................102, 141 1 Location data download status .....102, 140 2 Movie compression .....................................126 3 Depth-of- eld preview ..................................81 4 Proxy setting (ProRes only) 5 Focus check ............................................ 82, 123 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF). 3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button. Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 15 The LCD Monitor D E I J P Q B A C F G H K L M ON R STU V W X Y Z a b c d e st klnop m ij h g f qruvwx 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 z y 16 A Crop factor .....................................................123 B Location data download status .....102, 140 C Focus check ............................................ 82, 123 D Depth-of- eld preview ..................................81 E Proxy setting (ProRes only) F Movie compression .....................................126 G Image transfer status ........................102, 141 H Bluetooth ON/OFF I Movie mode ........................................... 92, 125 J High-speed recording indicator ..............126 K Focus frame ...............................................76, 87 L Recording time available/

elapsed recording time ..............................92 M Date and time ..................................50, 53, 134 N Card slot options ................................... 44, 140 O Number of available frames 1 P Image size ......................................................120 Q File format ......................................................126 R Image quality................................................120 S HEIF format ...................................................120 T Cooling fan settings ...........................124, 127 U Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 31, 123 V AWB lock ........................................................139 W White balance ..............................................120 X Film simulation ............................................120 Y F-Log/HLG recording ..................................126 Z Dynamic range ............................................120 a D-range priority ...........................................120 b Movie optimized control 3 ............................33 c Virtual horizon .................................................25 d Boost mode ...................................................139 Camera Displays e Touch zoom 3....................................................35 f Temperature warning ...................................43 g Control lock 4 .................................................139 h Battery level i Power supply ....................................................47 j Sensitivity ..........................................................83 k Histogram .........................................................24 l Exposure compensation ...............................86 m Distance indicator 2 ........................................81 n Aperture ......................................................59, 60 o Time code .......................................................131 p Shutter speed ............................................57, 60 q TTL lock ...........................................................125 r AE lock ...................................................... 88, 138 s Metering ............................................................85 t Shooting mode ...............................................56 u Focus mode 2 ....................................................73 v Focus indicator 2 w Manual focus indicator 2 .......................73, 80 x AF lock ...................................................... 88, 138 y Microphone input channel z AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................122 0 Shutter type ...................................................124 1 Recording level 2 ...........................................130 2 Continuous mode 3 Self-timer indicator .....................................123 4 Exposure indicator ...................................60, 86 5 Flash (TTL) mode 6 Flash compensation 7 IS mode 2 .........................................................124 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). 3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls. 4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button. Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 17 Choosing a Display Mode Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle through the following display modes. You can choose separate display modes for shooting and playback. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i SHOOTING Option Option EYE SENSOR EE EYE SENSOR LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY + EE EVF ONLY +

EE EYE SENSOR + LCD EYE SENSOR + LCD IMAGE DISP. IMAGE DISP. Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. LCD monitor on, view nder o . View nder on, LCD monitor o . Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on; taking it away turns the view nder o . The LCD monitor remains o . Putting your eye to the view nder during shooting turns the view nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for the display of images once you remove your eye from the view nder after shooting. The options selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP. apply to display in the LCD monitor. 18 Camera Displays PLAYBACK Option Option EYE SENSOR EE EYE SENSOR LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. LCD monitor on, view nder o . View nder on, LCD monitor o . N Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu to choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor. EVF/LCD SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the button then used to switch between the EVF ONLY and LCD ONLY displays. The Eye Sensor The eye sensor may respond to objects other than your eye or to light shining directly on the sensor. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Eye sensor 19 Adjusting Display Brightness The brightness and saturation of the viewfi nder and LCD monitor can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu. Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfi nder brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do the same for the LCD monitor. Display Rotation When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor au-

tomatically rotate to match camera orientation. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 20 Camera Displays The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor. N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose the EVF dis-

play, place your eye to the viewfi nder while using the DISP/BACK button. View nder Full screen Standard indicators Dual display

(manual focus mode only) 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 21 LCD Monitor Standard indicators No indicators 12800 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 12800 Dual display

(manual focus mode only) The Dual Display Info display The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a smaller close-up of the focus area. 22 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays Customizing the Standard Display To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. 2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING. Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the setup menu. 3 Choose items. Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. ItemItem Default Default STILL STILL MOVIEMOVIE R R FRAMING GUIDELINE R R FOCUS FRAME R R AF DISTANCE INDICATOR R R MF DISTANCE INDICATOR R R HISTOGRAM LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT R R R R SHOOTING MODE R R APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO INFORMATION BACKGROUND R R R R Expo. Comp. (Digit) R R Expo. Comp. (Scale) R R FOCUS MODE R R PHOTOMETRY R SHUTTER TYPE R FLASH R CONTINUOUS MODE ItemItem DUAL IS MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE BOOST MODE COOLING FAN SETTING FRAMES REMAINING IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER MIC LEVEL GUIDANCE MESSAGE BATTERY LEVEL FRAMING OUTLINE Default Default STILL STILL MOVIEMOVIE R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes. 5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 23 Framing Outline Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see against dark backgrounds. Histograms Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis. Number of pixels 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Shadows Highlights Pixel brightness Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve throughout the tone range. Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of the graph. Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of the graph. To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will be overex-

posed at current settings superimposed on the view through the lens, press the function but-

ton to which HISTOGRAM is assigned. A Overexposed areas blink B RGB histograms 24 Camera Displays Virtual Horizon Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be cho-

sen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING. Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on a tripod or the like. 2D 3D Pitch Roll OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed. 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level. The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back. 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or right and forward or back. N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 25 The Secondary LCD Monitor Among the settings that can be viewed in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Dif-

ferent settings are displayed in still pho-

tography and movie modes. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Secondary LCD monitor Default Settings By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings list-

ed below. N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >

SUB MONITOR SETTING. Still Photography Mode Still Photography Mode A SHUTTER SPEED B APERTURE C EXPO. COMP. D ISO Default Default E FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE G IMAGE SIZE H SHOOTING MODE 26 Movie Mode Movie Mode Camera Displays A MOVIE MODE B REC. TIME C EXPO. COMP. D ISO Default Default E FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE G CARD SLOT OPTIONS H BATTERY LEVEL The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button To turn on the secondary LCD monitor back-

light when you fi nd the secondary LCD monitor too dark to read, press the secondary monitor backlight button. Press the button again to turn the backlight off . Background Color The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is dis-

played in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 27 Using the Menus To display the menus, press MENU/OK. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Menus Diff erent menus are displayed during still photography, movie recording, and playback. Still Photography (All Modes Except F) Pressing MENU/OK during still photography displays the photo menus. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT EXIT N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if x STILL is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or B MOVIE SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie menus (P 64). 28 Movie Recording (F/Movie Mode) Pressing MENU/OK in movie mode displays the movie menus. Using the Menus N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if F MOVIE is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or B MOVIE SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie menus (P 64). Playback Pressing MENU/OK during playback displays the playback menu. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i MOVIE SETTING MOVIE SETTING LIST SHOOTING MODE MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC MEDIA REC SETTING HDMI OUTPUT SETTING FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION F-Log/HLG RECORDING EXIT PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ERASE SIMULTANEOUS DELETE CROP RESIZE PROTECT EXIT 29 Using the Menus Selecting a Menu Tab To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT EXIT EXIT Tab 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left to highlight the tab for the current menu. 3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab contain-

ing the desired item. 4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu. N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 30 Touch Screen Mode The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen. Shooting Touch Controls To enable touch controls, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS TOUCH SCREEN SETTING DOUBLE TAP SETTING ON TOUCH ZOOM OFF TOUCH FUNCTION TOUCH SCREEN SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS EVF The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-

tures are being framed in the electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-

itor employed for touch controls. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i N When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >

g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used for focus. You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferential-

ly focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. 31 LCD Monitor The operation performed can be selected by tapping the touch screen mode indica-

tor in the display. Touch controls can be used for the following operations:

1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode TOUCH TOUCH SHOOTING SHOOTING AFAF AFOFF AFOFF Description Description Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter. In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your nger on the display. If SINGLE AF is selected for focus mode, the camera will fo-

cus when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. If CONTINUOUS AF is selected for focus mode, the camera will initiate focus when you tap your subject in the display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for focus mode, you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. AREAAREA Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. OFFOFF Touch controls disabled. O Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom. N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN MODE. 32 Touch Screen Mode MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROLoL or tapping the movie-optimized mode but-

ton in the shooting display optimizes the command dials and touch controls for movie recording. This can be used to pre-

vent camera sounds being recorded with movie footage. SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPOSURE COMPENSATION ISO INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT N Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring. WIND FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME F FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE F IS MODE F IS MODE BOOST F FOCUS MODE Movie-optimized mode button When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 33 Touch Function Functions can be assigned to the follow-

ing fl ick gestures in much the same way as function buttons:

Flick up: T-Fn1 Flick left: T-Fn2 Flick right: T-Fn3 Flick down: T-Fn4 N In some cases, touch-function fl ick ges-

tures display a menu; tap to select the desired option. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION. SET CANCEL 34 Touch Screen Mode Touch Zoom If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by touching the display. Tap the touch zoom button in the display to enable touch zoom. Touch zoom is controlled using the but-

tons in the display. Button Button Description Description Touch zoom Enable touch zoom. Touch zoom Zoom in Zoom in Zoom out Zoom out Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant speed. Rocker switch Rocker switch Swipe to choose a zoom position. Touch and hold to zoom to the selected position. Disable Disable Disable touch zoom. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 35 Touch Screen Mode Playback Touch Controls When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls can be used for the following playback operations:

Swipe: Swipe a fi nger across the display to view other images. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Pinch-out: Place two fi ngers on the display and spread them apart to zoom in. Pinch-in: Place two fi ngers on the display and slide them together to zoom out. N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no further. Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in on the focus point. Drag: View other areas of the image during playback zoom. 36 First Steps 37 Attaching the Strap Attach the strap. Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below. O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 38 Attaching a Lens The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Remove the body cap from the camera and the rear cap from the lens. Place the lens on mount, keeping the marks on the lens and camera aligned (A), and then rotate the lens until it clicks into place

(B). O When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the camera. Be careful not to touch the cameras internal parts. Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place. Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens. 2 F i r s t S t e p s Removing Lenses To remove the lens, turn the camera off , then press the lens release button (A) and rotate the lens as shown (B). O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens or inside the camera, replace the lens caps and camera body cap when the lens is not attached. Lenses and Other Optional Accessories The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM X-mount. O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-

changing) lenses. Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter. Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to malfunction. Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses. See the manual provided with the lens for information on use. 39 Inserting the Battery Insert the battery in the camera as described below. 1 Open the battery-chamber cover. Slide the battery-chamber cover latch as shown and open the bat-

tery-chamber cover. O Do not open the battery-chamber cover when the camera is on. Fail-

ure to observe this precaution could image fi les or memory damage cards. Do not use excessive force when handling the battery-chamber cover. 2 Insert the battery as shown. O Insert the battery in the orientation shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. Confi rm that the battery is securely latched. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 40 Inserting the Battery 3 Close the battery-chamber cover. Close and latch the cover. O If the cover does not close, check that the battery is in the correct orienta-

tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-

er shut. Removing the Battery Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-cham-

ber cover. To remove the battery, press the battery latch to the side, and slide the battery out of the camera as shown. O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 41 Inserting Memory Cards Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately). N The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards. 1 Open the memory card slot cover. Unlatch and open the cover. O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or de-

leted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-

age the card. 2 Insert the memory card. Holding the card in the orientation shown, slide it in until it clicks into place at the back of the slot. Close and latch the memory card slot cover. O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle or use force. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 42 Inserting Memory Cards Removing Memory Cards Turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a fi nger and then slowly releasing it; the card can then be removed by hand. O Press the center of the card. Suddenly removing your fi nger from the card could cause the card to fall from the slot. Remove your fi nger slowly. If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 43 Inserting Memory Cards Using Two Cards The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the sec-

ond slot only when the card in the fi rst slot is full. This can be changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP> x CARD SLOT SETTING. Option Option SEQUENTIAL

(default) Description Description The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the rst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL), recording will start on the card in the second slot and switch to the rst slot when the card in the second slot is full. Display Display BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card. SEPARATE RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the rst slot and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This setting takes e ect only when FINE + RAW or NORMAL+ RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE QUALITY. RAW+JPEG RAW+HEIF The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 44 Charging the Battery For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at ship-

ment. The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before charging the battery, turn the camera off . O An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera. Charging takes about 180minutes. 1 Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter. Attach the plug adapter as shown, making sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into place on the AC power adapter terminals. O The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-

sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter. Do not use it with other devices. The shape of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Charge the battery. Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into an indoor power outlet. O Connect the cable to the cameras USB connector (Type-C). Be sure the connectors are fully inserted. 45 Charge Status The indicator lamp shows battery charge status as follows:

Indicator lamp Indicator lamp On O Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery charging Charging complete Charging error 2 F i r s t S t e p s 46 Charging the Battery O The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of 100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use). Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as this could cause malfunction. Do not affi x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from the camera. Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat. Read the cautions in The Battery and Power Supply. Use only genuine Fujifi lm rechargeable batteries designated for use in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-

uct malfunction. Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel the outer casing. The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its charging life and must be replaced. Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not in use. If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may fi nd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge the battery regularly. Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging. Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures. Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in the network/USB setting menu increases the drain on the battery. N If the camera is turned on during charging, charging will end and the USB connection will instead be used to power the camera. The battery level will begin to gradually decline. The camera will display a power supply icon when powered via USB. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 47 Charging via Computer The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with com-

puters with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface. Charging the Battery Leave the computer on during charging. O The battery will not charge while the camera is on. Connect the supplied USB cable. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable. Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-

puter, computer settings, and the computers current state. The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input of 5 V/500 mA. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 48 Turning the Camera On and Off Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off . Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera on, or to OFF to turn the camera off . O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfi nder can aff ect pic-

tures or the view through the viewfi nder. Keep the lens and viewfi nder clean. N Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback. Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >

AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF switch to OFF and then back to ON. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 49 Basic Setup When you turn the camera on for the fi rst time, you can choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the steps below when turning the camera on for the fi rst time. 1 Turn the camera on. A language-selection dialog will be displayed. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Choose a language. Highlight a MENU/OK. language and press 3 Choose a time zone. When prompted, highlight the cur-

rent time zone and daylight savings time setting using the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) and press MENU/OK. N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK. AREA SETTING BERLIN/PARIS AREA SETTING DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SET GMT 0:00 OFF NO 50 4 Set the clock. Basic Setup DATE/TIME GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS 2022

. 12

. 31 12

00 AM 12h SET NO APPLICATION 5 View information on the smartphone app. The camera will display a QR code you can scan with your smartphone to open a website where you can download the smartphone app. Press MENU/OK to exit to the shoot-

ing display. N Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED TO THE SMARTPHONE. SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP. SET or control the camera remotely (P 102). 6 Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab. O Format memory cards before fi rst use, and be sure to reformat all memory cards after using them in a computer or other device. 7 Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and press MENU/OK. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 51 8 A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. To format the memory card, highlight OK and press MENU/OK. FORMAT FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?

ERASE ALL DATA OK CANCEL N To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O All dataincluding protected pictureswill be deleted from the memory card. Be sure important fi les have been copied to a comput-

er or other storage device. Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting. N Format options can also be displayed by pressing the selector down

(f) while holding the b (delete) button. If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the camera is turned on. 52 Basic Setup Choosing a Diff erent Language To change the language:

1 Display language options. Select D USER SETTING> Qa. 2 Choose a language. Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Changing the Time and Date To set the camera clock:

1 Display DATE/TIME options. Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME. 2 Set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 53 MEMO 54 Taking and Viewing Photos 55 P, S, A, and M Modes P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture. Mode P: Program AE Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be selected with program shift. Rotate the mode dial to P. P will appear in the display. O If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed and aperture displays will show . Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-

lease the dial. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 56 P, S, A, and M Modes Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for optimal exposure. 1 Rotate the mode dial to S. S will appear in the display. 2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a shutter speed. N The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter speed, aperture will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-

ture display will show . Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-

lease the dial. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 57 N Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in progress. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 58 P, S, A, and M Modes Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for optimal exposure. 1 Rotate the mode dial to A. A will appear in the display. 2 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture. N If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the front command dial. The roles played by the front command dial can be changed us-

ing D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture, shutter speed will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed display will show . Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-

lease the dial. N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed halfway. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 59 Mode M: Manual Exposure In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture. Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed

(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-

pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-

ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached. 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. M will appear in the display. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 60 P, S, A, and M Modes 2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a shutter speed and the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture. N The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator that shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-ex-

posed at current settings. If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. The roles played by the front and rear command dials can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. BULB Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is rec-

ommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure. 1 Set shutter speed to BULB. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 61 2 Press the shutter button all the way down. The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the shutter button is pressed. The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure started. Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display the processing time remaining. O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL IMAGE or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTING SETTING> SHUTTER TYPE. N Selecting an aperture of A fi xes shutter speed at 30 s. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. Using a Remote Release A remote release can be used for long time-ex-

posures. When using an optional RR-100 re-

mote release or an electronic release from third-party suppliers, connect it to the cameras remote release connector. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 62 P, S, A, and M Modes FILTER Take photos with fi lter eff ects. 1 Rotate the mode dial to FILTER. 2 Choose a fi lter via A SHOOTING SETTING> FILTER SETTING. Filter Filter G TOY CAMERA H MINIATURE I POP COLOR J HIGH-KEY Z LOW-KEY K DYNAMIC TONE X SOFT FOCUS u PARTIAL COLOR (RED) v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE) w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW) x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN) y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE) z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE) Description Description Choose for a retro toy camera e ect. The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for a diorama e ect. Create high-contrast images with saturated colors. Create bright, low-contrast images. Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of emphasized highlights. Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy e ect. Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the whole image. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Areas of the image that are the selected color are recorded in that color. All other areas of the image are recorded in black-and-white. O Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in some cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue. 63 Custom Modes Rotate the mode dial to any of modes C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C7 (CUSTOM 7) to take pictures using previously-saved shooting menu settings. Mode Selection: Still Photography or Movie Choose whether the selected custom settings bank (C1 through C7) is for still photography (x STILL) or movie recording

(F MOVIE). 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N You can also use B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie menus. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING 3 Highlight x STILL or F MOVIE and press MENU/OK. The selected custom settings bank can now be used for still photogra-

phy or movie recording. xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING x F STILL MOVIE 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 64 P, S, A, and M Modes Saving Current Settings Save current settings in a custom settings bank. 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight a destination bank for cur-

rent settings (C1 through C7) and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS and press MENU/OK. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. Current settings will be saved to the selected bank. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED EXIT CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS CUSTOM 1 SAVE THE CHANGES OK?

OK CANCEL 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 65 Editing Custom Settings Edit existing custom settings banks. 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press MENU/OK. 4 The camera will display a list of shoot-

ing menu items; highlight an item you wish to edit and press MENU/OK. Adjust the selected item as desired. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED EXIT CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK SHOOTING MODE SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXP. COMPENSATION DRIVE MODE EXIT 66 P, S, A, and M Modes 5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting menu list. Adjust additional items as desired. N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIE SETTING > FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the mov-

ie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the changes will not be saved automatically. To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the list and press Q. To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings, select RESET THE CHANGES. If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied with the changes intact. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 67 Copying Custom Settings Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-

named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank. 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/

SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the source bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED EXIT CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 68 P, S, A, and M Modes 4 Highlight the destination bank (C1 through C7) and press MENU/OK. A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 N Any changes to custom settings in the destination bank will be overwritten. 5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The selected settings will be copied to the destination bank, overwriting any existing settings. COPY CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 COPY OK?

OK CANCEL 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 69 Resetting Custom Settings Reset selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography. To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING and press MENU/OK. A confi rmation dialog will be displayed. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The selected bank will be reset. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED EXIT CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME RESET CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?

RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT OK CANCEL 70 P, S, A, and M Modes Renaming Custom Settings Banks Rename selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photogra-

phy. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED EXIT CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME 4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select SET. The selected bank will be renamed. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 71 Autofocus Take pictures using autofocus. 1 Select single or continuous AF for G AF/MF SETTING >

FOCUS MODE in the shooting menu (P 73). 2 Use G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE to choose an AF mode

(P 74). 3 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA and choose the position and size of the focus frame (P 76). 4 Take pictures. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 72 Autofocus Focus Mode Choose how the camera focuses. 1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS MODE in the shooting menu. 3 Choose from the following options:

ModeMode p MANUAL FOCUS k CONTINUOUS AF Description Description Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for man-

ual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (P 80). Focus is continually adjusted to re ect changes in the dis-

tance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion. l SINGLE AF Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for stationary subjects. N Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-

justed continuously in modes l and k even when the shutter but-

ton is not pressed. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 73 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes. 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE. 3 Choose an AF mode. How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode. Focus Mode ll (SINGLE AF)

(SINGLE AF) Focus Mode Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image r SINGLE POINT Camera focuses on subject in selected focus point. Use for pin-

point focus on selected subject. Camera focuses on subject in se-

lected focus zone. Focus zones in-

clude multiple focus points, mak-

ing it easier to focus on subjects in motion. Camera focuses automatically on subjects; display high-contrast shows areas in focus. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 77, 78) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i y ZONE z WIDE j ALL 74 Focus Mode kk (CONTINUOUS AF) Focus Mode

(CONTINUOUS AF) Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image Autofocus r SINGLE POINT Focus tracks subject at selected fo-

cus point. Use for subjects moving toward or away from camera. y ZONE Focus tracks subject in selected fo-

cus zone. Use for subjects that are moving fairly predictably. z TRACKING tracks subjects moving Focus through wide area of frame. j ALL Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 77, 78) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 75 Focus-Point Selection Choose a focus point for autofocus. Viewing the Focus-Point Display 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the fo-

cus-point display. 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to choose a focus area. N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 31). 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 76 Autofocus Selecting a Focus Point Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the focus point and the rear command dial to choose the size of the focus frame. The procedure varies with the option se-

lected for AF mode. Focus stick Focus stick Rear command Rear command dialdial DISP/BACK DISP/BACK button button AF mode AF mode r y z TiltTilt Press Press Select focus point Select highlighted focus point Select center focus point Rotate Rotate Choose from 6 frame sizes Choose from 3 frame sizes N Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/

TRACKING is selected in focus mode l. If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE

(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode l) or z TRACKING

(focus mode k). 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 77 The Focus-Point Display The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF mode. N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large squares. SINGLE POINT rr SINGLE POINT WIDE/TRACKING zz WIDE/TRACKING AF mode AF mode ZONE yy ZONE 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Choose from zones with 7 7, 5 5, or 3 3 focus points. Position focus frame over subject you want to track using continuous AF. Number of points available can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING>

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Autofocus Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be unable to focus on the subjects listed below. Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies. Subjects photographed through a window or other refl ective object. Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than refl ect light, such as hair or fur. Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or fl ame. Subjects that show little contrast with the background. Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a backdrop of highly contrasting elements). 78 Autofocus Checking Focus To zoom in on the current focus area for precise focus, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever). Press up to two times more to zoom in further and a fourth time to cancel zoom. Normal display Focus zoom N In focus mode l, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear com-

mand dial. In focus mode l, select SINGLE POINT for AF MODE. Focus zoom is not available in focus mode k or when G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF is on. Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING to change the function performed by the center of the focus stick (focus lever). D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can also be used to assign focus zoom to other controls. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 79 Manual Focus Adjust focus manually. 1 Select MANUAL FOCUS for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS MODE. 2 Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce the focus distance, right to increase. 3 Take pictures. N Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING to reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring. Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 80 Manual Focus Checking Focus A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual focus mode. The Manual Focus Indicator The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-

cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu), the blue bar the depth of fi eld, or in other words the distance in front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus. Focus distance

(white line) Depth of fi eld N If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-

of-fi eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. Use the G AF/MF SETTING > DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option to choose how depth of fi eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 81 Manual Focus Focus Zoom If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK, the cam-

era will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever) to exit zoom. N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. If OFF or FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT is selected for G AF/MF SETTING>

MF ASSIST, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom cannot be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL MICROPRISM is selected. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 82 Sensitivity Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. To view sensitivity settings, press the ISObutton. Option Option AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO3 16012800 L(80/100/125) H(25600/51200) Description Description Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shoot-

ing conditions according to combination of standard and maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed cho-

sen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 84). Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in dis-

play. Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may ap-

pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range. N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off . Adjusting Sensitivity High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 83 Sensitivity AUTO Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3. ItemItem Options Options DEFAULT SENSITIVITY MAX. SENSITIVITY 16012800 40012800 MIN. SHUTTER SPEED SEC, AUTO AUTO1 AUTO1 800 Default Default AUTO2 AUTO2 160 3200 AUTO AUTO3 AUTO3 12800 The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-

fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED. N If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed automatically. The minimum shutter speed is not aff ected by the option selected for image stabilization. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 84 Metering Choose how the camera meters exposure. A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY off ers a choice of the following metering options:

O The selected option will only take eff ect if OFF is selected for g FACE/

EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the G AF/MF SETTING menu. ModeMode o MULTI p CENTER-

WEIGHTED v SPOT w AVERAGE Description Description The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analy-

sis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recom-

mended in most situations. The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the area at the center. The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and in other cases in which the background is much brighter or darker than the main subject. Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same light-

ing, and is particularly e ective for landscapes and portraits of subjects dressed in black or white. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/

MF SETTING> INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 123). 85 Exposure Compensation Adjust exposure. Rotate the rear command dial to adjust exposure. N The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. In manual mode, exposure can be adjusted by rotating the front or rear command dial after pressing a control to which d WHEN SET TO B(ON/OFF SWITCH) is assigned. O The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode. Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display, although the display may not accurately refl ect its eff ects if:

- the exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 EV,

- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or

- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY. Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the display may not accurately refl ect the eff ects of exposure compensa-

tion during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by select-

ing mode M and adjusting exposure directly. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 86 Focus/Exposure Lock Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. 1 Position the subject in the focus frame and press the shutter button halfway to lock focus and exposure. Focus and exposure will remain locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway (AF/AE lock). 2 Press the button all the way down. N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF, SHUTTER AE. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 87 Other Controls Focus and exposure can also be locked using the AEL and AFON buttons. At de-

fault settings, you can use the AEL button to lock exposure without locking focus. If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock fo-

cus without locking exposure. While the assigned control is pressed, pressing the shutter button halfway will not end the lock. If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/

AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be ended by pressing the control a second time. Focus/Exposure Lock AEL button

(exposure lock) AFON button N The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point during exposure lock. The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 138). 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 88 Viewing Pictures Pictures can be viewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor. To view pictures full frame, press a. 100-0001 Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame. N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (gift im-

age) icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that play-

back zoom may not be available. To view photos on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the camera monitor, press the a button. Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY BACK MENU> SWITCH SLOT option. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 89 Deleting Pictures Use the b button to delete pictures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. 1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and select FRAME. ERASE FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confi rmation dialog is not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures. N Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any pictures you wish to delete (P 132). Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK MENU> ERASE option (P 132). 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 90 Movie Recording and Playback 91 Recording Movies Record movies with sound. Recording Movies Movies can be recorded by pressing the t (movie recording) button or rotating the mode dial to F(movie). The t(Movie Recording) Button Use the t(movie recording) button to quickly and easily record movies while in still photography mode. N The camera automatically selects CONTINUOUS AF for focus mode. 1 Press t to start recording. A recording indicator (V) is dis-

played while recording is in prog-

ress. The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while another display counts up to show the re-

cording time. Recording time Time remaining 2 Press t again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 92 Recording Movies F(Movie) Mode For more control over camera settings, rotate the mode dial to F(movie) and record movies using the shutter button. 1 Rotate the mode dial to F(movie). O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. 2 Press the shutter button to start recording. A recording indicator (V) is dis-

played while recording is in prog-

ress. The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while another display counts up to show the re-

cording time. Recording time Time remaining 3 Press the shutter button again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 93 O The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for B MOVIE SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING.

- Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.

- Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mpbs can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mpbs can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better. Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording. Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds made by the camera during recording. Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. N The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp indicator or AF-assistthat lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you can change exposure compensation by up to 2EV and adjust zoom using the zoom ring on the lens (if available). While recording is in progress, you can:

- Adjust sensitivity

- Refocus using any of the following methods:

Press the shutter button halfway Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned Use touch screen controls

- Display a histogram or artifi cial horizon by pressing the button to which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been as-

signed Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases settings may not apply during recording. To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial (P 76). 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 94 Recording Movies Temperature Warnings The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed, image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before turning it on again. Using an External Microphone Sound can be recorded with external micro-

phones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in diameter; microphones that require plug-in power cannot be used. See the microphone manual for details. XLR Microphone Adapters The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website. https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 95 Recording Movies Adjusting Movie Settings Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 28). Use the BMOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quick-

ly adjust settings when recording movies via the t(movie re-

cording) button (P 125). The movie menus contain options for use when recording mov-

ies via the shutter button in F(movie) mode (P 126). The movie frame size, frame rate, destination card slot, and the like can be selected using MEDIA REC SETTING. Focus mode is selected using G AF/MF SETTING> F FOCUS MODE in the movie menus. Regardless of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choos-

ing MANUAL FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection. O Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of menus automatically apply in the other. Depth of Field Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be ad-

justed when the mode dial is set to A(aperture-priority AE) or M(manual). 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 96 Viewing Movies View movies on the camera. In full-frame playback, movies are iden-

tifi ed by a Wicon. Press the focus stick

(focus lever) down to start movie play-

back. The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed:

PLAYPLAY

+1.0 12800 Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever)

(focus lever) Up Down Full-frame playback Full-frame playback Start playback Playback in Playback in progress (xx)) progress (

Playback Playback paused (yy)) paused (

End playback Pause playback Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed Progress is shown in the display during playback. O Do not cover the speaker during playback. Start/resume playback Single frame rewind/

advance 29m59s STOP PAUSE N Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-

ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the camera monitor, press the a button. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 97 MEMO 98 Connections 99 Overview This chapter outlines features that can among other things be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer. N These features are covered here only in outline. For more information, visit the website below. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/

Supported Features This camera supports the following features:

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 Feature Feature Connecting to the Connecting to the smartphone app smartphone app USB card readers USB card readers Web camera Web camera instax printers instax printers Tethered photography Tethered photography FTP upload FTP upload RAW processing RAW processing Saving and Loading Saving and Loading Settings Settings Remote movie Remote movie recording using a web recording using a web browser browser 100 Description Description Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth and upload pictures or control the camera remotely while the smartphone displays the view through the lens. Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone via USB and copy pictures from memory cards. Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a webcam. Print pictures on connected instax printers. Take pictures from a computer to which the camera is connected (tethered) via wireless LAN or USB. You can also connect via wired LAN using an optional FT-XH file transmitter. Upload pictures to FTP servers using the optional FT-XH file transmitter. Harness image processing engine when processing RAW pictures on a computer. Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a computer. Control the camera and record movies remotely from a computer or smartphone connected via the optional FT-XH le transmitter. the power of the cameras PP 102 105 110 111 113 115 116 117 Overview Connection Settings Connections to other devices are made via settings either cho-

sen from a list of existing connection profi les using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING or newly created using CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 101 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth to copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera re-

motely while previewing the view through the lens in the smartphone display. N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when copying pictures to the smartphone. Installing Smartphone Apps Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smart-

phone app. Visit the following website and install the desired apps on your phone. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system. Connecting to a Smartphone Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth. 1 Press the x(Bluetooth) button when the camera is in shooting mode. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the xbutton during playback. 102 2 Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING X-H2S123456 Bluetooth Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) 3 Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth PAIRING Bluetooth ON/OFF 4 Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone with the camera. More information is available at the following website:

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

When pairing is complete, the cam-

era and smartphone will automati-

cally connect via Bluetooth. A white Bluetooth icon will appear in the camera display when a connection is established. N Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automati-

cally connect to the camera when the app is launched. Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smart-

phone reduces the drain on the battery. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 103 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) Using the Smartphone App Before launching the smartphone app, choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 104 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload pictures from the camera. Copying Pictures to a Smartphone Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB, select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. For Customers Using Android Devices How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB connector with which your smartphone is equipped. Type-C Type-C Use the supplied USB cable. Supplied USB cable Type-C connector (male) Type-C connector (male) C o n n e c t i o n s 5 105 Micro-B Micro-B Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable. Third-party USB cable USB OTG cable Type-C connector (male) Micro-B connector (male) Type-A connector

(male) Type-A connector

(female) O The smartphone must support USB OTG. The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-Cto Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the Camera Importer to access the camera, tap Cancel and move on to the next step. 4 On your smartphone, tap the notifi cation Connected to USB PTP. 106 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) 5 From the recommended apps, select Camera Importer. The app will automatically start and allow you to import pho-

tos and movies to your smartphone. N If the message There is no MTP device connected appears on the app, please try again from step 2. For Customers Using iOS Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter. Third-party USB cable Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter C o n n e c t i o n s 5 Type-C connector (male) Use an Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter Type-A connector (male) 1 Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your smartphone. O A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors. The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-Cto Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter. 107 Connecting the Camera and Computer 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Turn the camera off . 4 Turn the computer on. 5 Connect a USB cable. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 108 O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be suitable for data transfer. USB connector (Type-C) 6 Turn the camera on. 7 Copy pictures to your computer. Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or oth-

er software. Use a card reader to copy fi les over 4GB in size. Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using apps supplied with the operating system. Connecting to Smartphones (USB) O Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable. When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-

serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-

necting the camera. If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted, there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-

able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer pictures. Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning the camera off . Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-

alone computer. Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-

connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has ceased to be displayed. The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet connection. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 109 Using the Camera as a Webcam The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a webcam. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 6: USB WEBCAM for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). 4 Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a web-

cam. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 110 instax SHARE Printers Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE printers. Establishing a Connection Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and password. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 111 instax SHARE Printers Printing Pictures 1 Choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 2 Turn the printer on. 3 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL SET instax-12345678 CANCEL 4 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 5 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 112 Tethered Photography The camera can be controlled remotely and photographs taken from a computer connected via USB or wireless or wired LAN. N This section covers USB connections only. For information on tethered photography via wireless or wired LAN, visit the website below. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/

Tethered Photography via USB Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photog-

raphy. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose either 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or 4: USB for SELECT CONNECTION TETHER SHOOTING FIXED SETTING. O If 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho-

tography will be enabled automatically when the computer to which the camera is connected is turned on. When the com-

puter is off or not connected, tethered photography will be sus-

pended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card. If the camera is disconnected from the computer while 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to func-

tion in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). C o n n e c t i o n s 5 113 Tethered Photography 4 Take pictures via tethered photography. Use software such as Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in or FUJIFILM X Acquire. N For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-

low. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/

Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 114 RAW Processing Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the cameras image processing engine when processing RAW pictures on a computer. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). 4 Launch X RAW STUDIO. RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 115 Saving and Loading Settings Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers using FUJIFILM X Acquire. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). 4 Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire. Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X Acquire. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 116 Recording Movies Remotely from a Web Browser Control the camera and record movies remotely from a computer or smartphone connected via the optional FT-XH fi le transmitter. The computer can connect to up to four cameras. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 117 MEMO 118 Menu List 119 The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. Setting Setting IMAGE SIZE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY Description Description Choose the size and aspect ratio for new photographs. Adjust JPEG or HEIF compression settings or enable or disable RAW recording. Choose options for recording RAW images. Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF. Choose a color palette and tone range. RAW RECORDING RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR Choose a monochrome tint for photographs taken MONOCHROMATIC COLOR M e n u L i s t5 6 GRAIN EFFECT GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY D RANGE PRIORITY using FILM SIMULATION> a ACROS and b MONOCHROME. Add a lm grain e ect. Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens. blues. Match white balance to the light source, whether it be direct sunlight or arti cial lighting. Choose a dynamic range for photographs. Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-

contrast scenes. COLOR CHROME FX BLUE Increase the range of tones available for rendering COLOR CHROME FX BLUE 120 Setting Setting TONE CURVE TONE CURVE COLOR COLOR SHARPNESS SHARPNESS HIGH ISO NR HIGH ISO NR CLARITY CLARITY LONG EXPOSURE NR LONG EXPOSURE NR LENS MODULATION LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER OPTIMIZER COLOR SPACE COLOR SPACE PIXEL MAPPING PIXEL MAPPING EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING xxFF CUSTOM MODE CUSTOM MODE SETTING SETTING xxFF MOUNT ADAPTOR MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING SETTING The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) Description Description With reference to a tone curve, adjust the appearance of highlights or shadows, making them harsher or softer. Adjust color density. Sharpen or soften outlines. Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Increase de nition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Reduce mottling in long time-exposures. Reduce the slight loss of de nition caused by di rac-

tion at small apertures. Choose the gamut of colors available for color repro-

duction. Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures. Save custom shooting menu settings. Choose whether custom settings banks update auto-

matically to re ect changes to settings. Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used for still photography or movie recording. Adjust settings for M-mount lenses connected using an optional FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER. M e n u L i s t 6 121 AF/MF SETTING To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FOCUS AREA FOCUS AREA FOCUS MODE FOCUS MODE AF MODE AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS STORE AF MODE BY STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION ORIENTATION Description Description Choose the focus area. Choose how the camera focuses. Choose the size of the focus area. Select focus-tracking options for use when CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for focus mode. Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when the camera is in landscape orientation. AF POINT DISPLAY yzyz Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed AF POINT DISPLAY NUMBER OF FOCUS NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS POINTS PRE-AF PRE-AF when ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for AFMODE. Choose the number of focus points available for focus-

point selection. Choose whether the camera continues to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. xxFF AF ILLUMINATOR AF ILLUMINATOR Choose whether the AF-assist illuminator lights to gg FACE/EYE DETECTION FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING SETTING SUBJECT DETECTION SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING SETTING AF+MF AF+MF MF ASSIST MF ASSIST assist autofocus. Choose whether the camera prioritizes human faces over background objects when setting focus and exposure. Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected type, such as animals or vehicles, when set-

ting focus. Choose whether manual focus can be activated by rotating the focus ring during focus lock. Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. M e n u L i s t5 6 122 The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) Setting Setting FOCUS CHECK FOCUS CHECK INTERLOCK SPOT AE &

INTERLOCK SPOT AE &

FOCUS AREA FOCUS AREA INSTANT AF xxFF INSTANT AF SETTING SETTING Description Description Choose whether the display automatically zooms in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode. Choose whether spot metering meters the current focus frame. Choose how the camera focuses when function but-

tons to which features such as AF lock are assigned are pressed in manual focus mode. Choose a scale for depth of eld. xxFF DEPTH-OF-FIELD DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE SCALE RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY Choose whether photographs can be taken by press-

RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ing the shutter button all the way down when the camera is not in focus. xxFF AF RANGE LIMITER AF RANGE LIMITER Limit the range of available focus distances for in-

TOUCH SCREEN MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE creased focus speed. Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. SHOOTING SETTING To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the A(SHOOTING SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FILTER SETTING FILTER SETTING SPORTS FINDER MODE SPORTS FINDER MODE Description Description Take photos with lter e ects. Take pictures using the crop in the center of the display. PRE-SHOT ssJJ Choose whether to shoot bursts using the electronic PRE-SHOT shutter when the shutter button is pressed halfway. SELF-TIMER SELF-TIMER Choose a shutter release delay. SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING Choose whether self-timer settings are reset each time SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING the timer is used or when the camera is turned o . M e n u L i s t 6 123 Setting Setting SELF-TIMER LAMP SELF-TIMER LAMP INTERVAL TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING SMOOTHING AE BKT SETTING AE BKT SETTING FILM SIMULATION BKT FILM SIMULATION BKT Description Description Choose whether the self-timer lamp lights during self-

timer photography. Con gure the camera to take a selected number of shots automatically at a preset interval. Choose whether exposure is automatically adjusted during interval-timer photography to prevent it chang-

ing dramatically between shots. Adjust exposure bracketing settings. Choose the three lm simulation types used for lm simulation bracketing. Adjust settings for focus bracketing. Choose how the camera meters exposure. Choose the shutter type. Choose whether to reduce icker in pictures and the display when shooting under uorescent lighting and other similar light sources. FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING Choose whether shutter speed can be adjusted in FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING FOCUS BKT SETTING FOCUS BKT SETTING PHOTOMETRY PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION FLICKER REDUCTION M e n u L i s t5 6 IS MODE IS MODE ISOISO x xFF COOLING FAN COOLING FAN SETTING SETTING xxFF WIRELESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION smaller increments in order to reduce icker with LED lighting and the like. Choose whether to enable image stabilization. Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Adjust settings for optional cooling fans. Establish wireless connections to smartphones, tablets, or other devices. 124 The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) FLASH SETTING To display fl ash settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting dis-

play and select the F(FLASH SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Adjust such settings as ash control mode, ash level, FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Description Description and ash power. Choose whether to remove red-eye e ects caused by the ash. Choose a TTL lock mode. Choose whether to use the ash units LED video light

(if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. Choose groups when using the camera ash unit as a commander for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control. Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote ash units. RED EYE REMOVAL RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING CH SETTING MOVIE SETTING To display movie settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab. Setting Setting MOVIE MODE MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC HIGH SPEED REC MEDIA REC SETTING MEDIA REC SETTING IS MODE FF IS MODE FF IS MODE BOOST IS MODE BOOST AUDIO SETTING AUDIO SETTING Description Description Adjust movie recording settings. Adjust settings for high-speed movies. Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, and compression. Choose whether to enable image stabilization. Choose the image stabilization level. Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording. M e n u L i s t 6 125 The Shooting Menus (Movies) N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. MOVIE SETTING To display options for movie recording, press MENU/OK in the mov-

ie shooting display and select the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab. Setting Setting MOVIE SETTING LIST MOVIE SETTING LIST SHOOTING MODE SHOOTING MODE MOVIE MODE MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC HIGH SPEED REC MEDIA REC SETTING MEDIA REC SETTING Description Description View current movie recording settings. Choose the shooting mode for movie recording. Adjust movie recording settings. Adjust settings for high-speed movies. Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, and compression. HDMI OUTPUT SETTING Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is HDMI OUTPUT SETTING output to an HDMI device. Choose whether to x the movie crop ratio at 1.381. FIX MOVIE CROP FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION MAGNIFICATION F-Log/HLG RECORDING Choose the destination for F-Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-

F-Log/HLG RECORDING 6 DATA LEVEL SETTING DATA LEVEL SETTING FF PHOTOMETRY PHOTOMETRY FF FLICKERLESS S.S. FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING SETTING Gamma) movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device. Choose the signal range for movies recorded with the camera. Choose how the camera meters exposure. Choose whether shutter speed can be adjusted in smaller increments in order to reduce icker with LED lighting and the like. M e n u L i s t5 126 Setting Setting IS MODE FF IS MODE FF IS MODE BOOST IS MODE BOOST FF ISO ISO ZEBRA SETTING ZEBRA SETTING ZEBRA LEVEL ZEBRA LEVEL MOVIE OPTIMIZED MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL oL CONTROL TALLY LIGHT TALLY LIGHT x xFF COOLING FAN COOLING FAN SETTING SETTING FF EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING FF AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING CUSTOM MODE xxFF CUSTOM MODE SETTING SETTING xxFF WIRELESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION The Shooting Menus (Movies) Description Description Choose whether to enable image stabilization. Choose the image stabilization level. Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Choose whether highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes in the movie mode display. Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display. Settings can be adjusted using the command dials and touch-screen controls. Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. Adjust settings for optional cooling fans. Save custom shooting menu settings. Choose whether custom settings banks update auto-

matically to re ect changes to settings. Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used for still photography or movie recording. Establish wireless connections to smartphones, tablets, or other devices. M e n u L i s t 6 127 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FILM SIMULATION FF FILM SIMULATION FF MONOCHROMATIC MONOCHROMATIC COLOR COLOR WHITE BALANCE FF WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE FF DYNAMIC RANGE TONE CURVE FF TONE CURVE FF COLOR COLOR FF SHARPNESS SHARPNESS FF HIGH ISO NR HIGH ISO NR INTERFRAME NR INTERFRAME NR FF PERIPHERAL LIGHT PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION CORRECTION xxFF MOUNT ADAPTOR MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING SETTING AF/MF SETTING M e n u L i s t5 6 Description Description Choose a lm simulation e ect for movie recording. Choose a monochrome tint for movies recorded using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS and b MONOCHROME. Match white balance to the light source, whether it be direct sunlight or arti cial lighting. Choose a dynamic range for movie recording. With reference to a tone curve, adjust the appearance of highlights or shadows, making them harsher or softer. Adjust color density. Sharpen or soften outlines. Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose whether to reduce inter-frame noise. Choose whether to reduce vignetting when shooting movies. Adjust settings for M-mount lenses connected using an optional FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER. To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FF FOCUS AREA FOCUS AREA FOCUS MODE FF FOCUS MODE AF MODE FF AF MODE Description Description Choose the focus area. Choose how the camera focuses. Choose the size of the focus area. 128 The Shooting Menus (Movies) Setting Setting FF AF-C CUSTOM SETTING AF-C CUSTOM SETTING Choose focus-tracking options when recording movies with CONTINUOUS AF selected for focus mode. AF ILLUMINATOR Choose whether the AF-assist illuminator lights to xxFF AF ILLUMINATOR Description Description assist autofocus. Choose whether the camera prioritizes human faces over background objects when setting focus and exposure. Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected type, such as animals or vehicles, when set-

ting focus. Choose whether manual focus can be activated by rotating the focus ring during focus lock. Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Choose whether the display automatically zooms in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode. Choose how the camera focuses when function but-

tons to which features such as AF lock are assigned are pressed in manual focus mode. Choose a scale for depth of eld. FACE/EYE FgFg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING DETECTION SETTING FF SUBJECT DETECTION SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING SETTING AF+MF FF AF+MF MF ASSIST FF MF ASSIST FOCUS CHECK FF FOCUS CHECK xxFF INSTANT AF INSTANT AF SETTING SETTING xxFF DEPTH-OF-FIELD DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE SCALE xxFF AF RANGE LIMITER AF RANGE LIMITER Limit the range of available focus distances for in-

creased focus speed. FF TOUCH SCREEN MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using FOCUS CHECK LOCK FOCUS CHECK LOCK touch controls. Choose whether focus zoom remains in e ect once movie recording begins. M e n u L i s t 6 129 AUDIO SETTING To display audio settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the P(AUDIO SETTING) tab. Setting Setting INTERNAL MIC LEVEL INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT MIC JACK SETTING MIC JACK SETTING MIC LEVEL LIMITER MIC LEVEL LIMITER WIND FILTER WIND FILTER LOW CUT FILTER LOW CUT FILTER Description Description Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone. Adjust the recording level for external microphones. Specify the type of audio device connected to the microphone jack. Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the microphones audio circuits. Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction dur-

ing movie recording. Choose whether to reduce low-frequency noise during movie recording. HEADPHONES VOLUME HEADPHONES VOLUME Adjust the headphone volume. XLR MIC ADAPTER XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING SETTING Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use with XLR microphone adapters. M e n u L i s t5 6 130 The Shooting Menus (Movies) TIME CODE SETTING To display time code settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shoot-

ing display and select the Q(TIME CODE SETTING) tab. Setting Setting TIME CODE DISPLAY TIME CODE DISPLAY START TIME SETTING START TIME SETTING COUNT UP SETTING COUNT UP SETTING Description Description Choose whether to display time codes during movie recording and playback. Choose the time code starting time. Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during movie recording. Choose whether to enable frame drop. DROP FRAME DROP FRAME HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT devices. M e n u L i s t 6 131 The Playback Menu The playback menu is displayed when you press MENU/OK in play-

back mode. Setting Setting SWITCH SLOT SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION RAW CONVERSION HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION CONVERSION ERASE ERASE Description Description Choose the card from which images will be played back. Copy RAW pictures in other formats. Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF. Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures. SIMULTANEOUS DELETE Choose whether deleting either the RAW or JPEG/

SIMULTANEOUS DELETE HEIF copy of pictures recorded simultaneously to the memory cards Slots 1 and 2 with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> x CARD SLOT SETTING deletes the remaining copy. Create a cropped copy of the current picture. Create a small copy of the current picture. Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Choose whether pictures are rotated for display during playback. Choose whether to add voice memos to photographs. Rate pictures using stars. Copy pictures between the cards in the rst and second slots. Select pictures for later upload to a smartphone. Establish wireless connections to smartphones, tablets, or other devices. CROP CROP RESIZE RESIZE PROTECT PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE IMAGE ROTATE VOICE MEMO SETTING VOICE MEMO SETTING RATING RATING COPY COPY TRANSFER IMAGE TO TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE SMARTPHONE xxFF WIRELESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION M e n u L i s t5 6 132 The Playback Menu Setting Setting SLIDE SHOW SLIDE SHOW PHOTOBOOK ASSIST PHOTOBOOK ASSIST PRINT ORDER (DPOF) PRINT ORDER (DPOF) instax PRINTER PRINT instax PRINTER PRINT DISP ASPECT DISP ASPECT Description Description View pictures in an automated slide show. Create books from your favorite photos. Create a digital print order for DPOF-compatible printers. Print pictures on optional Fuji lm instax SHARE print-

ers. Choose the aspect ratio for pictures displayed on a TV. M e n u L i s t 6 133 The Setup Menus USER SETTING To access basic camera settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SETUP) tab, and choose USER SETTING. Setting Setting FORMAT FORMAT bb AREA SETTING AREA SETTING DATE/TIME DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE TIME DIFFERENCE Description Description Format memory cards. Choose your location. Set the camera clock. Switch between your home time zone and the time zone in your current location. QQ aa Choose a language. MY MENU SETTING xx MY MENU SETTING MY MENU SETTING FF MY MENU SETTING M e n u L i s t5 6 SENSOR CLEANING SENSOR CLEANING BATTERY AGE BATTERY AGE RESET RESET REGULATORY REGULATORY Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options. Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options. Remove dust from the camera image sensor. Check battery age. Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values. View electronic copies of the product model number and other certi cates. 134 The Setup Menus SOUND SET-UP To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SOUND SET-UP. Setting Setting AF BEEP VOL. AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. OPERATION VOL. tttt ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME SHUTTER VOLUME tttt ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND SHUTTER SOUND ss ELECTRONIC SHUTTER ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME VOLUME ss ELECTRONIC SHUTTER ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND SOUND PLAYBACK VOLUME PLAYBACK VOLUME 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK Description Description Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer is active. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or electronic front-curtain shutter. Choose the sound made by the mechanical or elec-

tronic front-curtain shutter. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic shutter. Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter. Adjust the volume for movie playback. Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch mov-

ies. M e n u L i s t 6 135 SCREEN SET-UP To access display settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose SCREEN SET-UP. Setting Setting VIEW MODE SETTING VIEW MODE SETTING EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF COLOR EVF COLOR Description Description Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic view-

nder), or LCD monitor view modes. Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic view nder. Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic view nder. EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the electronic view-

EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT PREVIEW EXP./WB IN PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW NATURAL LIVE VIEW nder. LCD BRIGHTNESS LCD BRIGHTNESS Adjust monitor brightness. LCD COLOR LCD COLOR Adjust monitor saturation. LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor. IMAGE DISP. IMAGE DISP. Choose how long images are displayed after shooting. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS Choose whether the indicators in the view nder(EVF) AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS and LCD monitor rotate to match camera orientation. Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview. Choose whether the e ects of settings are visible in the monitor. Choose whether to display a tone-corrected preview

(equivalent to BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies. Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual horizon display. Choose a framing grid for shooting mode. Choose whether to automatically rotate tall (portrait-

orientation) pictures during playback. ELECTRONIC LEVEL ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING SETTING FRAMING GUIDELINE FRAMING GUIDELINE AUTOROTATE PB AUTOROTATE PB F-Log VIEW ASSIST F-Log VIEW ASSIST M e n u L i s t5 6 136 The Setup Menus Setting Setting FOCUS SCALE UNITS FOCUS SCALE UNITS APERTURE UNIT FOR APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS CINEMA LENS Description Description Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator. Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number or an f/-number when an optional cinema lens is attached. DUAL DISPLAY SETTING Choose the content of the two windows in the dual DUAL DISPLAY SETTING display. DISP. CUSTOM SETTING Choose the items shown in the standard indicator DISP. CUSTOM SETTING display. Choose whether to display large indicators in the view nder (EVF). Choose whether to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. Choose the indicators displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). Adjust display contrast. LARGE INDICATORS LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) MODE(EVF) LARGE INDICATORS LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) MODE(LCD) LARGE INDICATORS DISP. LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING SETTING INFORMATION CONTRAST INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.ADJ. LOCATION INFO LOCATION INFO Choose whether to display location information down-

loaded from smartphones. SUB MONITOR SETTING Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD SUB MONITOR SETTING SUB MONITOR SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR BACKGROUND COLOR Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose a background for the quick menu for use when xx Q MENU BACKGROUND monitor. Choose a background color for the secondary LCD monitor. M e n u L i s t 6 FF Q MENU BACKGROUND Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose a background for the quick menu for use when taking photographs. taking lming movies. 137 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING To access control options, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. Description Description Setting Setting FOCUS LEVER SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING Choose the functions performed by the focus stick

(focus lever). Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography. Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when lming movies. xx EDIT/SAVE QUICK EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUMENU FF EDIT/SAVE QUICK EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUMENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the function buttons. FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING POWER ZOOM LENS FUNC-

POWER ZOOM LENS FUNC-

Choose the roles played by the function buttons TION (Fn) SETTING TION (Fn) SETTING available on some power zoom lenses. SELECTOR BUTTON SELECTOR BUTTON Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and SETTING SETTING right buttons on the selector. COMMAND DIAL SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING Choose the roles played by the command dials. S.S OPERATION oo S.S OPERATION M e n u L i s t5 6 COMMAND DIAL COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION DIRECTION SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT LENS Choose whether to enable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials. Choose whether to reverse command dial rotation for use when adjusting settings. Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose whether exposure locks (AE lock) while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose whether the shutter-release is enabled when no lens is attached. SHOOT WITHOUT CARD Choose whether the shutter can be released without a SHOOT WITHOUT CARD LENS ZOOM/FOCUS LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING SETTING memory card inserted in the camera. Adjust settings for lenses with focus rings or power zoom. 138 The Setup Menus Setting Setting AE/AF-LOCK MODE AE/AF-LOCK MODE Description Description Choose the role of the button to which exposure and/

or focus lock is assigned. Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance (AWB) lock. ISO BUTTON SETTING Choose the role played by the ISO button during AWB-LOCK MODE AWB-LOCK MODE aa ISO BUTTON SETTING playback. TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Choose whether to enable touch controls in the LCD TOUCH SCREEN SETTING LOCK LOCK monitor. Lock camera controls to prevent unintended operation. POWER MANAGEMENT To access power management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. Description Description Setting Setting AUTO POWER OFF AUTO POWER OFF Choose whether the camera turns o automatically when no operations are performed. Adjust power settings. PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING BOOST is selected for PERFORMANCE. AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. Choose the temperature at which the camera turns o AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. automatically when its temperature rises. M e n u L i s t 6 139 The Setup Menus SAVE DATA SET-UP To access fi le management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. Setting Setting FRAME NO. FRAME NO. Description Description Choose whether le numbering is reset when a new memory card is inserted. Change the le name pre x. EDIT FILE NAME EDIT FILE NAME CARD SLOT SETTING Choose the roles played by the cards in Slot 1 and Slot x x CARD SLOT SETTING SELECT SLOT SELECT SLOT SEQUENTIAL)

((xxSEQUENTIAL) SELECT FOLDER SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO COPYRIGHT INFO DEFAULT CAPTION DEFAULT CAPTION GEOTAGGING GEOTAGGING 2 during still photography. Choose the card that is recorded to rst when SEQUENTIAL is selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING. Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent pictures. Choose whether to add copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, to new images as they are taken. Choose a caption to be recorded with new images as they are taken. Choose whether location information downloaded from smartphones is recorded with new images as they are taken. M e n u L i s t5 6 140 Network/USB Setting Menus To access network/USB settings, press MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB settings) tab. N For information on the network/USB settings menu, visit the website below. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/

M e n u L i s t 6 141 MEMO 142 Notices 143 For Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-

tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-

turer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Antennas Antennas Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-

tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-

ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Ground Clamp e Equipment Electric Service Equipment t Ground Clamps Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC ART 250. PART H) AAntenna Lead in Wire AAAntenna An Discharge Unit D N

(NEC SECTION 8 810-20) Grounding Conductors (NEC SECTION 810-21) Read Instructions Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. Retain Instructions Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions Follow Instructions: All operating and use should be followed. instructions Installation Installation Power Sources: This video product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-

bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-

pany. For video products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will t into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to t, contact your electri-

cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third

(grounding) pin. This plug will only t into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-

place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of re or electric shock. Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-

uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been ad-

hered to. This video product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-

terfor example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 144 N o t i c e s 7 For Your Safety Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-

ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. UseUse Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-

fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into this video product through openings as they may touch dan-

gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the video product. Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-

ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and power-line surges. Service Service Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali ed service personnel. Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to quali ed service person-

nel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the video product. If the video product has been exposed to rain or water. If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. If the video product does not operate normally follow the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-

ment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali ed technician to restore the video product to its normal operation. When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-

i ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to this video product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-

er operating condition. Be sure to read these notes before use The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-

resent the following:

Safety Notes Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. AC DC WARNING WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious in-

jury can result if the information is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. Unplug from power socket The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). N o t i c e s 7 Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.) WARNING WARNING If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC power adapter. power adapter. Continued use of the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

era or connecting cables. era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids. Should liquid nd its way into the camera or con-

necting cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. 145 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean water and seek medical attention or call an emergency water and seek medical attention or call an emergency number right away. number right away. Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than those specifi ed here. those specifi ed here. The supplied charger is for use only with batteries of the type supplied with the camera. Using the charger to charge conventional batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst. Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual impairment. visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-

tographing infants and young children. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the product for prolonged periods while the product is on. product for prolonged periods while the product is on. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-

longed use, at high ambient temperatures, when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP., or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

sive gases, or dust. sive gases, or dust. When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the battery terminals with insulation tape. battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with other metallic objects or batteries could cause the battery to ignite or burst. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out of the reach of small children. out of the reach of small children. Children may swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical attention or call emergency. Keep out of reach of small children. Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-

ments that could cause injury are the strap, which could become entangled about a childs neck, causing strangulation, and the ash, which could cause visual impairment. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. This product generates radio-frequency emissions that could interfere with navigational or medical equipment. Do not use in the bathroom or shower Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. can cause a re or electric shock. Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-

Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-

er open the case). er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

accident, do not touch the exposed parts. serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-

move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord. tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and cause a re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not use cables with bent connectors. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause injury. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not use the camera while walking or driving. This can result in you falling down or being involved in a tra c accident. Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a thunderstorm. thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due to induced current from the lightning discharge. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Load the battery as shown by the indicator. Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-

abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-

charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-

charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-

charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking, causing re, burns, or other injury. Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the power supply voltage shown. power supply voltage shown. The use of other power sources can cause a re. N o t i c e s 7 146 CAUTION CAUTION Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a re fumes, steam, humidity or dust. or electric shock. Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely high temperatures. high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-

tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight. This can cause a re. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause injury. Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still connected. still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage the power cord or cables and cause a re or electric shock. Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-

Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-

er in a cloth or blanket. er in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build up and distort the casing or cause a re. Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t securely into the outlet. securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-

caution could result in re or electric shock. When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Failure to do so can cause a re or electric shock. When charging ends, unplug the charger from the When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power socket. power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the power socket can cause a re. When a memory card is removed, the card could come When a memory card is removed, the card could come out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. gently release the card. Injury could result to those struck by the ejected card. Do not handle the memory card immediately after Do not handle the memory card immediately after shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting shooting. in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing it from the camera. Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your camera. camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer to request internal cleaning every two years. Please note that this service is not free of charge. Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-

Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-

tions. tions. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. the like. For Your Safety N o t i c e s 7 147 The Battery and Power Supply Cautions: Handling the Battery Cautions: Handling the Battery Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-

laces or hairpins. Do not expose to ame or heat. Do not disassemble or modify. Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures. Use with designated chargers only. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks. Do not expose to water. Keep the terminals clean. The battery and camera body may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal. Caution: Disposal Disposal Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate. Do not mechanically crush or split batteries. AC Power Adapters AC Power Adapters The AC power adapter is for indoor use only. Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera. Turn the camera o before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-

connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable. Do not disassemble. Do not expose to high heat and humidity. Do not subject to strong physical shocks. The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during use. This is normal. If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read the appropriate sections. WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. The following describes the proper use of batteries and how to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or cause leakage, overheating, re, or explosion. Li-ion Batteries Li-ion Batteries Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. Notes on the Battery Notes on the Battery The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. Battery life can be extended by turning the camera o when not in use. Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating devices. Charging the Battery Charging the Battery The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below

+10 C (+50 F) or above +35 C (+95 F). Do not attempt to charge the battery at temperatures above +40 C (+104 F); at temperatures below +5 C (+41 F), the battery will not charge. Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery does not however need to be fully discharged before charging. The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after charging or use. This is normal. Battery Life Battery Life A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-

vice life and should be replaced. If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may nd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge the battery regularly. Storage Storage If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-

mately one half to capacity. If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-

move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient temperature of from +15 C to +25 C (+59 F to +77 F). Do not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature. 148 N o t i c e s 7 For Your Safety Using the Camera Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, including arti cial light sources or natural light sources such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera image sensor. Strong sunlight focused through the view nder may dam-

age the panel of electronic view nder (EVF). Do not aim the electronic view nder at the sun. Take Test Shots Take Test Shots Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept liability for damages or lost pro ts incurred as a result of product malfunction. Notes on Copyright Notes on Copyright Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-

er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. Handling Handling To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are being recorded. Liquid Crystal Liquid Crystal In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-

en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action indicated should any of the following situations arise:

If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and running water. If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ush the a ected eye with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-

iting, then seek medical assistance. Although the display is manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and images recorded with the product are una ected. Trademark Information Trademark Information Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Tai-

wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS, Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photo-

shop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other coun-

tries. Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Fuji lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA

(CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of their respective owners. Electrical Interference Electrical Interference This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-

ment. Consult with hospital or airline sta before using the camera in a hospital or on an aircraft. Color Television Systems Color Television Systems NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-

vision telecasting speci cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A., Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color television system adopted mainly in European countries and China. Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera le format in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-

or reproduction during printing. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-

ware without the permission of the applicable governing bodies is prohibited. Lenses and Other Accessories Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod. Fuji lm will not be held liable for performance issues or damage caused by the use of third-party accessories. N o t i c e s 7 149 Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-

ernments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci c Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certi ed power level in all tested frequency bands. Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this product must be used with a Fuji lm-speci ed fer-

rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord. A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Di-

vision 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Ef-

ciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through 1609 To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Please read the Safety Notes and make sure you understand them before using the camera. NOTICES Perchlorate Materialspecial handling may apply. See:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate For Customers in the U. S. A. For Customers in the U. S. A. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25 Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25 FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-

vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-

lowing measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and re-

ceiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di erent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modi cations not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter. N o t i c e s 7 150 For Customers in Canada For Customers in Canada CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B) CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-

dian ICES-003. Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-

try Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-

terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-

erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scienti c evi-

dence does not show that any health problems are asso-

ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health e ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating e ects causes no known adverse health e ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological e ects. Some studies have suggested that some biological e ects might occur, but such ndings have not been con rmed by additional research. X-H2S has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-

nel mobile satellite systems. For Your Safety Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-

vironment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. This symbol on the batteries or accumulators indicates that those batteries shall not be treated as household waste. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-

mulators please dispose these separately according to your local requirements. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-

sources. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city o ce, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-

thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal. In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates that they are to be disposed of separately. To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Caring for the Camera Storage and Use Storage and Use If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera in locations that are:

exposed to rain, steam, or smoke very humid or extremely dusty exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day extremely cold subject to strong vibration exposed to strong magnetic elds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer, or magnet in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides next to rubber or vinyl products N o t i c e s 7 151 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions This product complies with the following EU Directives:

RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU RE Directive 2014/53/EU Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF210002 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-h2s/pdf/x-h2s_doc-nkt.pdf The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-h2s/pdf/x-h2s_doc-nkt_uk.pdf This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth). Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):

WLAN 2.4 GHz: 10.81 dBm WLAN 5 GHz: 12.56 dBm Bluetooth: 1.86 dBm IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the cameras built-in wireless transmitter. Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.. Fuji lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater degree of reliability than o ered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to ensure safety and prevent malfunction. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device. Fuji lm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference that may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-

tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.

- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access rights.

- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.

- This device cannot be directly connected to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services. The following may be punishable by law:

The following may be punishable by law:

- Disassembly or modi cation or this device

- Removal of device certi cation labels This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-

ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Con rm that the RFID transmitter is not in operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the a ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fuji lm representative. N o t i c e s 7 152 For Your Safety Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-

uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when o . This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in the network/USB setting menu before boarding. Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/

UK/HR. 5150 MHz5350 MHz is for indoor use only. Wireless specifi cations follow. Wireless specifi cations follow. Wireless LAN Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency)

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels)

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels)

: 5,180 MHz5,320 MHz (W52, W53)

: 5,745 MHz5,825 MHz (UNII-3) IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol) Israel, Indonesia USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore, Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain, Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels)

: 5,180 MHz5,320 MHz (W52, W53)

: 5,500 MHz5,700 MHz (W56) Infrastructure Access protocols Bluetooth Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) 2,402 MHz2,480 MHz Specifi c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information Specifi c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certi ed output power level in all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.235 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue. U.K. Importer:

FUJIFILM UK Limited Fuji lm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom EU Importer:

FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany N o t i c e s 7 153 Be sure to read these notes before using the lens Safety Notes Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING WARNING CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that death or serious injury can result if the information is ig-

nored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Do not immerse Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). WARNING WARNING Do not immerse in or expose to water. Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution can cause a re or electric shock. Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re, electric shock, or injury due to product malfunction. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-

move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not place on unstable surfaces. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may fall, causing injury. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

fi nders. fi nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause permanent visual impairment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re. Keep out of the reach of small children. Keep out of the reach of small children. This product could cause injury in the hands of a child. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution can cause electric shock. Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects. subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame can cause re or burns. When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the store out of direct sunlight. lens can cause re or burns. Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached to a tripod. to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-

jects, causing injury. N o t i c e s 7 154 For Your Safety AC-5VJ AC power adapter Manufacturer Address Model name Rated input Input capacity Rated output Average active effi ciency Effi ciency at load 10%

No-load power consumption Operating temperature Weight Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd. No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town, 523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province, PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AC-5VJ 100 V 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Max. 50 VA DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W 84.8 %

84.2 %

0.02 W 0 C to +40 C/+32 F to +104 F Approx. 45 g 2 g/1.6 oz. 0.1 oz. N o t i c e s 7 155

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 156

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 157

158

159 MEMO 160 MEMO 161 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN https://fujifilm-x.com

 

 

FF210003 Basic Manual Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual handy for future reference once you have fi nished. The latest versions of the product manuals are available at the website be-

low. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The website above, which provides detailed instruc-

tions and material not covered in this guide, can be accessed from a computer, smartphone, or tablet. It also contains information on the software license. BL00005178-200 EN MEMO ii P Chapter Index 1 Before You Begin 2 First Steps 3 Taking and Viewing Photos 4 Movie Recording and Playback 5 Connections 6 Menu List 7 Notices 1 37 55 91 99 119 143 iii P Table of Contents Chapter Index ................................................................................................iii Supplied Accessories ............................................................................... viii About This Manual .......................................................................................ix Symbols and Conventions ..................................................................................ix Terminology .................................................................................................................ix 1 Before You Begin Before You Begin 1 1 Parts of the Camera ......................................................................................2 The Serial Number Plate ........................................................................................6 The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable) ..............................................6 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) .............................................................................7 The Selector ..................................................................................................................7 The WB Button .............................................................................................................7 The Mode Dial .............................................................................................................8 The DRIVE Button .......................................................................................................9 The Command Dials ............................................................................................. 10 The Indicator Lamp ............................................................................................... 11 The LCD Monitor ..................................................................................................... 12 The Eye Cup ............................................................................................................... 13 Focusing the Viewfi nder..................................................................................... 13 Camera Displays.......................................................................................... 14 The Electronic Viewfi nder .................................................................................. 14 The LCD Monitor ..................................................................................................... 16 Choosing a Display Mode ................................................................................. 18 Adjusting Display Brightness ........................................................................... 20 Display Rotation ...................................................................................................... 20 The DISP/BACK Button ........................................................................................ 21 The Dual Display...................................................................................................... 22 Customizing the Standard Display .............................................................. 23 Virtual Horizon .......................................................................................................... 25 The Secondary LCD Monitor ........................................................................... 26 iv Table of Contents Using the Menus ......................................................................................... 28 The Menus .................................................................................................................. 28 Selecting a Menu Tab ........................................................................................... 30 Touch Screen Mode ................................................................................... 31 Shooting Touch Controls ................................................................................... 31 Playback Touch Controls .................................................................................... 36 2 First Steps First Steps 37 37 Attaching the Strap ................................................................................... 38 Attaching a Lens ......................................................................................... 39 Inserting the Battery ................................................................................. 40 Inserting Memory Cards .......................................................................... 42 Using Two Cards ...................................................................................................... 44 Charging the Battery ................................................................................. 45 Turning the Camera On and Off ............................................................ 49 Basic Setup.................................................................................................... 50 Choosing a Diff erent Language .................................................................... 53 Changing the Time and Date .......................................................................... 53 3 Taking and Viewing Photos Taking and Viewing Photos 55 55 P, S, A, and M Modes .................................................................................. 56 Mode P: Program AE ............................................................................................. 56 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE .............................................................................. 57 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE .......................................................................... 59 Mode M: Manual Exposure ............................................................................... 60 FILTER ............................................................................................................................. 63 Custom Modes ......................................................................................................... 64 Autofocus ...................................................................................................... 72 Focus Mode ................................................................................................................ 73 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ........................................................................ 74 Focus-Point Selection .......................................................................................... 76 v Manual Focus ............................................................................................... 80 Checking Focus........................................................................................................ 81 Sensitivity ...................................................................................................... 83 AUTO............................................................................................................................... 84 Metering ........................................................................................................ 85 Exposure Compensation ......................................................................... 86 Focus/Exposure Lock ................................................................................ 87 Other Controls .......................................................................................................... 88 Viewing Pictures ......................................................................................... 89 Deleting Pictures ........................................................................................ 90 4 Movie Recording and Playback Movie Recording and Playback 91 91 Recording Movies ....................................................................................... 92 Recording Movies ................................................................................................... 92 Adjusting Movie Settings .................................................................................. 96 Viewing Movies ........................................................................................... 97 5 Connections Connections 99 99 Overview .....................................................................................................100 Supported Features ............................................................................................ 100 Connection Settings .......................................................................................... 101 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) ........................................102 Installing Smartphone Apps ......................................................................... 102 Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................................... 102 Using the Smartphone App .......................................................................... 104 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) ....................................................105 Copying Pictures to a Smartphone .......................................................... 105 Connecting the Camera and Computer ............................................... 108 Using the Camera as a Webcam ..........................................................110 instax SHARE Printers ..............................................................................111 Establishing a Connection ............................................................................. 111 Printing Pictures.................................................................................................... 112 vi Table of Contents Tethered Photography ...........................................................................113 Tethered Photography via USB ................................................................... 113 RAW Processing .........................................................................................115 Saving and Loading Settings ...............................................................116 Recording Movies Remotely from a Web Browser .......................117 6 Menu List Menu List 119 119 The Shooting Menus (Still Photography).........................................120 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING ............................................................................... 120 AF/MF SETTING ..................................................................................................... 122 SHOOTING SETTING ........................................................................................... 123 FLASH SETTING ..................................................................................................... 125 MOVIE SETTING ..................................................................................................... 125 The Shooting Menus (Movies) .............................................................126 MOVIE SETTING ..................................................................................................... 126 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING ............................................................................... 128 AF/MF SETTING ..................................................................................................... 128 AUDIO SETTING .................................................................................................... 130 TIME CODE SETTING .......................................................................................... 131 The Playback Menu ..................................................................................132 The Setup Menus ......................................................................................134 USER SETTING ........................................................................................................ 134 SOUND SET-UP ...................................................................................................... 135 SCREEN SET-UP...................................................................................................... 136 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.................................................................................... 138 POWER MANAGEMENT .................................................................................... 139 SAVE DATA SET-UP ............................................................................................... 140 Network/USB Setting Menus ...............................................................141 7 Notices Notices 143 143 For Your Safety ...........................................................................................144 vii Supplied Accessories The following are included with the camera:

NP-W235 rechargeable battery O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment. The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be sure to charge the battery before use (P 45). AC-5VJ AC power adapter Plug adapter USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.) Body cap (comes attached to camera) Shoulder strap Cable protector Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe) Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera) File transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover

(comes attached to camera) Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera) Basic Manual (this manual) N If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included. The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region. Visit the website below for information on the software available for your camera. https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/

viii About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-H2 digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual:

O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. product. N Additional information that may be helpful when using the P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplifi ed, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as memory cards. The electronic viewfi nder may be referred to as the EVF and the LCD monitor as the LCD. Smartphones and tablets are referred to as smartphones. ix MEMO x Before You Begin 1 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i S Lens release button ........................................39 T Fn2 button U AF-assist illuminator Self-timer lamp Tally light A ISO button .........................................................83 B WB button ...........................................................7 C Fn1 button D Secondary LCD monitor................................26 E Microphone ......................................................92 F Hot shoe G Diopter adjustment control .........................13 H Dial lock release .......................................56, 92 I Mode dial ............................................................8 J Strap eyelet .......................................................38 K HDMI connector cover L Microphone jack cover M Headphone jack cover N Speaker ..............................................................97 O USB connector cover P Sync terminal Q Fn3 button R Lens signal contacts O b Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long. V Front command dial ......................................10 W ON/OFF switch .................................................49 X Shutter button Y t (movie recording) button .......................92 Z Hot shoe cover a Body cap ............................................................39 b HDMI connector (Type A) c Microphone jack (3.5mm) ........................95 d Headphone jack (3.5mm) e USB connector (Type-C) ...............................45 f Hole to screw USB cable g Hole to screw cable protector 2 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i h DRIVE button ......................................................9 b (delete) button ...........................................90 i a (playback) button ...................................89 j Eye sensor ..........................................................19 k Electronic view nder (EVF)

.....................................................14, 18, 20, 31 l Eye cup (lockable) ...........................................13 m VIEW MODE button .........................................18 n Secondary monitor backlight button .......27 o Focus stick (focus lever)............................ 7, 76 p AFON button .....................................................88 q Rear command dial .......................................10 r Indicator lamp .................................................11 Tally light s Remote release connector cover ................62 t Memory card slot cover latch ......................42 u Memory card slot cover (detachable)

..................................................................... 6, 42 v Battery-chamber cover latch ......................40 w Battery-chamber cover .................................40 x Selector buttons ................................................7 y MENU/OK button .............................................28 z DISP (display)/BACK button .........................21 x(Bluetooth) button ..................................102 0 Q (quick menu) button 1 AEL (exposure lock) button ..........................88 2 Tripod mount 3 Vari-angle LCD monitor ..................12, 16, 18 Touch screen ....................................................31 4 File transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover 3 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 5 Remote release connector (2.5mm) .......62 6 Memory card slot2

(for SD memory cards) ...............................42 7 Serial number plate 8 Memory card slot1

- Battery chamber .............................................40

^ Cooling fan connector cover

\ Cooling fan connector Hole to screw cooling fan File transmitter/vertical battery grip

(for Type B CFexpress cards) ......................42 9 Battery latch ....................................................41 connector 4 Parts of the Camera The Cable Protector Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection. A Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the cover passes through the slot in the protector. B Tighten the lock screw. C Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 5 The Serial Number Plate Do not remove the serial number plate, which provides the CMIITID, serial num-

ber, and other important information. Serial number plate 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable) The memory card slot cover can be re-

moved by lowering the interior latch. Re-

move the cover for ease of access when a camera rig is attached or in other sit-

uations that make it diffi cult to open or close the cover. 6 Parts of the Camera The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-

cus area. The focus stick can also be used to navigate the menus. N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the cen-

ter of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING. The Selector Press the selector up (e), right (h), down (f), or left (g) to highlight items. The up, right, down, and left buttons also double as function buttons Fn4 through Fn7. The WB Button Press the WB button to access white bal-

ance settings. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 7 The Mode Dial To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until the icon for the desired mode aligns with the index. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode A P (PROGRAM AE) B S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE) A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE) M (MANUAL) C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6/C7

(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6/7) D FILTER (FILTER) E F (MOVIE) Description Description Aperture and shutter speed can be adjusted using program shift. Select for full control over camera settings, including aperture (M and A) and/or shutter speed (M and S). Take pictures using previously-stored settings. Take photos with lter e ects. Record movies. PP 56 57 59 60 64 63 92 8 Parts of the Camera The DRIVE Button Pressing the DRIVE button displays drive-

mode menu, where you can choose from the following the drive modes. ModeMode B Single frame J High-speed burst O Low-speed burst W ISO BKT V WHITE BALANCE BKT ModeMode BKT Bracketing h HDR u Panorama j Multiple Exposure p PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 9 The Command Dials The rear and front command dials are used for the operations below. Front command dial Rear command dial 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i P Choose the desired combi-

nation of shutter speed and aperture (program shift). Choose a shutter speed. S Adjust aperture. 2 A M Choose a shutter speed. Shooting 1 Shooting FILTER Program shift. Menus Menus Q Menu Q Menu Select menu tabs or page through menus. Select items in the quick menu. Playback Playback View other pictures. Adjust exposure compensa-

tion. Adjust aperture. 2 Adjust exposure compensa-

tion. Highlight menu items. Adjust settings in the quick menu. Zoom in or out (full-frame playback). Zoom in or out (multi-frame playback). 1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 2 Applies if the lens has no aperture ring or if an aperture ring with an A position is in the A position. N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION. 10 Parts of the Camera The Indicator Lamp Camera status is shown by the indicator lamp. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Indicator lamp Indicator lamp Glows green Blinks green Blinks green and orange Camera status Camera status Focus locked. Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken. Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for con rmation after being taken with option other than OFF selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP.

(additional pictures can be taken). Camera off : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tab-

let. *

Glows orange Blinks orange Blinks red Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at this time. Flash charging; ash will not re when picture is taken. Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload. N Warnings may also appear in the display. The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfi nder. The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-

cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. 11 The LCD Monitor You can adjust the angle of the LCD moni-

tor when framing shots, but be careful not to trap your fi ngers or other objects. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i O Do not apply excessive force to the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor, as this could damage the hinge. Be careful that the corners of the monitor do not contact the camera body, as this could leave marks. N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:

Touch photography (P 32) Focus area selection (P 31) Function selection (P 34) Movie optimized control oL (P 33) Playback (P 36) 12 Parts of the Camera The Eye Cup To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons on either side and slide eye cup up. Focusing the Viewfi nder If the indicators displayed in the viewfi nder are blurred, put your eye to the viewfi nder and rotate the diopter adjustment control until the display is in sharp focus. To focus the viewfi nder:

A Lift the diopter adjustment control. B Rotate the control to adjust viewfi nder focus. C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could cause product malfunction. 13 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during shooting. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. The Electronic Viewfi nder 5 6 E F L M N O P Q R S W X GHIJK T U V Y Z a b c d e f qr klmn j hi g opstuv 7 4 3 2 1 0 z y x w 14 A Crop factor .....................................................123 B IS mode 2 .........................................................124 C Flash (TTL) mode D Flash compensation E Movie compression .....................................126 F Digital teleconverter ...................................124 G Self-timer indicator .....................................123 H Continuous mode I Shutter type ...................................................124 J AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................122 K Bluetooth ON/OFF L White balance ..............................................120 M AWB lock ........................................................139 N Film simulation ............................................120 O F-Log/HLG recording ..................................126 P Dynamic range ............................................120 Q D-range priority ...........................................120 R Movie mode ........................................... 92, 125 S High-speed recording indicator ..............126 T Recording time available/

elapsed recording time ..............................92 U Card slot options ................................... 44, 140 V Number of available frames 1 W Image size ......................................................120 X File format ......................................................126 Y Image quality................................................120 Z HEIF format ...................................................120 a Date and time ..................................50, 53, 134 b Touch screen mode .............................. 31, 123 c Cooling fan settings ...........................124, 127 d Temperature warning ...................................43 Camera Displays e Control lock 3 .................................................139 f Boost mode ...................................................139 g Power supply ....................................................47 h Histogram .........................................................24 i Battery level j Sensitivity ..........................................................83 k Exposure compensation ...............................86 l Aperture ......................................................59, 60 m Distance indicator 2 ........................................81 n Shutter speed ............................................57, 60 o TTL lock ...........................................................125 p AE lock ...................................................... 88, 138 q Metering ............................................................85 r Shooting mode ...............................................56 s Focus mode 2 ....................................................73 t Focus indicator 2 u Manual focus indicator 2 .......................73, 80 v AF lock ...................................................... 88, 138 w Time code .......................................................131 x Microphone input channel y Recording level 2 ...........................................130 z Exposure indicator ...................................60, 86 0 Virtual horizon .................................................25 1 Focus frame ...............................................76, 87 2 FTP upload progress ...................................141 3 Image transfer status ........................102, 141 4 Location data download status .....102, 140 5 Depth-of- eld preview ..................................81 6 Proxy setting (ProRes only) 7 Focus check ............................................ 82, 123 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF). 3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button. Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 15 The LCD Monitor D E F G I K L R S B A C H J M N O QP T UVW X Y Z a b c d e f g uv mnpqr o kl j i h stwxyz 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16 A Crop factor .....................................................123 B Location data download status .....102, 140 C Focus check ............................................ 82, 123 D Depth-of- eld preview ..................................81 E Proxy setting (ProRes only) F Movie compression .....................................126 G Digital teleconverter ...................................124 H Image transfer status ........................102, 141 I Bluetooth ON/OFF J FTP upload progress ...................................141 K Movie mode ........................................... 92, 125 L High-speed recording indicator ..............126 M Focus frame ...............................................76, 87 N Recording time available/

elapsed recording time ..............................92 O Date and time ..................................50, 53, 134 P Card slot options ................................... 44, 140 Q Number of available frames 1 R Image size ......................................................120 S File format ......................................................126 T Image quality................................................120 U HEIF format ...................................................120 V Cooling fan settings ...........................124, 127 W Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 31, 123 X AWB lock ........................................................139 Y White balance ..............................................120 Z Film simulation ............................................120 a F-Log/HLG recording ..................................126 b Dynamic range ............................................120 c D-range priority ...........................................120 d Movie optimized control 3 ............................33 e Virtual horizon .................................................25 Camera Displays f Boost mode ...................................................139 g Touch zoom 3....................................................35 h Temperature warning ...................................43 i Control lock 4 .................................................139 j Battery level k Power supply ....................................................47 l Sensitivity ..........................................................83 m Histogram .........................................................24 n Exposure compensation ...............................86 o Distance indicator 2 ........................................81 p Aperture ......................................................59, 60 q Time code .......................................................131 r Shutter speed ............................................57, 60 s TTL lock ...........................................................125 t AE lock ...................................................... 88, 138 u Metering ............................................................85 v Shooting mode ...............................................56 w Focus mode 2 ....................................................73 x Focus indicator 2 y Manual focus indicator 2 .......................73, 80 z AF lock ...................................................... 88, 138 0 Microphone input channel 1 AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................122 2 Shutter type ...................................................124 3 Recording level 2 ...........................................130 4 Continuous mode 5 Self-timer indicator .....................................123 6 Exposure indicator ...................................60, 86 7 Flash (TTL) mode 8 Flash compensation 9 IS mode 2 .........................................................124 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). 3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls. 4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button. Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 17 Choosing a Display Mode Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle through the following display modes. You can choose separate display modes for shooting and playback. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i SHOOTING Option Option EYE SENSOR EE EYE SENSOR LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY + EE EVF ONLY +

EE EYE SENSOR + LCD EYE SENSOR + LCD IMAGE DISP. IMAGE DISP. Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. LCD monitor on, view nder o . View nder on, LCD monitor o . Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on; taking it away turns the view nder o . The LCD monitor remains o . Putting your eye to the view nder during shooting turns the view nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for the display of images once you remove your eye from the view nder after shooting. The options selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP. apply to display in the LCD monitor. 18 Camera Displays PLAYBACK Option Option EYE SENSOR EE EYE SENSOR LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. LCD monitor on, view nder o . View nder on, LCD monitor o . N Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu to choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor. EVF/LCD SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the button then used to switch between the EVF ONLY and LCD ONLY displays. The Eye Sensor The eye sensor may respond to objects other than your eye or to light shining directly on the sensor. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Eye sensor 19 Adjusting Display Brightness The brightness and saturation of the viewfi nder and LCD monitor can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu. Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfi nder brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do the same for the LCD monitor. Display Rotation When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor au-

tomatically rotate to match camera orientation. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 20 Camera Displays The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor. N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose the EVF dis-

play, place your eye to the viewfi nder while using the DISP/BACK button. View nder Full screen Standard indicators Dual display

(manual focus mode only) 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 21 LCD Monitor Standard indicators No indicators 12800 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 12800 Dual display

(manual focus mode only) Info display The Dual Display The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a smaller close-up of the focus area. 22 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays Customizing the Standard Display To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. 2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING. Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the setup menu. 3 Choose items. Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. ItemItem Default Default STILL STILL MOVIEMOVIE FRAMING GUIDELINE R R FOCUS FRAME R R AF DISTANCE INDICATOR R R MF DISTANCE INDICATOR R R HISTOGRAM R R LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT R R SHOOTING MODE R R APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO R R INFORMATION BACKGROUND R R Expo. Comp. (Digit) R R Expo. Comp. (Scale) R R FOCUS MODE R R PHOTOMETRY R R R SHUTTER TYPE R FLASH R CONTINUOUS MODE ItemItem DUAL IS MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE BOOST MODE COOLING FAN SETTING FRAMES REMAINING IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME DIGITAL TELE-CONV. IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER MIC LEVEL GUIDANCE MESSAGE BATTERY LEVEL FRAMING OUTLINE Default Default STILL STILL MOVIEMOVIE R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes. 5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 23 Framing Outline Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see against dark backgrounds. Histograms Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis. Number of pixels 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Shadows Highlights Pixel brightness Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve throughout the tone range. Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of the graph. Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of the graph. To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will be overex-

posed at current settings superimposed on the view through the lens, press the function but-

ton to which HISTOGRAM is assigned. A Overexposed areas blink B RGB histograms 24 Camera Displays Virtual Horizon Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be cho-

sen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING. Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on a tripod or the like. 2D 3D 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Pitch Roll OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed. 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level. The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back. 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or right and forward or back. N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays. 25 The Secondary LCD Monitor Among the settings that can be viewed in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Dif-

ferent settings are displayed in still pho-

tography and movie modes. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Secondary LCD monitor Default Settings By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings list-

ed below. N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >

SUB MONITOR SETTING. Still Photography Mode Still Photography Mode A SHUTTER SPEED B APERTURE C EXPO. COMP. D ISO Default Default E FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE G IMAGE SIZE H SHOOTING MODE 26 Movie Mode Movie Mode Camera Displays 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i A MOVIE MODE B REC. TIME C EXPO. COMP. D ISO Default Default E FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE G CARD SLOT OPTIONS H BATTERY LEVEL The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button To turn on the secondary LCD monitor back-

light when you fi nd the secondary LCD monitor too dark to read, press the secondary monitor backlight button. Press the button again to turn the backlight off . Background Color The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is dis-

played in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on. 27 Using the Menus To display the menus, press MENU/OK. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Menus Diff erent menus are displayed during still photography, movie recording, and playback. Still Photography (All Modes Except F) Pressing MENU/OK during still photography displays the photo menus. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT EXIT N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if x STILL is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or B MOVIE SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie menus (P 64). 28 Movie Recording (F/Movie Mode) Pressing MENU/OK in movie mode displays the movie menus. Using the Menus MOVIE SETTING MOVIE SETTING LIST SHOOTING MODE MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC MEDIA REC SETTING HDMI OUTPUT SETTING FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION DIGITAL ZOOM EXIT N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if F MOVIE is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or B MOVIE SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie menus (P 64). Playback Pressing MENU/OK during playback displays the playback menu. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ERASE SIMULTANEOUS DELETE CROP RESIZE PROTECT EXIT 29 Using the Menus Selecting a Menu Tab To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left to highlight the tab for the current menu. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT EXIT EXIT Tab 3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab contain-

ing the desired item. 4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu. N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items. 30 Touch Screen Mode The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen. Shooting Touch Controls To enable touch controls, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS TOUCH SCREEN SETTING DOUBLE TAP SETTING ON TOUCH FUNCTION OFF TOUCH ZOOM TOUCH SCREEN SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS EVF The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-

tures are being framed in the electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-

itor employed for touch controls. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i N When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >

g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used for focus. You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferential-

ly focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. 31 LCD Monitor The operation performed can be selected by tapping the touch screen mode indica-

tor in the display. Touch controls can be used for the following operations:

1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode TOUCH TOUCH SHOOTING SHOOTING AFAF AFOFF AFOFF Description Description Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter. In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your nger on the display. If SINGLE AF is selected for focus mode, the camera will fo-

cus when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. If CONTINUOUS AF is selected for focus mode, the camera will initiate focus when you tap your subject in the display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for focus mode, you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. AREAAREA Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. OFFOFF Touch controls disabled. O Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom. N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN MODE. 32 Touch Screen Mode MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROLoL or tapping the movie-optimized mode but-

ton in the shooting display optimizes the command dials and touch controls for movie recording. This can be used to pre-

vent camera sounds being recorded with movie footage. SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPOSURE COMPENSATION ISO INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT N Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring. WIND FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME F FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE F IS MODE F IS MODE BOOST F FOCUS MODE Movie-optimized mode button When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 33 Touch Function Functions can be assigned to the follow-

ing fl ick gestures in much the same way as function buttons:

Flick up: T-Fn1 Flick left: T-Fn2 Flick right: T-Fn3 Flick down: T-Fn4 N In some cases, touch-function fl ick ges-

tures display a menu; tap to select the desired option. INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION. SET CANCEL 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 34 Touch Screen Mode Touch Zoom If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by touching the display. Tap the touch zoom button in the display to enable touch zoom. Touch zoom is controlled using the but-

tons in the display. Button Button Description Description Touch zoom Enable touch zoom. Touch zoom Zoom in Zoom in Zoom out Zoom out Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant speed. Rocker switch Rocker switch Swipe to choose a zoom position. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a speed corresponding where you put your nger. Disable Disable Disable touch zoom. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 35 Touch Screen Mode Playback Touch Controls When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls can be used for the following playback operations:

Swipe: Swipe a fi nger across the display to view other images. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Pinch-out: Place two fi ngers on the display and spread them apart to zoom in. Pinch-in: Place two fi ngers on the display and slide them together to zoom out. N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no further. Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in on the focus point. Drag: View other areas of the image during playback zoom. 36 First Steps 37 Attaching the Strap Attach the strap. Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below. O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 38 2 F i r s t S t e p s Attaching a Lens The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Remove the body cap from the camera and the rear cap from the lens. Place the lens on mount, keeping the marks on the lens and camera aligned (A), and then rotate the lens until it clicks into place

(B). O When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the camera. Be careful not to touch the cameras internal parts. Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place. Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens. Removing Lenses To remove the lens, turn the camera off , then press the lens release button (A) and rotate the lens as shown (B). O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens or inside the camera, replace the lens caps and camera body cap when the lens is not attached. Lenses and Other Optional Accessories The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM X-mount. O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-

changing) lenses. Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter. Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to malfunction. Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses. See the manual provided with the lens for information on use. 39 Inserting the Battery Insert the battery in the camera as described below. 1 Open the battery-chamber cover. Slide the battery-chamber cover latch as shown and open the bat-

tery-chamber cover. O Do not open the battery-chamber cover when the camera is on. Fail-

ure to observe this precaution could damage image fi les or memory cards. Do not use excessive force when handling the battery-chamber cover. 2 Insert the battery as shown. O Insert the battery in the orientation shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. Confi rm that the battery is securely latched. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 40 Inserting the Battery 3 Close the battery-chamber cover. Close and latch the cover. O If the cover does not close, check that the battery is in the correct orienta-

tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-

er shut. Removing the Battery Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-cham-

ber cover. To remove the battery, press the battery latch to the side, and slide the battery out of the camera as shown. O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 41 Inserting Memory Cards Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately). N The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards. 1 Open the memory card slot cover. Unlatch and open the cover. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or de-

leted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-

age the card. 2 Insert the memory card. Holding the card in the orientation shown, slide it in until it clicks into place at the back of the slot. Close and latch the memory card slot cover. O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle or use force. 42 Inserting Memory Cards Removing Memory Cards Turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a fi nger and then slowly releasing it; the card can then be removed by hand. O Press the center of the card. Suddenly removing your fi nger from the card could cause the card to fall from the slot. Remove your fi nger slowly. If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 43 Inserting Memory Cards Using Two Cards The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the sec-

ond slot only when the card in the fi rst slot is full. This can be changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP> x CARD SLOT SETTING. Option Option SEQUENTIAL

(default) Description Description The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the rst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL), recording will start on the card in the second slot and switch to the rst slot when the card in the second slot is full. Display Display BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card. SEPARATE RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the rst slot and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This setting takes e ect only when FINE + RAW or NORMAL+ RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE QUALITY. RAW+JPEG RAW+HEIF The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 44 Charging the Battery For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at ship-

ment. The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before charging the battery, turn the camera off . O An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera. Charging takes about 180minutes. 1 Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter. Attach the plug adapter as shown, making sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into place on the AC power adapter terminals. O The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-

sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter. Do not use it with other devices. The shape of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Charge the battery. Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into an indoor power outlet. O Connect the cable to the cameras USB connector (Type-C). Be sure the connectors are fully inserted. 45 Charge Status The indicator lamp shows battery charge status as follows:

Indicator lamp Indicator lamp On O Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery charging Charging complete Charging error 2 F i r s t S t e p s 46 Charging the Battery O The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of 100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use). Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as this could cause malfunction. Do not affi x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from the camera. Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat. Read the cautions in The Battery and Power Supply. Use only genuine Fujifi lm rechargeable batteries designated for use in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-

uct malfunction. Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel the outer casing. The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its charging life and must be replaced. Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not in use. If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may fi nd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge the battery regularly. Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging. Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures. Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in the network/USB setting menu increases the drain on the battery. N If the camera is turned on during charging, charging will end and the USB connection will instead be used to power the camera. The battery level will begin to gradually decline. The camera will display a power supply icon when powered via USB. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 47 Charging via Computer The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with com-

puters with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface. Charging the Battery 2 F i r s t S t e p s Leave the computer on during charging. O The battery will not charge while the camera is on. Connect the supplied USB cable. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable. Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-

puter, computer settings, and the computers current state. The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input of 5 V/500 mA. 48 Turning the Camera On and Off Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off . Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera on, or to OFF to turn the camera off . O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfi nder can aff ect pic-

tures or the view through the viewfi nder. Keep the lens and viewfi nder clean. N Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback. Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >

AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF switch to OFF and then back to ON. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 49 Basic Setup When you turn the camera on for the fi rst time, you can choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the steps below when turning the camera on for the fi rst time. 1 Turn the camera on. A language-selection dialog will be displayed. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Choose a language. Highlight a MENU/OK. language and press 3 Choose a time zone. When prompted, highlight the cur-

rent time zone and daylight savings time setting using the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) and press MENU/OK. N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK. AREA SETTING BERLIN/PARIS AREA SETTING DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SET GMT 0:00 OFF NO 50 4 Set the clock. Basic Setup DATE/TIME GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS 2022

. 12

. 31 12 00 AM 12h SET NO APPLICATION 5 View information on the smartphone app. The camera will display a QR code you can scan with your smartphone to open a website where you can download the smartphone app. Press MENU/OK to exit to the shoot-

ing display. N Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED TO THE SMARTPHONE. SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP. SET or control the camera remotely (P 102). 6 Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab. O Format memory cards before fi rst use, and be sure to reformat all memory cards after using them in a computer or other device. 7 Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and press MENU/OK. 51 2 F i r s t S t e p s 8 A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. To format the memory card, highlight OK and press MENU/OK. FORMAT FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?

ERASE ALL DATA OK CANCEL N To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O All dataincluding protected pictureswill be deleted from the memory card. Be sure important fi les have been copied to a comput-

er or other storage device. Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting. N Format options can also be displayed by pressing the selector down

(f) while holding the b (delete) button. If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the camera is turned on. 52 Basic Setup Choosing a Diff erent Language To change the language:

1 Display language options. Select D USER SETTING> Qa. 2 Choose a language. Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Changing the Time and Date To set the camera clock:

1 Display DATE/TIME options. Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME. 2 Set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 53 MEMO 54 Taking and Viewing Photos 55 P, S, A, and M Modes P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture. Mode P: Program AE Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be selected with program shift. Rotate the mode dial to P. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i P will appear in the display. O If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed and aperture displays will show . Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-

lease the dial. 56 P, S, A, and M Modes Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for optimal exposure. 1 Rotate the mode dial to S. S will appear in the display. 2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a shutter speed. N The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter speed, aperture will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-

ture display will show . Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-

lease the dial. 57 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i N Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in progress. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 58 P, S, A, and M Modes Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for optimal exposure. 1 Rotate the mode dial to A. A will appear in the display. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 2 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture. N If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the front command dial. The roles played by the front command dial can be changed us-

ing D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture, shutter speed will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed display will show . Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-

lease the dial. N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed halfway. 59 Mode M: Manual Exposure In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture. Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed

(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-

pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-

ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached. 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i M will appear in the display. 60 2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a shutter speed and the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture. P, S, A, and M Modes N The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator that shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-ex-

posed at current settings. If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. The roles played by the front and rear command dials can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. BULB Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is rec-

ommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure. 1 Set shutter speed to BULB. 61 2 Press the shutter button all the way down. The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the shutter button is pressed. The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure started. Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display the processing time remaining. O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL IMAGE or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTING SETTING> SHUTTER TYPE. N Selecting an aperture of A fi xes shutter speed at 30 s. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Using a Remote Release A remote release can be used for long time-ex-

posures. When using an optional RR-100 re-

mote release or an electronic release from third-party suppliers, connect it to the cameras remote release connector. 62 P, S, A, and M Modes FILTER Take photos with fi lter eff ects. 1 Rotate the mode dial to FILTER. 2 Choose a fi lter via A SHOOTING SETTING> FILTER SETTING. Filter Filter G TOY CAMERA H MINIATURE I POP COLOR J HIGH-KEY Z LOW-KEY K DYNAMIC TONE X SOFT FOCUS u PARTIAL COLOR (RED) v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE) w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW) x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN) y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE) z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE) Description Description Choose for a retro toy camera e ect. The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for a diorama e ect. Create high-contrast images with saturated colors. Create bright, low-contrast images. Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of emphasized highlights. Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy e ect. Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the whole image. Areas of the image that are the selected color are recorded in that color. All other areas of the image are recorded in black-and-white. O Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in some cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue. 63 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Custom Modes Rotate the mode dial to any of modes C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C7 (CUSTOM 7) to take pictures using previously-saved shooting menu settings. Mode Selection: Still Photography or Movie Choose whether the selected custom settings bank (C1 through C7) is for still photography (x STILL) or movie recording

(F MOVIE). 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N You can also use B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie menus. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING 3 Highlight x STILL or F MOVIE and press MENU/OK. The selected custom settings bank can now be used for still photogra-

phy or movie recording. xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING x F STILL MOVIE 64 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i P, S, A, and M Modes Saving Current Settings Save current settings in a custom settings bank. 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight a destination bank for cur-

rent settings (C1 through C7) and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS and press MENU/OK. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. Current settings will be saved to the selected bank. ASSIGNED x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 ASSIGNED CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS CUSTOM 1 SAVE THE CHANGES OK?

OK CANCEL EXIT 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 65 Editing Custom Settings Edit existing custom settings banks. 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. ASSIGNED x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 ASSIGNED CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK SHOOTING MODE SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXP. COMPENSATION DRIVE MODE EXIT EXIT 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press MENU/OK. i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 4 The camera will display a list of shoot-

ing menu items; highlight an item you wish to edit and press MENU/OK. Adjust the selected item as desired. 66 P, S, A, and M Modes 5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting menu list. Adjust additional items as desired. N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIE SETTING > FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the mov-

ie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the changes will not be saved automatically. To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the list and press Q. To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings, select RESET THE CHANGES. If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied with the changes intact. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 67 Copying Custom Settings Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-

named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank. 1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK. N To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/

SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the source bank and press MENU/OK. 3 ASSIGNED x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 ASSIGNED CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK. EXIT CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME 68 P, S, A, and M Modes 4 Highlight the destination bank (C1 through C7) and press MENU/OK. A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. COPY TO CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 N Any changes to custom settings in the destination bank will be overwritten. 5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The selected settings will be copied to the destination bank, overwriting any existing settings. COPY CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 COPY OK?

OK CANCEL 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 69 Resetting Custom Settings Reset selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography. To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. ASSIGNED x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 ASSIGNED CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED EXIT CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME RESET CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?

RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT OK CANCEL 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING and press MENU/OK. A confi rmation dialog will be displayed. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The selected bank will be reset. 70 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i P, S, A, and M Modes Renaming Custom Settings Banks Rename selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photogra-

phy. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. ASSIGNED x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 ASSIGNED CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED 3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME 4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select SET. The selected bank will be renamed. 71 EXIT 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Autofocus Take pictures using autofocus. 1 Select single or continuous AF for G AF/MF SETTING >

FOCUS MODE in the shooting menu (P 73). 2 Use G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE to choose an AF mode

(P 74). 3 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA and choose the position and size of the focus frame (P 76). 3 4 Take pictures. i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 72 Autofocus Focus Mode Choose how the camera focuses. 1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS MODE in the shooting menu. 3 Choose from the following options:

ModeMode p MANUAL FOCUS k CONTINUOUS AF Description Description Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for man-

ual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (P 80). Focus is continually adjusted to re ect changes in the dis-

tance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion. l SINGLE AF Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for stationary subjects. N Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-

justed continuously in modes l and k even when the shutter but-

ton is not pressed. 73 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Autofocus Options (AF Mode) Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes. 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE. 3 Choose an AF mode. How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode. Focus Mode ll (SINGLE AF) Focus Mode

(SINGLE AF) Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image 3 r SINGLE POINT in Camera focuses on subject selected focus point. Use for pin-

point focus on selected subject. i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Camera focuses on subject in se-

lected focus zone. Focus zones in-

clude multiple focus points, mak-

ing it easier to focus on subjects in motion. Camera focuses automatically on high-contrast subjects; display shows areas in focus. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 77, 78) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE. y ZONE z WIDE j ALL 74 Focus Mode kk (CONTINUOUS AF)

(CONTINUOUS AF) Focus Mode Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image Autofocus r SINGLE POINT Focus tracks subject at selected fo-

cus point. Use for subjects moving toward or away from camera. y ZONE Focus tracks subject in selected fo-

cus zone. Use for subjects that are moving fairly predictably. z TRACKING tracks subjects moving Focus through wide area of frame. j ALL Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 77, 78) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING. 75 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Focus-Point Selection Choose a focus point for autofocus. Viewing the Focus-Point Display 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the fo-

cus-point display. 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to choose a focus area. N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 31). 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 76 Autofocus Selecting a Focus Point Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the focus point and the rear command dial to choose the size of the focus frame. The procedure varies with the option se-

lected for AF mode. Focus stick Focus stick Rear command Rear command dialdial DISP/BACK DISP/BACK button button AF mode AF mode r y z TiltTilt Press Press Select focus point Select highlighted focus point Rotate Rotate Choose from 6 frame sizes Choose from 3 frame sizes Select center focus point N Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/

TRACKING is selected in focus mode l. If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE

(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode l) or z TRACKING

(focus mode k). 77 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i The Focus-Point Display The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF mode. N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large squares. SINGLE POINT rr SINGLE POINT AF mode AF mode ZONE yy ZONE WIDE/TRACKING zz WIDE/TRACKING Number of points available can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING>

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Choose from zones with 7 7, 5 5, or 3 3 focus points. Position focus frame over subject you want to track using continuous AF. Autofocus Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be unable to focus on the subjects listed below. Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies. Subjects photographed through a window or other refl ective object. Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than refl ect light, such as hair or fur. Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or fl ame. Subjects that show little contrast with the background. Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a backdrop of highly contrasting elements). 78 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Autofocus Checking Focus To zoom in on the current focus area for precise focus, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever). Press up to two times more to zoom in further and a fourth time to cancel zoom. Normal display Focus zoom N In focus mode l, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear com-

mand dial. In focus mode l, select SINGLE POINT for AF MODE. Focus zoom is not available in focus mode k or when G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF is on. Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING to change the function performed by the center of the focus stick (focus lever). D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can also be used to assign focus zoom to other controls. 79 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Manual Focus Adjust focus manually. 1 Select MANUAL FOCUS for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS MODE. 2 Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce the focus distance, right to increase. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 3 Take pictures. N Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING to reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring. Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. 80 Manual Focus Checking Focus A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual focus mode. The Manual Focus Indicator The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-

cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu), the blue bar the depth of fi eld, or in other words the distance in front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus. Focus distance

(white line) Depth of fi eld N If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-

of-fi eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. Use the G AF/MF SETTING > DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option to choose how depth of fi eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. 81 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Manual Focus Focus Zoom If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK, the cam-

era will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever) to exit zoom. N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-

not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 82 Sensitivity Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. To view sensitivity settings, press the ISObutton. Option Option AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO3 12512800 L(64/80/100) H(25600/51200) Description Description Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shoot-

ing conditions according to combination of standard and maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed cho-

sen for A SHOOTING SETTING >ISO. Choose from AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 84). Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in dis-

play. Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may ap-

pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range. N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off . Adjusting Sensitivity High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities. 83 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Sensitivity AUTO Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3. ItemItem Options Options DEFAULT SENSITIVITY MAX. SENSITIVITY 12512800 40012800 MIN. SHUTTER SPEED SEC, AUTO AUTO1 AUTO1 800 Default Default AUTO2 AUTO2 125 3200 AUTO AUTO3 AUTO3 12800 The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-

fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED. N If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed automatically. The minimum shutter speed is not aff ected by the option selected for image stabilization. 84 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Metering Choose how the camera meters exposure. A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY off ers a choice of the following metering options:

O The selected option will only take eff ect if OFF is selected for g FACE/

EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the G AF/MF SETTING menu. ModeMode o MULTI p CENTER-

WEIGHTED v SPOT w AVERAGE Description Description The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analy-

sis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recom-

mended in most situations. The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the area at the center. 3 The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and in other cases in which the background is much brighter or darker than the main subject. Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same light-

ing, and is particularly e ective for landscapes and portraits of subjects dressed in black or white. i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/

MF SETTING> INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 123). 85 Exposure Compensation Adjust exposure. Rotate the rear command dial to adjust exposure. N The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. In manual mode, exposure can be adjusted by rotating the front or rear command dial after pressing a control to which d WHEN SET TO B(ON/OFF SWITCH) is assigned. O The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode. Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display, although the display may not accurately refl ect its eff ects if:

- the exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 EV,

- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or

- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY. Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the display may not accurately refl ect the eff ects of exposure compensa-

tion during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by select-

ing mode M and adjusting exposure directly. 86 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Focus/Exposure Lock Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. 1 Position the subject in the focus frame and press the shutter button halfway to lock focus and exposure. Focus and exposure will remain locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway (AF/AE lock). 2 Press the button all the way down. N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF, SHUTTER AE. 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i 87 Other Controls Focus and exposure can also be locked using the AEL and AFON buttons. At de-

fault settings, you can use the AEL button to lock exposure without locking focus. If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock fo-

cus without locking exposure. While the assigned control is pressed, pressing the shutter button halfway will not end the lock. If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/

AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be ended by pressing the control a second time. Focus/Exposure Lock AEL button

(exposure lock) AFON button N The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point during exposure lock. The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 138). 88 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Viewing Pictures Pictures can be viewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor. To view pictures full frame, press a. 100-0001 Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame. N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (gift im-

age) icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that play-

back zoom may not be available. To view photos on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the camera monitor, press the a button. Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY BACK MENU> SWITCH SLOT option. 89 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Deleting Pictures Use the b button to delete pictures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. 1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and select FRAME. ERASE FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confi rmation dialog is not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures. N Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any pictures you wish to delete (P 132). Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK MENU> ERASE option (P 132). 90 3 i i T a k n g a n d V e w n g P h o t o s i Movie Recording and Playback 91 Recording Movies Record movies with sound. Recording Movies Movies can be recorded by pressing the t (movie recording) button or rotating the mode dial to F(movie). The t(Movie Recording) Button Use the t(movie recording) button to quickly and easily record movies while in still photography mode. N The camera automatically selects CONTINUOUS AF for focus mode. 1 Press t to start recording. A recording indicator (V) is dis-

played while recording is in prog-

ress. The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while another display counts up to show the re-

cording time. Recording time Time remaining 2 Press t again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. 92 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l Recording Movies F(Movie) Mode For more control over camera settings, rotate the mode dial to F(movie) and record movies using the shutter button. 1 Rotate the mode dial to F(movie). O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. 2 Press the shutter button to start recording. A recording indicator (V) is dis-

played while recording is in prog-

ress. The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while another display counts up to show the re-

cording time. Recording time 3 Press the shutter button again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. Time remaining 93 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l O The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for B MOVIE SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING.

- Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.

- Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better. Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording. Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds made by the camera during recording. Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. N The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp indicator or AF-assistthat lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you can change exposure compensation by up to 2EV and adjust zoom using the zoom ring on the lens (if available). While recording is in progress, you can:

- Adjust sensitivity

- Refocus using any of the following methods:

Press the shutter button halfway Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned Use touch screen controls

- Display a histogram or artifi cial horizon by pressing the button to which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been as-

signed Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases settings may not apply during recording. To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial (P 76). 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 94 Recording Movies Temperature Warnings The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed, image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before turning it on again. Using an External Microphone Sound can be recorded with external micro-

phones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in diameter; microphones that require plug-in power cannot be used. See the microphone manual for details. XLR Microphone Adapters The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website. https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 95 Recording Movies Adjusting Movie Settings Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 28). Use the BMOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quick-

ly adjust settings when recording movies via the t(movie re-

cording) button (P 125). The movie menus contain options for use when recording mov-

ies via the shutter button in F(movie) mode (P 126). Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted us-

ing MOVIE MODE. Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the fi le type, bit rate, and the destination card slot. Focus mode is selected using G AF/MF SETTING> F FOCUS MODE in the movie menus. Regardless of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choos-

ing MANUAL FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection. O Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of menus automatically apply in the other. Depth of Field Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be ad-

justed when the mode dial is set to A(aperture-priority AE) or M(manual). 96 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l Viewing Movies View movies on the camera. In full-frame playback, movies are iden-

tifi ed by a Wicon. Press the focus stick

(focus lever) down to start movie play-

back. The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed:

PLAYPLAY

+1.0 12800 Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever)

(focus lever) Up Down Full-frame playback Full-frame playback Start playback Playback in Playback in progress (xx)) progress (

Playback Playback paused (yy)) paused (

End playback 4 Pause playback Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed Progress is shown in the display during playback. O Do not cover the speaker during playback. Start/resume playback Single frame rewind/

advance 29m59s i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l STOP PAUSE N Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-

ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the camera monitor, press the a button. 97 MEMO 98 Connections 99 Overview This chapter outlines features that can among other things be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer. N These features are covered here only in outline. For more information, visit the website below. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/

Supported Features This camera supports the following features:

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 Feature Feature Connecting to the Connecting to the smartphone app smartphone app USB card readers USB card readers Web camera Web camera instax printers instax printers Tethered photography Tethered photography FTP upload FTP upload RAW processing RAW processing Saving and Loading Saving and Loading Settings Settings Remote movie Remote movie recording using a web recording using a web browser browser 100 Description Description Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth and upload pictures or control the camera remotely while the smartphone displays the view through the lens. Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone via USB and copy pictures from memory cards. Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a webcam. Print pictures on connected instax printers. Take pictures from a computer to which the camera is connected (tethered) via wireless LAN or USB. You can also connect via wired LAN using an optional FT-XH file transmitter. Upload pictures to FTP servers using the optional FT-XH file transmitter. image Harness processing engine when processing RAW pictures on a computer. Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a computer. Control the camera and record movies remotely from a computer or smartphone connected via the optional FT-XH le transmitter. the power of the cameras PP 102 105 110 111 113 115 116 117 Overview Connection Settings Connections to other devices are made via settings either cho-

sen from a list of existing connection profi les using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING or newly created using CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 101 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth to copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera re-

motely while previewing the view through the lens in the smartphone display. N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when copying pictures to the smartphone. Installing Smartphone Apps Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smart-

phone app. Visit the following website and install the desired apps on your phone. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system. Connecting to a Smartphone Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth. 1 Press the x(Bluetooth) button when the camera is in shooting mode. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the xbutton during playback. 102 2 Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING X-H2123456 Bluetooth Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) 3 Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth PAIRING Bluetooth ON/OFF 4 Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone with the camera. More information is available at the following website:

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

When pairing is complete, the cam-

era and smartphone will automati-

cally connect via Bluetooth. A white Bluetooth icon will appear in the camera display when a connection is established. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 N Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automati-

cally connect to the camera when the app is launched. Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smart-

phone reduces the drain on the battery. 103 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) Using the Smartphone App Before launching the smartphone app, choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 104 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload pictures from the camera. Copying Pictures to a Smartphone Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB, select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. For Customers Using Android Devices How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB connector with which your smartphone is equipped. Type-C Type-C Use the supplied USB cable. Supplied USB cable Type-C connector (male) Type-C connector (male) C o n n e c t i o n s 5 105 Micro-B Micro-B Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable. Third-party USB cable USB OTG cable Type-C connector (male) Micro-B connector (male) Type-A connector

(male) Type-A connector

(female) O The smartphone must support USB OTG. The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-Cto Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the Camera Importer to access the camera, tap Cancel and move on to the next step. 4 On your smartphone, tap the notifi cation Connected to USB PTP. 106 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) 5 From the recommended apps, select Camera Importer. The app will automatically start and allow you to import pho-

tos and movies to your smartphone. N If the message There is no MTP device connected appears on the app, please try again from step 3. For Customers Using iOS Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter. Third-party USB cable Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter C o n n e c t i o n s 5 Type-C connector (male) Use an Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter Type-A connector (male) 1 Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your smartphone. O A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors. The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-Cto Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter. 107 Connecting the Camera and Computer 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Turn the camera off . 4 Turn the computer on. 5 Connect a USB cable. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be suitable for data transfer. USB connector (Type-C) 6 Turn the camera on. 7 Copy pictures to your computer. Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or oth-

er software. Use a card reader to copy fi les over 4GB in size. Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using apps supplied with the operating system. 108 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) O Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable. When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-

serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-

necting the camera. If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted, there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-

able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer pictures. Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning the camera off . Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-

alone computer. Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-

connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has ceased to be displayed. The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet connection. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 109 Using the Camera as a Webcam The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a webcam. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 6: USB WEBCAM for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). 4 Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a web-

cam. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 110 instax SHARE Printers Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE printers. Establishing a Connection Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and password. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. C o n n e c t i o n s 5 111 instax SHARE Printers Printing Pictures 1 Choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 2 Turn the printer on. 3 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL 4 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 C o n n e c t i o n s 5 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 5 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. 112 Tethered Photography The camera can be controlled remotely and photographs taken from a computer connected via USB or wireless or wired LAN. N This section covers USB connections only. For information on tethered photography via wireless or wired LAN, visit the website below. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/

Tethered Photography via USB Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photog-

raphy. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose either 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or 4: USB for SELECT CONNECTION TETHER SHOOTING FIXED SETTING. O If 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho-

tography will be enabled automatically when the computer to which the camera is connected is turned on. When the com-

puter is off or not connected, tethered photography will be sus-

pended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card. If the camera is disconnected from the computer while 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to func-

tion in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). C o n n e c t i o n s 5 113 Tethered Photography 4 Take pictures via tethered photography. Use software such as Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in or FUJIFILM X Acquire. N For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-

low. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/

Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 114 RAW Processing Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the cameras image processing engine when processing RAW pictures on a computer. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). 4 Launch X RAW STUDIO. RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 115 Saving and Loading Settings Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers using FUJIFILM X Acquire. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 108). 4 Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire. Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X Acquire. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 116 Recording Movies Remotely from a Web Browser Control the camera and record movies remotely from a computer or smartphone connected via the optional FT-XH fi le transmitter. The computer can connect to up to four cameras. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/

C o n n e c t i o n s 5 117 MEMO 118 Menu List 119 The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. Setting Setting IMAGE SIZE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY Description Description Choose the size and aspect ratio for new photographs. Adjust JPEG or HEIF compression settings or enable or disable RAW recording. Choose options for recording RAW images. Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF. Choose a color palette and tone range. RAW RECORDING RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR Choose a monochrome tint for photographs taken MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT using FILM SIMULATION> a ACROS and b MONOCHROME. Add a lm grain e ect. Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens. COLOR CHROME FX BLUE Increase the range of tones available for rendering COLOR CHROME FX BLUE SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY D RANGE PRIORITY blues. Smooth complexions. Match white balance to the light source, whether it be direct sunlight or arti cial lighting. Choose a dynamic range for photographs. Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-

contrast scenes. 120 M e n u L i s t5 6 Setting Setting TONE CURVE TONE CURVE COLOR COLOR SHARPNESS SHARPNESS HIGH ISO NR HIGH ISO NR CLARITY CLARITY LONG EXPOSURE NR LONG EXPOSURE NR LENS MODULATION LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER OPTIMIZER COLOR SPACE COLOR SPACE PIXEL MAPPING PIXEL MAPPING xx EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING xxFF CUSTOM MODE CUSTOM MODE SETTING SETTING MOUNT ADAPTOR xxFF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING SETTING The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) Description Description With reference to a tone curve, adjust the appearance of highlights or shadows, making them harsher or softer. Adjust color density. Sharpen or soften outlines. Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Increase de nition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Reduce mottling in long time-exposures. Reduce the slight loss of de nition caused by di rac-

tion at small apertures. Choose the gamut of colors available for color repro-

duction. Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures. Save custom shooting menu settings. Choose whether custom settings banks update auto-

matically to re ect changes to settings. Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used for still photography or movie recording. Adjust settings for M-mount lenses connected using an optional FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER. M e n u L i s t 6 121 AF/MF SETTING To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FOCUS AREA FOCUS AREA FOCUS MODE FOCUS MODE AF MODE AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS STORE AF MODE BY STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION ORIENTATION Description Description Choose the focus area. Choose how the camera focuses. Choose the size of the focus area. Select focus-tracking options for use when CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for focus mode. Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when the camera is in landscape orientation. AF POINT DISPLAY yzyz Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed AF POINT DISPLAY NUMBER OF FOCUS NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS POINTS PRE-AF PRE-AF when ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for AFMODE. Choose the number of focus points available for focus-

point selection. Choose whether the camera continues to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. xxFF AF ILLUMINATOR AF ILLUMINATOR Choose whether the AF-assist illuminator lights to FACE/EYE DETECTION gg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING SETTING SUBJECT DETECTION SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING SETTING AF+MF AF+MF MF ASSIST MF ASSIST assist autofocus. Choose whether the camera prioritizes human faces over background objects when setting focus and exposure. Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected type, such as animals or vehicles, when set-

ting focus. Choose whether manual focus can be activated by rotating the focus ring during focus lock. Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. 122 M e n u L i s t5 6 The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) Setting Setting FOCUS CHECK FOCUS CHECK INTERLOCK SPOT AE &

INTERLOCK SPOT AE &

FOCUS AREA FOCUS AREA xxFF INSTANT AF INSTANT AF SETTING SETTING Description Description Choose whether the display automatically zooms in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode. Choose whether spot metering meters the current focus frame. Choose how the camera focuses when function but-

tons to which features such as AF lock are assigned are pressed in manual focus mode. Choose a scale for depth of eld. DEPTH-OF-FIELD xxFF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE SCALE RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY Choose whether photographs can be taken by press-

RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ing the shutter button all the way down when the camera is not in focus. xxFF AF RANGE LIMITER AF RANGE LIMITER Limit the range of available focus distances for in-

TOUCH SCREEN MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE creased focus speed. Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. SHOOTING SETTING To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the A(SHOOTING SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FILTER SETTING FILTER SETTING SPORTS FINDER MODE SPORTS FINDER MODE Description Description Take photos with lter e ects. Take pictures using the crop in the center of the display. PRE-SHOT ssJJ Choose whether to shoot bursts using the electronic PRE-SHOT shutter when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose a shutter release delay. SELF-TIMER SELF-TIMER SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING Choose whether self-timer settings are reset each time SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING the timer is used or when the camera is turned o . M e n u L i s t 6 123 Setting Setting SELF-TIMER LAMP SELF-TIMER LAMP INTERVAL TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING SMOOTHING AE BKT SETTING AE BKT SETTING FILM SIMULATION BKT FILM SIMULATION BKT Description Description Choose whether the self-timer lamp lights during self-

timer photography. Con gure the camera to take a selected number of shots automatically at a preset interval. Choose whether exposure is automatically adjusted during interval-timer photography to prevent it chang-

ing dramatically between shots. Adjust exposure bracketing settings. Choose the three lm simulation types used for lm simulation bracketing. Adjust settings for focus bracketing. Choose how the camera meters exposure. Choose the shutter type. Choose whether to reduce icker in pictures and the display when shooting under uorescent lighting and other similar light sources. FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING Choose whether shutter speed can be adjusted in FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING FOCUS BKT SETTING FOCUS BKT SETTING PHOTOMETRY PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION FLICKER REDUCTION M e n u L i s t5 6 IS MODE IS MODE ISOISO DIGITAL TELE-CONV. DIGITAL TELE-CONV. x xFF COOLING FAN COOLING FAN SETTING SETTING xxFF WIRELESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION smaller increments in order to reduce icker with LED lighting and the like. Choose whether to enable image stabilization. Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Zoom in on your subject during shooting. Adjust settings for optional cooling fans. Establish wireless connections to smartphones, tablets, or other devices. 124 The Shooting Menus (Still Photography) FLASH SETTING To display fl ash settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting dis-

play and select the F(FLASH SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Adjust such settings as ash control mode, ash level, FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Description Description RED EYE REMOVAL RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING CH SETTING and ash power. Choose whether to remove red-eye e ects caused by the ash. Choose a TTL lock mode. Choose whether to use the ash units LED video light

(if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. Choose groups when using the camera ash unit as a commander for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control. Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote ash units. MOVIE SETTING To display movie settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab. Setting Setting MOVIE MODE MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC HIGH SPEED REC MEDIA REC SETTING MEDIA REC SETTING FF IS MODE IS MODE FF IS MODE BOOST IS MODE BOOST AUDIO SETTING AUDIO SETTING Description Description Adjust movie recording settings. Adjust settings for high-speed movies. Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, and compression. Choose whether to enable image stabilization. Choose the image stabilization level. Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording. M e n u L i s t 6 125 The Shooting Menus (Movies) N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. MOVIE SETTING To display options for movie recording, press MENU/OK in the mov-

ie shooting display and select the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab. Setting Setting MOVIE SETTING LIST MOVIE SETTING LIST SHOOTING MODE SHOOTING MODE MOVIE MODE MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC HIGH SPEED REC MEDIA REC SETTING MEDIA REC SETTING Description Description View current movie recording settings. Choose the shooting mode for movie recording. Adjust movie recording settings. Adjust settings for high-speed movies. Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, and compression. HDMI OUTPUT SETTING Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is HDMI OUTPUT SETTING output to an HDMI device. Choose whether to x the movie crop ratio at 1.251. FIX MOVIE CROP FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION MAGNIFICATION DIGITAL ZOOM DIGITAL ZOOM F-Log/HLG RECORDING Choose the destination for F-Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-

F-Log/HLG RECORDING Zoom in on your subject during shooting. DATA LEVEL SETTING DATA LEVEL SETTING PHOTOMETRY FF PHOTOMETRY FF FLICKERLESS S.S. FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING SETTING Gamma) movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device. Choose the signal range for movies recorded with the camera. Choose how the camera meters exposure. Choose whether shutter speed can be adjusted in smaller increments in order to reduce icker with LED lighting and the like. 126 M e n u L i s t5 6 Setting Setting FF IS MODE IS MODE FF IS MODE BOOST IS MODE BOOST FF ISO ISO ZEBRA SETTING ZEBRA SETTING ZEBRA LEVEL ZEBRA LEVEL MOVIE OPTIMIZED MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL oL CONTROL TALLY LIGHT TALLY LIGHT COOLING FAN x xFF COOLING FAN SETTING SETTING FF EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING FF AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING SETTING xxFF CUSTOM MODE CUSTOM MODE SETTING SETTING xxFF WIRELESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION The Shooting Menus (Movies) Description Description Choose whether to enable image stabilization. Choose the image stabilization level. Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Choose whether highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes in the movie mode display. Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display. Settings can be adjusted using the command dials and touch-screen controls. Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. Adjust settings for optional cooling fans. Save custom shooting menu settings. Choose whether custom settings banks update auto-

matically to re ect changes to settings. Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used for still photography or movie recording. Establish wireless connections to smartphones, tablets, or other devices. M e n u L i s t 6 127 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FF FILM SIMULATION FILM SIMULATION FF MONOCHROMATIC MONOCHROMATIC COLOR COLOR WHITE BALANCE FF WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE FF DYNAMIC RANGE TONE CURVE FF TONE CURVE FF COLOR COLOR FF SHARPNESS SHARPNESS HIGH ISO NR FF HIGH ISO NR INTERFRAME NR INTERFRAME NR FF PERIPHERAL LIGHT PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION CORRECTION MOUNT ADAPTOR xxFF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING SETTING Description Description Choose a lm simulation e ect for movie recording. Choose a monochrome tint for movies recorded using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS and b MONOCHROME. Match white balance to the light source, whether it be direct sunlight or arti cial lighting. Choose a dynamic range for movie recording. With reference to a tone curve, adjust the appearance of highlights or shadows, making them harsher or softer. Adjust color density. Sharpen or soften outlines. Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose whether to reduce inter-frame noise. Choose whether to reduce vignetting when shooting movies. Adjust settings for M-mount lenses connected using an optional FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER. AF/MF SETTING To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. Setting Setting FF FOCUS AREA FOCUS AREA FOCUS MODE FF FOCUS MODE AF MODE FF AF MODE Description Description Choose the focus area. Choose how the camera focuses. Choose the size of the focus area. 128 M e n u L i s t5 6 The Shooting Menus (Movies) Description Description Setting Setting FF AF-C CUSTOM SETTING AF-C CUSTOM SETTING Choose focus-tracking options when recording movies with CONTINUOUS AF selected for focus mode. AF ILLUMINATOR Choose whether the AF-assist illuminator lights to xxFF AF ILLUMINATOR assist autofocus. Choose whether the camera prioritizes human faces over background objects when setting focus and exposure. Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected type, such as animals or vehicles, when set-

ting focus. Choose whether manual focus can be activated during autofocus by rotating the focus ring. Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Choose whether the display automatically zooms in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode. Choose how the camera focuses when function but-

tons to which features such as AF lock are assigned are pressed in manual focus mode. Choose a scale for depth of eld. FACE/EYE FgFg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING DETECTION SETTING FF SUBJECT DETECTION SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING SETTING AF+MF FF AF+MF MF ASSIST FF MF ASSIST FOCUS CHECK FF FOCUS CHECK xxFF INSTANT AF INSTANT AF SETTING SETTING xxFF DEPTH-OF-FIELD DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE SCALE xxFF AF RANGE LIMITER AF RANGE LIMITER Limit the range of available focus distances for in-

creased focus speed. FF TOUCH SCREEN MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using FOCUS CHECK LOCK FOCUS CHECK LOCK touch controls. Choose whether focus zoom remains in e ect once movie recording begins. 129 M e n u L i s t 6 AUDIO SETTING To display audio settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the P(AUDIO SETTING) tab. Setting Setting INTERNAL MIC LEVEL INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT MIC JACK SETTING MIC JACK SETTING MIC LEVEL LIMITER MIC LEVEL LIMITER WIND FILTER WIND FILTER LOW CUT FILTER LOW CUT FILTER Description Description Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone. Adjust the recording level for external microphones. Specify the type of audio device connected to the microphone jack. Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the microphones audio circuits. Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction dur-

ing movie recording. Choose whether to reduce low-frequency noise during movie recording. HEADPHONES VOLUME Adjust the headphone volume. HEADPHONES VOLUME XLR MIC ADAPTER XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING SETTING Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use with XLR microphone adapters. M e n u L i s t5 6 130 The Shooting Menus (Movies) TIME CODE SETTING To display time code settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shoot-

ing display and select the Q(TIME CODE SETTING) tab. Setting Setting TIME CODE DISPLAY TIME CODE DISPLAY START TIME SETTING START TIME SETTING COUNT UP SETTING COUNT UP SETTING Description Description Choose whether to display time codes during movie recording and playback. Choose the time code starting time. Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during movie recording. Choose whether to enable frame drop. DROP FRAME DROP FRAME HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT devices. M e n u L i s t 6 131 The Playback Menu The playback menu is displayed when you press MENU/OK in play-

back mode. Setting Setting SWITCH SLOT SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION RAW CONVERSION HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION CONVERSION ERASE ERASE Description Description Choose the card from which images will be played back. Copy RAW pictures in other formats. Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF. Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures. SIMULTANEOUS DELETE Choose whether deleting either the RAW or JPEG/

SIMULTANEOUS DELETE HEIF copy of pictures recorded simultaneously to the memory cards Slots 1 and 2 with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> x CARD SLOT SETTING deletes the remaining copy. Create a cropped copy of the current picture. Create a small copy of the current picture. Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Choose whether pictures are rotated for display during playback. Choose whether to add voice memos to photographs. Rate pictures using stars. Copy pictures between the cards in the rst and second slots. Select pictures for later upload to a smartphone. Establish wireless connections to smartphones, tablets, or other devices. CROP CROP RESIZE RESIZE PROTECT PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE IMAGE ROTATE VOICE MEMO SETTING VOICE MEMO SETTING RATING RATING COPY COPY TRANSFER IMAGE TO TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE SMARTPHONE xxFF WIRELESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION M e n u L i s t5 6 132 The Playback Menu Setting Setting SLIDE SHOW SLIDE SHOW PHOTOBOOK ASSIST PHOTOBOOK ASSIST PRINT ORDER (DPOF) PRINT ORDER (DPOF) instax PRINTER PRINT instax PRINTER PRINT DISP ASPECT DISP ASPECT Description Description View pictures in an automated slide show. Create books from your favorite photos. Create a digital print order for DPOF-compatible printers. Print pictures on optional Fuji lm instax SHARE print-

ers. Choose the aspect ratio for pictures displayed on a TV. M e n u L i s t 6 133 The Setup Menus USER SETTING To access basic camera settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SETUP) tab, and choose USER SETTING. Setting Setting FORMAT FORMAT bb AREA SETTING AREA SETTING DATE/TIME DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE TIME DIFFERENCE Description Description Format memory cards. Choose your location. Set the camera clock. Switch between your home time zone and the time zone in your current location. QQ aa Choose a language. MY MENU SETTING xx MY MENU SETTING Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options. Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options. Remove dust from the camera image sensor. Check battery age. Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values. View electronic copies of the product model number and other certi cates. MY MENU SETTING FF MY MENU SETTING M e n u L i s t5 6 SENSOR CLEANING SENSOR CLEANING BATTERY AGE BATTERY AGE RESET RESET REGULATORY REGULATORY 134 The Setup Menus SOUND SET-UP To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SOUND SET-UP. Setting Setting AF BEEP VOL. AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. OPERATION VOL. tttt ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME SHUTTER VOLUME ELECTRONIC tttt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND SHUTTER SOUND ss ELECTRONIC SHUTTER ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME VOLUME ss ELECTRONIC SHUTTER ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND SOUND PLAYBACK VOLUME PLAYBACK VOLUME 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK Description Description Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer is active. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or electronic front-curtain shutter. Choose the sound made by the mechanical or elec-

tronic front-curtain shutter. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic shutter. Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter. Adjust the volume for movie playback. Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch mov-

ies. M e n u L i s t 6 135 SCREEN SET-UP To access display settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose SCREEN SET-UP. Setting Setting VIEW MODE SETTING VIEW MODE SETTING EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF COLOR EVF COLOR Description Description Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic view-

nder), or LCD monitor view modes. Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic view nder. Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic view nder. EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the electronic view-

EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT PREVIEW EXP./WB IN PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW NATURAL LIVE VIEW nder. Adjust monitor brightness. LCD BRIGHTNESS LCD BRIGHTNESS Adjust monitor saturation. LCD COLOR LCD COLOR LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor. LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT Choose how long images are displayed after shooting. IMAGE DISP. IMAGE DISP. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS Choose whether the indicators in the view nder(EVF) AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS and LCD monitor rotate to match camera orientation. Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview. Choose whether the e ects of settings are visible in the monitor. Choose whether to display a tone-corrected preview

(equivalent to BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies. Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual horizon display. Choose a framing grid for shooting mode. Choose whether to automatically rotate tall (portrait-

orientation) pictures during playback. ELECTRONIC LEVEL ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING SETTING FRAMING GUIDELINE FRAMING GUIDELINE AUTOROTATE PB AUTOROTATE PB F-Log VIEW ASSIST F-Log VIEW ASSIST M e n u L i s t5 6 136 The Setup Menus Setting Setting FOCUS SCALE UNITS FOCUS SCALE UNITS APERTURE UNIT FOR APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS CINEMA LENS Description Description Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator. Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number or an f/-number when an optional cinema lens is attached. DUAL DISPLAY SETTING Choose the content of the two windows in the dual DUAL DISPLAY SETTING display. DISP. CUSTOM SETTING Choose the items shown in the standard indicator DISP. CUSTOM SETTING LARGE INDICATORS LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) MODE(EVF) LARGE INDICATORS LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) MODE(LCD) LARGE INDICATORS DISP. LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING SETTING INFORMATION CONTRAST INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.ADJ. LOCATION INFO LOCATION INFO display. Choose whether to display large indicators in the view nder (EVF). Choose whether to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. Choose the indicators displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). Adjust display contrast. Choose whether to display location information down-

loaded from smartphones. SUB MONITOR SETTING Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD SUB MONITOR SETTING SUB MONITOR SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR BACKGROUND COLOR Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose a background for the quick menu for use when xx Q MENU BACKGROUND monitor. Choose a background color for the secondary LCD monitor. M e n u L i s t 6 taking photographs. FF Q MENU BACKGROUND Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose a background for the quick menu for use when taking lming movies. 137 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING To access control options, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. Description Description Setting Setting FOCUS LEVER SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING Choose the functions performed by the focus stick

(focus lever). Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography. Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when lming movies. xx EDIT/SAVE QUICK EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUMENU EDIT/SAVE QUICK FF EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUMENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the function buttons. FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the function buttons POWER ZOOM LENS FUNC-

POWER ZOOM LENS FUNC-

available on some power zoom lenses. TION (Fn) SETTING TION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and SELECTOR BUTTON SELECTOR BUTTON right buttons on the selector. SETTING SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING Choose the roles played by the command dials. COMMAND DIAL SETTING S.S OPERATION oo S.S OPERATION M e n u L i s t5 6 COMMAND DIAL COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION DIRECTION SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT LENS Choose whether to enable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials. Choose whether to reverse command dial rotation for use when adjusting settings. Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose whether exposure locks (AE lock) while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose whether the shutter-release is enabled when no lens is attached. SHOOT WITHOUT CARD Choose whether the shutter can be released without a SHOOT WITHOUT CARD LENS ZOOM/FOCUS LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING SETTING memory card inserted in the camera. Adjust settings for lenses with focus rings or power zoom. 138 The Setup Menus Setting Setting AE/AF-LOCK MODE AE/AF-LOCK MODE Description Description Choose the role of the button to which exposure and/

or focus lock is assigned. Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance (AWB) lock. ISO BUTTON SETTING Choose the role played by the ISO button during AWB-LOCK MODE AWB-LOCK MODE aa ISO BUTTON SETTING playback. TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Choose whether to enable touch controls in the LCD TOUCH SCREEN SETTING LOCK LOCK monitor. Lock camera controls to prevent unintended operation. POWER MANAGEMENT To access power management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. Description Description Setting Setting AUTO POWER OFF AUTO POWER OFF Choose whether the camera turns o automatically when no operations are performed. Adjust power settings. PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING BOOST is selected for PERFORMANCE. AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. Choose the temperature at which the camera turns o AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. automatically when its temperature rises. 139 M e n u L i s t 6 SAVE DATA SET-UP To access fi le management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D(SET UP) tab, and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. The Setup Menus Setting Setting FRAME NO. FRAME NO. Description Description Choose whether le numbering is reset when a new memory card is inserted. Change the le name pre x. EDIT FILE NAME EDIT FILE NAME CARD SLOT SETTING Choose the roles played by the cards in Slot 1 and Slot x x CARD SLOT SETTING SELECT SLOT SELECT SLOT SEQUENTIAL)

((xxSEQUENTIAL) SELECT FOLDER SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO COPYRIGHT INFO DEFAULT CAPTION DEFAULT CAPTION GEOTAGGING GEOTAGGING 2 during still photography. Choose the card that is recorded to rst when SEQUENTIAL is selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING. Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent pictures. Choose whether to add copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, to new images as they are taken. Choose a caption to be recorded with new images as they are taken. Choose whether location information downloaded from smartphones is recorded with new images as they are taken. M e n u L i s t5 6 140 Network/USB Setting Menus To access network/USB settings, press MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB settings) tab. N For information on the network/USB settings menu, visit the website below. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/

M e n u L i s t 6 141 MEMO 142 Notices 143 For Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read Instructions Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. Retain Instructions Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions Follow Instructions: All operating and use should be followed. instructions Installation Installation Power Sources: This video product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-

bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-

pany. For video products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will t into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to t, contact your electri-

cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third

(grounding) pin. This plug will only t into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-

place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of re or electric shock. Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-

uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been ad-

hered to. This video product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-

terfor example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 144 N o t i c e s 7 Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-

tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-

turer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Antennas Antennas Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-

tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-

ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Ground Clamp e Equipment Electric Service Equipment t Ground Clamps Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC ART 250. PART H) AAntenna Lead in Wire An AAAntenna Discharge Unit D

(NEC SECTION N 8 810-20) Grounding Conductors (NEC SECTION 810-21) For Your Safety Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-

ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. UseUse Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-

fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into this video product through openings as they may touch dan-

gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the video product. Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-

ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and power-line surges. Service Service Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali ed service personnel. Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to quali ed service person-

nel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the video product. If the video product has been exposed to rain or water. If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. If the video product does not operate normally follow the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-

ment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali ed technician to restore the video product to its normal operation. When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-

i ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to this video product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-

er operating condition. Be sure to read these notes before use The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-

resent the following:

Safety Notes Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious in-

jury can result if the information is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. Unplug from power socket The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). N o t i c e s 7 AC DC Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.) WARNING WARNING If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC power adapter. Continued use of the camera when power adapter. it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or era or connecting cables. connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids. Should liquid fi nd its way into the camera or connecting Should liquid fi nd its way into the camera or connecting cables, turn the camera off , remove the battery, discon-

cables, turn the camera off , remove the battery, discon-

nect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC nect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a adapter. re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. 145 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean water and seek medical attention or call an emergency water and seek medical attention or call an emergency number right away. number right away. Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than those specifi ed here. The supplied charger is for use those specifi ed here. only with batteries of the type supplied with the camera. Using the charger to charge conventional batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst. Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-

visual impairment. tographing infants and young children. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the product for prolonged periods while the product is on. product for prolonged periods while the product is on. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-

longed use, at high ambient temperatures, when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP., or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

sive gases, or dust. sive gases, or dust. When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with battery terminals with insulation tape. other metallic objects or batteries could cause the battery to ignite or burst. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out of the reach of small children. Children may out of the reach of small children. swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical attention or call emergency. Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-

Keep out of reach of small children. ments that could cause injury are the strap, which could become entangled about a childs neck, causing strangulation, and the ash, which could cause visual impairment. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. This product generates radio-frequency emissions that could interfere with navigational or medical equipment. Do not use in the bathroom or shower Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. can cause a re or electric shock. Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-

Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-

er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution er open the case). can cause re or electric shock. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

accident, do not touch the exposed parts. serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-

move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and tion cord. cause a re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not use cables with bent connectors. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause injury. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. not use the camera while walking or driving. This can result in you falling down or being involved in a tra c accident. Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due thunderstorm. to induced current from the lightning discharge. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Load the Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. battery as shown by the indicator. Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-

abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-

charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-

charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-

charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking, causing re, burns, or other injury. Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the power supply voltage shown. The use of other power power supply voltage shown. sources can cause a re. 146 N o t i c e s 7 CAUTION CAUTION Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a re fumes, steam, humidity or dust. or electric shock. Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-

high temperatures. tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight. This can cause a re. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can Do not place heavy objects on the camera. cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause injury. Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to still connected. disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage the power cord or cables and cause a re or electric shock. Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-

Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-

er in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build er in a cloth or blanket. up and distort the casing or cause a re. Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-

securely into the outlet. caution could result in re or electric shock. When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Failure to do so can cause a re or electric shock. When charging ends, unplug the charger from the When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the power socket. power socket can cause a re. When a memory card is removed, the card could come When a memory card is removed, the card could come out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. Injury could result to those gently release the card. struck by the ejected card. Do not handle the memory card immediately after Do not handle the memory card immediately after shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting shooting. in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing it from the camera. Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause camera. a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer to request internal cleaning every two years. Please note that this service is not free of charge. Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-

Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-

tions. tions. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. the like. For Your Safety N o t i c e s 7 147 The Battery and Power Supply Cautions: Handling the Battery Cautions: Handling the Battery Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-

laces or hairpins. Do not expose to ame or heat. Do not disassemble or modify. Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures. Use with designated chargers only. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks. Do not expose to water. Keep the terminals clean. The battery and camera body may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal. Caution: Disposal Disposal Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate. Do not mechanically crush or split batteries. AC Power Adapters AC Power Adapters The AC power adapter is for indoor use only. Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera. Turn the camera o before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-

connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable. Do not disassemble. Do not expose to high heat and humidity. Do not subject to strong physical shocks. The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during use. This is normal. If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read the appropriate sections. WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. The following describes the proper use of batteries and how to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or cause leakage, overheating, re, or explosion. Li-ion Batteries Li-ion Batteries Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. Notes on the Battery Notes on the Battery The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. Battery life can be extended by turning the camera o when not in use. Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating devices. Charging the Battery Charging the Battery The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below

+10 C (+50 F) or above +35 C (+95 F). Do not attempt to charge the battery at temperatures above +40 C (+104 F); at temperatures below +5 C (+41 F), the battery will not charge. Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery does not however need to be fully discharged before charging. The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after charging or use. This is normal. Battery Life Battery Life A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-

vice life and should be replaced. If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may nd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge the battery regularly. Storage Storage If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-

mately one half to capacity. If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-

move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient temperature of from +15 C to +25 C (+59 F to +77 F). Do not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature. 148 N o t i c e s 7 For Your Safety Using the Camera Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, including arti cial light sources or natural light sources such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera image sensor. Strong sunlight focused through the view nder may dam-

age the panel of electronic view nder (EVF). Do not aim the electronic view nder at the sun. Take Test Shots Take Test Shots Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept liability for damages or lost pro ts incurred as a result of product malfunction. Notes on Copyright Notes on Copyright Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-

er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. Handling Handling To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are being recorded. Liquid Crystal Liquid Crystal In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-

en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action indicated should any of the following situations arise:

If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and running water. If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ush the a ected eye with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-

iting, then seek medical assistance. Although the display is manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and images recorded with the product are una ected. Trademark Information Trademark Information Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Tai-

wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS, Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photo-

shop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other coun-

tries. Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Fuji lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA

(CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of their respective owners. Electrical Interference Electrical Interference This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-

ment. Consult with hospital or airline sta before using the camera in a hospital or on an aircraft. Color Television Systems Color Television Systems NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-

vision telecasting speci cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A., Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color television system adopted mainly in European countries and China. Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera le format in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-

or reproduction during printing. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-

ware without the permission of the applicable governing bodies is prohibited. Lenses and Other Accessories Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod. Fuji lm will not be held liable for performance issues or damage caused by the use of third-party accessories. N o t i c e s 7 149 To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Please read the Safety Notes and make sure you understand them before using the camera. NOTICES Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-

ernments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci c Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certi ed power level in all tested frequency bands. Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this product must be used with a Fuji lm-speci ed fer-

rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord. A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Di-

vision 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Ef-

ciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through 1609 Perchlorate Materialspecial handling may apply. See:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate For Customers in the U. S. A. For Customers in the U. S. A. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25 Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25 FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-

vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-

lowing measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and re-

ceiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di erent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modi cations not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter. N o t i c e s 7 150 For Customers in Canada For Customers in Canada CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B) CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-

dian ICES-003. Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-

try Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-

terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-

erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scienti c evi-

dence does not show that any health problems are asso-

ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health e ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating e ects causes no known adverse health e ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological e ects. Some studies have suggested that some biological e ects might occur, but such ndings have not been con rmed by additional research. X-H2 has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-

nel mobile satellite systems. For Your Safety Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-

vironment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. This symbol on the batteries or accumulators indicates that those batteries shall not be treated as household waste. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-

mulators please dispose these separately according to your local requirements. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-

sources. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city o ce, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-

thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal. In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates that they are to be disposed of separately. To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Caring for the Camera Storage and Use Storage and Use If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera in locations that are:

exposed to rain, steam, or smoke very humid or extremely dusty exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day extremely cold subject to strong vibration exposed to strong magnetic elds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer, or magnet in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides next to rubber or vinyl products N o t i c e s 7 151 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions This product complies with the following EU Directives:

RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU RE Directive 2014/53/EU Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF210003 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-h2/pdf/x-h2_doc-myt.pdf The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-h2/pdf/x-h2_doc-myt_uk.pdf This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth). Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):

WLAN 2.4 GHz: 10.28 dBm WLAN 5 GHz: 12.29 dBm Bluetooth: 2.23 dBm IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the cameras built-in wireless transmitter. Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.. Fuji lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater degree of reliability than o ered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to ensure safety and prevent malfunction. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device. Fuji lm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference that may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-

tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.

- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access rights.

- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.

- This device cannot be directly connected to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services. The following may be punishable by law:

The following may be punishable by law:

- Disassembly or modi cation or this device

- Removal of device certi cation labels This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-

ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Con rm that the RFID transmitter is not in operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the a ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fuji lm representative. N o t i c e s 7 152 For Your Safety Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-

uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when o . This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in the network/USB setting menu before boarding. Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/

UK/HR. 5150 MHz5350 MHz is for indoor use only. Wireless specifi cations follow. Wireless specifi cations follow. Wireless LAN Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol) Israel, Indonesia

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels) USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels)

: 5,180 MHz5,320 MHz (W52, W53)

: 5,745 MHz5,825 MHz (UNII-3) European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore, Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain, Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan

: 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels)

: 5,180 MHz5,320 MHz (W52, W53)

: 5,500 MHz5,700 MHz (W56) Access protocols Infrastructure Bluetooth Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) 2,402 MHz2,480 MHz Specifi c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information Specifi c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certi ed output power level in all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.224 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue. U.K. Importer:

FUJIFILM UK Limited Fuji lm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom EU Importer:

FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany N o t i c e s 7 153 Be sure to read these notes before using the lens WARNING WARNING Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-

Do not immerse in or expose to water. serve this precaution can cause a re or electric shock. Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure Do not disassemble (do not open the case). to observe this precaution can cause re, electric shock, or injury due to product malfunction. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

accident, do not touch the exposed parts. serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-

move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may Do not place on unstable surfaces. fall, causing injury. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

fi nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause fi nders. permanent visual impairment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution on a sunny day. can cause re. Keep out of the reach of small children. This product Keep out of the reach of small children. could cause injury in the hands of a child. Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this Do not handle with wet hands. precaution can cause electric shock. Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when subjects. the sun is in or close to the frame can cause re or burns. When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the store out of direct sunlight. lens can cause re or burns. Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-

to a tripod. jects, causing injury. Safety Notes Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING WARNING CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that death or serious injury can result if the information is ig-

nored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Do not immerse Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). N o t i c e s 7 154 For Your Safety AC-5VJ AC power adapter Manufacturer Address Model name Rated input Input capacity Rated output Average active effi ciency Effi ciency at load 10%

No-load power consumption Operating temperature Weight Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd. No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town, 523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province, PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AC-5VJ 100 V 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Max. 50 VA DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W 84.8 %

84.2 %

0.02 W 0 C to +40 C/+32 F to +104 F Approx. 45 g 2 g/1.6 oz. 0.1 oz. N o t i c e s 7 155

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 156

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 157

158

159 MEMO 160 MEMO 161 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN https://fujifilm-x.com

 

 

FF210003 Manuel de base Nous vous remercions d'avoir achet ce produit. Veillez lire attentive-

ment ce manuel et bien le comprendre avant d'utiliser votre appareil photo. Une fois que vous avez termin, conservez le manuel porte de main pour pouvoir vous y rfrer ultrieurement. Les dernires versions des manuels du produit sont disponibles depuis le site Internet ci-dessous. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en-int/manual/

Le site Internet ci-dessus, qui fournit des instructions dtailles et des contenus non disponibles dans ce guide, est accessible depuis un ordinateur, un smart-

phone ou une tablette. Il comporte galement des informations sur la licence des logiciels. BL00005178-300 FR NOTES ii P Index des chapitres 1 Avant de commencer 2 Premires tapes 3 Prise de vue et affi chage des photos 4 Enregistrement et lecture des vidos 5 Raccordements 6 Liste des menus 7 Remarques 1 37 55 91 99 119 143 iii P Table des matires Index des chapitres ......................................................................................iii Accessoires fournis ................................................................................... viii propos de ce manuel ..............................................................................ix Symboles et conventions ....................................................................................ix Terminologie................................................................................................................ix 1 Avant de commencer Avant de commencer 1 1 Parties de l'appareil photo .........................................................................2 La plaque d'identifi cation .....................................................................................6 Le couvercle du logement des cartes mmoire (amovible) ...........6 Le levier de mise au point ....................................................................................7 Les touches de slection.......................................................................................7 La touche WB ...............................................................................................................7 La molette de slection .........................................................................................8 La touche DRIVE ........................................................................................................9 Les molettes de commande ............................................................................ 10 Le tmoin lumineux .............................................................................................. 11 L'cran LCD ................................................................................................................. 12 L'illeton ..................................................................................................................... 13 Rglage de la nettet du viseur ..................................................................... 13 Affi chages de l'appareil photo............................................................... 14 Le viseur lectronique ......................................................................................... 14 L'cran LCD ................................................................................................................. 16 Choix d'un mode d'affi chage .......................................................................... 18 Rglage de la luminosit de l'affi chage .................................................... 20 Rotation de l'affi chage ........................................................................................ 20 La touche DISP/BACK ........................................................................................... 21 Le double affi chage .............................................................................................. 22 Personnalisation de l'affi chage standard ................................................. 23 Horizon virtuel .......................................................................................................... 25 L'cran LCD secondaire ....................................................................................... 26 iv Table des matires Utilisation des menus ............................................................................... 28 Les menus ................................................................................................................... 28 Slection d'un onglet de menu ..................................................................... 30 Mode ecran tactile ..................................................................................... 31 Commandes tactiles pour la prise de vue .............................................. 31 Commandes tactiles en mode de lecture .............................................. 36 2 Premires tapes Premires tapes 37 37 Fixation de la courroie .............................................................................. 38 Fixation d'un objectif ................................................................................ 39 Insertion de la batterie ............................................................................. 40 Insertion des cartes mmoire ................................................................ 42 Utilisation de deux cartes .................................................................................. 44 Chargement de la batterie ...................................................................... 45 Allumer et teindre l'appareil photo ................................................... 49 Confi guration de base .............................................................................. 50 Slection d'une autre langue .......................................................................... 53 Modifi cation de l'heure et de la date ......................................................... 53 3 Prise de vue et a chage des photos 55 55 Prise de vue et a chage des photos Modes P, S, A et M ....................................................................................... 56 Mode P: Programme AE .................................................................................... 56 Mode S: AE avec priorit la vitesse ......................................................... 57 Mode A: AE avec priorit l'ouverture..................................................... 59 Mode M: Exposition manuelle ...................................................................... 60 FILTER ............................................................................................................................. 63 Modes personnaliss ............................................................................................ 64 Autofocus ...................................................................................................... 72 Mode de mise au point ...................................................................................... 73 Options autofocus (mode AF) ........................................................................ 74 Slection du collimateur de mise au point ............................................ 76 v Mise au point manuelle ........................................................................... 80 Vrifi cation de la mise au point ..................................................................... 81 Sensibilit ...................................................................................................... 83 AUTO............................................................................................................................... 84 Mesure ............................................................................................................ 85 Correction d'exposition............................................................................ 86 Verrouillage de la mise au point/de l'exposition ............................ 87 Autres commandes ............................................................................................... 88 Visualisation des images .......................................................................... 89 Suppression des images .......................................................................... 90 4 Enregistrement et lecture des vidos 91 Enregistrement et lecture des vidos 91 Enregistrement de vidos ....................................................................... 92 Enregistrement de vidos ................................................................................. 92 Modifi cation des paramtres vido ............................................................ 96 Visionnage des vidos .............................................................................. 97 5 Raccordements Raccordements 99 99 Vue d'ensemble ........................................................................................100 Fonctionnalits prises en charge ............................................................... 100 Paramtres de connexion .............................................................................. 101 Connexion aux smartphones (Bluetooth) .......................................102 Installation des applications de smartphone ..................................... 102 Connexion un smartphone ....................................................................... 102 Utilisation de l'application du smartphone......................................... 104 Connexion aux smartphones (USB) ...................................................105 Copie des images sur un smartphone ................................................... 105 Connexion de l'appareil photo et de l'ordinateur ........................... 108 Utilisation de l'appareil photo comme webcam ...........................110 Imprimantes instax SHARE....................................................................111 tablissement d'une connexion ................................................................. 111 Impression des photos ..................................................................................... 112 vi Table des matires Prise de vue photographique distance .........................................113 Prise de vue photographique distance en USB ............................ 113 Traitement RAW ........................................................................................115 Enregistrement et chargement des rglages .................................116 Enregistrement des vidos distance depuis un navigateur Internet ........................................................................................................117 6 Liste des menus Liste des menus 119 119 Les menus prise de vue (photographie) ..........................................120 CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE ............................................................ 120 CONFIGURATION AF/MF ................................................................................. 122 CONFIGURATION PRISE DE VUE .................................................................. 123 CONFIGURATION DU FLASH ......................................................................... 125 CONFIGURATION DU FILM ............................................................................. 125 Les menus prise de vue (vidos) .........................................................126 CONFIGURATION DU FILM ............................................................................. 126 CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE ............................................................ 128 CONFIGURATION AF/MF ................................................................................. 128 RGLAGE AUDIO................................................................................................... 130 RGLAGE CODE TEMPOREL ........................................................................... 131 Le menu lecture ........................................................................................132 Les menus de confi guration .................................................................134 CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR .................................................................... 134 CONFIGURATION SON ...................................................................................... 135 CONFIG. CRAN .................................................................................................... 136 CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE .......................................................................... 138 GESTION ALIM. ..................................................................................................... 139 ENR. DES RGLAGES ........................................................................................... 140 Menus des paramtres rseau/USB ...................................................141 7 Remarques Remarques 143 143 Pour votre scurit ...................................................................................144 vii Accessoires fournis Les lments suivants sont fournis avec l'appareil photo:

Batterie rechargeable NP-W235 O Pour des raisons de scurit, la batterie nest pas charge au moment de lachat. Lappareil photo ne fonctionnera pas si la batterie nest pas charge; veillez charger la batterie avant toute utilisation (P 45). Adaptateur secteur AC-5VJ Fiche intermdiaire Cble USB (environ 0,6m/2pi) Bouchon de botier (est fi x sur l'appareil photo) Courroie Protecteur de cble Cache de la griff e fl ash (insr dans la griff e fl ash) Cache de la prise synchro (est fi x sur l'appareil photo) Cache du connecteur de la poigne-alimentation verticale/

du transmetteur de fi chiers (est fi x sur l'appareil photo) Cache du connecteur du ventilateur (est fi x sur l'appareil photo) Manuel de base (ce manuel) N Si vous avez achet un kit avec objectif, vrifi ez que lobjectif est inclus. La fi che intermdiaire fournie dpend du pays ou de la rgion. Consultez le site Internet ci-dessous pour obtenir des informations sur les logiciels disponibles pour votre appareil photo. https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/

viii propos de ce manuel Ce manuel comporte des instructions pour votre appareil photo numrique FUJIFILM X-H2. Veillez le lire attentive-

ment et bien le comprendre avant d'aller plus loin. Informations que vous devez lire pour viter d'endommager le produit. Informations supplmentaires qui peuvent vous tre utiles lors de l'utilisation du produit. Symboles et conventions Les symboles suivants sont utiliss dans ce manuel :

O N P Pages comportant des informations associes. Les menus et autres textes affi chs l'cran sont indiqus en gras. Les illustrations sont uniquement destines faciliter les explica-

tions; il se peut que les dessins aient t simplifi s. Par ailleurs, les photos n'ont pas ncessairement t prises avec le modle d'appa-

reil photo dcrit dans ce manuel. Terminologie Les cartes mmoire SD, SDHC, SDXC et CFexpress de typeB (en option) que l'appareil photo utilise pour enregistrer les images sont dnommes cartes mmoire. Le viseur lectronique peut tre dnomm EVF et l'cran LCD LCD. Les smartphones et les tablettes sont dnomms smartphones. ix NOTES x Avant de commencer 1 Parties de l'appareil photo 1 A Touche ISO .............................................................83 B Touche WB ............................................................... 7 C Touche Fn1 D cran LCD secondaire .........................................26 E Microphone ...........................................................92 F Gri e ash G Commande de rglage dioptrique .................13 H Bouton de dverrouillage de la molette

........................................................................ 56, 92 I Molette de slection .............................................. 8 J illet de la courroie ............................................38 K Cache de la prise HDMI L Cache de la prise du microphone M Cache de la prise jack pour casque N Haut-parleur .........................................................97 O Cache de la prise USB P Prise synchro Q Touche Fn3 R Contacts de signal de l'objectif S Bouton de dverrouillage de l'objectif ...........39 T Touche Fn2 U Illuminateur d'assistance AF Tmoin lumineux du retardateur Lampe tmoin V Molette de commande avant ..........................10 W Commutateur ON/OFF .......................................49 X Dclencheur Y Touche t (enregistrement vido) ..................92 Z Cache de la gri e ash a Bouchon de botier ..............................................39 b Prise HDMI (type A) c Prise du microphone (3,5mm) .....................95 d Prise jack pour casque (3,5mm) e Port USB (type C) ..................................................45 f Filetage pour visser le cble USB g Filetage pour visser le protge-cble O b Utilisez un cble HDMI dont la longueur ne dpasse pas 1,5m (4,9pi). 2 Parties de l'appareil photo 1 h Touche DRIVE .......................................................... 9 Touche b (suppression) ....................................90 i Touche a (lecture) ............................................89 j Dtecteur oculaire ...............................................19 k Viseur lectronique (EVF) ...............14, 18, 20, 31 l illeton (verrouillable) ......................................13 m Touche VIEW MODE .............................................18 n Touche de rtroclairage de l'cran secondaire ..........................................................27 o Levier de mise au point ..................................7, 76 p Touche AFON .........................................................88 q Molette de commande arrire .........................10 r Tmoin lumineux .................................................11 Lampe tmoin s Cache de la prise pour tlcommande .........62 t Loquet du couvercle des logements des cartes mmoire .................................................42 u Couvercle des logements des cartes mmoire ..........................................................6, 42 v Loquet du couvercle du compartiment de la batterie ................................................................40 w Couvercle du compartiment de la batterie ...40 x Touches de slection ............................................. 7 y Touche MENU/OK .................................................28 z Touche DISP (a chage)/BACK.........................21 Touche x(Bluetooth) .......................................102 0 Touche Q (menu rapide) 1 Touche AEL (verrouillage de l'exposition) .....88 2 Fixation du trpied 3 cran LCD inclinable ............................. 12, 16, 18 cran tactile ...........................................................31 4 Cache du connecteur de la poigne-alimentation verticale/

du transmetteur de chiers 3 1 5 Prise pour tlcommande (2,5mm) ..........62 6 Logement de la carte mmoire2

(pour cartes mmoire SD) ..............................42 7 Plaque d'identi cation 8 Logement de la carte mmoire1

(pour cartes CFexpress de typeB) ................42 9 Loquet de la batterie ...........................................41

- Compartiment de la batterie ...........................40

^ Cache du connecteur du ventilateur

\ Connecteur du ventilateur

$ Filetage pour visser le ventilateur

% Connecteur de la poigne-alimentation verticale/du transmetteur de chiers 4 Parties de l'appareil photo Le protecteur de cble Fixez le protecteur comme indiqu afi n d'empcher tout dbranchement accidentel. A Faites glisser le protge-cble en direction du cache du port USB de faon que le cache passe par la fente du protge-cble. B Serrez la vis de verrouillage. C Branchez le cble et faites-le passer par le protecteur comme illustr. 1 5 La plaque d'identifi cation Ne retirez pas la plaque d'identifi cation qui indique le CMIIT ID, le numro de srie et d'autres informations importantes. 1 Le couvercle du logement des cartes mmoire (amovible) Plaque d'identifi cation Il est possible de retirer le couvercle du logement des cartes mmoire en abaissant le loquet intrieur. Retirez le couvercle pour faciliter l'accs lorsqu'une cage pour camra est fi xe ou dans d'autres situa-

tions o il est diffi cile d'ouvrir ou de fermer le couvercle. 6 Parties de l'appareil photo Le levier de mise au point Inclinez le levier de mise au point ou ap-

puyez dessus pour slectionner la zone de mise au point. Le levier de mise au point permet galement de parcourir les menus. N Pour choisir le rle jou par le levier de mise au point, maintenez appuy le centre du levier ou utilisez D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> RGLAGE LEVIER FOCUS. 1 Les touches de slection Appuyez sur la touche de slection sup-

rieure (e), droite (h), infrieure (f) ou gauche (g) pour mettre en surbrillance les lments. Les touches de slection suprieure, droite, infrieure et gauche correspondent galement aux touches de fonction Fn4 Fn7. La touche WB Appuyez sur la touche WB pour accder aux rglages de balance des blancs. 7 La molette de slection Pour slectionner un mode de prise de vue, tournez la molette jusqu' ce que l'icne du mode souhait s'aligne sur le repre. 1 ModeMode A P (PROGRAMME AE) B S (AE AVEC PRIORIT L'OBTURATEUR) A (AE AVEC PRIORIT L'OUVERTURE) M (MANUELLE) C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6/C7

(PERSONNALIS 1/2/3/4/5/6/7) D FILTER (FILTRE) E F (VIDEO) Description Description Vous pouvez modi er l'ouverture et la vitesse d'obturation l'aide du dcalage de programme. Slectionnez l'un de ces modes pour contrler entirement les rglages de l'appareil photo, notamment l'ouver-

ture (M et A) et/ou la vitesse d'obtura-

tion (M et S). Prenez des photos en vous servant de rglages enregistrs prcdemment. Prenez des photos avec des e ets de ltres. Enregistrez des vidos. PP 56 57 59 60 64 63 92 8 Parties de l'appareil photo La touche DRIVE Appuyez sur la touche DRIVE pour affi cher le menu du mode de dclenchement;

vous avez le choix entre les modes de dclenchement suivants. ModeMode B Vue par vue J Mode rafale haute vitesse O Mode rafale basse vitesse W BRACKETING ISO V BAL. BLANC BKT ModeMode 1 BKT Bracketing h HDR u Panoramique j Exposition multiple p MULTI PRISE DCALAGE PIXEL 9 Les molettes de commande Les molettes de commande avant et arrire permettent d'eff ectuer les oprations ci-dessous. Molette de commande avant Molette de commande arrire 1 P Prise de Prise de vue 11 vue Choisir la combinaison sou-

haite de vitesse d'obturation et d'ouverture (dcalage de programme). Choisir une vitesse d'obturation. Rgler l'ouverture. 2 S A M Choisir une vitesse d'obturation. Rgler l'ouverture. 2 Rgler la correction de l'expo-

sition. FILTER Dcalage de programme. Menus Menus Menu Q Menu Q Slectionner les onglets de menus ou parcourir les menus. Slectionner les lments dans le menu rapide. Lecture Lecture A cher les autres images. Rgler la correction de l'expo-

sition. Mettre en surbrillance les rubriques de menus. Modi er les rglages du menu rapide. Faire un zoom avant ou arrire

(lecture plein cran). Faire un zoom avant ou arrire

(lecture multi-vues). 1 Peut tre modi l'aide de D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> PARAM. MOLETTE COMMANDE. 2 S'applique si l'objectif n'a pas de bague des ouvertures ou si une bague des ouvertures com-

portant la position A est positionne sur A. N Le sens de rotation des molettes de commande peut tre slectionn l'aide de D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> DIRECTION MOLETTE COMMANDE. 10 Parties de l'appareil photo Le tmoin lumineux L'tat de l'appareil photo est indiqu par le tmoin lumineux. Tmoin lumineux Tmoin lumineux Allum en vert Clignote en vert Clignote en vert et en orange Allum en orange Clignote en orange Clignote en rouge tat de l'appareil photo tat de l'appareil photo 1 La mise au point est verrouille. Avertissement relatif la mise au point ou une vitesse d'ob-

turation lente. Il est possible de prendre des photos. Appareil photo allum: enregistrement des photos ou photo a che pour validation aprs avoir t prise avec une option autre que NON pour D CONFIG. CRAN> IMAGE (il est possible de prendre d'autres photos). Appareil photo teint : transfert des photos vers un smart-

phone ou une tablette. *

Photos en cours d'enregistrement. Il est impossible de prendre d'autres photos pour le moment. Flash en cours de recyclage; le ash ne se dclenchera pas si vous prenez une photo. Erreur avec l'objectif ou la mmoire.

* A ch uniquement si les photos sont slectionnes pour tre transfres. N Des avertissements peuvent galement s'affi cher l'cran. Le tmoin lumineux reste teint lorsque vous regardez dans le viseur. L'option B CONFIGURATION DU FILM> LAMPE TMOIN permet de choisir le voyant (tmoin lumineux ou lampe d'assistance AF) qui s'claire pendant l'enregistrement vido et si ce voyant clignote ou pas. 11 L'cran LCD Vous pouvez modifi er l'angle de l'cran LCD lorsque vous cadrez les images, mais faites attention de ne pas vous coincer les doigts ou de coincer d'autres objets. 1 O N'exercez pas de force excessive sur la charnire lorsque vous tournez l'cran LCD, car cela pourrait endommager la charnire. Veillez ce que les angles de l'cran ne soient pas en contact avec le botier de l'appareil photo car cela pourrait laisser des marques. N L'cran LCD fonctionne galement comme cran tactile permettant:

La prise de vue tactile (P 32) La slection de la zone de mise au point (P 31) La slection de fonctions (P 34) Contrle fi lm optim. oL (P 33) Lecture (P 36) 12 Parties de l'appareil photo L'illeton Pour retirer l'illeton, maintenez appuys les boutons de chaque ct et faites glisser l'illeton vers le haut. Rglage de la nettet du viseur Si les indicateurs affi chs dans le viseur sont fl ous, tournez la com-

mande de rglage dioptrique tout en regardant dans le viseur jusqu' ce que l'affi chage soit net. 1 Pour rgler la nettet du viseur:

A Levez la commande de rglage dioptrique. B Tournez-la pour rgler la nettet du viseur. C Replacez-la dans sa position d'origine et bloquez-la. O Levez la commande avant toute utilisation. Si vous ne respectez pas cette prcaution, le produit risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 13 Affi chages de l'appareil photo Cette section rpertorie les indicateurs qui peuvent s'affi cher pendant la prise de vue. O Les affi chages sont reprsents avec tous les indicateurs allums des fi ns d'illustration. Le viseur lectronique 1 5 6 E F L M N O P Q R S W X GHIJK T U V Y Z a b c d e f qr klmn j hi g opstuv 7 4 3 2 1 0 z y x w 14 A Facteur de recadrage ........................................123 B Stabilisateur 2 ......................................................124 C Mode de ash (TTL) D Correction du ash E Compression de vidos ....................................126 F Tlconvertisseur numrique .........................124 G Indicateur du retardateur ................................123 H Mode continu I Type d'obturateur ..............................................124 J Indicateur AF+MF 2 ...........................................122 K Bluetooth ON/OFF L Balance des blancs ............................................120 M Verrouillage de la balance des blancs auto ......................................................139 N Simulation de lm .............................................120 O Enregistrement F-Log/HLG..............................126 P Plage dynamique ..............................................120 Q Priorit plage D ...................................................120 R Mode vido ...................................................92, 125 S Indicateur d'enregistrement haute vitesse ...126 T Dure d'enregistrement disponible/

Affi chages de l'appareil photo e Verrouillage des commandes 3 ......................139 f Mode Stimuler ..............................................139 g Alimentation .........................................................47 h Histogramme ........................................................24 i Niveau de charge de la batterie j Sensibilit ...............................................................83 k Correction d'exposition ......................................86 l Ouverture ........................................................ 59, 60 m Indicateur de distance 2 ......................................81 n Vitesse d'obturation ..................................... 57, 60 o Verrouillage TTL .................................................125 p Mmorisation de l'exposition ..................88, 138 q Mesure ....................................................................85 r Mode de prise de vue ..........................................56 s Mode de mise au point 2 ....................................73 t Indicateur de mise au point 2 u Indicateur de mise au point manuelle 2 ... 73, 80 v Verrouillage AF ............................................88, 138 w Code temporel ....................................................131 x Canal d'entre du microphone y Niveau d'enregistrement 2 ...............................130 z Indicateur d'exposition................................ 60, 86 0 Horizon virtuel ......................................................25 1 Cadre de mise au point ............................... 76, 87 2 Progression du transfert FTP ...........................141 3 tat de transfert des images ................. 102, 141 4 tat du tlchargement des donnes de 1 dure d'enregistrement coule ...................92 U Options du logement de cartes ..............44, 140 V Nombre de vues disponibles 1 W Taille d'image ......................................................120 X Format de chier ................................................126 Y Qualite d'image ..................................................120 Z Format HEIF .........................................................120 a Date et heure.........................................50, 53, 134 b Mode ecran tactile......................................31, 123 c Rglages du ventilateur ......................... 124, 127 d Avertissement concernant la temprature ...43 1 Indique 9999 s'il y a de la place pour plus de 9999 images. 2 Non a ch lorsque OUI est slectionn pour D CONFIG. CRAN> MODE GRD localisation ............................................. 102, 140 5 Aperu de la profondeur de champ ...............81 6 Paramtre de proxy (ProRes uniquement) 7 Vri cation de la mise au point ..............82, 123 INDICATEURS (EVF). 3 A ch lorsque vous avez verrouill les commandes en maintenant appuye la touche MENU/OK. Il est possible de dverrouiller les commandes en maintenant appuye nouveau la touche MENU/OK. 15 L'cran LCD D E F G I K L R S B A C H J M N O QP T UVW X Y Z a b c d e f g uv mnpqr o kl j i h stwxyz 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16 1 A Facteur de recadrage ........................................123 B tat du tlchargement des donnes de localisation ............................................. 102, 140 C Vri cation de la mise au point ..............82, 123 D Aperu de la profondeur de champ ...............81 E Paramtre de proxy (ProRes uniquement) F Compression de vidos ....................................126 G Tlconvertisseur numrique .........................124 H tat de transfert des images ................. 102, 141 I Bluetooth ON/OFF J Progression du transfert FTP ...........................141 K Mode vido ...................................................92, 125 L Indicateur d'enregistrement haute vitesse ...126 M Cadre de mise au point ............................... 76, 87 N Dure d'enregistrement disponible/

dure d'enregistrement coule ...................92 O Date et heure.........................................50, 53, 134 P Options du logement de cartes ..............44, 140 Q Nombre de vues disponibles 1 R Taille d'image ......................................................120 S Format de chier ................................................126 T Qualite d'image ..................................................120 U Format HEIF .........................................................120 V Rglages du ventilateur ......................... 124, 127 W Mode ecran tactile 3 ...................................31, 123 X Verrouillage de la balance des blancs auto ......................................................139 Y Balance des blancs ............................................120 Z Simulation de lm .............................................120 a Enregistrement F-Log/HLG..............................126 b Plage dynamique ..............................................120 c Priorit plage D ...................................................120 d Contrle lm optim. 3 ..........................................33 Affi chages de l'appareil photo e Horizon virtuel ......................................................25 f Mode Stimuler ..............................................139 g Zoom tactile 3 ........................................................35 h Avertissement concernant la temprature ...43 i Verrouillage des commandes 4 ......................139 j Niveau de charge de la batterie k Alimentation .........................................................47 l Sensibilit ...............................................................83 m Histogramme ........................................................24 n Correction d'exposition ......................................86 o Indicateur de distance 2 ......................................81 p Ouverture ........................................................ 59, 60 q Code temporel ....................................................131 r Vitesse d'obturation ..................................... 57, 60 s Verrouillage TTL .................................................125 t Mmorisation de l'exposition ..................88, 138 u Mesure ....................................................................85 v Mode de prise de vue ..........................................56 w Mode de mise au point 2 ....................................73 x Indicateur de mise au point 2 y Indicateur de mise au point manuelle 2 ... 73, 80 z Verrouillage AF ............................................88, 138 0 Canal d'entre du microphone 1 Indicateur AF+MF 2 ...........................................122 2 Type d'obturateur ..............................................124 3 Niveau d'enregistrement 2 ...............................130 4 Mode continu 5 Indicateur du retardateur ................................123 6 Indicateur d'exposition................................ 60, 86 7 Mode de ash (TTL) 8 Correction du ash 9 Stabilisateur 2 ......................................................124 1 Indique 9999 s'il y a de la place pour plus de 9999 images. 2 Non a ch lorsque OUI est slectionn pour D CONFIG. CRAN> MODE GRD INDICATEURS (LCD). 3 Il est galement possible d'accder aux fonctions de l'appareil photo via les commandes tactiles. 4 A ch lorsque vous avez verrouill les commandes en maintenant appuye la touche MENU/OK. Il est possible de dverrouiller les commandes en maintenant appuye nouveau la touche MENU/OK. 17 Choix d'un mode d'affi chage Appuyez sur la touche VIEW MODE pour parcourir les modes d'affi chage suivants. Vous pouvez choisir des modes d'affi chage distincts pour la prise de vue et la lecture. 1 CLICH Option Option DT. OC. EE DT. OC. SEUL LCD SEUL LCD SEUL EVF SEUL EVF SEUL EVF + EE SEUL EVF +

EE DTECTEUR OC. + AFF. DTECTEUR OC. + AFF. IM. LCD IM. LCD Description Description Lorsque vous regardez dans le viseur, ce dernier s'allume et l'cran LCD s'teint; si vous loignez votre il du viseur, ce dernier s'teint et l'cran LCD s'allume. cran LCD allum, viseur teint. Viseur allum, cran LCD teint. Lorsque vous regardez dans le viseur, ce dernier s'allume;

si vous loignez votre il du viseur, ce dernier s'teint. L'cran LCD reste teint. Si vous approchez l'il du viseur pendant la prise de vue, ce dernier s'allume, mais c'est l'cran LCD qui a che les images une fois que vous avez retir l'il du viseur aprs la prise de vue. Les options slectionnes pour D CONFIG. CRAN> IMAGE s'appliquent l'a chage de l'cran LCD. 18 Affi chages de l'appareil photo LECTURE Option Option DT. OC. EE DT. OC. SEUL LCD SEUL LCD SEUL EVF SEUL EVF Description Description Lorsque vous regardez dans le viseur, ce dernier s'allume et l'cran LCD s'teint; si vous loignez votre il du viseur, ce dernier s'teint et l'cran LCD s'allume. cran LCD allum, viseur teint. Viseur allum, cran LCD teint. N Utilisez D CONFIG. CRAN > RGLAGE VIEW MODE dans le menu de confi guration afi n de choisir un mode d'affi chage pour le viseur lectro-

nique et pour l'cran LCD. L'option COMMUTATEUR EVF/LCD peut tre attribue une touche de fonction, puis cette touche peut tre utilise pour commuter entre les affi chages SEUL EVF et SEUL LCD. 1 Le dtecteur oculaire Le dtecteur oculaire peut ragir des objets autres que votre il ou la lumire qui claire directement le capteur. Dtecteur oculaire 19 Rglage de la luminosit de l'affi chage La luminosit et la saturation du viseur et de l'cran LCD peuvent tre rgles l'aide des lments situs dans le menu D CONFIG. CRAN. Choisissez LUMINOSIT EVF ou COULEUR EVF pour r-

gler la luminosit ou la saturation du viseur, LUMINOSIT LCD ou COULEUR LCD pour eff ectuer ces mmes rglages sur l'cran LCD. 1 Rotation de l'affi chage Lorsque OUI est slectionn pour l'option D CONFIG. CRAN>

AUTOROTATION CRANS, les indicateurs du viseur et de l'cran LCD pivotent automatiquement pour s'adapter l'orientation de l'appareil photo. 20 Affi chages de l'appareil photo La touche DISP/BACK La touche DISP/BACK permet de contrler l'affi chage des indicateurs dans le viseur et sur l'cran LCD. N Les indicateurs du viseur lectronique et de l'cran LCD doivent tre slectionns spa-

rment. Pour choisir l'affi chage du viseur lectronique, placez l'il au niveau du viseur tout en utilisant la touche DISP/BACK. Viseur Plein cran Indicateurs standard Double affi chage

(mode de mise au point manuelle uniquement) 1 21 cran LCD Indicateurs standard Sans indicateurs 1 12800 12800 Double affi chage (mode de mise au point manuelle uniquement) Affi chage des infos Le double affi chage Le double affi chage comporte une grande fentre qui affi che l'int-

gralit de la vue et une plus petite qui affi che en gros plan la zone de mise au point. 22 Affi chages de l'appareil photo Personnalisation de l'affi chage standard Pour choisir les lments affi chs en standard:

1 A chez les indicateurs standard. Appuyez sur la touche DISP/BACK afi n d'affi cher les indicateurs standard. 2 Slectionnez AFF. REGL. PERSO. Slectionnez D CONFIG. CRAN> AFF. REGL. PERSO dans le menu de confi guration. 1 3 Choisissez les lments a cher. Mettez en surbrillance les lments et appuyez sur MENU/OK pour les slectionner ou les dslectionner. lment lment Par dfaut Par dfaut STILL STILL MOVIEMOVIE R R GUIDE CADRAGE R R CADRE FOCUS R R TMOIN DISTANCE AF R R TMOIN DISTANCE MF R R HISTOGRAMME ALERTE LUM. VUE EN DIRECT R R R R MODE DE PRISE DE VUE R R OUVERT/VIT OBTUR/ISO ARRIRE-PLAN INFORMATIONS R R R R Comp. Expo (Numrique) R R Comp. Expo (chelle) R R MODE AF R R PHOTOMETRIE R TYPE DE DCLENCHEUR R FLASH R PRISE DE VUE CONTINUE lment lment Par dfaut Par dfaut STILL STILL MOVIEMOVIE R R MODE DOUBLE STAB. R R MODE TACTILE R R BALANCE DES BLANCS R R SIMULATION DE FILM R R PLAGE DYNAMIQUE R R MODE BOOST RGL. DU VENTILATEUR DE REFROID. R R R IMAGES RESTANTES R TAILLE/QUALITE IMAGE MODE VIDEO ET DURE D'ENREG. R R CONV-TELE NUMERIQUE ORDRE TRANSFERT IMAGE R R R NIVEAU MICRO R R MESSAGE DE GUIDAGE R R TAT BATTERIE CONTOUR D'ENCADREMENT R R 4 Appuyez sur DISP/BACK pour enregistrer les modi cations. 5 Appuyez sur DISP/BACK autant que ncessaire pour quitter les menus et revenir l'cran de prise de vue. 23 Contour d'encadrement Activez CONTOUR D'ENCADREMENT pour que les contours du cadre soient plus visibles sur un arrire-plan sombre. Histogrammes Les histogrammes indiquent la rpartition des tons d'une image. La luminosit est indique par l'axe horizontal, le nombre de pixels par l'axe vertical. Nombre de pixels 1 Ombres Hautes lumires Luminosit des pixels Exposition optimale: les pixels sont rpartis de manire uniforme sur toute la gamme des tons. Surexposition: les pixels sont regroups droite du graphique. Sous-exposition: les pixels sont regroups gauche du graphique. Pour affi cher des histogrammes RVB distincts et les zones de l'image surexposes avec les rglages en cours, en superposition de la vue passant par l'objectif, appuyez sur la touche de fonction laquelle l'option HISTOGRAMME est attribue. A Les zones surexposes clignotent B Histogrammes RVB 24 Affi chages de l'appareil photo Horizon virtuel Vrifi ez si l'appareil photo est niveau. Vous pouvez choisir le type d'affi chage l'aide de D CONFIG. CRAN> RGLAGE DU NIVEAU LECTRONIQUE. Utilisez l'horizon virtuel pour mettre niveau l'appareil photo lorsqu'il est fi x un trpied ou autre accessoire similaire. 2D 3D 1 Roulis Tangage OFF: l'horizon virtuel n'est pas affi ch. 2D: une ligne blanche indique le degr d'inclinaison de l'appareil photo vers la gauche ou la droite. Cette ligne devient verte lorsque l'appareil photo est niveau. Cette ligne peut disparatre si vous inclinez l'appareil photo vers l'avant ou l'arrire. 3D: l'affi chage indique si l'appareil photo est inclin vers la gauche ou la droite et vers l'avant ou l'arrire. N L'option COMMUTATEUR DE NIVEAU LECTRONIQUE peut tre attri-

bue une touche de fonction, puis cette touche peut tre utilise pour commuter entre les affi chages 2D et 3D. 25 L'cran LCD secondaire La vitesse d'obturation, l'ouverture et la sensibilit fi gurent parmi les rglages pou-

vant tre affi chs sur l'cran LCD secon-

daire. Des rglages diff rents sont affi chs en modes photo et vido. 1 Rglages par dfaut cran LCD secondaire Par dfaut, l'cran LCD secondaire affi che les rglages indiqus ci-dessous. N Vous pouvez slectionner les rglages affi chs l'aide de D CONFIG. CRAN> RGLAGE SUB MONITEUR. Mode photo Mode photo A VITESSE DU DCLENCHEUR B OUVERTURE C COMP. EXPO. D ISO Par dfaut Par dfaut E SIMULATION DE FILM F BALANCE DES BLANCS G TAILLE D'IMAGE H MODE DE PRISE DE VUE 26 Mode vido Mode vido Affi chages de l'appareil photo 1 A MODE VIDEO B DURE ENREGISTREMENT C COMP. EXPO. D ISO Par dfaut Par dfaut E SIMULATION DE FILM F BALANCE DES BLANCS G OPTIONS FENTE CARTE H NIVEAU DE BATTERIE La touche de rtroclairage de l'cran LCD secondaire Si vous trouvez l'cran LCD secondaire trop sombre pour lire correctement, vous pouvez l'clairer en appuyant sur la touche de rtroclai-

rage de l'cran secondaire. Appuyez nouveau sur cette touche pour dsactiver le rtroclairage. Couleur de fond La couleur de fond (noir ou blanc) de l'cran LCD secondaire peut tre s-

lectionne l'aide de l'option D CONFIG. CRAN> COULEUR FOND SUB-

MONITEUR du menu D(confi guration). Notez que le fond s'affi che en blanc chaque fois que le rtroclairage de l'cran LCD secondaire est activ. 27 Utilisation des menus Pour affi cher les menus, appuyez sur MENU/OK. 1 Les menus Des menus diff rents s'affi chent pendant la prise de vue photogra-

phique, l'enregistrement vido et la lecture. Photo (tous les modes sauf F) Si vous appuyez sur MENU/OK pendant que vous photographiez, les menus photo s'affi chent. CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE TAILLE D'IMAGE QUALITE D'IMAGE ENREGISTREMENT RAW SLECTIONNER JPEG/HEIF SIMULATION DE FILM COULEUR MONOCHOMATIQUE EFFET DU GRAIN COULEUR EFFET CHROME SORTIR N Dans les modes C1 C7, les menus photo s'affi cheront si vous slectionnez x PHOTO pour le jeu choisi l'aide de H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS dans les menus photo ou l'aide de B CONFIGURATION DU FILM> xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS dans les menus vido (P 64). 28 Utilisation des menus Enregistrement vido (F/mode vido) Si vous appuyez sur MENU/OK en mode vido, les menus vido s'affi chent. CONFIGURATION DU FILM LISTE DES PARAMTRES VIDEO MODE DE PRISE DE VUE MODE VIDEO ENR. GDE VITESSE RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA RGLAGE DE LA SORTIE HDMI CORR. AGR. ROG. FILM ZOOM NUMRIQUE SORTIR 1 N Dans les modes C1 C7, les menus photo s'affi cheront si vous slectionnez F VIDO pour le jeu choisi l'aide de H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS dans les menus photo ou l'aide de B CONFIGURATION DU FILM> xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS dans les menus vido (P 64). Lecture Si vous appuyez sur MENU/OK en mode de lecture, le menu de lec-

ture s'affi che. MENU LECTURE FENTE COMMUTE CONVERSION RAW CONVERSION HEIF EN JPEG/TIFF EFFACE SUPPRESSION SIMULTANE RECADRER REDIMENSIONNER PROTEGER SORTIR 29 Slection d'un onglet de menu Pour parcourir les menus:

1 Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour affi cher les menus. 1 2 Appuyez gauche du levier de mise au point pour mettre en surbrillance l'onglet du menu en cours. Utilisation des menus CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE TAILLE D'IMAGE QUALITE D'IMAGE ENREGISTREMENT RAW SLECTIONNER JPEG/HEIF SIMULATION DE FILM COULEUR MONOCHOMATIQUE EFFET DU GRAIN COULEUR EFFET CHROME SORTIR CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE TAILLE D'IMAGE QUALITE D'IMAGE ENREGISTREMENT RAW SLECTIONNER JPEG/HEIF SIMULATION DE FILM COULEUR MONOCHOMATIQUE EFFET DU GRAIN COULEUR EFFET CHROME SORTIR Onglet 3 Appuyez en haut ou en bas du levier de mise au point pour mettre en surbrillance l'onglet comportant l'lment souhait. 4 Appuyez droite du levier de mise au point pour positionner le curseur dans le menu. N Utilisez la molette de commande avant pour slectionner les onglets de menus ou pour parcourir les menus et utilisez la molette de commande arrire pour mettre en surbrillance les lments de menus. 30 Mode ecran tactile L'cran LCD est galement un cran tactile. Commandes tactiles pour la prise de vue Pour activer les commandes tactiles, s-

lectionnez OUI pour D CONFIG.TOUCHE/

MOLETTE> CONFIG. ECRAN TACTILE>

x RGLAGE CRAN TACTILE. RGLAGES CRAN TACTILE RGLAGE CRAN TACTILE RGLAGE TOUCHER DOUBLE OUI FONCTION TACTILE NON ZOOM AU TOUCH RGLAGE CRAN TACTILE RGL ZONE CRAN TACT EVF 1 EVF L'cran LCD permet de slectionner la zone de mise au point lorsque vous cadrez les images dans le viseur lectronique

(EVF). Utilisez D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> CONFIG. ECRAN TACTILE> RGL ZONE CRAN TACT EVF pour choisir la zone de l'cran destine aux commandes tactiles. N Lorsque DTECTION DU VISAGE OUI est slectionn pour G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> g RG. DTECT. VISAGE/YEUX, vous pouvez choisir le visage utilis pour la mise au point. Vous pouvez choisir le type de sujet sur lequel l'appareil photo eff ectue de prfrence la mise au point lorsque DTECTION DES SUJETS ON est slectionn pour G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> RGLAGE DE LA DTECTION DES SUJETS. 31 cran LCD Vous pouvez slectionner l'opration eff ectuer en touchant l'indicateur du mode tactile. Les commandes tactiles peuvent tre utilises pour les oprations suivantes:

1 ModeMode PRISE PRISE VUES VUES TACTILE TACTILE AFAF AFOFF AFOFF Description Description Touchez le sujet l'cran pour faire le point et dclencher. En mode rafale, les photos sont prises tant que vous gardez le doigt sur l'cran. Si AF SEUL est slectionn comme mode de mise au point, l'ap-

pareil photo fera le point lorsque vous toucherez le sujet l'cran. La mise au point reste verrouille la distance actuelle jusqu' ce que vous touchiez l'icne AF OFF. Si AF CONTINU est slectionn comme mode de mise au point, l'ap-

pareil photo activera la mise au point lorsque vous toucherez le sujet l'cran. L'appareil photo continuera ajuster la mise au point si la distance au sujet change jusqu' ce que vous touchiez l'icne AF OFF. Lorsque FOCUS MANUEL est slectionn comme mode de mise au point, vous pouvez toucher l'cran pour faire le point l'aide de l'autofocus sur le sujet slectionn. ZONE ZONE Touchez pour slectionner un emplacement pour la mise au point ou le zoom. Le cadre de mise au point se dplacera l'emplacement slectionn. OFFOFF Commandes tactiles dsactives. O Il est possible d'utiliser diff rentes commandes tactiles pendant le zoom de mise au point. N Pour dsactiver les commandes tactiles et masquer l'indicateur du mode d'cran tactile, slectionnez NON pour D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE>

CONFIG. ECRAN TACTILE> x RGLAGE CRAN TACTILE. Vous pouvez modifi er les rglages du contrle tactile l'aide de G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> MODE ECRAN TACTILE. 32 CONTRLE FILM OPTIM. oL Si vous slectionnez OUI pour B CONFIGURATION DU FILM>

CONTRLE FILM OPTIM.oL ou si vous touchez le bouton du mode d'optimisation des fi lms sur l'cran de prise de vue, les molettes de commande et les commandes tactiles sont optimises pour l'enregistre-

ment vido. Cela empche d'enregistrer dans les squences vido les sons mis par l'appareil photo. Mode ecran tactile Bouton du mode d'optimisation des fi lms 1 VOLUME DU CASQUE F SIMULATION DE FILM F BALANCE DES BLANCS F MODE DE STAB. IMAGE F AMLIO. MODE STAB. IM. F MODE MISE AU PT VITESSE DU DCLENCHEUR OUVERTURE COMPENSATION EXPOSIT ISO RGLER NIVEAU MIC INTERNE/

RGLER NIVEAU MIC EXTERNE FILTRE VENT N L'activation des commandes d'optimisation des fi lms dsactive la bague des ouvertures. Lorsque le contrle optimis des fi lms est activ, la touche du mode optimi-

s des fi lms permet de modifi er les rglages de prise de vue ou de dsactiver le contrle optimis des fi lms. 33 Fonctions tactiles Les fonctions peuvent tre attribues aux gestes suivants de la mme manire qu'aux touches de fonction:

Balayage vers le haut: T-Fn1 Balayage vers la gauche: T-Fn2 Balayage vers la droite: T-Fn3 Balayage vers le bas: T-Fn4 N Dans certains cas, les gestes de balayage sur l'cran tactile affi chent un menu;

touchez l'option souhaite pour la slec-

tionner. 1 RGLER NIVEAU MIC INTERNE REGLER ANNULER Les mouvements des doigts sont dsactivs par dfaut. Pour activer les mouvements des doigts, slectionnez OUI pour D CONFIG.TOUCHE/

MOLETTE> CONFIG. ECRAN TACTILE> c FONCTION TACTILE. 34 Zoom tactile Si l'objectif prend en charge le zoom tac-

tile, vous pouvez faire un zoom avant ou arrire en touchant l'cran. Touchez le bou-

ton du zoom tactile l'cran pour activer le zoom tactile. Contrlez le zoom tactile l'aide des bou-

tons sur l'cran. Mode ecran tactile 1 Bouton Bouton Description Description Zoom tactile Zoom tactile Activez le zoom tactile. Zoom avant Zoom avant Zoom arrire Zoom arrire E ectuez un zoom avant ou arrire. Maintenez appuy pour e ec-

tuer un zoom avant ou arrire une vitesse constante. Commutateur Commutateur de bascule de bascule Faites d ler pour choisir une position de zoom. Maintenez ap-

puy pour e ectuer un zoom avant ou arrire une vitesse corres-

pondant lemplacement de votre doigt. Dsactiver Dsactiver Dsactivez le zoom tactile. 35 Mode ecran tactile Commandes tactiles en mode de lecture Lorsque OUI est slectionn pour D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE>

CONFIG. ECRAN TACTILE> a RGLAGE CRAN TACTILE, les com-

mandes tactiles permettent d'eff ectuer les oprations de lecture suivantes:

Faire glisser : faites glisser un doigt sur l'cran pour voir les autres images. 1 loigner : posez deux doigts sur l'cran et loignez-les l'un de l'autre pour faire un zoom avant. Rapprocher : posez deux doigts sur l'cran et rapprochez-les pour faire un zoom arrire. N Vous pouvez faire un zoom arrire jusqu' ce que l'image entire soit visible mais pas davantage. Appuyer deux fois : touchez deux fois l'cran pour zoomer sur le collimateur de mise au point. Faire dfi ler : affi chez les autres zones de l'image aprs avoir zoom lors de la lecture. 36 Premires tapes 37 Fixation de la courroie Fixez la courroie. Fixez la courroie aux deux illets comme le montre l'illustration. 2 O Pour viter de faire tomber l'appareil photo, vrifi ez que la courroie est bien attache. 38 Fixation d'un objectif L'appareil photo peut tre utilis avec des objectifs pour monture X de FUJIFILM. Retirez le bouchon se trouvant sur l'appa-

reil photo et celui se trouvant l'arrire de l'objectif. Placez l'objectif sur la monture en alignant les repres qui se trouvent sur l'ob-

jectif et sur l'appareil photo (A), puis tour-

nez l'objectif jusqu' ce qu'il s'enclique (B). O Lorsque vous fi xez des objectifs, veillez ce qu'aucune poussire ni aucun corps tranger ne s'infi ltre dans l'appareil photo. Faites attention de ne pas toucher les pices internes de l'appareil photo. Faites pivoter l'objectif jusqu' ce qu'il s'enclenche. N'appuyez pas sur la touche de dverrouillage de l'objectif lorsque vous installez un objectif. 2 Retrait de l'objectif Pour retirer l'objectif, teignez l'appareil photo, puis appuyez sur le bouton de dverrouillage

(A) de l'objectif comme le montre l'illustration

(B). O Pour viter que la poussire ne s'accumule sur l'objectif ou l'intrieur de l'appareil photo, remettez en place les bouchons d'objectif et de botier lorsque l'objectif n'est pas fi x. Objectifs et autres accessoires en option L'appareil photo peut tre utilis avec des objectifs et des accessoires pour monture X de FUJIFILM. O Respectez les prcautions suivantes lorsque vous fi xez ou retirez (changez) un objectif. Vrifi ez qu'aucune poussire ni aucun corps tranger n'est prsent sur l'objectif. Ne changez pas d'objectif sous la lumire directe du soleil ou sous une autre source lumineuse puissante. La lumire concentre l'intrieur de l'appareil photo pourrait provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Fixez les bouchons d'objectif avant de changer d'objectif. Consultez le manuel fourni avec l'objectif pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation. 39 Insertion de la batterie Insrez la batterie dans l'appareil photo comme dcrit ci-des-

sous. 1 Ouvrez le couvercle du compartiment de la batterie. 2 Faites glisser le loquet du couvercle comme le montre l'illustration et ouvrez le couvercle du compartiment de la batterie. O N'ouvrez pas le couvercle du compar-

timent de la batterie lorsque l'appareil photo est allum. Vous risquez sinon d'endommager les fi chiers image ou les cartes mmoire. Ne forcez pas lorsque vous manipulez le couvercle du compartiment de la batterie. 2 Insrez la batterie comme illustr. O Insrez la batterie dans le sens indi-

qu sur l'illustration. Ne forcez pas et n'essayez pas d'insrer la batterie l'envers. Vrifi ez que la batterie est correcte-

ment insre. 40 Insertion de la batterie 3 Fermez le couvercle du compartiment de la batterie. Fermez et verrouillez le couvercle. O Si le couvercle ne se ferme pas, vrifi ez que la batterie est dans le bon sens. Ne forcez pas pour fermer le couvercle. Retrait de la batterie Avant de retirer la batterie, teignez l'appareil photo, puis ouvrez le couvercle du compartiment de la batterie. Pour retirer la batterie, poussez le loquet de la batterie sur le ct, et faites glisser la batterie pour la sortir de l'appareil photo comme le montre l'illustration. 2 O La batterie peut chauff er lorsqu'elle est utilise dans des environnements o la temprature est leve. Faites attention lorsque vous retirez la batterie. 41 Insertion des cartes mmoire Les images sont enregistres sur des cartes mmoire (ven-

dues sparment). N L'appareil photo est dot de deux logements de cartes mmoire. Utilisez le logement1 avec les cartes CFexpress et le logement2 avec les cartes SD, SDHC ou SDXC. 1 Ouvrez le couvercle des logements des cartes mmoire. Dverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle. 2 O N'teignez pas l'appareil photo, ni ne retirez la carte mmoire pendant son formatage ou pendant l'enregistrement ou la suppression de don-

nes sur la carte. Vous risquez sinon d'endommager la carte. 2 Insrez la carte mmoire. En tenant la carte dans le sens indiqu, faites-la glisser au fond de son loge-

ment jusqu' ce qu'elle s'y embote. Fermez et verrouillez le couvercle des logements des cartes mmoire. O Veillez ce que la carte soit dans le bon sens ; ne l'insrez pas en biais et ne forcez pas. 42 Insertion des cartes mmoire Retrait des cartes mmoire teignez l'appareil photo et ouvrez le couvercle des logements des cartes mmoire. jectez la carte en appuyant dessus avec un doigt, puis re-

tirez ce dernier lentement; vous pouvez ensuite sortir la carte manuellement. O Appuyez au centre de la carte. Si vous retirez soudainement votre doigt de la carte, cette dernire pour-

rait tomber du logement. Retirez votre doigt lentement. Si l'appareil photo affi che l'icne p, la carte mmoire peut tre chaude au toucher. Attendez que la carte refroidisse avant de la retirer. 2 43 Insertion des cartes mmoire Utilisation de deux cartes L'appareil photo peut tre utilis avec deux cartes, une dans chaque logement. Avec les rglages par dfaut, les photos sont enregistres sur la carte du second logement uniquement lorsque la carte du premier logement est pleine. Vous pouvez modifi er ce rglage l'aide de l'option D ENR. DES RGLAGES> x RGLAGE LOGEMENT CARTE. Option Option 2 SQUENTIEL

(par dfaut) Affi chage Affi chage Description Description La carte du second logement est utilise uniquement lorsque la carte du premier logement est pleine. Si le second logement est slectionn pour D ENR. DES RGLAGES> SL. FENTE (xSQUENTIEL), l'en-

registrement commence sur la carte du second loge-

ment et se poursuit sur la carte du premier logement lorsque la carte du second est pleine. DUPLIQUER (1=2) Chaque photo est enregistre en double, une fois sur chaque carte. SEPARE Les images RAW sont enregistres sur la carte du pre-

mier logement et les images JPEG ou HEIF sur la carte du second logement. Ce rglage s'active uniquement lorsque FINE + RAW ou NORMAL + RAW est s-

lectionn pour H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> QUALITE D'IMAGE. RAW+JPEG RAW+HEIF Vous pouvez slectionner la carte destine au stockage des vidos l'aide de B CONFIGURATION DU FILM> RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA. 44 Chargement de la batterie Pour des raisons de scurit, la batterie n'est pas charge au moment de l'achat. L'appareil photo ne fonctionnera pas si la bat-

terie n'est pas charge; veillez charger la batterie avant toute utilisation. Avant de charger la batterie, teignez l'appareil photo. O Une batterie rechargeable NP-W235 est fournie avec l'appareil photo. Le chargement prend environ 180minutes. 1 Branchez le connecteur adaptateur l'adaptateur d'alimentation CA. Branchez le connecteur adaptateur comme indiqu, en vous assurant qu'il est entirement insr dans l'adaptateur d'alimentation CA jusqu' ce que vous entendiez un clic. O La fi che intermdiaire fournie est destine exclusivement l'adaptateur secteur AC-

5VJ. Ne l'utilisez pas avec d'autres appareils. La forme de la fi che intermdiaire dpend du pays d'achat. 2 2 Chargez la batterie. Connectez l'appareil photo l'adaptateur secteur CA l'aide du cble USB fourni. Connectez ensuite l'adaptateur secteur une prise de courant intrieure. O Branchez le cble dans le port USB (typeC) de l'appareil photo. Veillez ce que les connecteurs soient insrs fond. 45 Niveau de charge Le tmoin lumineux indique l'tat de charge de la batterie de la manire suivante :

Tmoin lumineux Tmoin lumineux Allum teint Clignote tat de la batterie tat de la batterie Batterie en cours de chargement Chargement termin Erreur de chargement 2 46 2 Chargement de la batterie O L'adaptateur secteur fourni est compatible avec des alimentations de 100 240V (une fi che intermdiaire peut tre ncessaire pour une utilisation l'tranger). N'utilisez pas l'adaptateur secteur ou le cble USB avec d'autres priph-

riques, car cela pourrait provoquer un dysfonctionnement. Ne collez pas d'tiquettes ou d'autres objets sur la batterie. Si vous ne respectez pas cette prcaution, vous risquez de ne plus pouvoir retirer la batterie de l'appareil photo. Ne court-circuitez pas les bornes de la batterie. Celle-ci pourrait sur-

chauff er. Lisez les prcautions de la section Batterie et alimentation lectrique. Utilisez uniquement des batteries rechargeables Fujifi lm authentiques, conues pour cet appareil photo. Si vous ne respectez pas cette prcau-

tion, le produit risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Ne retirez pas les tiquettes de la batterie et n'essayez pas de couper ou d'enlever l'enveloppe extrieure. La batterie perd progressivement sa charge lorsqu'elle n'est pas utilise. Chargez la batterie un ou deux jours avant utilisation. Si la batterie se dcharge rapidement, cela signifi e qu'elle a atteint la fi n de sa dure de vie et qu'elle doit tre remplace. Dbranchez l'adaptateur secteur de la prise de courant lorsque vous ne l'utilisez pas. Si vous laissez la batterie longtemps sans la recharger, il se peut que vous constatiez que sa qualit se dgrade ou qu'elle ne retient plus la charge. Rechargez la batterie rgulirement. Essuyez les bornes de la batterie avec un chiff on propre et sec afi n d'li-

miner toute salet. Si vous ne respectez pas cette prcaution, la batterie risque de ne pas se recharger. Notez que les temps de chargement sont plus longs si la temprature est basse ou leve. Si vous slectionnez OUI pour RGLAGE Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE>

Bluetooth ON/OFF dans le menu des paramtres rseau/USB, la consommation de l'accumulateur augmente. N Si vous allumez l'appareil photo pendant le chargement, ce dernier s'arrte et la connexion USB est utilise pour alimenter l'appareil photo. Le niveau de charge de la batterie baisse progressivement. L'appareil photo affi che l'icne alimentation lorsqu'il est aliment en USB. 47 Chargement avec un ordinateur Il est possible de recharger l'appareil photo par USB. Le chargement par USB est disponible avec les ordinateurs dots d'un systme d'exploitation approu-

v par le fabricant et d'une interface USB. 2 Laissez l'ordinateur allum pendant le chargement. O La batterie ne se recharge pas tant que l'appareil photo est allum. Branchez le cble USB fourni. Raccordez l'appareil photo directement l'ordinateur; n'utilisez pas de hub USB ou le port USB du clavier. Le chargement cesse lorsque l'ordinateur se met en veille. Pour re-

prendre le chargement, activez l'ordinateur, puis dbranchez et rebran-

chez le cble USB. Selon le modle, les rglages et l'tat actuel de l'ordinateur, il se peut que le chargement ne soit pas pris en charge. La batterie se recharge en 600minutes environ et son entre de charge est de 5V/500mA. 48 Allumer et teindre l'appareil photo Utilisez le commutateur ON/OFF pour allumer et teindre l'appareil photo. Positionnez le commutateur sur ON pour allumer l'appareil photo ou sur OFF pour l'teindre. O Les images ou la visibilit dans le viseur peuvent tre aff ectes par la pr-

sence de traces de doigts ou d'autres marques sur l'objectif ou le viseur. Veillez ce que l'objectif et le viseur restent propres. 2 N Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche a pendant la prise de vue, la lecture dmarre. Appuyez sur le dclencheur mi-course pour revenir au mode de prise de vue. L'appareil photo s'teint automatiquement si vous n'eff ectuez aucune opration pendant le dlai indiqu dans D GESTION ALIM.> EXT. AUTO. Pour ractiver l'appareil photo aprs une extinction automatique, appuyez sur le dclencheur mi-course ou positionnez le commutateur ON/OFF sur OFF puis de nouveau sur ON. 49 Confi guration de base Lorsque vous allumez l'appareil photo pour la premire fois, vous pouvez choisir une langue et rgler l'horloge. Suivez les tapes ci-dessous lorsque vous allumez l'appareil photo pour la premire fois. 1 Allumez l'appareil photo. Une bote de dialogue de slection de la langue s'affi che. 2 2 Choisissez une langue. Mettez une langue en surbrillance et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 3 Choisissez un fuseau horaire. Lorsque vous y tes invit, mettez en surbrillance le fuseau horaire actuel et le rglage de l'heure d't l'aide du levier de mise au point et appuyez sur MENU/OK. RGLAGE DE ZONE BERLIN/PARIS FUSEAU HORAIRE HEURE D'T RGL GMT 0:00 NON ANNULER N Pour ignorer cette tape, appuyez sur DISP/BACK. 50 4 Rglez l'horloge. Confi guration de base DATE/HEURE GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS 2022

. 12

. 31 12 00 AM 12h ENTRE ANNULER 5 A chez les informations sur l'application du smartphone. L'appareil photo affi che un QR code que vous pouvez scanner avec votre smartphone afi n d'ouvrir un site Internet partir duquel vous pouvez tlcharger l'application du smart-

phone. Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour quitter et affi cher l'cran de prise de vue. APPLICATION LES IMAGES PEUVENT TRE FACILEMENT TRANSFRES SUR LE SMARTPHONE. 2 SCANNEZ LE QR CODE POUR ACCDER L'APPLICATION. ENTRE N Utilisez l'application du smartphone pour tlcharger les images de l'appareil photo ou commander l'appareil photo distance (P 102). 6 Slectionnez D CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR> FORMATAGE dans l'onglet D(PARAMETRAGE). O Formatez les cartes mmoire avant de les utiliser pour la premire fois et veillez les reformater si vous les avez utilises sur un ordina-

teur ou un autre appareil. 7 Mettez en surbrillance le logement dans lequel est insre la carte que vous souhaitez formater et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 51 8 Une bote de dialogue de confi rma-

tion s'affi che. Pour formater la carte mmoire, mettez en surbrillance OK et appuyez sur MENU/OK. FORMATAGE FORMAT CARTE FENTE 1, CORRECT?

EFFACER TOUTES LES DONNEES OK ANNULER N Pour quitter sans formater la carte mmoire, slectionnez ANNULER ou appuyez sur DISP/BACK. 2 O Toutes les donnes, y compris les images protges, sont supprimes de la carte mmoire. Veillez copier les fi chiers importants sur un ordina-

teur ou un autre priphrique de stockage. N'ouvrez pas le couvercle du compartiment de la batterie pendant le formatage. N Vous pouvez galement affi cher les options de formatage en appuyant sur la touche de slection infrieure (f) tout en maintenant appuye la touche b (supprimer). Lorsque l'appareil photo est rest longtemps sans batterie, son horloge se rinitialise et la bote de dialogue de slection de la langue rapparat sa mise sous tension. 52 Confi guration de base Slection d'une autre langue Pour modifi er la langue:

1 A chez les options de langue. Slectionnez D CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR>

Qa. 2 Choisissez une langue. Mettez en surbrillance l'option souhaite et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Modifi cation de l'heure et de la date Pour rgler l'horloge de l'appareil photo:

2 1 A chez les options DATE/HEURE. Slectionnez D CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR> DATE/

HEURE. 2 Rglez l'horloge. Appuyez gauche ou droite du levier de mise au point pour mettre en surbrillance l'anne, le mois, le jour, l'heure ou les mi-

nutes, et appuyez en haut ou en bas pour modifi er ces valeurs. Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour rgler l'horloge. 53 NOTES 54 Prise de vue et affi chage des photos 55 Modes P, S, A et M Les modes P, S, A et M off rent divers degrs de contrle sur la vitesse d'obturation et l'ouverture. Mode P: Programme AE L'appareil photo choisit la vitesse d'obturation et l'ouverture afi n d'obtenir une exposition optimale. Vous pouvez slectionner d'autres valeurs qui produisent la mme exposition grce au dca-

lage de programme. Positionnez la molette de slection sur P. 3 P s'affi che. O Si le sujet se trouve en dehors de la plage de mesure de l'appareil photo, s'affi che la place de la vitesse d'obturation et de l'ouverture. Tournez la molette de slection uniquement aprs avoir appuy sur son bouton de dverrouillage. 56 Mode S: AE avec priorit la vitesse Choisissez la vitesse d'obturation et laissez l'appareil photo modi-

fi er l'ouverture afi n d'obtenir une exposition optimale. Modes P, S, A et M 1 Positionnez la molette de slection sur S. S s'affi che. 2 Tournez la molette de commande avant pour choisir une vitesse d'obtu-

ration. 3 N Vous pouvez modifi er les rles jous par la molette de commande avant l'aide de D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> PARAM. MOLETTE COMMANDE. O S'il est impossible d'obtenir une exposition correcte avec la vitesse d'ob-

turation slectionne, l'ouverture s'affi che en rouge. Si le sujet se trouve en dehors de la plage de mesure de l'appareil photo, s'affi che la place de l'ouverture. Tournez la molette de slection uniquement aprs avoir appuy sur son bouton de dverrouillage. 57 N La vitesse d'obturation peut tre modifi e tant que la touche AFON est enclenche ou que le dclencheur est enclench mi-course. des vitesses d'obturation plus lentes que 1s, un compte rebours s'affi che pendant l'exposition. Pour rduire le bruit (marbrures) en pose longue, slectionnez OUI pour H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> LONGUE EXPO RB. Notez que, dans ce cas, le temps d'enregistrement des images aprs la prise de vue risque d'augmenter. La photo sera fl oue si vous dplacez l'appareil photo au cours d'une pose longue; nous vous recommandons d'utiliser un trpied. 3 58 Mode A: AE avec priorit l'ouverture Choisissez l'ouverture et laissez l'appareil photo modifi er la vitesse d'obturation afi n d'obtenir une exposition optimale. Modes P, S, A et M 1 Positionnez la molette de slection sur A. A s'affi che. 3 2 Tournez la bague des ouvertures de l'objectif pour choisir une ouverture. N Si l'objectif ne dispose pas d'une bague des ouvertures ou si la bague des ouvertures est positionne sur A, l'ouverture peut tre modifi e en tournant la molette de commande avant. Vous pouvez modifi er les rles jous par la molette de commande avant l'aide de D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> PARAM. MOLETTE COMMANDE. O S'il est impossible d'obtenir une exposition correcte avec l'ouverture slectionne, la vitesse d'obturation s'affi che en rouge. Si le sujet se trouve en dehors de la plage de mesure de l'appareil photo, s'affi che la place de la vitesse d'obturation. Tournez la molette de slection uniquement aprs avoir appuy sur son bouton de dverrouillage. N L'ouverture peut tre modifi e mme lorsque le dclencheur est enclen-

ch mi-course. 59 Mode M: Exposition manuelle En mode manuel, l'utilisateur choisit la fois la vitesse d'obturation et l'ouverture. Il est possible de surexposer (claircir) ou de sous-ex-

poser (assombrir) volontairement les images, afi n de multiplier les possibilits en matire de crativit. Le niveau de sous-exposition ou de surexposition de la photo avec les rglages en cours est indi-

qu par l'indicateur d'exposition; modifi ez la vitesse d'obturation et l'ouverture jusqu' ce que vous obteniez l'exposition souhaite. 1 Positionnez la molette de slection sur M. 3 M s'affi che. 60 Modes P, S, A et M 2 Tournez la molette de commande avant pour choisir une vitesse d'obtu-

ration et tournez la bague des ouver-

tures de l'objectif pour choisir une ouverture. N L'affi chage d'exposition manuelle comprend un indicateur d'expo-

sition qui signale le niveau de sous-exposition ou de surexposition de la photo avec les rglages en cours. Si l'objectif ne dispose pas d'une bague des ouvertures ou si la bague des ouvertures est positionne sur A, l'ouverture peut tre modifi e en tournant la molette de commande arrire. Il est possible de modifi er les rles jous par les molettes de commande avant et arrire l'aide de D CONFIG.TOUCHE/

MOLETTE> PARAM. MOLETTE COMMANDE. O Tournez la molette de slection uniquement aprs avoir appuy sur son bouton de dverrouillage. BULB Slectionnez la vitesse d'obturation BULB pour les poses longues au cours desquelles vous ouvrez et fermez l'obturateur manuel-

lement. Il est recommand d'utiliser un trpied pour viter que l'appareil photo ne bouge pendant l'exposition. 3 1 Rglez la vitesse d'obturation sur BULB. 61 2 Appuyez fond sur le dclencheur. L'obturateur reste ouvert pendant 60 minutes maximum tant que vous appuyez sur le dclencheur. L'affi chage indique le temps coul depuis le dbut de l'expo-

sition. Relchez le dclencheur pour fermer l'obturateur et donc ar-

rter l'exposition. Le traitement commence alors et l'appareil photo affi che la dure de traitement restante. O La prise de vue en pose B n'est pas disponible dans les modes de d-

clenchement autres que PHOTO ou lorsque l'obturateur lectronique est slectionn pour A CONFIGURATION PRISE DE VUE> TYPE DE DCLENCHEUR. 3 N Lorsque vous choisissez A comme ouverture, la vitesse d'obturation se fi xe sur 30s. Pour rduire le bruit (marbrures) en pose longue, slectionnez OUI pour H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> LONGUE EXPO RB. Notez que, dans ce cas, le temps d'enregistrement des images aprs la prise de vue risque d'augmenter. Utilisation d'une tlcommande fi laire Une tlcommande fi laire peut tre utilise pour les poses longues. Lorsque vous utilisez une tlcommande fi laire RR-100 (en option) ou un dclencheur lectronique d'un autre fabricant, insrez l'accessoire dans la prise pour tlcom-

mande de l'appareil photo. 62 Modes P, S, A et M FILTER Prenez des photos avec des eff ets de fi ltres. 1 Positionnez la molette de slection sur FILTER. 2 Choisissez un fi ltre via A CONFIGURATION PRISE DE VUE>

RGLAGE DU FILTRE. Filtre Filtre G APPAREIL JOUET H MINIATURE I COULEUR POP J IMAGE CLAIRE Z IMAGE SOMBRE K COUL. DYNAMIQUE X FLOU ARTISTIQUE 3 Description Description Choisissez cette option pour crer un e et rtro, sem-

blable celui obtenu avec un appareil photo jouet. Le haut et le bas des photos sont outs a n de crer un e et de diorama. Choisissez cette option pour crer des images trs contrastes aux couleurs satures. Choisissez cette option pour crer des images claires et faiblement contrastes. Ce ltre assombrit l'image dans son ensemble et fait ressortir les hautes lumires. Des couleurs dynamiques sont utilises pour obte-

nir des e ets fantaisie. Ce ltre permet d'obtenir un rendu doux sur l'en-

semble de l'image. u COUL. PARTIELLE (ROUGE) v COUL. PARTIELLE (ORNGE) w COUL. PARTIELLE (JAUNE) x COUL. PARTIELLE (VERT) y COUL. PARTIELLE (BLEU) z COUL. PARTIELLE (VIOL.) O En fonction du sujet et des rglages de l'appareil photo, les images Les zones de l'image qui sont de la couleur s-

lectionne sont enregistres dans cette couleur. Toutes les autres zones de l'image sont enregis-

tres en noir et blanc. peuvent parfois prsenter du grain ou des variations en termes de luminosit ou de teinte. 63 Modes personnaliss Positionnez la molette de slec-

tion sur n'importe quel mode com-

pris entre C1(PERSONNALISE1) et C7(PERSONNALISE7) pour prendre des photos l'aide de rglages du menu prise de vue enregistrs prcdemment. Slection du mode: photo ou vido Choisissez si le jeu de rglages personnaliss slectionn (C1 C7) est destin la prise de vue photographique (x PHOTO) ou l'enregistrement vido (F VIDO). 3 1 Accdez H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE dans les me-

nus photo, mettez en surbrillance xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS et appuyez sur MENU/OK. N Vous pouvez galement utiliser B CONFIGURATION DU FILM>

xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS dans les menus vido. 2 Mettez en surbrillance le jeu de r-

glages personnaliss souhait et appuyez sur MENU/OK. xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS 3 Mettez en surbrillance x PHOTO ou F VIDO et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Le jeu de rglages personnaliss slectionn peut dsormais tre utilis pour la prise de vue photographique ou pour l'enregistrement vido. xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS xF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS x F PHOTO VIDO 64 Modes P, S, A et M Enregistrement des rglages actuels Enregistrez les rglages actuels dans un jeu de rglages personna-

liss. 1 Accdez H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE dans les me-

nus photo, mettez en surbrillance MODIF/ENR REG PERSO et appuyez sur MENU/OK. N Pour enregistrer les rglages d'enregistrement vido, accdez B CONFIGURATION DU FILM dans les menus vido et slectionnez F MODIF/ENR REG PERSO. 2 Mettez en surbrillance un jeu de desti-

nation pour les rglages actuels (C1 C7) et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 3 Mettez en surbrillance ENR REGL ACTUELS et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 4 Mettez en surbrillance OK et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Les rglages actuels seront enregistrs dans le jeu slectionn. 3 MODIF/ENR REG PERSO PERSONNALISE 1 PERSONNALISE 2 PERSONNALISE 3 PERSONNALISE 4 PERSONNALISE 5 PERSONNALISE 6 PERSONNALISE 7 ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU SORTIR PERSONNALISE 1 ENR REGL ACTUELS MODIF./VRIF. SAUVEGARDER MODIFICATIONS RINITIALISER MODIFICAT. COPIER RINITIALISER LE RGLAGE PERSONNALIS MODIF. NOM PERSONNALIS ENR REGL ACTUELS PERSONNALISE 1 SAUVEGARDER LES MODIFICATIONS OK ?

OK ANNULER 65 Modi cation des rglages personnaliss Modifi ez les jeux de rglages personnaliss existants. 1 Accdez H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE dans les me-

nus photo, mettez en surbrillance MODIF/ENR REG PERSO et appuyez sur MENU/OK. N Pour enregistrer les rglages d'enregistrement vido, accdez B CONFIGURATION DU FILM dans les menus vido et slectionnez F MODIF/ENR REG PERSO. MODIF/ENR REG PERSO PERSONNALISE 1 PERSONNALISE 2 PERSONNALISE 3 PERSONNALISE 4 PERSONNALISE 5 PERSONNALISE 6 PERSONNALISE 7 ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU SORTIR PERSONNALISE 1 ENR REGL ACTUELS MODIF./VRIF. SAUVEGARDER MODIFICATIONS RINITIALISER MODIFICAT. COPIER RINITIALISER LE RGLAGE PERSONNALIS MODIF. NOM PERSONNALIS PERSONNALISE 1 MODIF./VRIF. MODE DE PRISE DE VUE VITESSE OBTURATION OUVERT COMPENSATION D'EXPOSITION MODE DRIVE SORTIR 2 Mettez en surbrillance le jeu de r-

glages personnaliss souhait et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 3 3 Mettez en surbrillance MODIF./VRIF. et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 4 L'appareil photo affi che une liste d'lments du menu prise de vue;

mettez en surbrillance l'lment que vous souhaitez modifi er et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Modifi ez l'lment slectionn comme vous le souhaitez. 66 Modes P, S, A et M 5 Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour enregistrer les modifi cations et reve-

nir la liste du menu prise de vue. Modifi ez les autres lments si vous le souhaitez. N Si DSACT. est slectionn pour H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> MISE JOUR AUTO DU RGLAGE PERSONNALIS dans le menu photo ou pour B CONFIGURATION DU FILM> F RGL. PERSO DE MISE JOUR AUTO dans le menu vido, des points rouges s'affi chent ct des lments modifi s mais les modifi ca-

tions ne sont pas enregistres automatiquement. Pour enregistrer les modifi cations apportes aux lments slec-

tionns, mettez-les en surbrillance dans la liste et appuyez sur Q. Pour enregistrer les modifi cations apportes tous les l-

ments, revenez l'tape3 et slectionnez SAUVEGARDER MODIFICATIONS. Pour annuler toutes les modifi cations et restaurer les rglages prcdents, slectionnez RINITIALISER MODIFICAT. Si vous copiez un lment signal par un point rouge, cet lment sera copi avec ses modifi cations. 3 67 Copie des rglages personnaliss Copiez les rglages personnaliss d'un jeu l'autre, ce qui crase les rglages du jeu de destination. Si le jeu source a t renomm, le nom sera galement copi dans le jeu de destination. 1 Accdez H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE dans les me-

nus photo, mettez en surbrillance MODIF/ENR REG PERSO et appuyez sur MENU/OK. N Pour copier les rglages d'un jeu de rglages personnaliss vido, accdez B CONFIGURATION DU FILM dans les menus vido et slectionnez F MODIF/ENR REG PERSO. MODIF/ENR REG PERSO PERSONNALISE 1 PERSONNALISE 2 PERSONNALISE 3 PERSONNALISE 4 PERSONNALISE 5 PERSONNALISE 6 PERSONNALISE 7 ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU SORTIR PERSONNALISE 1 ENR REGL ACTUELS MODIF./VRIF. SAUVEGARDER MODIFICATIONS RINITIALISER MODIFICAT. COPIER RINITIALISER LE RGLAGE PERSONNALIS MODIF. NOM PERSONNALIS 2 Mettez en surbrillance le jeu source et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 3 3 Mettez en surbrillance COPIER et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 68 Modes P, S, A et M 4 Mettez en surbrillance le jeu de des-

tination (C1 C7) et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Une bote de dialogue de confi rmation s'affi che. MODIF/ENR REG PERSO PERSONNALISE 1 PERSONNALISE 2 PERSONNALISE 3 PERSONNALISE 4 PERSONNALISE 5 PERSONNALISE 6 PERSONNALISE 7 N Toute modifi cation apporte aux rglages personnaliss situs dans le jeu de destination sera crase. 5 Mettez en surbrillance OK et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Les rglages slectionns seront co-

pis dans le jeu de destination; cette action crasera tout rglage existant. COPIER PERSONNALISE 1 PERSONNALISE 2 COPIER OK ?

OK ANNULER 3 69 3 Rinitialisation des rglages personnaliss Rinitialisez certains jeux de rglages personnaliss. 1 Slectionnez H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> MODIF/

ENR REG PERSO dans le menu prise de vue et appuyez sur MENU/OK. N Cela suppose que vous souhaitez rinitialiser les rglages du mode photo. Pour rinitialiser les rglages vido, accdez B CONFIGURATION DU FILM dans les menus vido et slectionnez F MODIF/ENR REG PERSO. 2 Mettez en surbrillance le jeu de r-

glages personnaliss souhait et appuyez sur MENU/OK. MODIF/ENR REG PERSO PERSONNALISE 1 PERSONNALISE 2 PERSONNALISE 3 PERSONNALISE 4 PERSONNALISE 5 PERSONNALISE 6 PERSONNALISE 7 ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU 3 Mettez en surbrillance RINITIALISER LE RGLAGE PERSONNALIS et ap-

puyez sur MENU/OK. Une bote de dialogue de confi rmation s'affi che. SORTIR PERSONNALISE 1 ENR REGL ACTUELS MODIF./VRIF. SAUVEGARDER MODIFICATIONS RINITIALISER MODIFICAT. COPIER RINITIALISER LE RGLAGE PERSONNALIS MODIF. NOM PERSONNALIS 4 Mettez en surbrillance OK et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Le jeu slectionn sera rinitialis. RINITIALISER LE RGLAGE PERSONNALIS PERSONNALISE 1 RINIT RGL PERSO OK?

RINIT TS RGL AUX VAL DFAUT OK ANNULER 70 Modes P, S, A et M Modi cation des noms des jeux de rglages personnaliss Renommez certains jeux de rglages personnaliss. 1 Slectionnez H CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE> MODIF/

ENR REG PERSO dans le menu prise de vue et appuyez sur MENU/OK. N Cela suppose que vous souhaitez renommer les rglages du mode photo. Pour renommer les rglages vido, accdez B CONFIGURATION DU FILM dans les menus vido et slectionnez F MODIF/ENR REG PERSO. 2 Mettez en surbrillance le jeu de r-

glages personnaliss souhait et appuyez sur MENU/OK. 3 Mettez en surbrillance MODIF. NOM PERSONNALIS et appuyez sur MENU/OK. MODIF/ENR REG PERSO PERSONNALISE 1 PERSONNALISE 2 PERSONNALISE 3 PERSONNALISE 4 PERSONNALISE 5 PERSONNALISE 6 PERSONNALISE 7 ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU ATTRIBU SORTIR PERSONNALISE 1 ENR REGL ACTUELS MODIF./VRIF. SAUVEGARDER MODIFICATIONS RINITIALISER MODIFICAT. COPIER RINITIALISER LE RGLAGE PERSONNALIS MODIF. NOM PERSONNALIS 3 4 Saisissez un nouveau nom pour le jeu de rglages personnali-

ss et slectionnez REGLER. Le jeu slectionn sera renomm. 71 Autofocus Prenez des photos l'aide de l'autofocus. 1 Slectionnez l'AF seul ou continu pour G CONFIGURATION AF/

MF> MODE MISE AU PT dans le menu prise de vue (P 73). 2 Utilisez G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> MODE AF pour choisir un mode AF (P 74). 3 Slectionnez G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> ZONE DE MISE AU POINT et choisissez la position et la taille du cadre de mise au point (P 76). 3 4 Prenez des photos. 72 Autofocus Mode de mise au point Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo eff ectue la mise au point. 1 Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour affi cher les menus. 2 Slectionnez G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> MODE MISE AU PT dans le menu prise de vue. 3 Choisissez l'une des options suivantes:

ModeMode p FOCUS MANUEL k AF CONTINU l AF SEUL Description Description E ectuez manuellement la mise au point l'aide de la bague de mise au point de l'objectif. Choisissez ce mode lorsque vous souhaitez contrler la mise au point ou lorsque l'appareil photo n'arrive pas e ectuer la mise au point avec l'autofocus

(P 80). La mise au point est ajuste continuellement a n de tenir compte des modi cations de la distance par rapport au sujet, tant que vous maintenez le dclencheur appuy. utiliser lorsque les sujets sont en mouvement. La mise au point est verrouille tant que vous appuyez sur le dclencheur mi-course. choisir pour les sujets statiques. 3 N Quelle que soit l'option slectionne, la mise au point manuelle est utilise lorsque l'objectif est en mode de mise au point manuelle. Lorsque OUI est slectionn pour l'option G CONFIGURATION AF/

MF> PRE-AF, la mise au point est ajuste continuellement en modes l et k mme si vous n'appuyez pas sur le dclencheur. 73 Options autofocus (mode AF) La mise au point peut tre adapte une varit de sujets en mo-

difi ant la combinaison de rglages slectionne pour le mode de mise au point et le mode AF. 1 Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour affi cher le menu prise de vue. 2 Slectionnez G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> MODE AF. 3 Choisissez un mode AF. La faon dont l'appareil photo fait le point dpend du mode de mise au point.

(AF SEUL) Mode de mise au point ll (AF SEUL) Mode de mise au point Description Description Exemple d'image Exemple d'image Option Option L'appareil photo fait le point sur le sujet situ dans le collimateur de mise au point slectionn. Utilisez cette option pour obtenir une mise au point prcise sur un sujet parti-

culier. L'appareil photo fait le point sur le sujet situ dans la zone de mise au point slectionne. Les zones de mise au point comportent plusieurs collimateurs, ce qui facilite la mise au point des sujets en mouvement. L'appareil photo fait le point au-

tomatiquement sur les sujets trs contrasts; les zones de nettet sont a ches. Tournez la molette de commande arrire sur l'a chage de slec-

tion des collimateurs de mise au point (P 77, 78) pour parcourir les di rents modes AF dans l'ordre suivant: r POINT UNIQUE, y ZONE et z LARGE. 3 r POINT UNIQUE y ZONE z LARGE j TOUS 74

(AF CONTINU) Mode de mise au point kk (AF CONTINU) Mode de mise au point Description Description Option Option Exemple d'image Exemple d'image Autofocus r POINT UNIQUE La mise au point suit le sujet situ dans le collimateur de mise au point slectionn. Utilisez cette option pour les sujets qui s'approchent ou s'loignent de l'appareil photo. y ZONE z SUIVI j TOUS La mise au point suit le sujet situ dans la zone de mise au point slec-

tionne. Utilisez cette option pour les sujets qui se dplacent de ma-

nire assez prvisible. La mise au point suit les sujets qui se dplacent sur une large zone de la vue. 3 Tournez la molette de commande arrire sur l'a chage de slec-

tion des collimateurs de mise au point (P 77, 78) pour parcourir les di rents modes AF dans l'ordre suivant: r POINT UNIQUE, y ZONE et z SUIVI. 75 Slection du collimateur de mise au point Choisissez un collimateur de mise au point en mode autofocus. A chage des collimateurs de mise au point 1 Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour affi cher le menu prise de vue. 2 Slectionnez G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> ZONE DE MISE AU POINT pour affi cher les collimateurs de mise au point. 3 Utilisez le levier de mise au point et la molette de commande arrire pour choisir une zone de mise au point. N Il est galement possible de slectionner le collimateur de mise au point l'aide des commandes tactiles (P 31). 3 76 Autofocus Slection d'un collimateur de mise au point Utilisez le levier de mise au point pour choisir le collimateur et la molette de commande arrire pour choisir la taille du cadre de mise au point. La procdure varie selon le mode AF slectionn. Levier de mise au point Levier de mise au point Molette de com-

Molette de com-

mande arrire mande arrire Touche DISP/BACK Touche DISP/BACK Mode AF Mode AF r y z Incliner Incliner Appuyer Appuyer Slectionner un collimateur de mise au point Slectionner le collimateur en surbrillance Tourner Tourner Choisir l'une des 6tailles de cadre Choisir l'une des 3tailles de cadre 3 Slectionner le collimateur central N Il n'est pas possible de slectionner manuellement le collimateur de mise au point lorsque z LARGE/SUIVI est slectionn en mode de mise au point l. Si j TOUS est slectionn comme mode AF, vous pouvez tourner la molette de commande arrire pour parcourir les diff rents modes AF dans l'ordre suivant sur l'affi chage de slection des collimateurs de mise au point: r POINT UNIQUE (6 tailles de cadre), y ZONE (3 tailles de cadre), et soit z LARGE (mode de mise au point l), soit z SUIVI

(mode de mise au point k). 77 L'a chage des collimateurs de mise au point L'affi chage des collimateurs de mise au point varie selon le mode AF slectionn. N Les cadres de mise au point sont reprsents par les petits carrs (), les zones de mise au point par les grands carrs. POINT UNIQUE rr POINT UNIQUE Mode AF Mode AF ZONE yy ZONE LARGE/SUIVI zz LARGE/SUIVI 3 Vous pouvez slec-

tionner le nombre de collimateurs disponibles l'aide de l'option G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> NOMBRES DE POINTS FOCUS. Choisissez des zones comportant 7 7, 5 5 ou 3 3 collimateurs. Positionnez le cadre de mise au point sur le sujet que vous souhaitez suivre l'aide de l'AF continu. Autofocus Bien que l'appareil photo possde un automatisme de mise au point de haute prcision, il se peut qu'il n'arrive pas eff ectuer la mise au point sur les sujets numrs ci-dessous. Sujets trs brillants tels que des miroirs ou des carrosseries de voitures. Sujets photographis travers une vitre ou un autre objet qui rfl chit la lumire. Sujets sombres et sujets qui absorbent la lumire plutt qu'ils ne la refl tent, comme les cheveux ou la fourrure. Sujets sans substance, comme la fume ou les fl ammes. Sujets prsentant peu de contraste avec l'arrire-plan. Sujets situs devant ou derrire un objet trs contrast qui fi gure lui aussi dans le cadre de mise au point (par exemple, sujet photographi sur un fond compos d'lments trs contrasts). 78 Autofocus Vrifi cation de la mise au point Pour faire un zoom avant sur la zone de mise au point actuelle et obtenir une mise au point prcise, appuyez au centre du levier de mise au point. Faites jusqu' deux pressions supplmen-

taires pour zoomer davantage et une quatrime pression pour annuler le zoom. Affi chage normal Zoom de mise au point N En mode de mise au point l, vous pouvez rgler le zoom en tournant la molette de commande arrire. En mode de mise au point l, slectionnez POINT UNIQUE pour MODE AF. Le zoom de mise au point n'est pas disponible en mode de mise au point k ou lorsque l'option G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> PRE-AF est active. Utilisez D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> RGLAGE LEVIER FOCUS pour modifi er la fonction eff ectue par le centre du levier de mise au point. D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> RGL. FONCT. (Fn) permet galement d'attribuer le zoom de mise au point d'autres commandes. 3 79 Mise au point manuelle Rglez la mise au point manuellement. 1 Slectionnez FOCUS MANUEL pour G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> MODE MISE AU PT. 2 Eff ectuez manuellement la mise au point l'aide de la bague de mise au point de l'objectif. Tournez la bague vers la gauche pour rduire la distance de mise au point, vers la droite pour l'augmenter. 3 3 Prenez des photos. N Utilisez l'option D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> RGL. DU ZOOM/DE LA MAP DE L'OBJECTIF pour inverser le sens de rotation de la bague de mise au point. Quelle que soit l'option slectionne, la mise au point manuelle est utilise lorsque l'objectif est en mode de mise au point manuelle. 80 Mise au point manuelle Vrifi cation de la mise au point Diverses options sont disponibles pour vrifi er la mise au point en mode de mise au point manuelle. L'indicateur de mise au point manuelle La ligne blanche indique la distance au sujet situ dans la zone de mise au point (en mtres ou en pieds selon l'option slectionne pour D CONFIG. CRAN> UNIT DE DISTANCE MAP dans le menu de confi guration), la barre bleue indique la profondeur de champ ou en d'autres termes la zone de nettet situe devant et derrire le sujet. Distance de mise au point

(ligne blanche) 3 Profondeur de champ N Si TMOIN DISTANCE AF et TMOIN DISTANCE MF sont slectionns dans la liste D CONFIG. CRAN> AFF. REGL. PERSO, il est galement possible d'affi cher l'indicateur de mise au point manuelle l'aide de l'indicateur de profondeur de champ affi ch en standard. Appuyez sur la touche DISP/BACK afi n d'affi cher les indicateurs standard. Utilisez l'option G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> CHELLE DE PROFOND. CHAMP pour choisir la faon d'affi cher la profondeur de champ. Choi-

sissez BASE DU FORMAT DE FILM pour vous aider valuer la profon-

deur de champ des photos qui seront imprimes et similaires, ou BASE DE PIXEL pour vous aider valuer la profondeur de champ des photos qui seront affi ches en haute dfi nition sur des ordinateurs ou autres crans lectroniques. 81 Mise au point manuelle Zoom de mise au point Si OUI est slectionn pour G CONFIGURATION AF/MF>

VERIFICATION AF., l'appareil photo fait automatiquement un zoom avant sur la zone de mise au point slectionne lorsque vous tour-

nez la bague de mise au point. Appuyez au centre du levier de mise au point pour annuler le zoom. N Utilisez le levier de mise au point pour choisir une autre zone de mise au point. Vous pouvez modifi er le zoom en tournant la molette de commande arrire. Il nest cependant pas possible de modifi er le zoom lorsque DIVISER NUM. IMAGE ou MICROPRISME NUMRIQUE est slectionn comme assistance MAP. 3 82 Sensibilit Rglez la sensibilit de l'appareil photo la lumire. Pour affi cher les rglages de sensibilit, appuyez sur la touche ISO. Option Option AUTO 1 AUTO 2 AUTO 3 12512800 L(64/80/100) H(25600/51200) Description Description La sensibilit est modi e automatiquement en fonction des conditions de prise de vue et des rglages de sensibilits stan-

dard et maximale et de vitesse d'obturation minimale choisis pour A CONFIGURATION PRISE DE VUE> ISO. Vous avez le choix entre AUTO1, AUTO2 et AUTO3 (P 84). Rglez manuellement la sensibilit. La valeur slectionne est a che. Choisissez ces options pour les situations spciales. Notez que des marbrures risquent d'tre visibles sur les photos prises avec l'option H, tandis que l'option L rduit la plage dynamique. 3 N La sensibilit n'est pas rinitialise par l'extinction de l'appareil photo. Rglage de la sensibilit Les valeurs leves permettent de rduire le risque de fl ou en cas de faible clairage, tandis que les valeurs basses permettent de slectionner des vi-

tesses d'obturation plus lentes ou des ouvertures plus grandes en cas de forte luminosit ambiante; notez nanmoins que des marbrures risquent d'appa-

ratre sur les photos prises des sensibilits leves. 83 Sensibilit AUTO Choisissez la sensibilit de base, la sensibilit maximale et la vitesse d'obturation minimale pour AUTO1, AUTO2 et AUTO3. lment lment Options Options AUTO 1 AUTO 1 Par dfaut Par dfaut AUTO 2 AUTO 2 SENSIBILIT PAR DFAUT SENSIBILIT MAXIMALE VIT OBTURAT MIN 12512800 40012800 SEC, AUTO 800 125 3200 AUTO AUTO 3 AUTO 3 12800 L'appareil photo choisit automatiquement une sensibilit com-

prise entre la valeur par dfaut et la valeur maximale; la sensibilit dpasse la valeur par dfaut uniquement si la vitesse d'obturation permettant d'obtenir une exposition optimale est plus lente que la valeur slectionne pour VIT OBTURAT MIN. N Si la valeur slectionne pour SENSIBILIT PAR DFAUT est suprieure celle slectionne pour SENSIBILIT MAXIMALE, SENSIBILIT PAR DFAUT se paramtrera sur la valeur slectionne pour SENSIBILIT MAXIMALE. L'appareil photo peut slectionner des vitesses d'obturation plus lentes que la valeur de VIT OBTURAT MIN dans le cas o les photos seraient sous-exposes avec la valeur slectionne pour SENSIBILIT MAXIMALE. Si AUTO est slectionn pour VIT OBTURAT MIN, l'appareil photo choisira automatiquement la vitesse d'obturation minimale. L'option slectionne pour la stabilisation d'image n'a pas d'impact sur la vitesse d'obturation minimale. 3 84 Mesure Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo mesure l'exposition. A CONFIGURATION PRISE DE VUE> PHOTOMETRIE comporte les options de mesure suivantes:

O L'option slectionne s'activera uniquement si NON est slectionn pour g RG. DTECT. VISAGE/YEUX et RGLAGE DE LA DTECTION DES SUJETS dans le menu G CONFIGURATION AF/MF. ModeMode o MULTIMULTI Description Description L'appareil photo dtermine instantanment l'exposition en se ba-

sant sur l'analyse de la composition, de la couleur et de la rparti-

tion de la luminosit. Recommand dans la plupart des situations. p CENTRALE PONDRE CENTRALE PONDRE L'appareil photo mesure l'ensemble de l'image mais accorde plus d'importance la zone centrale. v CENTRALE CENTRALE w MOYENNE MOYENNE L'appareil photo mesure les conditions d'clairage en se basant sur une zone correspondant 2% de l'image. Recommand avec les sujets en contre-jour et dans d'autres cas o l'arrire-plan est bien plus lumineux ou bien plus sombre que le sujet principal. L'exposition est rgle sur la moyenne de l'ensemble de l'image. Ce mode permet d'avoir une exposition homogne sur plusieurs photos ayant le mme clairage et s'avre particulirement e -

cace pour les paysages et les portraits de sujets habills en noir ou blanc. 3 N Pour mesurer le sujet situ dans la zone de mise au point slectionne, choisissez OUI pour G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> VER. EA SPOT ET ZONE MaP (P 123). 85 Correction d'exposition Modifi ez l'exposition. Tournez la molette de commande arrire pour modifi er l'exposition. N Vous pouvez choisir la molette de commande utilise pour ce rle l'aide de D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> PARAM. MOLETTE COMMANDE. En mode manuel, vous pouvez modifi er l'exposition en tournant la molette de commande avant ou arrire aprs avoir appuy sur une commande laquelle d QD RGL. SUR B(COMMUT. ON/OFF) est attribu. 3 O Le niveau de correction disponible dpend du mode de prise de vue slectionn. Vous pouvez avoir un aperu de la correction d'exposition sur l'cran de prise de vue, bien que ses eff ets risquent de ne pas s'affi cher prcisment si:

- le niveau de correction d'exposition dpasse 3IL,

- W 200% ou X 400% est slectionn pour PLAGE DYNAMIQUE ou

- FORT ou FAIBLE est slectionn pour PRIORIT PLAGE D. Vous pouvez toujours avoir un aperu de la profondeur de champ dans le viseur ou sur l'cran LCD en appuyant mi-course sur le dclen-

cheur. En mode vido, l'cran risque de ne pas affi cher prcisment les eff ets de la correction d'exposition pendant l'enregistrement en F-Log ou lorsque W 200% ou X 400% est slectionn pour PLAGE DYNAMIQUE. Vous pouvez obtenir un aperu prcis en slectionnant le mode M et en modifi ant directement l'exposition. 86 Verrouillage de la mise au point/

de l'exposition La mise au point et l'exposition sont verrouilles lorsque vous appuyez sur le dclencheur mi-course. 1 Positionnez le sujet dans le cadre de mise au point et appuyez sur le d-

clencheur mi-course pour verrouiller la mise au point et l'exposition. La mise au point et l'exposition de-

meurent verrouilles tant que vous maintenez le dclencheur enfonc mi-course (verrouillage AF/AE). 2 Appuyez fond sur le dclencheur. N Le verrouillage de l'exposition et de la mise au point l'aide du d-

clencheur est possible uniquement lorsque ON est slectionn pour D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> OBTURATEUR AF, OBTURATEUR AE. 3 87 Verrouillage de la mise au point/de l'exposition Autres commandes Touche AEL

(verrouillage de l'exposition) La mise au point et l'exposition peuvent galement tre verrouilles l'aide des touches AEL et AFON. Avec les rglages par dfaut, vous pouvez utiliser la touche AEL pour verrouiller l'exposition sans verrouiller la mise au point. Si la touche AFON eff ectue la fonction VERROUILL AF UNIQUEMENT, elle permet aussi de ver-

rouiller la mise au point sans verrouiller l'exposition. Tant que vous appuyez sur la commande programme, le verrouillage ne s'annule pas en cas de pression mi-course du dclencheur. Si ENREG AE/AF ON/OFF est slectionn pour D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE>

MODE MEM. AE/AF, vous pouvez annuler le verrouillage uniquement en appuyant une seconde fois sur la commande. N Le levier de mise au point permet de repositionner le collimateur de Touche AFON mise au point au cours du verrouillage de l'exposition. D'autres rles peuvent tre attribus aux touches AEL et AFON l'aide de D CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE> RGL. FONCT. (Fn). Vous pouvez galement attribuer le verrouillage de l'exposition et de la mise au point d'autres touches (P 138). 3 88 Visualisation des images Vous pouvez visualiser les images dans le viseur ou sur l'cran LCD. Pour affi cher les images en plein cran, appuyez sur a. 100-0001 3 Vous pouvez voir les autres images en appuyant gauche ou droite du levier de mise au point ou en tournant la molette de commande avant. Appuyez droite du levier de mise au point ou tournez la molette vers la droite pour affi cher les images dans leur ordre d'enregistrement, et appuyez gauche du levier de mise au point ou tournez la molette vers la gauche pour les affi cher dans l'ordre inverse. Maintenez le levier de mise au point enfonc pour aller rapidement la vue souhaite. N Les images prises l'aide d'autres appareils sont signales par l'icne m (image prise avec un autre appareil) pour avertir qu'elles risquent de ne pas s'affi cher correctement et que la lecture avec zoom peut tre indisponible. Pour affi cher les photos sur un tlviseur raccord en HDMI au lieu de les affi cher sur l'cran de l'appareil photo, appuyez sur la touche a. Deux cartes mmoire Si deux cartes mmoire sont insres, vous pouvez maintenir appuye la touche a afi n de choisir une carte pour la lecture. Vous pouvez galement slectionner une carte l'aide de l'option C MENU LECTURE> FENTE COMMUTE. 89 Suppression des images Utilisez la touche b pour supprimer les images. O Il n'est pas possible de rcuprer les images supprimes. Protgez les images importantes ou copiez-les sur un ordinateur ou un autre priph-

rique de stockage avant d'aller plus loin. 1 Lorsqu'une image est affi che en plein cran, appuyez sur la touche b et slectionnez IMAGE. EFFACE IMAGE PHOTOS SLECT. TOUTES IMAGES 3 2 Appuyez gauche ou droite du levier de mise au point pour parcourir les images et appuyez sur MENU/OK pour les supprimer

(aucune bote de dialogue de confi rmation ne s'affi che). Rp-

tez cette tape pour supprimer d'autres images. N Les images protges ne peuvent pas tre supprimes. Retirez la pro-

tection de toute image que vous souhaitez supprimer (P 132). Vous pouvez galement supprimer des images via les menus l'aide de l'option C MENU LECTURE> EFFACE (P 132). 90 Enregistrement et lecture des vidos 91 Enregistrement de vidos Enregistrez des vidos avec le son. Enregistrement de vidos Vous pouvez enregistrer des vidos en appuyant sur la touche t(enregistrement vido) ou en positionnant la molette de slec-

tion sur F(vido). La touche t (enregistrement vido) Utilisez la touche t(enregistrement vido) pour enregistrer rapi-

dement et aisment des vidos en mode photo. N L'appareil photo slectionne automatiquement AF CONTINU comme mode de mise au point. 1 Appuyez sur t pour commencer l'enregistrement. 4 Un indicateur d'enregistrement (V) s'affi che pendant l'enregistrement. La dure restante est indique par un compte rebours et la dure d'enre-

gistrement par un compteur. Dure d'enregistrement Dure restante 2 Appuyez nouveau sur t pour arrter l'enregistrement. L'enregistrement s'arrte automatiquement lorsque la vido a atteint sa dure maximale ou lorsque la carte mmoire est pleine. 92 Enregistrement de vidos Mode F(vido) Pour contrler davantage les rglages de l'appareil photo, position-

nez la molette de slection sur F(vido) et enregistrez les vidos l'aide du dclencheur. 1 Positionnez la molette de slection sur F (vido). O Tournez la molette de slection uniquement aprs avoir appuy sur son bouton de dverrouillage. 2 Appuyez sur le dclencheur pour commencer l'enregistrement. Un indicateur d'enregistrement (V) s'affi che pendant l'enregistrement. La dure restante est indique par un compte rebours et la dure d'enre-

gistrement par un compteur. 4 Dure d'enregistrement Dure restante 3 Appuyez nouveau sur le dclencheur pour terminer l'enregis-

trement. L'enregistrement s'arrte automatiquement lorsque la vido a atteint sa dure maximale ou lorsque la carte mmoire est pleine. 93 O Le type de carte mmoire compatible varie selon l'option slectionne pour B CONFIGURATION DU FILM> RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA.

- Enregistrez les vidos ProRes sur des cartes CFexpress.

- Les vidos dont le dbit binaire est de 720Mbit/s peuvent tre enregistres sur des cartes CFexpress ou des cartes dont la classe de vitesse vido est V90 ou suprieure.

- Les vidos dont le dbit binaire est de 360Mbit/s peuvent tre enregistres sur des cartes CFexpress ou des cartes dont la classe de vitesse vido est V60 ou suprieure.

- Les vidos dont le dbit binaire est de 100 ou 200Mbit/s peuvent tre enregistres sur des cartes CFexpress ou des cartes dont la classe de vitesse UHS est 3 ou suprieure. Le son est enregistr via le microphone intgr ou via un microphone ex-

terne (en option). Ne couvrez pas le microphone pendant l'enregistrement. Notez que le microphone risque de capter le bruit de l'objectif et d'autres sons mis par l'appareil photo pendant l'enregistrement. Des bandes verticales ou horizontales peuvent apparatre sur les vidos contenant des sujets trs lumineux. Cela est normal et n'est pas le signe d'un dysfonctionnement. 4 N Le tmoin lumineux est allum pendant l'enregistrement (l'option B CONFIGURATION DU FILM> LAMPE TMOIN permet de choisir le voyant [tmoin lumineux ou lampe d'assistance AF] qui s'claire pendant l'enregistrement vido et si ce voyant clignote ou pas). Pendant l'enregis-

trement, vous pouvez modifi er la correction d'exposition par 2IL et rgler le zoom l'aide de la bague de zoom situe sur l'objectif (si disponible). Lorsque l'enregistrement est en cours, vous pouvez:

- Rgler la sensibilit

- Refaire le point l'aide de l'une des mthodes suivantes:

Appuyer sur le dclencheur mi-course Appuyez sur une touche de fonction laquelle AF-ON est attribu Utiliser les commandes de l'cran tactile

- Affi cher un histogramme ou un horizon artifi ciel en appuyant sur la touche laquelle HISTOGRAMME ou COMMUTATEUR DE NIVEAU LECTRONIQUE est attribu Il se peut que l'enregistrement ne soit pas disponible avec certains rglages. En outre, dans d'autres cas, certains rglages peuvent ne pas s'appliquer pendant l'enregistrement. Pour choisir la zone de mise au point destine l'enregistrement vido, slectionnez G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> ZONE DE MISE AU POINT et utilisez le levier de mise au point et la molette de commande arrire (P 76). 94 Enregistrement de vidos Avertissements relatifs la temprature L'appareil photo s'teint automatiquement pour se protger lorsque sa temprature ou celle de la batterie augmente. Si un avertissement relatif la temprature s'affi che, le bruit de l'image peut augmenter. teignez l'appareil photo et attendez qu'il refroidisse avant de le rallumer. Utilisation d'un microphone externe Le son peut tre enregistr l'aide de micro-

phones externes qui se branchent sur des prises jack de 3,5mm de diamtre; les microphones ncessitant une entre alimente ne peuvent pas tre utiliss. Reportez-vous au manuel du microphone pour plus de dtails. Adaptateurs microphone XLR L'appareil photo peut tre utilis avec les adaptateurs microphone XLR TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F. Pour en savoir plus, consultez le site Internet de TASCAM. https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website 4 95 Enregistrement de vidos Modifi cation des paramtres vido Vous pouvez modifi er les rglages vido depuis les menus vido ou l'aide de l'lment B CONFIGURATION DU FILM disponible dans les menus photo (P 28). Utilisez l'lment BCONFIGURATION DU FILM des menus photo pour modifi er rapidement les rglages lorsque vous enregistrez des vidos via la touche t(enregistrement vido) (P 125). Les menus vido comportent des options qui peuvent tre uti-

lises lorsque vous enregistrez des vidos via le dclencheur en mode F(vido) (P 126). Certains rglages comme la cadence et la taille d'image peuvent tre modifi s l'aide de MODE VIDEO. Utilisez RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA pour certaines tches comme la slection du type de fi chier, du dbit binaire et du logement de la carte de destination. Vous pouvez slectionner le mode de mise au point l'aide de G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> F MODE MISE AU PT dans les me-

nus vido. Quelle que soit l'option slectionne, l'appareil photo passe automatiquement en AF CONTINU lorsque DTECTION DU VISAGE OUI ou DTECTION DES SUJETS ON est choisi pour G CONFIGURATION AF/MF> g RG. DTECT. VISAGE/YEUX ou RGLAGE DE LA DTECTION DES SUJETS. Notez cependant que si vous choisissez FOCUS MANUEL lorsque DTECTION DU VISAGE OUI ou DTECTION DES SUJETS ON est slectionn, la dtection du visage et des sujets est dsactive. O Les modifi cations eff ectues l'aide de l'lment B CONFIGURATION DU FILM des menus photo s'appliquent galement aux menus vido. Les modifi cations eff ectues dans l'un de ces deux menus s'appliquent automatiquement l'autre menu. Profondeur de champ Choisissez des petits chiff res pour estomper les dtails de l'arrire-plan. Vous pouvez modifi er l'ouverture lorsque la molette de slection est positionne sur A(AE priorit ouverture) ou M(manuel). 4 96 Visionnage des vidos Visionnez les vidos sur l'appareil photo. En lecture plein cran, les vidos sont signales par l'icne W. Appuyez en bas du levier de mise au point pour dmar-

rer la lecture vido. AFFICHER AFFICHER Vous pouvez eff ectuer les oprations suivantes lorsqu'une vido est affi che:

Levier de Levier de mise au point mise au point Haut Lecture plein cran Lecture plein cran Lecture en cours (xx)) Lecture en cours (

Lecture en pause (yy)) Lecture en pause (

Mettre n la lecture 4 Bas Lancer la lecture Faire une pause Gauche/

droite A cher les autres images Rgler la vitesse La progression est indique l'cran pen-

dant la lecture. O Ne couvrez pas le haut-parleur pendant la lecture. Dmarrer/reprendre la lecture Revenir en arrire/

avancer d'une vue 29m59s STOP PAUSE N Appuyez sur MENU/OK pour faire une pause pendant la lecture et affi cher les commandes du volume. Appuyez en haut ou en bas du levier de mise au point pour rgler le volume; appuyez de nouveau sur MENU/OK pour reprendre la lecture. Vous pouvez galement rgler le volume l'aide de l'option D CONFIGURATION SON> VOL. LECTURE. Pour visionner les vidos sur un tlviseur raccord en HDMI au lieu de les visionner sur l'cran de l'appareil photo, appuyez sur la touche a. 97 NOTES 98 Raccordements 99 Vue d'ensemble Ce chapitre dcrit les fonctionnalits qui permettent notam-

ment de transfrer les images sur un smartphone ou un ordi-

nateur, ou de commander l'appareil photo et de prendre des photos distance depuis un smartphone ou un ordinateur. N Ces fonctionnalits ne sont dcrites que succinctement dans le prsent document. Pour en savoir plus, consultez le site Internet ci-dessous. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en-int/manual/x-h2_connection/

Fonctionnalits prises en charge Cet appareil photo prend en charge les fonctionnalits suivantes:

Fonctionnalit Fonctionnalit Connexion l'applica-

Connexion l'applica-

tion du smartphone tion du smartphone Lecteurs de cartes USB Lecteurs de cartes USB Camra Web Camra Web Imprimantes instax Imprimantes instax 5 Prise de vue photogra-

Prise de vue photogra-

phique distance phique distance Transfert FTP Transfert FTP Traitement RAW Traitement RAW Enregistrement et char-

Enregistrement et char-

gement des rglages gement des rglages Enregistrement vido Enregistrement vido distance l'aide d'un distance l'aide d'un navigateur Internet navigateur Internet 100 110 105 102 PP Description Description Connectez-vous aux smartphones en Bluetooth et transf-

rez les images ou commandez l'appareil photo distance lorsque le smartphone a che la vue passant par l'objectif. Connectez un lecteur de cartes un ordinateur ou un smartphone en USB et copiez les images depuis les cartes mmoire. Connectez l'appareil photo un ordinateur en USB pour l'utiliser comme webcam. Imprimez les photos avec des imprimantes instax connectes. 111 Prenez des photos depuis un ordinateur auquel l'appareil photo est connect via un rseau local (LAN) sans l ou en USB. Vous pouvez galement vous connecter via un rseau local (LAN) cbl l'aide d'un transmetteur de chiers FT-XH

(en option). Transfrez les images sur des serveurs FTP l'aide du trans-

metteur de chiers FT-XH (en option). Tirez parti de la puissance du processeur de traitement d'image de l'appareil photo lors du traitement des photos RAW sur un ordinateur. Enregistrez les rglages de l'appareil photo sur un ordinateur ou chargez les rglages existants depuis un ordinateur. Commandez l'appareil photo et enregistrez les vidos dis-

tance depuis un ordinateur ou un smartphone connect via le transmetteur de chiers sans l FT-XH (en option). 113 115 117 116 Vue d'ensemble Paramtres de connexion Les connexions d'autres priphriques s'eff ectuent soit en choisissant ces derniers dans une liste rpertoriant les profi ls de connexion existants l'aide de SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION ou les profi ls crs rcemment l'aide de CRER/MODIFIER RGL. CONNEXION. 5 101 Connexion aux smartphones (Bluetooth) Connectez l'appareil photo un smartphone en Bluetooth pour copier les images sur le smartphone ou commander l'appareil photo distance tout en prvisualisant la vue pas-

sant par l'objectif sur l'cran du smartphone. N L'appareil photo passe automatiquement une connexion LAN sans fi l lorsqu'il copie les images sur le smartphone. Installation des applications de smartphone Avant d'tablir une connexion entre le smartphone et l'appareil photo, vous devrez installer au moins une application de smart-

phone ddie. Consultez le site Internet suivant et installez les applications souhaites sur votre tlphone. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

N Les applications disponibles varient selon le systme d'exploitation du smartphone. 5 Connexion un smartphone Couplez l'appareil photo au smartphone et tablissez une connexion en Bluetooth. 1 Appuyez sur la touche x(Bluetooth) lorsque l'appareil photo est en mode de prise de vue. N Vous pouvez galement passer directement l'tape3 en mainte-

nant appuye la touche xpendant la lecture. 102 Connexion aux smartphones (Bluetooth) 2 Mettez en surbrillance Bluetooth et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Bluetooth & RGLAGE DE FONCTION (Fn) X-H2123456 Bluetooth 3 Mettez en surbrillance COUPLAGE et appuyez sur MENU/OK. Bluetooth COUPLAGE Bluetooth ON/OFF 4 Lancez l'application sur le smartphone et couplez le smart-

phone l'appareil photo. Vous trouverez d'autres informations sur le site Internet sui-

vant:

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

Une fois le couplage eff ectu, l'ap-

pareil photo et le smartphone se connecteront automatiquement en Bluetooth. Une icne Bluetooth blanche s'affi chera sur l'cran de l'appareil photo lorsqu'une connexion sera tablie. 5 N Une fois les priphriques coupls, le smartphone se connectera auto-

matiquement l'appareil photo lors du lancement de l'application. Lorsque l'appareil photo n'est pas connect un smartphone, vous pou-

vez dsactiver le Bluetooth pour rduire la consommation de la batterie. 103 Connexion aux smartphones (Bluetooth) Utilisation de l'application du smartphone Avant de lancer l'application du smartphone, choisissez 1: RGLAGE UNIVERSEL pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 5 104 Connexion aux smartphones (USB) Connectez-vous aux smartphones et aux ordinateurs en USB pour transfrer les images depuis l'appareil photo. Copie des images sur un smartphone Avant de vous connecter au smartphone pour transfrer les images en USB, slectionnez AUTO ou ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. l'attention des clients qui utilisent des priphriques Android La faon dont vous allez raccorder l'appareil photo dpend du type de port USB de votre smartphone. Type C Type C Utilisez le cble USB fourni. Cble USB fourni Port de type C (mle) Port de type C (mle) 5 105 Micro-B Micro-B Utilisez un cble USB OTG. Cble USB tiers Cble USB OTG Port de type C (mle) Port Micro-B (mle) Port de type A (mle) Port de type A (femelle) O Le smartphone doit prendre en charge la norme USB OTG. Il n'est pas possible d'obtenir les rsultats souhaits avec un cble USB de type C vers micro-B. Utilisez un cble OTG. 1 Slectionnez AUTO ou ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. 2 Choisissez 2: LECTEUR DE CARTE USB pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 3 Raccordez l'appareil photo au smartphone l'aide d'un cble USB. N Si le smartphone demande l'autorisation pour une application autre que Camera Importer afi n d'accder l'appareil photo, touchez Annuler et passez l'tape suivante. 4 Sur votre smartphone, touchez la notifi cation Connect en USB PTP. 5 106 Connexion aux smartphones (USB) 5 Slectionnez Camera Importer dans la liste des applications recommandes. L'application dmarre automatiquement et vous permet d'im-

porter des photos et des vidos sur votre smartphone. N Si le message Aucun priphrique MTP n'est connect s'affi che sur l'application, essayez nouveau partir de l'tape 3. l'attention des clients qui utilisent iOS Utilisez un adaptateur pour appareil photo. tant donn que l'ap-

pareil photo est dot d'un port USB de type C, vous devez disposer d'un cble dot d'un port USB de type A pour permettre le bran-

chement l'adaptateur pour appareil photo. Cble USB tiers Adaptateur pour appareil photo Apple Lightning vers USB Port de type C (mle) Utilisez un adaptateur pour appareil photo Apple Lightning vers USB 5 Port de type A (mle) 1 Slectionnez ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. 2 Choisissez 2:LECTEUR DE CARTE USB pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 3 Raccordez l'appareil photo au smartphone l'aide d'un cble USB. Lancez l'application Photos pour importer les photos et les vidos sur votre smartphone. O Un cble USB de typeC vers typeC est ncessaire pour la connexion des iPad et autres priphriques dots de ports USB de typeC. Il n'est pas possible d'obtenir les rsultats souhaits avec un cble USB de type C vers Lightning. Utilisez un adaptateur pour appareil photo. 107 Connexion de l'appareil photo et de l'ordinateur 1 Slectionnez AUTO ou ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. 2 Choisissez 2: LECTEUR DE CARTE USB pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 3 teignez l'appareil photo. 4 Allumez l'ordinateur. 5 Branchez un cble USB. 5 Port USB (type C) O Le cble USB ne doit pas dpasser 1m (3,3pi) et doit tre adapt au transfert de donnes. 6 Allumez l'appareil photo. 7 Copiez les photos sur votre ordinateur. Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: vous pouvez copier les images sur votre ordinateur l'aide de Transfert d'images (fourni avec votre ordinateur) ou d'autres logiciels. Utilisez un lecteur de cartes pour copier les fi chiers dont la taille dpasse 4Go. Windows: vous pouvez copier les images sur votre ordinateur l'aide des applications fournies avec le systme d'exploitation. 108 Connexion aux smartphones (USB) O teignez l'appareil photo avant de dbrancher le cble USB. Lors du raccordement des cblesUSB, assurez-vous que les connecteurs sont entirement et correctement insrs. Raccordez l'appareil photo directement l'ordinateur; n'utilisez pas de hub USB ou le port USB du clavier. Une coupure d'alimentation pendant le transfert peut entraner une perte des donnes ou endommager la carte mmoire. Insrez une bat-

terie neuve ou entirement charge avant de raccorder l'appareil photo. Si la carte mmoire insre contient un grand nombre d'images, le logiciel peut mettre un certain temps s'ouvrir, dlai pendant lequel vous ne pourrez ni importer, ni enregistrer d'images. Utilisez un lecteur de cartes mmoire pour transfrer les images. Vrifi ez que le tmoin lumineux est teint ou allum en vert avant d'teindre l'appareil photo. Ne dbranchez pas le cble USB pendant le transfert. Si vous ne respec-

tez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de perdre des donnes ou d'endom-

mager la carte mmoire. Dconnectez l'appareil photo avant d'insrer ou de retirer les cartes mmoire. Dans certains cas, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas accder aux images enregistres sur un serveur de rseau l'aide du logiciel comme vous le feriez sur un ordinateur autonome. Ne retirez pas immdiatement l'appareil photo du systme ou ne dbranchez pas le cble USB une fois que le message indiquant que la copie est en cours a disparu de l'cran de l'ordinateur. Si le nombre d'images copies est trs important, le transfert des donnes peut se poursuivre aprs la disparition de ce message. Lorsque l'utilisateur utilise des services qui requirent une connexion Internet, tous les frais facturs par le fournisseur d'accs Internet sont la charge de l'utilisateur. 5 109 Utilisation de l'appareil photo comme webcam Vous pouvez connecter l'appareil photo un ordinateur afi n de l'utiliser comme webcam. 1 Slectionnez AUTO ou ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. 2 Choisissez 6: WEBCAM USB pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 3 Connectez l'appareil photo l'ordinateur en USB, puis mettez l'appareil photo sous tension (P 108). 4 Slectionnez l'appareil photo dans l'application o il sera utilis comme webcam. 5 110 Imprimantes instax SHARE Imprimez les photos prises avec votre appareil photo num-

rique l'aide d'une imprimante instax SHARE. tablissement d'une connexion Slectionnez RGL CNX IMPRIM instax dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB et saisissez le nom de l'imprimante instax SHARE (SSID) et le mot de passe. Le nom (SSID) et le mot de passe de l'imprimante Le nom (SSID) de l'imprimante est indiqu sous l'imprimante; le mot de passe par dfaut est 1111. Si vous avez dj choisi un autre mot de passe pour imprimer depuis un smartphone, saisissez ce mot de passe. 5 111 Imprimantes instax SHARE Impression des photos 1 Choisissez 1: RGLAGE UNIVERSEL pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 2 Allumez l'imprimante. 3 Slectionnez C MENU LECTURE>

IMPRESS. IMPRIM instax. L'appareil photo se connecte alors l'impri-

mante. 4 Utilisez le levier de mise au point pour affi cher la photo que vous souhaitez imprimer, puis appuyez sur MENU/OK. IMPRESS. IMPRIM instax-12345678 CONNECTION FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 ANNULER IMPRESS. IMPRIM 100-0020 REGLER instax-12345678 ANNULER N Vous ne pouvez pas imprimer les photos prises avec d'autres appareils photo. La zone imprime est plus petite que la zone visible sur l'cran LCD. Les affi chages dpendent de l'imprimante raccorde. 5 5 La photo est envoye l'imprimante et l'impression dmarre. 112 Prise de vue photographique distance Vous pouvez commander l'appareil photo distance et prendre des photos depuis un ordinateur connect en USB ou via un rseau local (LAN) sans fi l ou cbl. N Cette section fait rfrence uniquement aux connexions USB. Pour obtenir des informations sur la prise de vue photographique distance via un rseau local (LAN) sans fi l ou cbl, consultez le site Internet ci-dessous. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en-int/manual/x-h2_connection/

Prise de vue photographique distance en USB Connectez l'appareil photo un ordinateur en USB pour photogra-

phier distance. 1 Slectionnez AUTO ou ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. 2 Choisissez 3: CONNEX. USB PRISE VUE AUTO ou 4: CONNEX. USB PRISE VUE DF. pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. O Si 3: CONNEX. USB PRISE VUE AUTO est slectionn, la prise de vue photographique distance est active automatiquement lorsque vous mettez sous tension l'ordinateur auquel l'appareil photo est connect. Lorsque l'ordinateur est hors tension ou non connect, la prise de vue photographique distance est inter-

rompue et les photos sont enregistres sur la carte mmoire de l'appareil photo. Si l'appareil photo est dbranch de l'ordinateur lorsque 4: CONNEX. USB PRISE VUE DF. est slectionn, il continuera de fonctionner en mode distance et aucune photo ne sera enregis-

tre. 3 Connectez l'appareil photo l'ordinateur en USB, puis mettez l'appareil photo sous tension (P 108). 5 113 Prise de vue photographique distance 4 Prenez des photos via la fonction de prise de vue photogra-

phique distance. Utilisez des logiciels comme Adobe Lightroom Classic+

FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in ou FUJIFILM X Acquire. N Pour en savoir plus sur la prise de vue photographique distance, consultez le site Internet ci-dessous. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/fr/tether/

Consultez le site Internet ci-dessous pour obtenir des informations sur les logiciels utiliss. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

5 114 Traitement RAW En utilisant X RAW STUDIO, vous pouvez tirer parti de la puissance du processeur de traitement d'image de l'appareil photo lors du traitement des photos RAW sur un ordinateur. 1 Slectionnez AUTO ou ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. 2 Choisissez 5: REST SAUV/CONV RAW USB pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 3 Connectez l'appareil photo l'ordinateur en USB, puis mettez l'appareil photo sous tension (P 108). 4 Lancez X RAW STUDIO. Vous pouvez eff ectuer le traitement RAW l'aide de X RAW STUDIO. N Consultez le site Internet ci-dessous pour obtenir des informations sur les logiciels utiliss. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

5 115 Enregistrement et chargement des rglages Vous pouvez enregistrer ou charger les rglages de l'appareil photo depuis des ordinateurs l'aide de FUJIFILM X Acquire. 1 Slectionnez AUTO ou ALIMENTATION OFF / COM. ON pour RGLAGE ALIMENTATION/COMM USB dans le menu Rglage rseau/USB. 2 Choisissez 5: REST SAUV/CONV RAW USB pour SLECT. RGLAGE CONNEXION. 3 Connectez l'appareil photo l'ordinateur en USB, puis mettez l'appareil photo sous tension (P 108). 4 Lancez FUJIFILM X Acquire. Vous pouvez enregistrer ou charger les rglages de l'appareil photo l'aide de FUJIFILM X Acquire. N Consultez le site Internet ci-dessous pour obtenir des informations sur les logiciels utiliss. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

5 116 Enregistrement des vidos distance depuis un navigateur Internet Commandez l'appareil photo et enregistrez les vidos dis-

tance depuis un ordinateur ou un smartphone connect via le transmetteur de fi chiers sans fi l FT-XH (en option). L'ordina-

teur peut se connecter quatre appareils photo maximum. N Consultez le site Internet ci-dessous pour obtenir des informations sur les logiciels utiliss. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en-int/manual/x-h2_connection/

5 117 NOTES 118 Liste des menus 119 Les menus prise de vue (photographie) N Les lments signals par les icnes x et F sont disponibles dans les menus prise de vue photo et prise de vue vido. Les modifi cations apportes ces lments dans l'un ou l'autre de ces menus s'appliquent l'lment de l'autre menu. CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE Pour affi cher les rglages de qualit d'image, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue photo et slectionnez l'onglet H(CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE). Rglage Rglage TAILLE D'IMAGE TAILLE D'IMAGE QUALITE D'IMAGE QUALITE D'IMAGE Description Description Choisissez la taille et le format des nouvelles photos. Modi ez les rglages de compression JPEG ou HEIF ou activez ou dsactivez l'enregistrement RAW. ENREGISTREMENT RAW ENREGISTREMENT RAW Choisissez les options d'enregistrement des images RAW. SLECTIONNER JPEG/HEIF Choisissez si les photos sont enregistres en JPEG ou HEIF. SLECTIONNER JPEG/HEIF SIMULATION DE FILM SIMULATION DE FILM Choisissez une palette de couleurs et une gamme de tons. COULEUR COULEUR Choisissez une teinte monochrome pour les photos prises l'aide de SIMULATION DE FILM> a ACROS et MONOCHOMATIQUE MONOCHOMATIQUE b MONOCHROME. Ajoutez un e et de grain de lm. EFFET DU GRAIN EFFET DU GRAIN COULEUR EFFET CHROME Augmentez la gamme de tonalits disponibles pour le COULEUR EFFET CHROME 6 COULEUR CHROME FX COULEUR CHROME FX BLEUE BLEUE EFFET PEAU LISSE EFFET PEAU LISSE BALANCE DES BLANCS BALANCE DES BLANCS PLAGE DYNAMIQUE PLAGE DYNAMIQUE PRIORIT PLAGE D PRIORIT PLAGE D rendu des couleurs qui ont tendance tre trs satures comme les rouges, les jaunes et les verts. Augmentez la gamme des tonalits disponibles pour le rendu des bleus. Teint lisse. Faites correspondre la balance des blancs la source lumineuse, qu'il s'agisse de la lumire directe du soleil ou d'un clairage arti ciel. Choisissez la plage dynamique des photos. Rduisez la perte de dtails dans les hautes lumires et les ombres pour obtenir un rendu naturel lorsque vous photographiez des scnes trs contrastes. 120 Rglage Rglage COURBE DE TONALIT COURBE DE TONALIT COULEUR COULEUR DETAIL DETAIL RB ISO LEVE RB ISO LEVE NETTET NETTET LONGUE EXPO RB LONGUE EXPO RB OPTIM. MOD. OBJ. OPTIM. MOD. OBJ. ESPACE COULEUR ESPACE COULEUR CLONAGE PIXEL MORT CLONAGE PIXEL MORT MODIF/ENR REG PERSO MODIF/ENR REG PERSO MISE JOUR AUTO DU MISE JOUR AUTO DU RGLAGE PERSONNALIS RGLAGE PERSONNALIS xxFF RGLAGE DU MODE RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS PERSONNALIS Les menus prise de vue (photographie) Description Description En vous rfrant une courbe de tonalit, rglez l'appa-

rence des hautes lumires ou des ombres pour les rendre plus dures ou plus douces. Modi ez la densit des couleurs. Accentuez ou estompez les contours. Rduisez le bruit des photos prises des sensibilits leves. Augmentez la d nition tout en modi ant les tonalits des hautes lumires et des ombres aussi peu que possible. Rduisez l'e et de marbrure sur les expositions de longue dure. Rduisez la perte lgre de d nition provoque par la di raction prsente de petites ouvertures. Choisissez la gamme des couleurs disponibles pour la reproduction des couleurs. Utilisez cette option si vous observez des points lumineux sur vos photos. Enregistrez des rglages du menu prise de vue person-

naliss. Choisissez si les jeux de rglages personnaliss s'actua-

lisent automatiquement pour tenir compte des modi ca-

tions apportes aux rglages. Choisissez si le jeu de rglages personnaliss actuel va tre utilis pour la prise de vue photographique ou pour l'enregistrement vido. xxFF RGL BAGUE ADAPT RGL BAGUE ADAPT Modi ez les rglages des objectifs monture M installs l'aide d'une BAGUE ADAPTATRICE POUR MONTURE M FUJIFILM (en option). 6 121 CONFIGURATION AF/MF Pour affi cher les rglages AF/MF, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue photo et slectionnez l'onglet G(CONFIGURATION AF/MF). Rglage Rglage ZONE DE MISE AU POINT ZONE DE MISE AU POINT MODE MISE AU PT MODE MISE AU PT Description Description Choisissez la zone de mise au point. Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo e ectue la mise au point. Choisissez la taille de la zone de mise au point. MODE AF MODE AF RGL. PERSONNALISS AF-C Slectionnez les options de suivi de la mise au point RGL. PERSONNALISS AF-C STOCK. MODE AF PAR STOCK. MODE AF PAR ORIENT. ORIENT. AFFICHAGE POINT AFFICHAGE POINT AF AF yzyz NOMBRES DE POINTS NOMBRES DE POINTS FOCUS FOCUS PRE-AF PRE-AF TEMOIN AF xxFF TEMOIN AF 6 gg RG. DTECT. VISAGE/

RG. DTECT. VISAGE/

YEUX YEUX RGLAGE DE LA DTECTION RGLAGE DE LA DTECTION DES SUJETS DES SUJETS AF+MF AF+MF ASSIST. M.AP. ASSIST. M.AP. 122 utiliser en mode de mise au point AF CONTINU. Choisissez si le mode AF utilis lorsque l'appareil photo est la verticale est enregistr sparment de celui utilis lorsque l'appareil photo est l'horizontale. Choisissez si les cadres de mise au point individuels s'af-

chent lorsque ZONE ou LARGE/SUIVI est slectionn pour MODE AF. Choisissez le nombre de collimateurs pouvant tre slectionns. Choisissez si l'appareil photo continue rgler la mise au point mme lorsque vous n'appuyez pas sur le dclen-

cheur mi-course. Choisissez si l'illuminateur d'assistance AF s'allume pour aider l'autofocus. Choisissez si l'appareil photo accorde la priorit aux visages humains par rapport aux objets situs l'ar-

rire-plan lors du rglage de la mise au point et de l'exposition. Choisissez si l'appareil photo accorde la priorit aux sujets d'une catgorie particulire, comme les animaux ou les vhicules, lors du rglage de la mise au point. Choisissez si la mise au point manuelle peut tre active en tournant la bague de mise au point lorsque la mise au point est verrouille. Choisissez la mthode d'a chage de la mise au point en mode de mise au point manuelle. Les menus prise de vue (photographie) Rglage Rglage VERIFICATION AF. VERIFICATION AF. Description Description Choisissez si l'appareil photo zoome automatiquement sur la zone de mise au point slectionne lorsque vous tournez la bague de mise au point en mode de mise au point manuelle. VER. EA SPOT ET ZONE MaP Choisissez si la mesure ponctuelle e ectue la mesure sur VER. EA SPOT ET ZONE MaP le cadre de mise au point actuellement slectionn. xxFF PARAM. AF INSTANT. PARAM. AF INSTANT. Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo e ectue la mise CHELLE DE PRO-

xxFF CHELLE DE PRO-

FOND. CHAMP FOND. CHAMP PRIOR. DCL./AF. PRIOR. DCL./AF. LIMITEUR DE PLAGE xxFF LIMITEUR DE PLAGE AFAF MODE ECRAN TACTILE MODE ECRAN TACTILE au point lorsque, en mode de mise au point manuelle, vous appuyez sur les touches de fonction auxquelles des fonctionnalits comme le verrouillage AF sont attribues. Choisissez une chelle pour la profondeur de champ. Choisissez si les photos peuvent tre prises en appuyant jusqu'en n de course sur le dclencheur lorsque l'appa-

reil photo n'a pas e ectu la mise au point. Limitez la plage des distances de mise au point dispo-

nibles pour augmenter la vitesse de mise au point. Choisissez les oprations de prise de vue e ectues l'aide des commandes tactiles. CONFIGURATION PRISE DE VUE Pour affi cher les rglages de prise de vue, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue photo et slectionnez l'onglet A(CONFIGURATION PRISE DE VUE). Rglage Rglage RGLAGE DU FILTRE RGLAGE DU FILTRE MODE VISEUR POUR LE MODE VISEUR POUR LE SPORT SPORT Description Description 6 Prenez des photos avec des e ets de ltres. Prenez des photos en vous basant sur le cadre situ au centre de l'cran. PR-PRISE DE VUE s sJJ Choisissez de photographier en rafale l'aide de l'obtura-

PR-PRISE DE VUE teur lectronique lorsque vous appuyez mi-course sur le dclencheur. Choisissez une temporisation pour le dclenchement. Choisissez si les rglages du retardateur sont rinitialiss aprs chaque utilisation ou au moment de la mise hors tension de l'appareil photo. RETARDATEUR RETARDATEUR SAUVEG. RGL. SAUVEG. RGL. RETARDATEUR RETARDATEUR 123 Rglage Rglage TMOIN DE RETARDATEUR Choisissez si le tmoin lumineux du retardateur s'allume TMOIN DE RETARDATEUR Description Description CLICH. RETARD. INTERV. CLICH. RETARD. INTERV. LISSAGE EXPO. AVEC LISSAGE EXPO. AVEC INTERVAL. INTERVAL. RG. PRISE DE VUE AE RG. PRISE DE VUE AE BKT SIMULATION FILM BKT SIMULATION FILM RGLAGE DE BKT DE MISE RGLAGE DE BKT DE MISE AU POINT AU POINT PHOTOMETRIE PHOTOMETRIE TYPE DE DCLENCHEUR TYPE DE DCLENCHEUR RDUCTION DU RDUCTION DU SCINTILLEMENT SCINTILLEMENT RGL. DE LA VIT. DU DCL. RGL. DE LA VIT. DU DCL. SANS SCINT. SANS SCINT. STABILISATEUR STABILISATEUR ISOISO CONV-TELE NUMERIQUE CONV-TELE NUMERIQUE xxFF RGL. DU RGL. DU VENTILATEUR DE REFROID. VENTILATEUR DE REFROID. COM. SANS FIL xxFF COM. SANS FIL lors des prises de vues l'aide du retardateur. Con gurez l'appareil photo pour prendre automatique-

ment un certain nombre de photos, selon un intervalle prd ni. Choisissez si l'exposition se rgle automatiquement lors de l'utilisation de l'intervallomtre a n d'viter des chan-

gements brusques d'exposition entre les prises de vues. D nissez les rglages du bracketing de l'exposition. Choisissez les trois types de lms utiliss pour le bracke-

ting de simulation de lm. Modi ez les rglages du bracketing de la mise au point. Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo mesure l'expo-

sition. Choisissez le type d'obturateur. Choisissez de rduire le scintillement sur les images et sur l'cran lorsque vous photographiez sous des clairages uorescents et d'autres sources lumineuses similaires. Choisissez si la vitesse d'obturation peut tre modi e se-

lon de plus petits incrments pour rduire le scintillement sous un clairage LED ou autre clairage similaire. Choisissez d'activer ou non la stabilisation d'image. Rglez la sensibilit de l'appareil photo la lumire. Faites un zoom avant sur votre sujet pendant la prise de vue. Modi ez les rglages des ventilateurs optionnels. tablissez des connexions sans l avec des smartphones, des tablettes ou d'autres priphriques. 6 124 Les menus prise de vue (photographie) CONFIGURATION DU FLASH Pour affi cher les rglages du fl ash, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue photo et slectionnez l'onglet F(CONFIGURATION DU FLASH). Description Description Rglage Rglage RGLAGE FONCTION FLASH Modi ez certains rglages comme le mode de contrle du RGLAGE FONCTION FLASH ash, son intensit et sa puissance. Choisissez de corriger l'e et des yeux rouges provoqu par le ash. Choisissez un mode de verrouillage TTL. REDUC. YEUX ROUGE REDUC. YEUX ROUGE MODE DE VERROUILLAGE MODE DE VERROUILLAGE TTLTTL RGLAGE DE L'CLAIRAGE RGLAGE DE L'CLAIRAGE DELDEL Choisissez d'utiliser l'clairage vido LED du ash (si disponible) comme r ecteur ou comme illuminateur d'assistance AF lorsque vous prenez des photos. RGLAGE TLCOMMANDE Choisissez des groupes lorsque le ash de l'appareil photo RGLAGE TLCOMMANDE RGLAGE CH RGLAGE CH joue le rle de contrleur en mode de contrle optique sans l distance Fuji lm. Choisissez le canal utilis pour la communication entre le contrleur et les ashes asservis. CONFIGURATION DU FILM Pour affi cher les rglages des vidos, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue photo et slectionnez l'onglet B(CONFIGURATION DU FILM). Rglage Rglage MODE VIDEO MODE VIDEO ENR. GDE VITESSE ENR. GDE VITESSE RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA Choisissez les rglages des chiers vido, notamment la RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA Rglez les paramtres d'enregistrement vido. Modi ez les rglages des vidos haute vitesse. Description Description destination, le type de chier et la compression. 6 MODE DE STAB. IMAGE Choisissez d'activer ou non la stabilisation d'image. FF MODE DE STAB. IMAGE FF AMLIO. MODE STAB. AMLIO. MODE STAB. IM. IM. RGLAGE AUDIO RGLAGE AUDIO Choisissez le niveau de la stabilisation d'image. Modi ez les rglages audio pour l'enregistrement vido. 125 Les menus prise de vue (vidos) N Les lments signals par les icnes x et F sont disponibles dans les menus prise de vue photo et prise de vue vido. Les modifi cations apportes ces lments dans l'un ou l'autre de ces menus s'appliquent l'lment de l'autre menu. CONFIGURATION DU FILM Pour affi cher les options d'enregistrement vido, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue vido et slectionnez l'onglet B(CONFIGURATION DU FILM). Rglage Rglage LISTE DES PARAMTRES LISTE DES PARAMTRES VIDEO VIDEO MODE DE PRISE DE VUE MODE DE PRISE DE VUE A chez les rglages d'enregistrement vido actuels. Description Description Choisissez le mode de prise de vue pour l'enregistrement vido. Rglez les paramtres d'enregistrement vido. Modi ez les rglages des vidos haute vitesse. MODE VIDEO MODE VIDEO ENR. GDE VITESSE ENR. GDE VITESSE RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA Choisissez les rglages des chiers vido, notamment la RGLAGE DE L'ENR. MDIA RGLAGE DE LA SORTIE RGLAGE DE LA SORTIE HDMI HDMI CORR. AGR. ROG. FILM CORR. AGR. ROG. FILM 6 ZOOM NUMRIQUE ZOOM NUMRIQUE ENREGISTREMENT ENREGISTREMENT F-Log/HLG F-Log/HLG RGLAGE DU NIVEAU DE RGLAGE DU NIVEAU DE DONNES DONNES PHOTOMETRIE FF PHOTOMETRIE FF RGL. DE LA VIT. DU RGL. DE LA VIT. DU DCL. SANS SCINT. DCL. SANS SCINT. destination, le type de chier et la compression. Modi ez les rglages utiliser lorsque l'a chage de prise de vue est transmis un priphrique HDMI. Choisissez de d nir ou non le facteur de recadrage vido sur 1,25:1. Faites un zoom avant sur votre sujet pendant la prise de vue. Choisissez la destination des vidos F-Log et HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) enregistres lorsque l'appareil photo est raccord un priphrique HDMI. Choisissez la plage de signal des vidos enregistres avec l'appareil photo. Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo mesure l'expo-

sition. Choisissez si la vitesse d'obturation peut tre modi e se-

lon de plus petits incrments pour rduire le scintillement sous un clairage LED ou autre clairage similaire. 126 Les menus prise de vue (vidos) Description Description Rglage Rglage MODE DE STAB. IMAGE Choisissez d'activer ou non la stabilisation d'image. FF MODE DE STAB. IMAGE FF AMLIO. MODE STAB. AMLIO. MODE STAB. IM. IM. FF ISO ISO PARAMTRE ZEBRA PARAMTRE ZEBRA Choisissez le niveau de la stabilisation d'image. Rglez la sensibilit de l'appareil photo la lumire. Choisissez si les hautes lumires susceptibles d'tre surex-

poses sont indiques par des zbrures en mode vido. Choisissez le seuil de luminosit des zbrures. Il est possible de modi er les rglages l'aide des mo-

lettes de commande et des commandes tactiles. Choisissez le voyant (tmoin lumineux ou lampe d'assis-

tance AF) qui s'allume pendant l'enregistrement vido et si ce voyant clignote ou pas. Modi ez les rglages des ventilateurs optionnels. NIVEAU ZEBRA NIVEAU ZEBRA CONTRLE FILM CONTRLE FILM OPTIM. OPTIM. oLoL LAMPE TMOIN LAMPE TMOIN RGL. DU xxFF RGL. DU VENTILATEUR DE REFROID. VENTILATEUR DE REFROID. FF MODIF/ENR REG PERSO MODIF/ENR REG PERSO Enregistrez des rglages du menu prise de vue person-

FF RGL. PERSO DE MISE RGL. PERSO DE MISE JOUR AUTO JOUR AUTO RGLAGE DU MODE xxFF RGLAGE DU MODE PERSONNALIS PERSONNALIS COM. SANS FIL xxFF COM. SANS FIL naliss. Choisissez si les jeux de rglages personnaliss s'actua-

lisent automatiquement pour tenir compte des modi ca-

tions apportes aux rglages. Choisissez si le jeu de rglages personnaliss actuel va tre utilis pour la prise de vue photographique ou pour l'enregistrement vido. tablissez des connexions sans l avec des smartphones, des tablettes ou d'autres priphriques. 6 127 CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE Pour affi cher les rglages de qualit d'image, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue vido et slectionnez l'onglet H(CONFIGURATION QUALIT IMAGE). SIMULATION DE FILM Choisissez un e et de simulation de lm pour l'enregistre-

Description Description Rglage Rglage FF SIMULATION DE FILM COULEUR FF COULEUR MONOCHOMATIQUE MONOCHOMATIQUE BALANCE DES BLANCS FF BALANCE DES BLANCS FF PLAGE DYNAMIQUE PLAGE DYNAMIQUE COURBE DE TONALIT FF COURBE DE TONALIT FF COULEUR COULEUR FF DETAIL DETAIL RB ISO LEVE FF RB ISO LEVE RDUCTION DU BRUIT RDUCTION DU BRUIT INTER-IMAGE INTER-IMAGE FF CORR VIGNET CHROM ment vido. Choisissez une teinte monochrome pour les vidos rali-

ses l'aide de SIMULATION DE FILM> a ACROS et b MONOCHROME. Faites correspondre la balance des blancs la source lumi-

neuse, qu'il s'agisse de la lumire directe du soleil ou d'un clairage arti ciel. Choisissez une plage dynamique pour l'enregistrement vido. En vous rfrant une courbe de tonalit, rglez l'appa-

rence des hautes lumires ou des ombres pour les rendre plus dures ou plus douces. Modi ez la densit des couleurs. Accentuez ou estompez les contours. Rduisez le bruit des photos prises des sensibilits leves. Choisissez de rduire ou non le bruit inter-image. CORR VIGNET CHROM Choisissez de rduire ou non le vignetage lors de la ralisa-

tion de vidos. 6 xxFF RGL BAGUE ADAPT RGL BAGUE ADAPT Modi ez les rglages des objectifs monture M installs l'aide d'une BAGUE ADAPTATRICE POUR MONTURE M FUJIFILM (en option). CONFIGURATION AF/MF Pour affi cher les rglages AF/MF, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue vido et slectionnez l'onglet G(CONFIGURATION AF/MF). Rglage Rglage Description Description ZONE DE MISE AU POINT Choisissez la zone de mise au point. FF ZONE DE MISE AU POINT MODE MISE AU PT FF MODE MISE AU PT MODE AF FF MODE AF Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo e ectue la mise au point. Choisissez la taille de la zone de mise au point. 128 Rglage Rglage FF RGL. PERSONNALISS RGL. PERSONNALISS AF-CAF-C TEMOIN AF xxFF TEMOIN AF RG. DTECT. FgFg RG. DTECT. VISAGE/YEUX VISAGE/YEUX RGLAGE DE LA FF RGLAGE DE LA DTECTION DES SUJETS DTECTION DES SUJETS AF+MF FF AF+MF ASSIST. M.AP. FF ASSIST. M.AP. VERIFICATION AF. FF VERIFICATION AF. Les menus prise de vue (vidos) Description Description Choisissez les options de suivi de la mise au point lorsque vous enregistrez les vidos en mode de mise au point AF CONTINU. Choisissez si l'illuminateur d'assistance AF s'allume pour aider l'autofocus. Choisissez si l'appareil photo accorde la priorit aux visages humains par rapport aux objets situs l'arrire-plan lors du rglage de la mise au point et de l'exposition. Choisissez si l'appareil photo accorde la priorit aux sujets d'une catgorie particulire, comme les animaux ou les vhicules, lors du rglage de la mise au point. Choisissez si la mise au point manuelle peut tre active pendant lautofocus en tournant la bague de mise au point. Choisissez la mthode d'a chage de la mise au point en mode de mise au point manuelle. Choisissez si l'appareil photo zoome automatiquement sur la zone de mise au point slectionne lorsque vous tournez la bague de mise au point en mode de mise au point manuelle. xxFF PARAM. AF INSTANT. PARAM. AF INSTANT. Choisissez la faon dont l'appareil photo e ectue la mise au point lorsque, en mode de mise au point manuelle, vous appuyez sur les touches de fonction auxquelles des fonctionnalits comme le verrouillage AF sont attribues. Choisissez une chelle pour la profondeur de champ. Limitez la plage des distances de mise au point disponibles pour augmenter la vitesse de mise au point. 6 xxFF CHELLE DE CHELLE DE PROFOND. CHAMP PROFOND. CHAMP xxFF LIMITEUR DE LIMITEUR DE PLAGE AF PLAGE AF FF MODE ECRAN TACTILE MODE ECRAN TACTILE Choisissez les oprations de prise de vue e ectues l'aide BLOC. VRIF. MISE AU PT BLOC. VRIF. MISE AU PT des commandes tactiles. Choisissez si le zoom de mise au point reste activ une fois que l'enregistrement vido dmarre. 129 RGLAGE AUDIO Pour affi cher les rglages audio, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue vido et slectionnez l'onglet P(RGLAGE AUDIO). Rglage Rglage RGLER NIVEAU MIC RGLER NIVEAU MIC INTERNE INTERNE RGLER NIVEAU MIC RGLER NIVEAU MIC EXTERNE EXTERNE RGLAGE DU JACK DU RGLAGE DU JACK DU MICROMICRO LIMITEUR NIVEAU MIC LIMITEUR NIVEAU MIC FILTRE VENT FILTRE VENT FILTRE PASSE-BAS FILTRE PASSE-BAS VOLUME DU CASQUE VOLUME DU CASQUE RGLAGE DE L'ADAPTATEUR RGLAGE DE L'ADAPTATEUR MICROPHONE XLR MICROPHONE XLR Description Description Modi ez le niveau d'enregistrement du microphone intgr. Modi ez le niveau d'enregistrement des microphones externes. Indiquez le type de priphrique audio branch dans la prise du microphone. Rduit la distorsion provoque par les sons qui dpassent les limites des circuits audio du microphone. Choisissez d'activer ou non la rduction du bruit du vent pendant l'enregistrement vido. Choisissez de rduire ou non le bruit basse frquence pendant l'enregistrement vido. Rglez le volume du casque. Modi ez les rglages du canal d'entre du microphone et autres paramtres similaires destins aux adaptateurs microphone XLR. 6 130 Les menus prise de vue (vidos) RGLAGE CODE TEMPOREL Pour affi cher les rglages du code temporel, appuyez sur MENU/OK sur l'cran de prise de vue vido et slectionnez l'onglet Q(RGLAGE CODE TEMPOREL). Rglage Rglage AFFICHAGE CODE TEMPOREL Choisissez d'a cher ou non des codes temporels pendant AFFICHAGE CODE TEMPOREL Description Description RGLAGE HEURE DE RGLAGE HEURE DE DMARRAGE DMARRAGE RGLAGE DCOMPTE RGLAGE DCOMPTE TEMPS REL TEMPS REL SORTIE CODE TEMPOREL SORTIE CODE TEMPOREL HDMI HDMI l'enregistrement et la lecture vido. Choisissez l'heure de dmarrage du code temporel. Choisissez si l'heure est synchronise en continu ou uniquement pendant l'enregistrement vido. Choisissez d'activer ou non le saut d'images. Choisissez si les codes temporels sont transmis aux priphriques HDMI. 6 131 Le menu lecture Le menu lecture s'affi che lorsque vous appuyez sur MENU/OK en mode de lecture. Rglage Rglage FENTE COMMUTE FENTE COMMUTE CONVERSION RAW CONVERSION RAW CONVERSION HEIF EN CONVERSION HEIF EN JPEG/TIFF JPEG/TIFF EFFACE EFFACE Description Description Choisissez la carte partir de laquelle les images seront lues. Copiez les images RAW dans d'autres formats. Convertissez les photos HEIF en JPEG ou TIFF. Supprimez les images individuellement, plusieurs images slectionnes ou toutes les images. RECADRER RECADRER REDIMENSIONNER REDIMENSIONNER PROTEGER PROTEGER ROTATION IMAGE ROTATION IMAGE SUPPRESSION SIMULTANE Choisissez si la suppression de la copie RAW ou JPEG/

SUPPRESSION SIMULTANE HEIF des photos enregistres simultanment dans les logements pour cartes mmoire 1 et 2, lorsque SEPARE est slectionn pour D ENR. DES RGLAGES >

x RGLAGE LOGEMENT CARTE, entrane galement la suppression de l'autre copie. Crez une copie redimensionne de la photo en cours. Crez une petite copie de la photo en cours. Protgez les images contre toute suppression accidentelle. Choisissez de faire pivoter ou non les images a ches en mode de lecture. Choisissez d'ajouter ou non des mmos audio aux photos. valuez les images l'aide d'toiles. Copiez les images entre les cartes insres dans le premier et le second logements. Slectionnez les images transfrer ultrieurement sur un smartphone. tablissez des connexions sans l avec des smartphones, des tablettes ou d'autres priphriques. RGLAGE MMO VOCAL RGLAGE MMO VOCAL VALUATION VALUATION COPIER COPIER TRANSF. IMG VERS TRANSF. IMG VERS SMARTPHONE SMARTPHONE COM. SANS FIL xxFF COM. SANS FIL 6 132 Le menu lecture Rglage Rglage DIAPORAMA DIAPORAMA CREA LIVRE ALBUM CREA LIVRE ALBUM IMPRESSION (DPOF) IMPRESSION (DPOF) IMPRESS. IMPRIM instax IMPRESS. IMPRIM instax FORMAT IMAGE FORMAT IMAGE Description Description Visionnez les photos sous forme de diaporama automa-

tis. Cette fonction vous permet de crer des albums partir de vos photos prfres. Crez une commande d'impression numrique; l'im-

primante doit tre compatible avec la norme DPOF. Imprimez les photos sur des imprimantes Fuji lm instax SHARE (en option). Choisissez le format des images a ches sur un tlviseur. 6 133 Les menus de confi guration CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR Pour accder aux rglages de base de l'appareil photo, appuyez sur MENU/OK, slectionnez l'onglet D(PARAMETRAGE) et choisissez CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR. Rglage Rglage FORMATAGE FORMATAGE bb FUSEAU HORAIRE FUSEAU HORAIRE DATE/HEURE DATE/HEURE DECALAGE HOR DECALAGE HOR Description Description Formatez les cartes mmoire. Choisissez votre localisation. Rglez l'horloge de l'appareil photo. Commutez entre votre fuseau horaire et celui de votre lieu actuel. xx RGLAGE MON MENU QQ aa Choisissez une langue. RGLAGE MON MENU Modi ez les lments rpertoris dans l'onglet E(MON MENU), un menu personnalis regroupant les options du menu photo souvent utilises. FF RGLAGE MON MENU NETTOYAGE CAPTEUR NETTOYAGE CAPTEUR RGLAGE MON MENU Modi ez les lments rpertoris dans l'onglet E(MON MENU), un menu personnalis regroupant les options du menu vido souvent utilises. Retirez la poussire du capteur d'image de l'appareil photo. Vri ez l'ge de la batterie. Rtablissez les valeurs par dfaut des options des menus prise de vue ou de con guration. A chez les copies lectroniques du numro de modle du produit et d'autres certi cats. GE BATTERIE GE BATTERIE INITIALISER INITIALISER RGLEMENTAIRE RGLEMENTAIRE 6 134 Les menus de confi guration CONFIGURATION SON Pour accder aux rglages du son, appuyez sur MENU/OK, slection-

nez l'onglet D(PARAMETRAGE) et choisissez CONFIGURATION SON. Rglage Rglage AF BIP VOLUME AF BIP VOLUME Description Description Choisissez le volume du bip mis lorsque l'appareil photo fait le point. RETARDATEUR BIP VOLUME Choisissez le volume du bip mis lorsque le retardateur RETARDATEUR BIP VOLUME VOL. APPAREIL VOL. APPAREIL est activ. Rglez le volume des sons mis par l'appareil photo lors de l'utilisation des commandes. tttt VOL. DCL. LECTR. VOL. DCL. LECTR. Rglez le volume des sons mis par l'obturateur mca-

nique ou l'obturation lectronique au premier rideau. SON DCL. LECTR. Choisissez le son mis par l'obturateur mcanique ou tttt SON DCL. LECTR. VOL. DCL. LECTR. ss VOL. DCL. LECTR. ss SON DCL. LECTR. SON DCL. LECTR. VOL. LECTURE VOL. LECTURE LECTURE AUDIO 4ch LECTURE AUDIO 4ch l'obturation lectronique au premier rideau. Rglez le volume des sons mis par l'obturateur lectro-

nique. Choisissez le son mis par l'obturateur lectronique. Rglez le volume de lecture des vidos. Modi ez les rglages audio utiliss lors du visionnage de vidos 4ch. 6 135 CONFIG. CRAN Pour accder aux rglages d'affi chage, appuyez sur MENU/OK, slec-

tionnez l'onglet D(PARAMETRAGE) et choisissez CONFIG. CRAN. Rglage Rglage RGLAGE VIEW MODE RGLAGE VIEW MODE LUMINOSIT EVF LUMINOSIT EVF COULEUR EVF COULEUR EVF RGLAGE COULEUR EVF RGLAGE COULEUR EVF LUMINOSIT LCD LUMINOSIT LCD COULEUR LCD COULEUR LCD RGLAGE COULEUR LCD RGLAGE COULEUR LCD IMAGE IMAGE AUTOROTATION CRANS AUTOROTATION CRANS Description Description Modi ez les rglages du dtecteur oculaire et des modes d'a chage du viseur lectronique (EVF) ou de l'cran LCD. Rglez la luminosit du viseur lectronique. Rglez la saturation du viseur lectronique. Rglez la couleur de l'a chage du viseur lectronique. Rglez la luminosit de l'cran. Rglez la saturation de l'cran. Rglez la couleur de l'a chage de l'cran LCD. Choisissez la dure d'a chage des images aprs la prise de vue. Choisissez si les indicateurs du viseur (EVF) et de l'cran LCD pivotent pour s'adapter l'orientation de l'appareil photo. Choisissez d'activer ou non l'aperu de l'exposition et/ou de la balance des blancs. APERCU EXP./BALANCE DES APERCU EXP./BALANCE DES BLANCS MODE MANUEL BLANCS MODE MANUEL VUE EN DIRECT NATURELLE Choisissez si les e ets des rglages sont visibles sur l'cran. VUE EN DIRECT NATURELLE ASSIS. VISUALIS. F-Log ASSIS. VISUALIS. F-Log Choisissez d'a cher ou non un aperu avec correction des tons (quivalent BT.709) lors de l'enregistrement ou de l'a chage des vidos F-log. Modi ez les rglages utiliser lorsque vous prenez des photos l'aide de l'horizon virtuel. Choisissez un guide de cadrage pour le mode de prise de vue. Choisissez de faire pivoter automatiquement les photos prises la verticale pendant la lecture. RGLAGE DU NIVEAU RGLAGE DU NIVEAU LECTRONIQUE LECTRONIQUE GUIDE CADRAGE GUIDE CADRAGE REGL. ROTAT AUTO REGL. ROTAT AUTO 6 136 Les menus de confi guration Rglage Rglage UNIT DE DISTANCE MAP Choisissez l'unit utilise pour l'indicateur de distance de UNIT DE DISTANCE MAP Description Description mise au point. UNIT D'OUV. PR OBJ. CIN. Choisissez si l'appareil photo a che l'ouverture sous UNIT D'OUV. PR OBJ. CIN. PARAMTRE DOUBLE PARAMTRE DOUBLE CRAN CRAN AFF. REGL. PERSO AFF. REGL. PERSO MODE GRD INDICATEURS MODE GRD INDICATEURS

(EVF)

(EVF) MODE GRD INDICATEURS MODE GRD INDICATEURS

(LCD)

(LCD) RGL. AFF. GRD RGL. AFF. GRD INDICATEURS INDICATEURS INFO RGLAGE DE INFO RGLAGE DE CONTRASTE CONTRASTE INFO LOCALISATION INFO LOCALISATION forme de nombre T ou de nombre f/ lorsqu'un objectif de cinma optionnel est x. Choisissez le contenu des deux fentres du double a chage. Choisissez les lments a chs en standard. Choisissez d'a cher ou non de grands indicateurs dans le viseur (EVF). Choisissez d'a cher ou non de grands indicateurs sur l'cran LCD. Choisissez les indicateurs a chs lorsque OUI est slectionn pour MODE GRD INDICATEURS (EVF) ou MODE GRD INDICATEURS (LCD). Rglez le contraste de l'a chage. Choisissez d'a cher ou non les informations de localisa-

tion tlcharges depuis les smartphones. RGLAGE SUB MONITEUR Choisissez les indicateurs a chs sur l'cran LCD secon-

RGLAGE SUB MONITEUR COULEUR FOND COULEUR FOND SUB-MONITEUR SUB-MONITEUR ARRIRE-PLAN DU xx ARRIRE-PLAN DU MENU Q MENU Q FF ARRIRE-PLAN DU ARRIRE-PLAN DU MENU Q MENU Q daire. Choisissez une couleur d'arrire-plan pour l'cran LCD secondaire. Choisissez un arrire-plan pour le menu rapide lorsque vous prenez des photos. Choisissez un arrire-plan pour le menu rapide lorsque vous ralisez des vidos. 6 137 CONFIG.TOUCHE/MOLETTE Pour accder aux options des commandes, appuyez sur MENU/OK, slectionnez l'onglet D(PARAMETRAGE) et choisissez CONFIG. TOUCHE/MOLETTE. Rglage Rglage RGLAGE LEVIER FOCUS RGLAGE LEVIER FOCUS xx MENU RPDE MODIF/

MENU RPDE MODIF/

ENREG ENREG FF MENU RPDE MODIF/

MENU RPDE MODIF/

ENREG ENREG RGL. FONCT. (Fn) RGL. FONCT. (Fn) RGL. FONCT. (Fn) OBJ. DE RGL. FONCT. (Fn) OBJ. DE ZOOM MOTORIS ZOOM MOTORIS RGLAGE TOUCHE RGLAGE TOUCHE SLECTION SLECTION PARAM. MOLETTE PARAM. MOLETTE COMMANDE COMMANDE OPRATION oo S.S S.S OPRATION DIRECTION MOLETTE DIRECTION MOLETTE COMMANDE COMMANDE OBTURATEUR AF OBTURATEUR AF 6 OBTURATEUR AE OBTURATEUR AE PRISE DE VUE SANS OBJ. PRISE DE VUE SANS OBJ. Description Description Choisissez les fonctions ralises par le levier de mise au point. Choisissez les lments a chs dans le menu rapide lorsque vous prenez des photos. Choisissez les lments a chs dans le menu rapide lorsque vous ralisez des vidos. Choisissez les rles jous par les touches de fonction. Choisissez les rles jous par les touches de fonction disponibles sur certains zooms motoriss. Choisissez les rles jous par les touches de slection suprieure, infrieure, gauche et droite. Choisissez les rles jous par les molettes de commande. Choisissez d'activer ou non le rglage prcis de la vitesse d'obturation l'aide des molettes de commande. Choisissez d'inverser ou non le sens de rotation des mo-

lettes de commande lorsque vous modi ez les rglages. Choisissez si l'appareil photo fait le point lorsque vous appuyez sur le dclencheur mi-course. Choisissez de verrouiller ou non l'exposition tant que vous appuyez sur le dclencheur mi-course. Choisissez si le dclenchement est possible en l'absence d'objectif. PRISE DE VUE SANS CARTE Autorisez ou non le dclenchement si aucune carte PRISE DE VUE SANS CARTE RGL. DU ZOOM/DE LA MAP RGL. DU ZOOM/DE LA MAP DE L'OBJECTIF DE L'OBJECTIF mmoire n'est insre dans l'appareil photo. Modi ez les rglages des objectifs dots d'une bague de mise au point ou d'un zoom motoris. 138 Les menus de confi guration Rglage Rglage MODE MEM. AE/AF MODE MEM. AE/AF MODE VERR BALANCE BLC MODE VERR BALANCE BLC AUTOAUTO PARAM. TOUCHE ISO aa PARAM. TOUCHE ISO CONFIG. ECRAN TACTILE CONFIG. ECRAN TACTILE Description Description Choisissez le rle de la touche laquelle le verrouillage de l'exposition et/ou de la mise au point est attribu. Choisissez le comportement des touches de fonction auxquelles le verrouillage de la balance des blancs auto-

matique a t attribu. Choisissez le rle jou par la toucheISO pendant la lecture. Choisissez d'activer ou non les commandes tactiles sur l'cran LCD. VERROUILLAGE FONCTION Verrouillez certaines commandes de l'appareil photo pour VERROUILLAGE FONCTION empcher toute utilisation accidentelle. GESTION ALIM. Pour accder aux rglages de gestion de l'nergie, appuyez sur MENU/OK, slectionnez l'onglet D(PARAMETRAGE) et choisissez GESTION ALIM.. Rglage Rglage EXT. AUTO EXT. AUTO PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE RGLAGE D'AMLIOR. RGLAGE D'AMLIOR. EVF/LCD EVF/LCD MISE HORS TENS. AUTO MISE HORS TENS. AUTO TEMP. TEMP. Description Description Choisissez si l'appareil photo s'teint automatiquement lorsqu'aucune opration n'est e ectue. Rglez les paramtres d'alimentation. Modi ez le comportement du viseur lectronique et de l'cran LCD lorsque MODE BOOST est slectionn pour PERFORMANCE. Choisissez la temprature laquelle l'appareil photo s'teint automatiquement lorsque sa temprature augmente. 6 139 Les menus de confi guration ENR. DES RGLAGES Pour accder aux rglages de gestion des fi chiers, appuyez sur MENU/OK, slectionnez l'onglet D(PARAMETRAGE) et choisissez ENR. DES RGLAGES. Rglage Rglage NUMERO IMAGE NUMERO IMAGE MODIF. NOM FICH. MODIF. NOM FICH. xx RGLAGE LOGEMENT RGLAGE LOGEMENT CARTE CARTE SL. FENTE SL. FENTE SQUENTIEL)

((xx SQUENTIEL) SLECTIONNER DOSSIER SLECTIONNER DOSSIER INFOS COPYRIGHT INFOS COPYRIGHT LGENDE PAR DFAUT LGENDE PAR DFAUT GOMARQUAGE GOMARQUAGE Description Description Choisissez si la numrotation des chiers est rinitialise lorsqu'une nouvelle carte mmoire est insre. Modi ez le pr xe du nom de chier. Choisissez les rles jous par les cartes du logement1 et du logement2 en mode photo. Choisissez la carte sur laquelle l'enregistrement s'e ectue en premier lorsque SQUENTIEL est slectionn pour x RGLAGE LOGEMENT CARTE. Crez des dossiers et choisissez celui utilis pour stocker les images venir. Choisissez d'ajouter ou non des informations de copyright aux nouvelles images, sous la forme de donnes Exif, au fur et mesure de la prise de vue. Choisissez une lgende enregistrer avec les nouvelles images au fur et mesure de la prise de vue. Choisissez si les informations de localisation tlcharges depuis des smartphones sont enregistres avec les nou-

velles images au fur et mesure de la prise de vue. 6 140 Menus des paramtres rseau/USB Pour accder aux paramtres rseau/USB, appuyez sur MENU/OK et slectionnez l'onglet I (paramtres rseau/USB). N Pour obtenir des informations sur le menu des paramtres rseau/USB, consultez le site Internet ci-dessous. https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en-int/manual/x-h2_connection/

6 141 NOTES 142 Remarques 143 Pour votre scurit Lisez attentivement ces remarques avant toute utilisation Consignes de scurit Veillez utiliser correctement votre appareil photo. Pour cela, lisez attentivement ces remarques relatives la scurit et votre Manuel de base avant toute utilisation. Aprs avoir lu ces consignes de scurit, rangez-les dans un endroit sr. propos des icnes Les icnes illustres ci-dessous sont utilises dans ce document pour indiquer le degr de gravit des blessures ou dom-

mages qui peuvent se produire si vous n'observez pas les informations indiques par l'icne et donc utilisez ce produit de manire incorrecte. AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Cette icne indique que le fait de ne pas observer les informations mentionnes peut entraner la mort ou des blessures graves. ATTENTION ATTENTION Cette icne indique que le fait de ne pas observer les informations mentionnes peut entraner des blessures ou endommager le matriel. Les icnes illustres ci-dessous sont utilises pour indiquer la nature des instructions que vous devez observer. Les icnes triangulaires vous indiquent que ces informations ncessitent votre attention (Important). Les icnes circulaires barres en diagonale vous informent que l'action indique est interdite (Interdit). Les cercles pleins qui contiennent un point d'exclamation vous informent que l'action doit tre ralise (Re-

quis). Les symboles indiqus sur le produit (y compris les accessoires) ont la signi cation suivante:

CA CC Matriel de classe II (le produit bn cie d'une double isolation). AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT En cas de problme, teignez l'appareil photo, retirez la batterie, dbranchez le cble USB et l'alimentation secteur. En cas de problme, teignez l'appareil photo, retirez la batterie, dbranchez le cble USB et l'alimentation secteur. Si vous continuez utiliser l'appareil photo lorsqu'il dgage de la fume, une odeur inhabituelle ou dans d'autres conditions anormales, cela peut provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Prenez contact avec votre revendeur Fuji lm. Dbrancher de la prise murale Ne laissez pas de l'eau ou des objets s'infi ltrer dans l'appareil photo ou dans les cbles de connexion. Ne laissez pas de l'eau ou des objets s'infi ltrer dans l'appareil photo ou dans les cbles de connexion. N'utilisez pas l'appareil photo ou les cbles de connexion suite l'in ltration d'eau douce ou sale, de lait, de boissons, de dtergents ou d'autres liquides. En cas d'in ltration de liquide dans l'appareil photo ou dans les cbles de connexion, teignez l'appareil photo, retirez la batterie, dbranchez le cble USB, et dconnectez et dbranchez l'alimentation secteur. Si vous continuez utiliser l'appareil photo dans ces conditions, cela peut provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Prenez contact avec votre revendeur Fuji lm. 7 N'utilisez pas l'appareil photo dans une salle de bain ou une douche. N'utilisez pas l'appareil photo dans une salle de bain ou une douche. Cela peut provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. N'essayez jamais de modifi er ou de dmonter l'appareil photo (n'ouvrez jamais le botier). Le non-respect de cette N'essayez jamais de modifi er ou de dmonter l'appareil photo (n'ouvrez jamais le botier). prcaution peut provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Ne pas utiliser dans une salle de bain ou une douche Ne pas dmonter 144 Pour votre scurit AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Dans le cas o le botier s'ouvrirait suite une chute ou un autre accident, ne touchez pas les pices mises nu. Dans le cas o le botier s'ouvrirait suite une chute ou un autre accident, ne touchez pas les pices mises nu. Le non-respect de cette prcaution pourrait provoquer une dcharge lectrique ou une blessure suite la manipulation des pices endommages. Retirez immdiatement la batterie, en vitant de vous blesser ou de recevoir une dcharge lectrique, puis con ez le produit au revendeur d'origine pour le faire vri er. Ne pas toucher les pices internes Ne modifi ez pas, ne chauff ez pas, ne tordez pas ou ne tirez pas indment sur le cordon de connexion et ne posez pas Ne modifi ez pas, ne chauff ez pas, ne tordez pas ou ne tirez pas indment sur le cordon de connexion et ne posez pas d'objets lourds dessus. d'objets lourds dessus. Ceci risque d'endommager le cordon et de provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Si le cordon est endommag, prenez contact avec votre revendeur Fuji lm. N'utilisez pas les cbles si leurs connecteurs sont dforms. Ne posez pas l'appareil photo sur un plan instable. L'appareil photo pourrait tomber ou se renverser et provo-

Ne posez pas l'appareil photo sur un plan instable. quer des blessures. N'essayez jamais de prendre des photos quand vous bougez. N'essayez jamais de prendre des photos quand vous bougez. N'utilisez pas l'appareil photo pendant que vous marchez ou que vous conduisez. Vous pourriez tomber ou tre impliqu dans un accident de la circulation. Pendant les orages, ne touchez aucune pice mtallique de l'appareil photo. Pendant les orages, ne touchez aucune pice mtallique de l'appareil photo. Vous pourriez tre lectrocut par le courant induit par une dcharge de foudre. N'utilisez pas de batteries autres que celles prconises. Chargez la batterie comme indiqu par l'indicateur. N'utilisez pas de batteries autres que celles prconises. Ne dmontez pas, ne modifi ez pas ou ne chauff ez pas les batteries. Ne les faites pas tomber, ne les cognez pas, ne les jetez Ne dmontez pas, ne modifi ez pas ou ne chauff ez pas les batteries. Ne les faites pas tomber, ne les cognez pas, ne les jetez pas ou ne leur faites pas subir de forts impacts. N'utilisez pas des batteries qui prsentent des signes de fuite, dformation, pas ou ne leur faites pas subir de forts impacts. N'utilisez pas des batteries qui prsentent des signes de fuite, dformation, dcoloration ou autres anomalies. Utilisez uniquement les chargeurs prconiss pour recharger les batteries rechar-

dcoloration ou autres anomalies. Utilisez uniquement les chargeurs prconiss pour recharger les batteries rechar-

geables et n'essayez pas de recharger des piles alcalines ou Li-ion non rechargeables. Ne court-circuitez pas les batteries geables et n'essayez pas de recharger des piles alcalines ou Li-ion non rechargeables. Ne court-circuitez pas les batteries ou ne les rangez pas avec des objets mtalliques. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, les batteries peuvent ou ne les rangez pas avec des objets mtalliques. surchau er, s'en ammer, se casser ou fuir, provoquant un incendie, des brlures ou d'autres blessures. Utilisez seulement les batteries ou les adaptateurs secteur prconiss pour une utilisation avec cet appareil photo. Utilisez seulement les batteries ou les adaptateurs secteur prconiss pour une utilisation avec cet appareil photo. N'utilisez pas de tensions autres que la tension d'alimentation lectrique indique. N'utilisez pas de tensions autres que la tension d'alimentation lectrique indique. L'utilisation d'autres sources d'alimentation peut provoquer un incendie. Si la batterie fuit et que le liquide entre en contact avec vos yeux, votre peau ou vos vtements, rincez abondamment Si la batterie fuit et que le liquide entre en contact avec vos yeux, votre peau ou vos vtements, rincez abondamment la partie touche l'eau claire et consultez un mdecin ou appelez les urgences immdiatement. la partie touche l'eau claire et consultez un mdecin ou appelez les urgences immdiatement. N'utilisez pas le chargeur pour recharger d'autres batteries que celles indiques ici. N'utilisez pas le chargeur pour recharger d'autres batteries que celles indiques ici. Le chargeur fourni est conu uniquement pour les batteries de mme type que celle fournie avec l'appareil photo. L'utilisation du char-

geur pour la recharge de batteries ordinaires ou d'autres types de batteries rechargeables peut provoquer une fuite, une surchau e ou une explosion des batteries. Si le fl ash est dclench trop prs des yeux d'une personne, cela peut provoquer chez celle-ci une dfi cience visuelle. Si le fl ash est dclench trop prs des yeux d'une personne, cela peut provoquer chez celle-ci une dfi cience visuelle. Faites particulirement attention lorsque vous photographiez des bbs et de jeunes enfants. Ne restez pas en contact prolong avec des surfaces chaudes. Ne laissez aucune partie du corps en contact avec le Ne restez pas en contact prolong avec des surfaces chaudes. Ne laissez aucune partie du corps en contact avec le produit pendant une priode prolonge tant que le produit est sous tension. produit pendant une priode prolonge tant que le produit est sous tension. Le non-respect de cette prcaution peut entraner des brlures super cielles, en particulier lors d'une utilisation prolonge, si la temprature ambiante est leve, lorsque LEVE est slectionn pour MISE HORS TENS. AUTO TEMP. ou si l'utilisateur sou re d'une mauvaise circulation sanguine ou d'une perte de sensibilit, auquel cas le recours un trpied ou des prcautions similaires est recommand. N'utilisez pas le produit en prsence d'objets infl ammables, de gaz explosifs ou de poussire. N'utilisez pas le produit en prsence d'objets infl ammables, de gaz explosifs ou de poussire. Lorsque vous transportez la batterie, insrez-la dans votre appareil photo numrique ou conservez-la dans l'tui Lorsque vous transportez la batterie, insrez-la dans votre appareil photo numrique ou conservez-la dans l'tui rigide prvu cet eff et. Rangez la batterie dans l'tui rigide. Avant de jeter la batterie, recouvrez les bornes avec du rigide prvu cet eff et. Rangez la batterie dans l'tui rigide. Avant de jeter la batterie, recouvrez les bornes avec du ruban isolant. ruban isolant. L'entre en contact avec d'autres objets mtalliques ou d'autres batteries pourrait provoquer la mise feu ou l'explosion de la batterie. 7 145 AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Conservez les cartes mmoire, les griff es fl ash et les autres petites pices hors de la porte des enfants en bas ge. Conservez les cartes mmoire, les griff es fl ash et les autres petites pices hors de la porte des enfants en bas ge. Les enfants risquent d'avaler les petites pices; conservez hors de porte des enfants. Si un enfant avalait une petite pice, consultez un mdecin ou appelez les urgences. Conservez hors de la porte des enfants en bas ge. Conservez hors de la porte des enfants en bas ge. Parmi les lments qui peuvent provoquer des blessures, on peut citer la courroie, qui peut s'enrouler autour du cou d'un enfant et ainsi prsenter un risque de strangulation, et le ash, qui peut provoquer une d cience visuelle. Suivez les instructions du personnel des compagnies ariennes et des hpitaux. Suivez les instructions du personnel des compagnies ariennes et des hpitaux. Ce produit met des frquences radio pouvant interfrer avec le matriel de navigation ou mdical. ATTENTION ATTENTION N'utilisez pas cet appareil photo dans des endroits exposs des vapeurs d'essence, de la vapeur, de l'humidit ou de la N'utilisez pas cet appareil photo dans des endroits exposs des vapeurs d'essence, de la vapeur, de l'humidit ou de la poussire. Cela peut provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. poussire. Ne laissez pas cet appareil photo dans des endroits exposs des tempratures trs leves. Ne laissez pas cet appareil photo dans des endroits exposs des tempratures trs leves. Ne laissez pas l'appareil photo dans un vhicule ferm, par exemple, ou la lumire directe du soleil. Un incendie peut se produire. Ne posez pas d'objet lourd sur l'appareil photo. Ne posez pas d'objet lourd sur l'appareil photo. L'objet lourd peut se renverser ou tomber et provoquer des blessures. Ne dplacez pas l'appareil photo tant que l'adaptateur secteur est raccord. Ne dplacez pas l'appareil photo tant que l'adaptateur secteur est raccord. Ne tirez pas sur le cordon de connexion pour dbrancher l'adaptateur secteur. Vous pourriez endommager le cordon d'alimentation ou les cbles et provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Ne couvrez pas l'appareil photo ou l'adaptateur secteur avec un chiff on ou une couverture et ne les enroulez pas Ne couvrez pas l'appareil photo ou l'adaptateur secteur avec un chiff on ou une couverture et ne les enroulez pas dedans. La chaleur peut s'accumuler et dformer le botier ou provoquer un incendie. dedans. N'utilisez pas la prise si elle est endommage ou si elle ne s'insre pas correctement dans la prise de courant. N'utilisez pas la prise si elle est endommage ou si elle ne s'insre pas correctement dans la prise de courant. Le non-respect de cette prcaution pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Lorsque vous nettoyez l'appareil photo ou lorsque vous n'avez pas l'intention de l'utiliser avant longtemps, retirez la Lorsque vous nettoyez l'appareil photo ou lorsque vous n'avez pas l'intention de l'utiliser avant longtemps, retirez la batterie, dconnectez et dbranchez l'adaptateur secteur. batterie, dconnectez et dbranchez l'adaptateur secteur. Sinon, vous pourriez provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Lorsque le chargement est termin, dbranchez le chargeur de la prise de courant. Lorsque le chargement est termin, dbranchez le chargeur de la prise de courant. Il existe un risque d'incendie si le chargeur reste branch dans la prise de courant. Il se peut, lorsque vous retirez la carte mmoire, qu'elle sorte trop rapidement de son logement. Retenez-la avec le Il se peut, lorsque vous retirez la carte mmoire, qu'elle sorte trop rapidement de son logement. Retenez-la avec le doigt et relchez-la doucement. Vous risquez sinon de blesser des personnes lors de l'jection de la carte. doigt et relchez-la doucement. Ne manipulez pas la carte mmoire immdiatement aprs la prise de vue. Ne manipulez pas la carte mmoire immdiatement aprs la prise de vue. La carte mmoire peut tre chaude et provoquer des brlures. Attendez que la carte refroidisse avant de la retirer de l'appareil photo. Demandez rgulirement un test et le nettoyage de votre appareil photo. Demandez rgulirement un test et le nettoyage de votre appareil photo. L'accumulation de la poussire dans votre appareil photo peut provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Prenez contact tous les deux ans avec votre revendeur Fuji lm pour lui con er le nettoyage interne. Veuillez noter que ce service n'est pas gratuit. 7 liminez le produit conformment aux rglementations locales. liminez le produit conformment aux rglementations locales. Risque d'explosion si la batterie n'est pas correctement remplace. Remplacez-la uniquement avec une batterie du Risque d'explosion si la batterie n'est pas correctement remplace. Remplacez-la uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou d'un type quivalent. mme type ou d'un type quivalent. Les batteries (bloc-piles ou batteries insres) ne doivent pas tre exposes une chaleur excessive, comme la lumire Les batteries (bloc-piles ou batteries insres) ne doivent pas tre exposes une chaleur excessive, comme la lumire du soleil, un feu ou un autre lment du mme type. du soleil, un feu ou un autre lment du mme type. 146 Pour votre scurit Batterie et alimentation lectrique Remarque : vrifiez le type de batterie utilis par votre appareil photo et lisez les sections appropries. AVERTISSEMENT : la batterie ne doit pas tre expose une chaleur excessive, comme la lumire du soleil, un feu ou un autre lment du mme type. Les paragraphes suivants dcrivent comment utiliser correctement les batteries et prolonger leur autonomie. Une utilisa-

tion incorrecte peut rduire l'autonomie de la batterie ou provoquer sa fuite, sa surchau e, un incendie ou une explosion. Batteries Li-ion Batteries Li-ion Lisez cette section si votre appareil photo fonctionne avec une batterie Li-ion. La batterie n'a pas t charge avant expdition. Vous devez la charger avant d'utiliser votre appareil photo. Rangez la batterie dans son tui si vous ne l'utilisez pas. Remarques concernant la batterie Remarques concernant la batterie La batterie perd progressivement sa charge lorsqu'elle n'est pas utilise. Chargez la batterie un ou deux jours avant utilisation. Vous pouvez prolonger l'autonomie de la batterie en teignant l'appareil photo lorsque vous ne l'utilisez pas. La capacit de la batterie diminue basse temprature; une batterie dcharge peut ne pas fonctionner si elle est froide. Conservez une batterie de rechange entirement charge dans un endroit chaud et utilisez-la en cas de besoin, ou mettez la batterie dans votre poche ou dans un autre endroit chaud et insrez-la dans l'appareil photo uniquement lors de la prise de vue. Ne placez pas la batterie directement sur des chau e-mains ou d'autres dispositifs chau ants. Chargement de la batterie Chargement de la batterie La batterie peut tre recharge l'aide de l'appareil photo et de l'adaptateur secteur fourni ou d'un chargeur de batterie double BC-W235. Le temps de charge augmente des tempratures ambiantes infrieures +10C (+50F) ou sup-

rieures +35C (+95F). N'essayez pas de recharger la batterie des tempratures suprieures +40C (+104F); des tempratures infrieures +5C (+41F), la batterie ne se recharge pas. N'essayez pas de recharger une batterie entirement charge. Il n'est cependant pas ncessaire que la batterie soit entirement dcharge avant de la recharger. Il se peut que la batterie soit chaude au toucher immdiatement aprs avoir t recharge ou utilise. Cela est normal. Autonomie de la batterie Autonomie de la batterie Une nette diminution de la dure pendant laquelle la batterie conserve sa charge indique qu'elle a atteint sa limite de longvit et qu'elle doit tre remplace. Si vous laissez la batterie longtemps sans la recharger, il se peut que vous constatiez que sa qualit se dgrade ou qu'elle ne retient plus la charge. Rechargez la batterie rgulirement. Rangement Rangement Si vous n'avez pas l'intention d'utiliser l'appareil photo avant longtemps, rangez-le temprature ambiante avec sa batterie recharge entre la moiti et les de sa capacit environ. Si vous n'avez pas l'intention d'utiliser l'appareil photo avant longtemps, retirez la batterie et rangez-la dans un endroit sec dont la temprature ambiante est comprise entre +15C et +25C (+59F +77F). Ne la rangez pas dans un endroit expos des tempratures extrmes. Prcautions: Manipulation de la batterie Prcautions: Manipulation de la batterie Ne la transportez pas et ne la rangez pas avec des objets mtalliques comme des colliers ou des pingles. Ne l'exposez pas aux ammes ou la chaleur. Ne la dmontez pas, ni ne la modi ez. Ne l'exposez pas des pressions atmosphriques basses. Utilisez uniquement les chargeurs prconiss. Jetez rapidement les batteries usages. Ne faites pas tomber la batterie, ni ne lui faites subir de chocs violents. Ne l'exposez pas l'eau. Gardez les bornes toujours propres. Il se peut que la batterie et le botier de l'appareil photo soient chauds au toucher aprs une utilisation prolonge. Cela est normal. Attention: Mise au rebut Attention: Mise au rebut Jetez les batteries usages en respectant les rglementations locales en vigueur. Une attention particulire doit tre porte aux aspects environnementaux lis l'limination des batteries. Utilisez l'appareil sous un climat tempr. N'crasez pas ou ne fractionnez pas les batteries. 147 7 Adaptateurs secteur Adaptateurs secteur L'adaptateur secteur est uniquement prvu pour un usage l'intrieur. Vri ez que le cble est correctement insr dans l'appareil photo. teignez l'appareil photo avant de dbrancher l'adaptateur. Dbranchez l'adaptateur en tirant sur la che, pas sur le cble. Ne le dmontez pas. Ne l'exposez pas une forte chaleur et une forte humidit. Ne lui faites pas subir de chocs violents. Il se peut que l'adaptateur mette un bourdonnement ou soit chaud au toucher lors de son utilisation. Cela est normal. Si l'adaptateur provoque des interfrences radio, rorientez ou repositionnez l'antenne de rception. Utilisation de l'appareil photo Ne visez pas des sources lumineuses trs vives, notamment des sources lumineuses arti cielles ou des sources lumi-

neuses naturelles, comme le soleil dans un ciel sans nuage. Si vous ne respectez pas cette prcaution, le capteur d'image de l'appareil photo risque de s'endommager. La forte lumire du soleil passant par le viseur risque d'endommager l'cran du viseur lectronique (EVF). N'orientez pas le viseur lectronique en direction du soleil. Essais pralables Essais pralables Avant de prendre des photos d'vnements importants (comme lors de mariages ou de voyages), faites une photo test et vri ez les rsultats pour vous assurer que l'appareil photo fonctionne normalement. FUJIFILM Corporation n'accepte aucune responsabilit pour les dommages ou perte de pro ts rsultant d'un mauvais fonctionnement du produit. Remarques sur les droits d'auteur Remarques sur les droits d'auteur Les images enregistres l'aide de cet appareil photo numrique ne peuvent pas tre utilises d'une manire allant l'encontre des lois sur les droits d'auteur sans l'autorisation pralable du propritaire, moins qu'elles ne soient rserves qu' un usage personnel. Notez que certaines restrictions s'appliquent aux photos des performances thtrales, des divertissements et des expositions, mme lorsqu'elles ne sont rserves qu' un usage personnel. Les utilisateurs sont aussi pris de noter que le transfert des cartes mmoire contenant des images ou des donnes protges par les lois sur les droits d'auteur n'est autoris que dans la limite des restrictions imposes par lesdites lois. Manipulation Manipulation Pour garantir le bon enregistrement des images, ne soumettez pas l'appareil photo des impacts ou des chocs pendant l'enregistrement des images. Cristaux liquides Cristaux liquides Si l'cran est endommag, faites particulirement attention viter tout contact avec les cristaux liquides. Si l'une des situations suivantes se produisait, adoptez l'action d'urgence indique:

Si des cristaux liquides venaient toucher votre peau, essuyez la zone a ecte avec un chi on puis lavez-la soigneusement l'eau courante avec du savon. Si des cristaux liquides pntrent dans vos yeux, rincez abondamment l'il a ect l'eau claire pendant 15minutes au moins et consultez immdiatement un mdecin. Si vous avalez des cristaux liquides, rincez-vous abondamment la bouche avec de l'eau. Buvez de grands verres d'eau et faites-vous vomir, puis consultez un mdecin. Bien que l'cran soit fabriqu partir d'une technologie de pointe de trs haute prcision, il est possible que certains pixels restent constamment allums ou teints. Il ne s'agit pas d'un dysfonctionnement: les images enregistres avec ce produit n'en sont nullement a ectes. 7 148 Pour votre scurit Informations sur les marques commerciales Informations sur les marques commerciales Digital Split Image est une marque commerciale ou une marque dpose de FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism est une marque commerciale ou une marque dpose de FUJIFILM Corporation. Les types de caractres prsents ici sont uniquement dvelopps par DynaComware Taiwan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS, Lightning et Apple ProRes sont des marques dposes d'Apple Inc. aux tats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Windows est une marque dpose de Microsoft Corporation aux tats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Android est une marque commerciale ou une marque dpose de Google LLC. Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques commerciales ou des marques dposes d'Adobe Systems Incorporated aux tats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Wi-Fi, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et Wi-Fi Protected Setup sont des marques dposes de la Wi-Fi Alliance. La marque et les logos Bluetooth sont des marques dposes appartenant Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et leur utilisation par Fuji lm s'e ectue sous licence. Les logos SDHC et SDXC sont des marques commerciales de SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress est une marque commerciale de la CFA (CompactFlash Association). Le logo HDMI est une marque commerciale ou dpose de HDMI Licensing LLC. Tous les autres noms de marques mentionns dans ce manuel sont des marques commerciales ou des marques dposes de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. Interfrences lectriques Interfrences lectriques Cet appareil photo peut provoquer des interfrences avec les quipements d'hpitaux ou d'avions. Consultez le personnel hospitalier ou la compagnie arienne avant d'utiliser l'appareil photo dans un hpital ou bord d'un avion. Systmes de tlvision couleur Systmes de tlvision couleur NTSC (National Television System Committee) est une norme de tldi usion couleur adopte principalement par les tats-Unis, le Canada et le Japon. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) est un systme de tlvision couleur adopt principale-

ment par les pays europens et la Chine. Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print, qui a t rvis rcemment, est un format de chier pour appareil photo numrique qui permet d'utiliser les informations enregistres avec les photos pour reproduire les couleurs de manire optimale lors de l'impression. AVIS IMPORTANT: veuillez lire le passage suivant avant d'utiliser le logiciel Il est interdit d'exporter directement ou indirectement, en partie ou en totalit, un logiciel sous licence sans l'accord des autorits concernes. Utilisez une vis de 4,5mm ou moins lorsque vous xez un trpied. Fuji lm ne pourra tre tenu responsable des problmes de performance ou des dommages provoqus par l'utilisation d'accessoires d'autres fabricants. Objectifs et autres accessoires 7 149 REMARQUES Pour viter tout risque d'incendie ou d'lectrocution, n'exposez pas l'appareil la pluie ou l'humidit. Veuillez lire les Consignes de scurit et assurez-vous de les avoir bien comprises avant d'utiliser l'appareil photo. Matriau en perchlorate: une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire. Voir:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate l'attention des clients rsidant aux tats-Unis l'attention des clients rsidant aux tats-Unis Test conforme aux normes de la FCC POUR UNE UTILISATION AU DOMICILE OU AU BUREAU Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25 Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25 Rglementation de la FCC: cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interfrence nuisible et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris celle susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. ATTENTION: cet appareil a t test et dclar conforme aux normes d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, stipules dans la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Ces normes sont destines assurer une protection su sante contre les interfrences dangereuses dans le cadre d'une installation rsidentielle. Cet appareil gnre, utilise et peut mettre des frquences radio et peut, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, tre l'origine d'interfrences dans les communications radio. Nanmoins, il n'est pas possible de garantir que des interfrences ne seront pas provoques dans certaines installations particulires. Si cet appareil est e ectivement l'origine d'interfrences nuisibles la rception radio ou tlvisuelle, ce qui peut tre dtermin en teignant et en allumant l'appareil, il est conseill l'utilisateur de remdier cette situation en recourant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes:

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. loigner l'appareil du rcepteur. Brancher l'appareil dans une prise appartenant un circuit di rent de celui sur lequel le rcepteur est branch. Consulter le revendeur ou un technicien radio/tl quali pour obtenir de l'aide. Mise en garde de la FCC: toute transformation ou modi cation non expressment autorise par l'autorit responsable de la conformit pourrait faire perdre l'utilisateur son droit d'utiliser ce matriel. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas tre plac au mme endroit que ou fonctionner en conjonction avec toute autre antenne ou tout autre transmetteur. Dclaration relative l'exposition aux radiations: cet appareil est conforme aux exigences gouvernementales en matire d'exposition aux ondes radio. Cet appareil a t conu et fabriqu de manire respecter les limites d'mission recom-

mandes par la Federal Communications Commission du gouvernement des tats-Unis en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio. La norme d'exposition applicable aux appareils sans l utilise une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spci-

que ou SAR (de l'anglais Speci c Absorption Rate). La limite du SAR tablie par la FCC est de 1,6W/kg. Lors des tests de calcul du SAR, l'appareil est utilis dans des positions de fonctionnement standard acceptes par la FCC et transmet son niveau de puissance certi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences testes. Remarques relatives l'octroi d'autorisation: pour tre conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC, ce produit doit tre utilis avec un cble A/V, un cble USB et un cble d'alimentation CC avec tores de ferrite, tels que prconiss par Fuji lm. Une batterie lithium-ion recyclable alimente le produit que vous avez achet. Veuillez composer le 1-800-8-BATTERY pour obtenir des informations sur le recyclage de cette batterie. 7 Code rglementaire de la Californie (California Code of Regulations), titre20, division2, chapitre4, article4, rglement sur l'e cacit nergtique (Appliance E ciency Regulations), sections 1601 1609 150 Pour votre scurit l'attention des clients rsidant au Canada l'attention des clients rsidant au Canada CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B) ATTENTION: cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme la norme canadienne ICES-003. Dclaration d'Industrie Canada: cet appareil est conforme aux CNR exemptes de licence d'Industrie Canada. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) Cet appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; et (2) Cet appareil doit accepter tout brouillage, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Cet appareil et son ou ses antennes ne doivent pas tre placs au mme endroit que ou utiliss en conjonction avec toute autre antenne ou tout autre metteur, l'exception des radios intgres qui ont t testes. La fonction de slection de l'indicatif du pays est dsactive sur les produits commercialiss aux tats-Unis et au Canada. Dclaration relative l'exposition aux radiations: les connaissances scienti ques dont nous disposons n'ont mis en vidence aucun problme de sant associ l'usage des appareils sans l faible puissance. Nous ne sommes cependant pas en mesure de prouver que ces appareils sans l faible puissance sont entirement sans danger. Les appareils sans l faible puissance mettent une nergie frquence radiolectrique (RF) trs faible dans le spectre des micro-ondes lorsqu'ils sont utiliss. Alors qu'un niveau lev de RF peut avoir des e ets sur la sant (en chau ant les tissus), l'exposition de faibles RF qui ne produisent pas de chaleur n'a pas de mauvais e ets connus sur la sant. De nombreuses tudes ont t menes sur les expositions aux RF faibles et n'ont dcouvert aucun e et biologique. Certaines tudes ont suggr qu'il pouvait y avoir certains e ets biologiques, mais ces rsultats n'ont pas t con rms par des recherches supplmentaires. Le X-H2 a t test et jug conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC nonces pour un environnement non contrl et respecte les rgles d'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. La bande 51505250MHz est rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur an de rduire les risques de brouil-

lage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux. Mise au rebut du matriel lectrique et lectronique des particuliers Mise au rebut du matriel lectrique et lectronique des particuliers Applicable l'Union europenne, la Norvge, l'Islande et le Liechtenstein: ce symbole sur le produit, ou dans le manuel et sur la garantie, et/ou sur son emballage, indique que l'appareil ne doit pas tre trait comme un d-

chet mnager. Il doit tre dpos dans un point de collecte qui recycle le matriel lectrique et lectronique. En vous dbarrassant correctement de ce produit, vous contribuez viter des consquences prjudiciables pour l'environnement et la sant de l'homme, qui peuvent tre provoques en jetant ce produit de manire inapproprie. Ce symbole sur les piles ou les batteries indique que ces piles/batteries ne doivent pas tre traites comme des dchets mnagers. Si votre matriel contient des piles ou des batteries faciles retirer, merci de les jeter sparment conformment aux rglementations locales. Le recyclage des matriaux contribuera prserver les ressources naturelles. Pour obtenir plus d'informations sur le recyclage de ce produit, renseignez-vous auprs de votre mairie, de la dchterie la plus proche de votre domicile ou du magasin o vous l'avez achet. Applicable aux pays n'appartenant pas l'Union europenne et autres que la Norvge, l'Islande et le Liechtenstein: si vous souhaitez jeter ce produit, y compris les piles ou les batteries, renseignez-vous auprs des autorits locales pour connatre les moyens de retraitement existants. Au Japon: ce symbole sur les piles ou les batteries indique qu'elles doivent tre limines sparment. 7 151 Entretien de l'appareil photo Pour pouvoir pro ter pleinement de votre appareil, veuillez respecter les prcautions suivantes. Stockage et utilisation Stockage et utilisation Si vous n'avez pas l'intention d'utiliser l'appareil photo pendant une priode prolonge, retirez la batterie et la carte mmoire. Ne rangez et n'utilisez pas l'appareil photo dans des endroits qui sont :

exposs la pluie, la vapeur ou la fume trs humides ou extrmement poussireux exposs la lumire directe du soleil ou de trs hautes tempratures, comme dans un vhicule ferm en plein soleil extrmement froids soumis de fortes vibrations exposs des champs magntiques puissants, comme proximit d'une antenne de di usion, d'une ligne lectrique, d'un metteur radar, d'un moteur, d'un transformateur ou d'un aimant en contact avec des produits chimiques volatils tels que des pesticides proximit de produits en caoutchouc ou en vinyle Priphriques rseau sans fi l et Bluetooth: prcautions Ce produit est conforme aux directives de l'UE suivantes:

Directive RoHS 2011/65/UE Directive RE 2014/53/UE Le soussign, FUJIFILM Corporation, dclare que l'quipement radiolectrique du type FF210003 est conforme la directive 2014/53/UE. Le texte complet de la dclaration UE de conformit est disponible l'adresse internet suivante:

https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-h2/pdf/x-h2_doc-myt.pdf Le texte intgral de la dclaration de conformit britannique est disponible l'adresse Internet suivante:

https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-h2/pdf/x-h2_doc-myt_uk.pdf Cette conformit est indique par le marquage suivant plac sur le produit:

Ce marquage est valable pour les produits non-Tlcom et les produits Tlcom harmoniss de l'UE (comme le Bluetooth). Puissance radiofrquence maximale (PIRE):

Rseau local sans l 2,4 GHz: 10,28 dBm Rseau local sans l 5 GHz: 12,29 dBm Bluetooth: 2,23 dBm IMPORTANT: lisez les notifications suivantes avant d'utiliser le transmetteur intgr sans fil de l'appareil photo. Q Ce produit, qui contient une fonction de cryptage dveloppe aux tats-Unis, est contrl par la rglementation amricaine en matire d'exportations (US Export Administration Regulations) et ne peut tre ni export ni r-export vers des pays sous embargo des tats-Unis. 7 Utilisez uniquement un priphrique rseau sans fi l ou Bluetooth Utilisez uniquement un priphrique rseau sans fi l ou Bluetooth.. Fuji lm ne peut pas tre tenu responsable de dommages provenant d'une utilisation non autorise. Ne l'utilisez pas dans des applications exigeant une extrme abilit, par exemple dans des appareils mdicaux ou dans tout autre systme qui peuvent mettre en pril directement ou indirectement la vie d'autrui. Lorsque vous utilisez l'appareil dans des ordinateurs ou d'autres systmes qui demandent un plus haut degr de abilit que des priphriques rseau sans l ou Bluetooth, veillez prendre toutes les mesures ncessaires pour assurer la scurit et empcher tout dysfonctionnement. Utilisez-le uniquement dans son pays d'achat. Utilisez-le uniquement dans son pays d'achat. Cet appareil est conforme aux rglementations rgissant les priphriques rseau sans l et Bluetooth dans le pays d'achat. Respectez toutes les rglementations locales en vigueur lorsque vous utilisez cet appareil. Fuji lm ne peut pas tre tenu responsable des problmes provoqus par une utilisation sous d'autres juridictions. N'utilisez pas cet appareil dans des endroits exposs des champs magntiques, de l'lectricit statique ou des interfrences radio. N'utilisez pas cet appareil dans des endroits exposs des champs magntiques, de l'lectricit statique ou des interfrences radio. N'utilisez pas le transmetteur proximit de fours micro-ondes ou dans tout autre lieu expos des champs magntiques, de l'lectrici-

t statique ou des interfrences radio qui peuvent empcher la rception des signaux sans l. Une interfrence mutuelle peut se produire lorsque le transmetteur est utilis proximit d'autres appareils sans l fonctionnant dans la bande 2,4GHz. Le transmetteur s Le transmetteur sans fi l fonctionne d SSS, OFDM et GFSK. sant la modulation DSSS, OFDM et GFSK. Hz et 5GHz en utilisant la modulation D ans fi l fonctionne dans les bandes 2,4G ans les bandes 2,4GHz et 5GHz en utili 152 Pour votre scurit Scurit: les priphriques rseau sans l et Bluetooth transmettent les donnes via radio. Par consquent, leur utilisation exige d'accorder une plus grande attention la scurit qu'avec les rseaux cbls.

- Ne vous connectez pas des rseaux inconnus ou des rseaux pour lesquels vous ne disposez pas des droits d'accs, mme s'ils sont a chs sur votre priphrique, tant donn qu'y accder peut tre considr comme une utilisation non autorise. Connectez-vous uniquement aux rseaux pour lesquels vous disposez des droits d'accs.

- N'oubliez pas que les transmissions sans l sont susceptibles d'tre interceptes par des tiers.

- Il n'est pas possible de connecter directement ce priphrique des rseaux de tlcommunication (notamment des rseaux locaux sans l publics) exploits par des fournisseurs ou des services de tlcommunication mobiles, de tlphonie xe ou autres. Les actions suivantes sont passibles de poursuites:

Les actions suivantes sont passibles de poursuites:

- Dmontage ou modi cation de cet appareil

- Retrait des tiquettes de certi cation de l'appareil Cet appareil fonctionne sur la mme frquence que les appareils commerciaux, ducatifs et mdicaux et les transmetteurs sans fi l. Cet appareil fonctionne sur la mme frquence que les appareils commerciaux, ducatifs et mdicaux et les transmetteurs sans fi l. Il fonctionne galement sur la mme frquence que les transmetteurs brevets et les transmetteurs basse tension non brevets spciaux fonctionnant dans les systmes de traabilit RFID (systmes d'identi cation par radiofrquence) des lignes d'assemblage ou d'application similaire. Pour empcher l'interfrence avec les appareils ci-dessus, respectez les consignes suivantes. Pour empcher l'interfrence avec les appareils ci-dessus, respectez les consignes suivantes. Vri ez que le transmetteur RFID ne fonctionne pas avant d'utiliser cet appareil. Si vous remarquez que cet appareil provoque des interfrences avec les transmetteurs brevets utiliss par le systme de traabilit RFID, rglez-le immdiatement sur une nouvelle frquence de transmission a n d'viter d'autres interfrences. Si vous remarquez que cet appareil provoque des interfrences avec des systmes de traabilit RFID basse tension, contactez un reprsentant Fuji lm. N'utilisez pas cet appareil bord d'un avion. N'utilisez pas cet appareil bord d'un avion. Lorsque vous voyagez en avion, suivez les instructions du personnel de la compagnie arienne. Notez que ce produit peut mettre des frquences radio mme lorsqu'il est teint. Pour empcher cela, slectionnez ON pour MODE AVION dans le menu des paramtres rseau/USB avant l'embarquement. Exigences dans les pays AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/

SE/CH/UK/HR. La plage 5150MHz5350MHz est uniquement destine une utilisation l'intrieur. Vous trouverez ci-dessous les caractristiques sans fi l. Vous trouverez ci-dessous les caractristiques sans fi l. Rseau local sans fi l Normes Frquence de transmission

(frquence centrale) IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (protocole sans l standard) Isral, Indonsie

: 2412MHz2462MHz (11 canaux) tats-Unis, Canada, Brsil, Chine, Inde, Core, Malaisie

: 2412MHz2462MHz (11 canaux)

: 5180MHz5320MHz (W52, W53)

: 5745MHz5825MHz (UNII-3) Union europenne, Japon, Royaume-Uni, Australie, Norvge, Nouvelle-Zlande, Turquie, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapour, Thalande, EAU, Russie, Taiwan, Arabie saoudite, Qatar, Bahren, Oman, gypte, Iran, Kowet, Liban, Ouzbkistan

: 2412MHz2462MHz (11 canaux)

: 5180MHz5320MHz (W52, W53)

: 5500MHz5700MHz (W56) Protocoles d'accs Infrastructure Bluetooth Normes Frquence de transmission

(frquence centrale) Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) 2402MHz2480MHz 7 Informations sur le Dbit d'Absorption Spcifi que (DAS) Informations sur le Dbit d'Absorption Spcifi que (DAS) Le Dbit d'Absorption Spci que (DAS) se mesure en plaant l'appareil 0mm du corps tandis qu'il met au niveau de puissance de sortie certi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences. La valeur maximale du Dbit d'Absorption Spci que (DAS) est de 0,224W/kg (tte/corps) en moyenne sur 10 grammes de tissu. 153 Lisez attentivement ces remarques avant d'utiliser l'objectif Consignes de scurit Veillez utiliser correctement l'objectif. Pour cela, lisez attentivement ces remarques relatives la scurit et le Manuel de base de l'appareil photo avant toute utilisation. Aprs avoir lu ces consignes de scurit, rangez-les dans un endroit sr. propos des icnes Les icnes illustres ci-dessous sont utilises dans ce document pour indiquer le degr de gravit des blessures ou dommages qui peuvent se produire si vous n'observez pas les informations indiques par l'icne et donc utilisez ce produit de manire incorrecte. AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT ATTENTION ATTENTION Cette icne indique que le fait de ne pas observer les informations mentionnes peut entraner la mort ou des blessures graves. Cette icne indique que le fait de ne pas observer les informations mentionnes peut entraner des blessures ou endommager le matriel. Les icnes illustres ci-dessous sont utilises pour indiquer la nature des instructions que vous devez observer. Les icnes triangulaires vous indiquent que ces informations ncessitent votre attention (Important). Les icnes circulaires barres en diagonale vous informent que l'action indique est interdite (Interdit). Les cercles pleins qui contiennent un point d'exclamation vous informent que l'action doit tre ralise (Requis). AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT N'immergez pas le produit dans l'eau et ne l'exposez pas l'eau. N'immergez pas le produit dans l'eau et ne l'exposez pas l'eau. Le non-respect de cette prcaution peut provo-

quer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Ne dmontez pas le produit (n'ouvrez pas le botier). Ne dmontez pas le produit (n'ouvrez pas le botier). Le non-respect de cette prcaution peut provoquer un incendie, une dcharge lectrique ou des blessures dues au dysfonctionnement du produit. Ne pas immerger Ne pas dmonter Dans le cas o le botier s'ouvrirait suite une chute ou un autre accident, ne touchez pas les pices mises nu. Dans le cas o le botier s'ouvrirait suite une chute ou un autre accident, ne touchez pas les pices mises nu. Le non-respect de cette prcaution pourrait provoquer une dcharge lectrique ou une blessure suite la manipulation des pices endommages. Retirez immdiatement la batterie, en vitant de vous blesser ou de recevoir une dcharge lectrique, puis con ez le produit au revendeur d'origine pour le faire vri er. Ne pas toucher les pices internes Ne le posez pas sur des surfaces instables. Le produit pourrait tomber et provoquer ainsi des blessures. Ne le posez pas sur des surfaces instables. Ne regardez pas le soleil travers l'objectif ou le viseur de l'appareil photo. Ne regardez pas le soleil travers l'objectif ou le viseur de l'appareil photo. Le non-respect de cette prcaution peut se solder par une d cience visuelle permanente. ATTENTION ATTENTION N'utilisez pas ce produit ou ne le rangez pas dans des lieux exposs la vapeur, la fume ou qui sont trs humides ou extr-

N'utilisez pas ce produit ou ne le rangez pas dans des lieux exposs la vapeur, la fume ou qui sont trs humides ou extr-

mement poussireux. mement poussireux. Le non-respect de cette prcaution peut provoquer un incendie ou une dcharge lectrique. Ne laissez pas le produit la lumire directe du soleil ou dans des endroits exposs de trs hautes tempratures, Ne laissez pas le produit la lumire directe du soleil ou dans des endroits exposs de trs hautes tempratures, comme dans un vhicule ferm en plein soleil. comme dans un vhicule ferm en plein soleil. Le non-respect de cette prcaution peut provoquer un incendie. Conservez hors de la porte des enfants en bas ge. Ce produit peut provoquer des blessures s'il est laiss dans Conservez hors de la porte des enfants en bas ge. les mains d'un enfant. Ne manipulez pas le produit avec les mains mouilles. Ne manipulez pas le produit avec les mains mouilles. Le non-respect de cette prcaution peut provoquer une dcharge lectrique. Maintenez le soleil l'extrieur du cadre lorsque vous photographiez ou fi lmez des sujets en contre-jour. Maintenez le soleil l'extrieur du cadre lorsque vous photographiez ou fi lmez des sujets en contre-jour. Lorsque le soleil se trouve prs du cadre ou dans celui-ci, la lumire du soleil risque de se concentrer dans l'appareil photo et de provoquer un incendie ou des brlures. Lorsque vous n'utilisez pas le produit, remettez en place les bouchons d'objectif et rangez-le l'abri de la lumire directe Lorsque vous n'utilisez pas le produit, remettez en place les bouchons d'objectif et rangez-le l'abri de la lumire directe du soleil. du soleil. La lumire du soleil concentre dans l'objectif risque de provoquer un incendie ou des brlures. Ne transportez pas l'appareil photo ou l'objectif lorsqu'ils sont installs sur un trpied. Ne transportez pas l'appareil photo ou l'objectif lorsqu'ils sont installs sur un trpied. Le produit risque de tomber ou de cogner d'autres objets et de provoquer ainsi des blessures. 7 154 Pour votre scurit Adaptateur secteur AC-5VJ Fabricant Adresse Nom du modle Entre nominale Capacit d'entre Sortie nominale Rendement moyen en mode actif Rendement en charge 10%

Consommation lectrique hors charge Temprature de fonctionnement Poids Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd. No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town, 523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province, PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AC-5VJ CA 100 V 240 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 50 VA CC 5,0V 3,0A 15,0W 84,8%

84,2%

0,02 W 0 C +40 C/+32 F +104 F Environ 45 g 2 g/1,6 oz. 0,1 oz. 7 155

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 156

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 157

158

159 NOTES 160 NOTES 161 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN https://fujifilm-x.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1. Images of the e-label screen are provided below:

E-Label information Information OnElabel InUserManual FCCID/ICnumber DoClogo Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwo conditions:(1)Thisdevicemaynotcauseharmful interference,and(2)this devicemustacceptany interferencereceived,includinginterferencethat maycauseundesiredoperationofthedevice V V ClassA/BDigitalDeviceusermanualstatements V V V V 1. Users are able to access the information in no more than 3 steps in a devices menu. 2. The actual Steps are: select MENU button > USER SETTING in the SET UP >

REGULATORY. The E-Label can be accessed without any special accessories, access codes, or SIM card having to be in place. 3. Electronic labeling information is programmed into the device by the manufacturer at the time of manufacture. 4. Electronic labeling information is not modifiable by any third party. 5. A temporary removable adhesive label will be used on the product.

 

 

Be 2516 BF

[IMAGE QUALITY SETTING 1/3 LO. f IMAGE SIZE m43 >

AL YYYYYVYY YyYVY SM ee ASE SE XXXXXXX XXXXXXX YyYyXyyYyXxyxy Se ee

-_ XXXXXXX 0.0.0.4 f XXXXXXX 0.0.04

; 10'0'0'0.0.0.4 XXXX EXIT

| SET UP 10. USER SETTING 5 AF XXXXXXXXX ME XXXXXXXXX Le. XXXXKXKXXX 4 XXXXXKKKX HY XXXXXXXXX Lice Fe 200000 XXXXXXXXX MY EXIT USER SETTING 1/2 1a FORMAT >

XXXXXXXXX ININININININININEN XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX WAVAVAVAVAYAYAVAYA

| To PENA NEN SE NEES V.0.0,0,0,0,0,0,0,6 100. 0.00.0.0,0. yyXyxXxXxXyxyxy MY EXIT USER SETTING 2/2

| REGULATORY >

REGULATORY 1/3 MODEL FF190005 US. CONTAINS FCC ID : COF-WMBNBM26A REI ATORY 2 CANADA PONTAING If + 1N9O0A_WMRNRMORA ANOCTDAL TAAICW 7CAIL FOO TUM BEY TUL Load VS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Universal No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. Nantou TEL +886-49-221-2700 FAX +886-49-232-9561 1, Tsaotuen, 542007, Taiwan County NOTE: The U.S. Agent for Service of Process should not be confused with the authorized agent used for signing the 731 form, other cover letters within the application, and/or the agent who may interface with the TCB. U.S. Ana tion for Service of Process ATTENTION: Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA REGARDING: FCC Certification -Section 2.911 (d)(7) Information Designated U.s.ARent Company Name: Approve-IT, Inc. Contact Name: Nathan Grinager Street Address: 8011 34th Ave South, Suite 342 City/Province/Zip: Bloomington, MN 55425 Telephone No: 651-247-1678 Email: ve-

it.net FRN #: 0027533835 This letter is to confirm that we ("the Designated U.S. Agent) have accepted the responsibility to act as the Designated U.S. Agent for Service of Process as required by section 47 CFR 2.91l(d)(7) behalf of the A pplicant noted below. on U.S. Agent Signature:

Date:

Signed by (Printed Name/Title): Nathan Grinager / Co-President

*This letter submitted 3/6/2024 - 3/5/2025. for all applications is valid indefinitely within the period of March 6, 2024

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, Nantou County 542007, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 FAX +886-49-232-9561 WS Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: February 29, 2024 Ref: Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(5)(i)&(ii) Filing FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(i) Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. (the applicant) certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(ii) Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as a specifically named entity or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates that producing covered equipment. Sincerely, Signature: NVR, Shih Printed Name /Title: Martin Shih/Manager Company Name: Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.

 

 

Date: February 29, 2024 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Requesting permissive change To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25, Original grant date: 07/10/2023 The major change filed under this application is 1. The subject approved module is integrated in a new host (product: Digital Camera Model:

FF240001). 2. Evaluation has been done to ensure compliance. 3. The hardware design of this transmitter that may affect compliance is remained unchanged in this permissive change application. 4. WLAN 2.4GHz 802.11 n40 & UNII-2C & BT are disabled by software. 5. The security mechanism according to section II of KDB 594280 D02 is remained unchanged as it reported to the FCC at the original grant. 6. The master and client modes operate in each frequency band are same as it is in the original grant conditions. 7. WLAN transmitter only supports with passive scanning in UNII-2A band without radar detection, hence radar detection is exempted from evaluation in this permissive change. 8. WLAN and Bluetooth are not able to transmit simultaneously which is restricted by software. Sincerely, Title / Name: Manager / Jim Chang On behalf of: SGS Taiwan Ltd. Telephone: +886 2 2299 3279 Ext.: 1194 Email: jim.chang@sgs.com

 

 

Date: February 29, 2024 Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 REQUEST FOR CONFIDENTIALITY - FCC FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 Pursuant to Sections 0.457(d) and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules and FCC Guidance document 726920, we hereby request permanent confidential treatment of exhibits identified as such in the table below and request they are permanently withheld from public review based on the documents containing trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of this information might be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. We also request short-term confidentiality on certain exhibits until the intended date of marketing as outlined below. We request the exhibits be withheld from public view for a period of 180 days. We attest marketing of the product will only commence after the period of short-term confidentiality expires, or if marketing is to commence before the requested number of days listed above, the grantee will inform the TCB to release the Short-Term Confidentiality information withheld on the FCC equipment authorization website. Type of Confidentiality Requested Exhibit Block Diagrams Operation Description Software defined radio & security info Parts List & Placement/BOM Tune-Up Procedure Schematic Diagrams External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos Users Manual Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent

Permanent*

Permanent*

Short Term Short Term

Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term The asterisked items (*) require further information to be provided in this justification letter before permanent confidentiality will be extended to these exhibits. Please refer to FCC KDB 726920 D01 found at:

https://apps.fcc.gov/oetcf/kdb/forms/FTSSearchResultPage.cfm?switch=P&id=41731 and review section II, 3) regarding specific information that must accompany these requests. Note: any documents held under the Short-Term confidentiality will automatically become public after the requested time if an appropriate extension request has not been received. Any exhibits (i.e., schematic diagrams) that may have already been requested to have Permanent confidentiality as shown above need not be repeated under Short-Term confidentiality request. Sincerely, Signed:

Printed name: Jim Chang Title: Manager Company Name: SGS Taiwan Ltd.

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. U S | No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, va\ Nantou County 542007, Taiwan _ TEL +886-49-221-2700 FAX +886-49-232-9561 Date: February 29, 2024 TO: Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 Regarding FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Jim Chang, SGS Taiwan Ltd. to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization with respect to the FCC ID above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by the agent on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge (47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. Agency Agreement Expiration Date: February 28, 2025 This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, AA U S : Nantou County 542007, Taiwan ones TEL +886-49-221-2700 FAX +886-49-232-9561 Signature: Matha Shih Martin Shih/ Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, AA Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 ea FAM +886-49-232-9561 Date: 2023-06-01 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Attestation Statements Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(5)(i) Filing Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receivingan equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(5)(ii) Filing Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment. Sincerely yours, Mei, elt Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.

- Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: 2023-06-20 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Permanent Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Application as outlined below:

Schematics Software Operational Description The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely yours,

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. U & | No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, Nantou County 542007, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 aaa FAX +886-49-232-9561 Date: 2023-06-01 To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division SUBJECT: End Product Model Difference Attestation FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 Models: WM-BAC-BM-25, WM-BAC-BM-25_FF2,WM-BAC-BM-25-FF3 We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd., hereby declare that our end product, 802.11a/b/g/n/ac + BT 4.1 Module, includes 3 model names as listed above. The above listed models are electrically and mechanically identical. The intention of these models is only for Marketing purpose. Should you have any question, feel free to contact me directly. Sincerely yours,

/\V Slay Martin Shih / Manager

* Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. U S | No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, XN Nantou County 542007, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 a Pa |

FAX +886-49-232-9561 Date: 2023-06-01 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 Description of Permissive Change Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: Class Il permissive change Applicant: Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 (original date:

03/29/2019), the difference compared with original is changed the components as below:

1. Added one Model Name: WM-BAC-BM-25-FF3 2. Change Ant. Matching , power reduce Except for the changes mentioned above, no other modification is performed. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Moda ehih Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Certification designating a U.S. Agent for service of process:

As required by section 2.911(d)(7), the applicant must designate a contact located in the United States for purposes of acting as the applicants agent for service of process, regardless of whether the applicant is a domestic or foreign entity. An applicant located in the United States may designate itself as the agent for service of process. In either scenario, the designation of the U.S. agent for service of process should be provided as an attachment to the equipment authorization application. The applicant must provide a written certification, which must:

i. Be signed by both the applicant and designated agent for service of process, if the agent is different from the applicant. ii. Acknowledge the applicants consent and the designated agents obligation to accept service of process. iii. Provide a physical U.S. address and email for the designated agent. iv. Acknowledge the applicants acceptance to maintain an agent for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. Unofficial information provided by FCC personnel on February 14, 2023, via the monthly call with the TCB Council:

The Agent for Process of Service:

cannot be a TCB or affiliated with a TCB (e.g. could not be a person who works for a TCB or a company that owns or is owned by the TCB) cannot be a [FCC recognised] Lab or affiliated with a test lab (e.g. could not be a person who works for a Lab or a company that owns or is owned by the Lab) Agent can be Individual Entity or a Company Entity Agent Entity must be located in US, US address/phone Entity acting as Agent must have FRN (best practice, put FRN on Agent Letter) Agent letter does not have to be FCC ID specific, can be general Agent for Grantee For devices being marketed or for which marketing has ceased for less than 1 year, if the Agent for Process of Service changes, then for every TC Number the TCB must request the FCC to put application into Audit Mode and Agent Letter needs to be updated (superseded). NOTE: The U.S. Agent for Service of Process should not be confused with the authorized agent used for signing the 731 form, other cover letters within the application, and/or the agent who may interface with the TCB. U.S. Agent Designation for Service of Process ATTENTION:

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA FCC Certification Section 2.911(d)(7) Information REGARDING:

Designated U.S. Agent Company Name: Approve-IT, Inc. Contact Name: Nathan Grinager Street Address: 8011 34th Ave South, Suite 342 City/Province/Zip: Bloomington, MN 55425 Telephone No: 651-247-1678 Email: team@approve-it.net FRN #: 0027533835 This letter is to confirm that we (the Designated U.S. Agent) have accepted the responsibility to act as the Designated U.S. Agent for Service of Process as required by section 47 CFR 2.911(d)(7) on behalf of the Applicant noted below. U.S. Agent Signature:

Date: 6/20/2023 Signed by (Printed Name/Title): Nathan Grinager / Co-President

*This letter is valid indefinitely for all applications submitted within the period of 6/20/2023 6/19/2024. The Applicant confirms its explicit consent and acknowledges that they must maintain an agent for no less than one year after terminating all marketing and importation OR the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. The applicant further acknowledges their responsibility to inform the FCC whenever the Designated U.S. Agent information above changes. Applicant Company name: Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Service Type: Class 2 permissive change FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 FRN #: 0021670591 Module type: Single-modular transmitter Contact Name: Martin Shih / Manager Street Address: 141, Lane 351, Sec.1, Taiping Road, Tsaotuen Nantou City/Province/Zip: Taiwan Telephone No: 886-49-235-0876 Email: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Confidentiality Request regarding application for certification of FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 Pursuant to DA04-1705 June 15, 2004 of the Commissions public notice, we also request temporary confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Materials for Short Term Confidentiality (STC) Manual External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos Planned Release Date STC: 180 days Sincerely, Signature:

Title / Name (Printed): Manager /Jim Chang

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Date: 2022-07-26 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 FCC E-Label Information:

e-labeling for the product 1. According to FCC rule part 2.925 (d) justification of using the alternative method of When etched on the surface, the labeling may cause damage or delete by users hand. 2. According to KDB 784748 D02 e labeling v02 section 4, for devices with an integrated electronic display, or those devices that only operate in conjunction with another associated product that has an electronic display, below info has been stated in e-label and/or user manual. A. User Steps to Access Information Starting from Main or Home Menu:

Step 1 Push Menu/ok Key will show menu. Step 2 Push Menu/ok Key to select USER SETTING Step 3 Push Menu/ok Key to select Rgulatory B. Products must not require special accessories or supplemental plug-ins (e.g., the installation of a SIM/USIM card) to access the information. Instructions will be provided with the product at the time of purchase, in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet End user can access to product-related website, a reference (URL) to obtain the website information is provided at the time of purchase in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet, etc. Readability of Regulatory Information Information FCC ID number FCC logo 15.19 statement (This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements Caution to the user that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment on E-label Yes Yes In Manual Yes Yes NO NO NO Yes Yes Yes Above info which displayed electronically is clearly legible no need to aid of magnification, please see below e-label screen. C. Regulatory Information must be Secure The regulatory information and dedicated exclusive application(s) or script(s) will be secured and implemented in a factory-set-unalterable format. The regulatory information will be capable of being retrieved and displayed locally and access by the end user. The info is no way to modify by end user. D. Physical and Temporary label for Purchasing and Importation Although the e-label has been used, below info will also on the product, or a label on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales. 1. FCC ID 2. FCC logo 3. products subject to certification. E. Additional Considerations(Modular transmitters) Device is not a modular device. If you have any questions regarding the declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Sincerely yours, _____________________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

DECLARATION LETTER We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. here, hereby declare the BT EDR / BDR function will be disabled by software in the future. If you have any questions regarding the declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Date: 2022-07-26 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 IC: 10293A-WMBACBM25 Thank you!

Sincerely yours, _______________________________________ Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Martin Shih / Manager Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: July 26, 2022 SUBJECT: FCC Class II Permissive Change We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Permissive Change is to add a host: Digital Camera (Model: FF210003/ Brand:

FUJIFILM) to the certified module which was originally granted on 01/04/2022 under FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25. The module mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically identical to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd., take the responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Sincerely Yours, _______________________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Date: August 29, 2022 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road - Gate A Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459) and Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 09/03/2022. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos Users Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, _____________________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: 2022-05-11 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 IC: 10293A-WMBACBM25 DECLARATION LETTER We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. here, hereby declare the BT EDR / BDR function will be disabled by software in the future. If you have any questions regarding the declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Sincerely yours, ____________________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

SUBJECT: FCC Class II Permissive Change Date: April 18, 2022 We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Permissive Change is to add a host: Digital Camera (Model: FF210002/ Brand:

FUJIFILM) to the certified module which was originally granted on 01/04/2022 under FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25. The module mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically identical to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd., take the responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Sincerely Yours, ____________________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Date: 2022-05-11 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 FCC E-Label Information:

e-labeling for the product 1. According to FCC rule part 2.925 (d) justification of using the alternative method of When etched on the surface, the labeling may cause damage or delete by users hand 2. According to KDB 784748 D02 e labeling v02 section 4, for devices with an integrated electronic display, or those devices that only operate in conjunction with another associated product that has an electronic display, below info has been stated in e-label and/or user manual. A. User Steps to Access Information Reply temple:

Starting from Main or Home Menu:

Step 1 Push Menu/ok Key will show menu. Step 2 Push Menu/ok Key to select USER SETTING Step 3 Push Menu/ok Key to select Rgulatory B. Products must not require special accessories or supplemental plug-ins (e.g., the installation of a SIM/USIM card) to access the information. Instructions will be provided with the product at the time of purchase, in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet End user can access to product-related website, a reference (URL) to obtain the website information is provided at the time of purchase in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet, etc. Readability of Regulatory Information Information FCC ID number FCC logo 15.19 statement (This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements Caution to the user that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment on E-label Yes Yes In Manual Yes Yes NO NO NO Yes Yes Yes Above info which displayed electronically is clearly legible no need to aid of magnification, please see below e-label screen. C. Regulatory Information must be Secure The regulatory information and dedicated exclusive application(s) or script(s) will be secured and implemented in a factory-set-unalterable format. The regulatory information will be capable of being retrieved and displayed locally and access by the end user. The info is no way to modify by end user. D. Physical and Temporary label for Purchasing and Importation Although the e-label has been used, below info will also on the product, or a label on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales. 1. FCC ID 2. FCC logo 3. products subject to certification. E. Additional Considerations(Modular transmitters) Device is not a modular device. If you have any questions regarding the declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Sincerely yours, _____________________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tel: 408-526-1188 Fax: 408-526-1088 Email: TCB@siemic.com 775 Montague Expressway Milpitas, CA 95035 Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) Initial Release (obsolete) Revised wording (obsolete) Updated company template (obsolete) Updated letter information (obsolete) Added FCC ID field (current) Revision History To 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 From 1.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 Approved Date Nov-14-2006 Sept25-2007 Jan-31-2012 May-23-2014 Sept 16 2014 SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 1 of 2 Rev 5.0 Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. 141, Lane 351, Sec.1, Taiping Road, Tsaotuen, Nantou 54261, Taiwan March 25, 2019 To: SIEMIC, INC. 775 Montague Expressway, Milpitas, CA 95035 USA Dear Sir/Madam, Re: Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. hereby authorize SIEMIC, Inc. to act as a Certification Body for certifying for the following project(s):

(802.11a/b/g/n/ac + BT 4.1 Module, WM-BAC-BM-25) FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 Sincerely, ____________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 2 of 2 Rev 5.0

 

 

SUBJECT: FCC Class II Permissive Change Date: April 24, 2019 We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Permissive Change is to add a host: Digital Camera (Model: FF180005/ Brand: FUJIFILM) to the certified module which was originally granted on 03/29/2019 under FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25. NII-2C band is software disabled. The module mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically identical to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd., take the responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Sincerely Yours, _______________________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: 2019-04-03 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 FCC E-Label Information:

1. According to FCC rule part 2.925 (d) justification of using the alternative method of e-labeling for 2. According to KDB 784748 D02 e labeling v02 section 4, for devices with an integrated electronic display, or those devices that only operate in conjunction with another associated product that has an electronic display, below info has been stated in e-label and/or user manual. A. User Steps to Access Information the product When etched on the surface, the labeling may cause damage or delete by users hand B. Products must not require special accessories or supplemental plug-ins (e.g., the installation of a Starting from Main or Home Menu:

Step 1 push MENU/OK Key on the screen to show menu Step 2 push MENU/OK Key on the screen to select USER SETTING Step 3 push MENU/OK Key on the screen to select REGULATORY In this page the screen will display the e-label information SIM/USIM card) to access the information. Instructions will be provided with the product at the time of purchase, in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet End user can access to product-related website, a reference (URL) to obtain the website information is provided at the time of purchase in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet, etc. Readability of Regulatory Information Information FCC ID number FCC logo 15.19 statement (This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements Caution to the user that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment on E-label Yes Yes In Manual Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Above info which displayed electronically is clearly legible no need to aid of magnification, please see below e-label screen. C. Regulatory Information must be Secure The regulatory information and dedicated exclusive application(s) or script(s) will be secured and implemented in a factory-set-unalterable format. The regulatory information will be capable of being retrieved and displayed locally and access by the end user. The info is no way to modify by end user. D. Physical and Temporary label for Purchasing and Importation Although the e-label has been used, below info will also on the product, or a label on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales. 1. FCC ID 2. FCC logo 3. products subject to certification. E. Additional Considerations(Modular transmitters) Device is not a modular device.

-----------------------------------

Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: March 25, 2019 FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 AUTHORIZATION LETTER To Whom It May Concern:

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. hereby authorizes Joanna Hung / Specialist of Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch (BV CPS Taoyuan), to act on its behalf in all matters relating to the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) application for equipment authorization in connection with the FCC ID listed above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Joanna Hung / Specialist of BV CPS Taoyuan on Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.s behalf, within the scope of the powers granted herein, shall have the same effect as acts of its own. If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Sincerely yours, _____________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: April 9, 2019 RSE Justification Letter We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd., declare that the device without RSE testing due to the following:

The end product (Brand: FUJIFILM, Model: FF180005) with module under FCC ID: COF-

WMBACBM25 was assessed compliant to radiated emission limits per 15.247 in its initial approvals. The end product under this application uses same type and gain antenna across the emission bands. The original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: COF-WMBACBM25 was performed when the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current platform under application has the antenna installed inside the Digital Camera enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by Digital Camera enclosure should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Should you have any question or comment regarding this matter, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, ________________________ Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 1 of 38 SAR TEST REPORT Company Address Standards The following samples were submitted and identified on behalf of the client as:

Product Name Brand Name Model No. Company Name Digital Camera FUJIFILM FF180005 UNIVERSAL GLOBAL SCIENTIFIC INDUSTRIAL CO.,LTD. 141, Lane 351, Sec.1,Taiping Road., Tsaotuen, Nantou, 54261, Taiwan IEEE/ANSI C95.1-1992, IEEE 1528-2013, KDB248227D01v02r02,KDB865664D01v01r04, KDB865664D02v01r02,KDB447498D01v06, COF-WMBACBM25 Apr. 25, 2019 Apr. 25, 2019 ~ Apr. 26, 2019 Apr. 30, 2019 FCC ID Date of Receipt Date of Test(s) Date of Issue In the configuration tested, the EUT complied with the standards specified above. Remarks:

This report details the results of the testing carried out on one sample, the results contained in this test report do not relate to other samples of the same product. The manufacturer should ensure that all products in series production are in conformity with the product sample detailed in this report. This report may only be reproduced and distributed in full. If the product in this report is used in any configuration other than that detailed in the report, the manufacturer must ensure the new system complies with all relevant standards. Any mention of SGS Taiwan Electronic & Communication Laboratory or testing done by SGS Taiwan Electronic & Communication Laboratory in connection with distribution or use of the product described in this report must be approved by SGS Taiwan Electronic & Communication Laboratory in writing. Signed on behalf of SGS Clerk / Ruby Ou Supervisor / Afu Chen Asst. Manager / John Yeh Date: Apr. 30, 2019 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 2 of 38 Revision History Report Number EN/2019/40030 Revision Rev.00 Description Initial creation of document Issue Date Apr. 30, 2019 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 3 of 38 Contents 1. General Information ....................................................................................................... 4 1.1 Testing Laboratory ............................................................................................................... 4 1.2 Details of Applicant .............................................................................................................. 4 1.3 Details of Manufacturer ....................................................................................................... 4 1.4 Description of EUT .............................................................................................................. 5 1.5 Test Environment .............................................................................................................. 10 1.6 Operation Description ....................................................................................................... 10 1.7 The SAR Measurement System ........................................................................................ 12 1.8 System Components ......................................................................................................... 14 1.9 SAR System Verification ................................................................................................... 16 1.10 Tissue Simulant Fluid for the Frequency Band ............................................................... 18 1.11 Evaluation Procedures .................................................................................................... 20 1.12 Probe Calibration Procedures ......................................................................................... 21 1.13 Test Standards and Limits ............................................................................................... 24 2. Summary of Results .................................................................................................... 26 2.1 Decision rules .................................................................................................................... 26 2.2 Summary of Results .......................................................................................................... 26 2.3 Reporting statements of conformity .................................................................................. 26 3. Instruments List ........................................................................................................... 27 4. Measurements .............................................................................................................. 28 5. SAR System Performance Verification ...................................................................... 32 6. Uncertainty Budget ...................................................................................................... 36 Appendixes ...................................................................................................................... 38 EN201940030 SAR_Appendix A Photographs ....................................................................... 38 EN201940030 SAR_Appendix B DAE & Probe Cal. Certificate ............................................. 38 EN201940030 SAR_Appendix C Phantom Description & Dipole Cal. Certificate ................... 38 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1. General Information 1.1 Testing Laboratory Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 4 of 38 SGS Taiwan Ltd. Electronics & Communication Laboratory 1F, No. 8, Alley 15, Lane 120, Sec. 1, NeiHu Road, Neihu District, Taipei City, 11493, Taiwan Tel Fax Internet

+886-2-2299-3279

+886-2-2298-0488 http://www.tw.sgs.com/

1.2 Details of Applicant Company Name Company Address 141, Lane 351, Sec.1,Taiping Road., Tsaotuen, UNIVERSAL GLOBAL SCIENTIFIC INDUSTRIAL CO.,LTD. Nantou, 54261, Taiwan 1.3 Details of Manufacturer Company Name Company Address 7-3, Akasaka 9-Chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-0052, Japan FUJIFILM Corporation Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 5 of 38 1.4 Description of EUT Equipment Under Test Digital Camera Brand Name Model No. FCC ID FUJIFILM FF180005 COF-WMBACBM25 Mode of Operation Duty Cycle TX Frequency Range

(MHz) Channel Number

(ARFCN) WLAN802.11a/b/g/n(20M/40M)/ac(20M/40M/80M) Bluetooth 5210 1 WLAN802.11 a/b/g/n(20M/40M)/

ac(20M/40M/80M) 1 Bluetooth 2412 WLAN802.11 b/g/n(20M) WLAN802.11 n(40M) 2422 WLAN802.11 a/n(20M)/ac(20M) 5.2G 5180 WLAN802.11 n(40M)/ac(40M) 5.2G 5190 WLAN802.11 ac(80M) 5.2G WLAN802.11 a/n(20M)/ac(20M) 5.3G 5260 WLAN802.11 n(40M)/ac(40M) 5.3G 5270 WLAN802.11 ac(80M) 5.3G WLAN802.11 a/n(20M)/ac(20M) 5.8G 5745 WLAN802.11 n(40M)/ac(40M) 5.8G 5710 WLAN802.11 ac(80M) 5.8G Bluetooth 1 WLAN802.11 b/g/n(20M) 3 WLAN802.11 n(40M) WLAN802.11 a/n(20M)/ac(20M) 5.2G 36 WLAN802.11 n(40M)/ac(40M) 5.2G 38 WLAN802.11 ac(80M) 5.2G WLAN802.11 a/n(20M)/ac(20M) 5.3G 52 42 5290 5775 2462 2452 5240 5230 5320 5310 5825 5795 11 9 48 46 64 2400 2483.5 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 6 of 38 Channel Number

(ARFCN) 54 WLAN802.11 n(40M)/ac(40M) 5.3G WLAN802.11 ac(80M) 5.3G 58 WLAN802.11 a/n(20M)/ac(20M) 5.8G 149 WLAN802.11 n(40M)/ac(40M) 5.8G 151 WLAN802.11 ac(80M) 5.8G Bluetooth 155 0 62 165 159 39 Max. SAR (1-g) (Unit: W/Kg) Band Measured Reported Channel Position WLAN 802.11b WLAN 802.11 ac(80M) 5.2G WLAN 802.11 ac(80M) 5.3G WLAN802.11ac(80M) 5.8G 0.06 0.66 0.52 0.54 0.09 0.96 0.74 0.77 1 42 58 155 Front tilt side Front tilt side Front tilt side Front side WLAN antenna information:

Antenna Frequency Gain(dBi) Chip antenna 5G 2.23 2.4G 1.59 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 7 of 38 WLAN802.11 a/b/g/n(20M/40M)/ac(20M/40M/80M) conducted power table:

Band Mode Channel Frequency

(MHz) Data Rate Max. Rated Avg. Power +

Max. Tolerance

(dBm) Average power

(dBm) 2450 MHz 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n20-HT0 802.11n40-HT0 1 6 11 1 6 11 1 6 11 3 6 9 2412 2437 2462 2412 2437 2462 2412 2437 2462 2422 2437 2452 1Mbps 6Mbps MCS0 MCS0 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 Band Mode Channel Frequency

(MHz) Data Rate Max. Rated Avg. Power

+ Max. Tolerance

(dBm) 5.15-5.25 GHz 802.11a 802.11n20-HT0 802.11ac20-VHT0 802.11n40-HT0 802.11ac40-VHT0 802.11ac80-VHT0 36 40 44 48 36 40 44 48 36 40 44 48 38 46 38 46 42 5180 5200 5220 5240 5180 5200 5220 5240 5180 5200 5220 5240 5190 5230 5190 5230 5210 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 6Mbps MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 11.92 11.82 11.90 11.92 11.70 11.91 11.77 11.76 11.90 11.95 11.91 11.89 Average power

(dBm) 11.72 11.83 11.89 11.93 11.77 11.82 11.86 11.89 11.78 11.92 11.99 11.84 11.93 11.87 11.89 11.90 11.84 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 8 of 38 Band Mode Channel Frequency

(MHz) Data Rate Max. Rated Avg. Power

+ Max. Tolerance

(dBm) 5.25-5.35 GHz 802.11a 802.11n20-HT0 802.11ac20-VHT0 802.11n40-HT0 802.11ac40-VHT0 802.11ac80-VHT0 52 56 60 64 52 56 60 64 52 56 60 64 54 62 54 62 58 5260 5280 5300 5320 5260 5280 5300 5320 5260 5280 5300 5320 5270 5310 5270 5310 5290 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 6Mbps MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 Average power

(dBm) 11.97 11.92 11.84 11.94 11.95 11.83 12.05 11.94 11.98 11.88 12.06 11.97 11.96 11.96 11.95 11.97 11.96 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 9 of 38 Mode Mode Channel Frequency

(MHz) Data Rate Max. Rated Avg. Power

+ Max. Tolerance

(dBm) 5800 MHz 802.11a 802.11n20-HT0 802.11ac20-VHT0 802.11n40-HT0 802.11ac40-VHT0 802.11ac80-VHT0 149 153 157 165 149 153 157 165 149 153 157 165 151 159 151 159 155 5745 5765 5785 5825 5745 5765 5785 5825 5745 5765 5785 5825 5755 5795 5755 5795 5775 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 6Mbps MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 MCS0 Bluetooth conducted power table:

Average power

(dBm) 11.97 11.93 11.84 11.84 11.96 11.89 11.85 11.94 11.90 11.81 11.82 11.70 12.03 11.97 12.00 12.07 11.97 Average Output Power (dBm) Max. Rated Avg. Power + Max. Tolerance (dBm) Mode Channel Frequency

(MHz) LE CH 37 CH 18 CH 39 2402 2442 2480 GFSK 4.85 5.08 5.06 6.7 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 10 of 38 1.5 Test Environment Ambient Temperature: 222 C Tissue Simulating Liquid: 222 C 1.6 Operation Description Use chipset specific software to control the EUT, and makes it transmit in maximum power. Measurements are performed respectively on the lowest, middle and highest channels of the operating band(s). The EUT is set to maximum power level during all tests, and at the beginning of each test the battery is fully charged. Based on KDB inquiry, EUT was tested as below, Utilize the flat phantom and test for 1 gram SAR on all surfaces and side edges with a transmitting antenna at 25 mm from that surface or edge, but at 0 mm separation to the phantom using head simulant tissue. Note:

802.11b DSSS SAR Test Requirements:

1. SAR is measured for 2.4 GHz 802.11b DSSS mode using the highest measured maximum output power channel, when the reported SAR of the highest measured maximum output power channel for the exposure configuration is 0.8 W/kg, no further SAR testing is required for 802.11b DSSS in that exposure configuration. 2. When the reported SAR is > 0.8 W/kg, SAR is required for that exposure configuration using the next highest measured output power channel. When any reported SAR is > 1.2 W/kg, SAR is required for the third channel; i.e., all channels require testing. 802.11g/n OFDM SAR Test Exclusion Requirements:

3. SAR is not required for 802.11g/n since the highest reported SAR for DSSS is adjusted by the ratio of OFDM to DSSS specified maximum output power and the adjusted SAR is 1.2 W/kg. 4. WLAN and BT share the same antenna path and they will not transmit simultaneously. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 11 of 38 5. According to KDB447498 D01, testing of other required channels is not required when the reported 1-g SAR for the highest output channel is 0.8 W/kg, when the transmission band is 100 MHz. 6. According to KDB865664 D01, SAR measurement variability must be assessed for each frequency band. When the original highest measured SAR is 0.8 W/kg, repeated that measurement once. Perform a second repeated measurement only if the ratio of largest to smallest SAR for the original and first repeated measurements is > 1.20 or when the original or repeated measurement is 1.45 W/kg (~10% from the 1-g SAR limit) 7. Based on KDB447498D01, SAR test exclusion thresholds for 100 MHz to 6 GHz at test separation distances 50 mm are determined by:

Max.tune up powermW Min.test separation distancemmfGHz3 When the minimum test separation distance is < 5mm, 5mm is applied to determine SAR test exclusion. Mode Max. tune-up power(dBm) BT 6.7 Max. tune-up power(mW) 4.677 All surfaces Test separation distance (mm) Calculation value Require SAR testing?

less than 5 1.473 NO Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1.7 The SAR Measurement System Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 12 of 38 A block diagram of the SAR measurement System is given in Fig. a. This SAR Measurement System uses a Computer-controlled 3-D stepper motor system

(SPEAG DASY 5 professional system). The model EX3DV4 field probe is used to determine the internal electric fields. The SAR can be obtained from the equation SAR= (|Ei|2)/ where and are the conductivity and mass density of the tissue-simulant. The DASY 5 system for performing compliance tests consists of the following items:

1. A standard high precision 6-axis robot (Staubli RX family) with controller, teach pendant and software. An arm extension is for accommodating the data acquisition electronics (DAE). 2. A dosimetric probe, i.e., an isotropic E-field probe optimized and calibrated for usage intissue simulating liquid. The probe is equipped with an optical surface detector system. 3. A data acquisition electronics (DAE) which performs the signal amplification, signal multiplexing, AD-conversion, offset measurements, mechanical surface detection, collision detection, etc. The unit is battery powered with standard or rechargeable batteries. The signal is optically transmitted to the EOC. Fig. a The block diagram of SAR system 4. The Electro-optical converter (EOC) performs the conversion between optical and electrical of the signals for the digital communication to the DAE and for the analog signal from the optical surface detection. The EOC is connected to the measurement server. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 13 of 38 5. The function of the measurement server is to perform the time critical tasks such as signal filtering, control of the robot operation and fast movement interrupts. 6. A probe alignment unit which improves the (absolute) accuracy of the probe positioning. 7. A computer operating Windows 7. 8. DASY 5 software. 9. Remote control with teach pendant and additional circuitry for robot safety such as warning lamps, etc. 10. Tissue simulating liquid mixed according to the given recipes. 11. Validation dipole kits allowing to validate the proper functioning of the system. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 14 of 38 1.8 System Components EX3DV4 E-Field Probe Construction Symmetrical design with triangular core Built-in shielding against static charges PEEK enclosure material (resistant to organic solvents, e.g., DGBE) Calibration Basic Broad Band Calibration in air Conversion Factors (CF) for HSL 2450/5200/5300/5800 MHz Additional CF for other liquids and frequencies upon request Frequency Directivity 10 MHz to > 6 GHz 0.3 dB in HSL (rotation around probe axis) 0.5 dB in tissue material (rotation normal to probe axis) 10 W/g to > 100 mW/g Linearity: 0.2 dB (noise: typically < 1 W/g) Dynamic Range Dimensions Tip diameter: 2.5 mm Application High precision dosimetric measurements in any exposure scenario

(e.g., very strong gradient fields). Only probe which enables compliance testing for frequencies up to 6 GHz with precision of better 30%. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 15 of 38 ELI PHANTOM Model Construction The ELI phantom is used for compliance testing of handheld and body-mounted wireless devices in the frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz. ELI is fully compatible with the IEC 62209-2 standard and all known tissue simulating liquids. ELI has been optimized regarding its performance and can be integrated into our standard phantom tables. A cover prevents evaporation of the liquid. Reference markings on the phantom allow installation of the complete setup, including all predefined phantom positions and measurement grids, by teaching three points. The phantom is compatible with all SPEAG dosimetric probes and dipoles. 2 0.2 mm Shell Thickness Filling Volume Approx. 30 liters Dimensions Major axis: 600 mm Minor axis: 400 mm DEVICE HOLDER Construction The device holder (Supporter) for Notebook is made by POM

(polyoxymethylene resin ) , which is non-metal and non-conductive. The height can be adjusted to fit varies kind of notebooks. Device Holder Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1.9 SAR System Verification Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 16 of 38 The microwave circuit arrangement for system verification is sketched in Fig. b. The daily system accuracy verification occurs within the flat section of the SAM phantom. A SAR measurement was performed to see if the measured SAR was within +/- 10% from the target SAR values. These tests were done at 2450/5200/

/5300/5800 MHz. The tests were conducted on the same days as the measurement of the DUT. The obtained results from the system accuracy verification are displayed in the table 1 (SAR values are normalized to 1W forward power delivered to the dipole). During the tests, the liquid depth above the ear reference points was 15 cm 5 mm (frequency 3 GHz) or 10 cm 5 mm (frequency > 3 G Hz) in all the cases. It is seen that the system is operating within its specification, as the results are within acceptable tolerance of the reference values. Fig. b The block diagram of system verification Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 17 of 38 Validation Kit S/N Frequency

(MHz) 1W Target SAR-1g

(mW/g) D2450V2 869 2450 Head 52.30 Validation Kit S/N Frequency

(MHz) 1W Target SAR-1g

(mW/g) D5GHzV2 1023 5200 Head 5300 Head 5800 Head 79.20 82.50 80.40 Pin=250mW Measured SAR-1g

(mW/g) 13.2 Pin=100mW Measured SAR-1g

(mW/g) 7.79 8.38 7.98 Measured SAR-1g normalized to 1W (mW/g) Deviation

(%) Measured Date 52.8 0.96%

Apr. 25, 2019 Measured SAR-1g normalized to 1W (mW/g) Deviation

(%) Measured Date 77.9 83.8 79.8

-1.64%

1.58%

-0.75%

Apr. 26, 2019 Apr. 26, 2019 Apr. 26, 2019 Table 1. Results of system validation Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1.10 Tissue Simulant Fluid for the Frequency Band Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 18 of 38 The dielectric properties for this body-simulant fluid were measured by using the Agilent Model 85070E Dielectric Probe (rates frequency band 200 MHz to 20 GHz) in conjunction with Network Analyzer (30 KHz-6000 MHz). All dielectric parameters of tissue simulates were measured within 24 hours of SAR measurements. The depth of the tissue simulant in the flat section of the phantom was 15 cm 5 mm (Frequency 3G) or 10 cm 5 mm (Frequency >3G) during all tests. (Fig. 2) Tissue Type Measurement Date Measured Frequency

(MHz) Target Dielectric Constant, r Target Conductivity,

(S/m) Measured Dielectric Constant, r Measured Conductivity Head Apr, 25. 2019 Apr, 26. 2019 2402.00 2412.00 2437.00 2442.00 2450.00 2462.00 2480.00 5200.00 5210.00 5290.00 5300.00 5775.00 5800.00 39.285 39.268 39.223 39.214 39.200 39.185 39.162 35.986 35.974 35.883 35.871 35.329 35.300 1.757 1.766 1.788 1.793 1.800 1.813 1.833 4.655 4.665 4.747 4.758 5.244 5.270 38.759 38.709 38.608 38.589 38.557 38.480 38.438 35.803 35.773 35.616 35.534 34.209 34.171

,

(S/m) 1.763 1.778 1.801 1.805 1.814 1.828 1.847 4.753 4.763 4.865 4.871 5.465 5.494

% dev r % dev

-1.34%

-1.42%

-1.57%

-1.59%

-1.64%

-1.80%

-1.85%

-0.51%

-0.56%

-0.74%

-0.94%

-3.17%

-3.20%

0.32%

0.67%

0.70%

0.68%

0.78%

0.82%

0.78%

2.11%

2.10%

2.48%

2.39%

4.21%

4.25%

Table 2. Dielectric Parameters of Tissue Simulant Fluid Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 19 of 38 The composition of the tissue simulating liquid:

Frequency

(MHz) Mode DGMBE Water Salt 2450 Head 550 g 450 g Ingredient Preventol D-7 Cellulose Sugar Total amount 1.0L(Kg) Body Simulating Liquids for 5 GHz, Manufactured by SPEAG:

Ingredients

(% by weight) Water 60-80 Esters, Emulsifiers, Inhibitors Sodium and Salt 20-40 0-1.5 Table 3. Recipes for Tissue Simulating Liquid Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1.11 Evaluation Procedures Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 20 of 38 The entire evaluation of the spatial peak values is performed within the Post-processing engine (SEMCAD). The system always gives the maximum values for the 1 g and 10 g cubes. The algorithm to find the cube with highest averaged SAR is divided into the following stages:

1. The extraction of the measured data (grid and values) from the Zoom Scan. 2. The calculation of the SAR value at every measurement point based on all stored data (A/D values and measurement parameters) 3. The generation of a high-resolution mesh within the measured volume 4. The interpolation of all measured values from the measurement grid to the high-resolution grid 5. The extrapolation of the entire 3-D field distribution to the phantom surface over the distance from sensor to surface 6. The calculation of the averaged SAR within masses of 1g and 10g. The probe is calibrated at the center of the dipole sensors that is located 1 to 2.7mm away from the probe tip. During measurements, the probe stops shortly above the phantom surface, depending on the probe and the surface detecting system. Both distances are included as parameters in the probe configuration file. The software always knows exactly how far away the measured point is from the surface. As the probe cannot directly measure at the surface, the values between the deepest measured point and the surface must be extrapolated. The angle between the probe axis and the surface normal line is less than 30 degree. In the Area Scan, the gradient of the interpolation function is evaluated to find all the extreme of the SAR distribution. The uncertainty on the locations of the extreme is less than 1/20 of the grid size. Only local maximum within 2 dB of the global maximum are searched and passed for the Cube Scan measurement. In the Cube Scan, the interpolation function is used to extrapolate the Peak SAR from the lowest measurement points to the inner phantom surface (the extrapolation distance). The uncertainty increases with the extrapolation distance. To keep the uncertainty within 1% for the 1 g and 10 g cubes, the extrapolation distance should not be larger than 5mm. The maximum search is automatically performed after each area scan measurement. It is based on splines in two or three dimensions. The procedure can find the maximum for most SAR distributions even with relatively large grid spacing. After the area scanning measurement, the probe is automatically moved to a position at the interpolated maximum. The following scan can directly use this position for reference, e.g., for a finer resolution grid or the cube evaluations. The 1g and 10g peak evaluations are only available for the predefined cube 7x7x7 scans. The routines are verified and optimized for the grid dimensions used in these cube measurements. The measured volume of 30x30x30mm contains about 30g of tissue. The first procedure is an extrapolation (incl. Boundary correction) to get the points between the lowest measured plane and the surface. The next step uses 3D Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 21 of 38 interpolation to get all points within the measured volume. In the last step, a 1g cube is placed numerically into the volume and its averaged SAR is calculated. This cube is the moved around until the highest averaged SAR is found. If the highest SAR is found at the edge of the measured volume, the system will issue a warning: higher SAR values might be found outside of the measured volume. In that case the cube measurement can be repeated, using the new interpolated maximum as the center. 1.12 Probe Calibration Procedures For the calibration of E-field probes in lossy liquids, an electric field with an accurately known field strength must be produced within the measured liquid. For standardization purposes it would be desirable if all measurements which are necessary to assess the correct field strength would be traceable to standardized measurement procedures. In the following two different calibration techniques are summarized:

1.12.1 Transfer Calibration with Temperature Probes In lossy liquids the specific absorption rate (SAR) is related both to the electric field () and the temperature gradient ( T / t ) in the liquid. SAR TC =

, t whereby is the conductivity, the density and c the heat capacity of the liquid. in the the temperature gradient Hence, the electric field in lossy liquid can be measured indirectly by measuring liquid. Non-disturbing temperature probes (optical probes or thermistor probes with resistive lines) with high spatial resolution (<1-2 mm) and fast reaction time (<1 s) are available and can be easily calibrated with high precision [1]. The setup and the exciting source have no influence on the calibration; only the relative positioning uncertainties of the standard temperature probe and the E-field probe to be calibrated must be considered. However, several problems the available accuracy of probe calibrations with temperature probes:

limit Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 22 of 38 The temperature gradient is not directly measurable but must be evaluated from temperature measurements at different time steps. Special precaution is necessary to avoid measurement errors caused by temperature gradients due to energy equalizing effects or convection currents in the liquid. Such effects cannot be completely avoided, as the measured field itself destroys the thermal equilibrium in the liquid. With a careful setup these errors can be kept small. The measured volume around the temperature probe is not well defined. It is difficult to calculate the energy transfer from a surrounding gradient temperature field into the probe. These effects must be considered, since temperature probes are calibrated in liquid with homogeneous temperatures. There is no traceable standard for temperature rise measurements. The calibration depends on the assessment of the specific density, the heat capacity and the conductivity of the medium. While the specific density and heat capacity can be measured accurately with standardized procedures (~ 2% for c; much better for ) , there is no standard for the measurement of the conductivity. Depending on the method and liquid, the error can well exceed 5%. Temperature rise measurements are not very sensitive and therefore the E-field

(e.g., power are often performed at a higher power measurements. The nonlinearities measurements, different components, etc.) must be considered. the system Considering these problems, the possible accuracy of the calibration of E-field probes with temperature gradient measurements in a carefully designed setup is about 10% (RSS) [2]. Recently, a setup which is a combination of the waveguide techniques and the thermal measurements was presented in [3]. The estimated uncertainty of the setup is 5% (RSS) when the same liquid is used for the calibration and for actual measurements and 7-9% (RSS) when not, which is in good agreement with the estimates given in [2]. level than in 1.12.2 Calibration with Analytical Fields In this method a technical setup is used in which the field can be calculated analytically from measurements of other physical magnitudes (e.g., input power). This corresponds to the standard field method for probe calibration in air; however, there is no standard defined for fields in lossy liquids. When using calculated fields in lossy liquids for probe calibration, several points must be considered in the assessment of the uncertainty:

The setup must enable accurate determination of the incident power. The accuracy of the calculated field strength will depend on the assessment of the dielectric parameters of the liquid. Due to the small wavelength in liquids with high permittivity, even small Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 23 of 38 setups might be above the resonant cutoff frequencies. The field distribution in the setup must be carefully checked for conformity with the theoretical field distribution. References 1. 2. 3. N. Kuster, Q. Balzano, and J.C. Lin, Eds., Mobile Communications Safety, Chapman & Hall, London, 1997. K. Meier, M. Burkhardt, T. Schmid, and N. Kuster, \Broadband calibration of E-field probes in lossy media", IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques, vol. 44, no. 10, pp. 1954{1962, Oct. 1996. K. Jokela, P. Hyysalo, and L. Puranen, \Calibration of specific absorption rate (SAR) probes in waveguide at 900 MHz", IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurements, vol. 47, no. 2, pp. 432{438, Apr. 1998. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1.13 Test Standards and Limits Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 24 of 38 According to FCC 47CFR 2.1093(d) The limits to be used for evaluation are based generally on criteria published by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) in Section 4.2 of IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz, ANSI/IEEE C95.1, By the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., New York, New York 10017. These criteria for SAR evaluation are similar to those recommended by the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) in Biological Effects and Exposure Criteria for Radio frequency Electromagnetic Fields, NCRP Report No. 86, Section 17.4.5. Copyright NCRP, 1986, Bethesda, Maryland 20814. SAR is a measure of the rate of energy absorption due to exposure to an RF transmitting source. SAR values have been related to threshold levels for potential biological hazards. The criteria to be used are specified in paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section and shall apply for portable devices transmitting in the frequency range from 100 kHz to 6 GHz. Portable devices that transmit at frequencies above 6 GHz are to be evaluated in terms of the MPE limits specified in 1.1310 of this chapter. Measurements and calculations to demonstrate compliance with MPE field strength or power density limits for devices operating above 6 GHz should be made at a minimum distance of 5 cm from the radiating source.

(1) Limits for Occupational/Controlled exposure: 0.4 W/kg as averaged over the whole-body and spatial peak SAR not exceeding 8 W/kg as averaged over any 1 gram of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube). Exceptions are the hands, wrists, feet and ankles where the spatial peak SAR shall not exceed 20 W/kg, as averaged over an 10 grams of tissue

(defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube).

(2) Occupational/Controlled limits apply when persons are exposed as a consequence of their employment provided these persons are fully aware of and exercise control over their exposure. Awareness of exposure can be accomplished by use of warning labels or by specific training or education through appropriate means, such as an RF safety program in a work environment.

(3) Limits for General Population/Uncontrolled exposure: 0.08 W/kg as averaged over the whole-body and spatial peak SAR not exceeding 1.6 W/kg as averaged over any 1 gram of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube). Exceptions are the hands, wrists, feet and ankles where the spatial peak SAR shall not exceed 4 W/kg, as averaged over any 10 grams of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube). General Population/Uncontrolled limits apply when the general public may be exposed, or when persons that are exposed as a consequence of their employment may not be fully aware of the potential for exposure or do not Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 25 of 38 exercise control over their exposure. Warning labels placed on consumer devices such as cellular telephones will not be sufficient reason to allow these devices to be evaluated subject to limits for occupational/controlled exposure in paragraph (d)(1) of this section. (Table 4.) Human Exposure Spatial Peak SAR

(Brain) Spatial Average SAR

(Whole Body) Spatial Peak SAR

(Hands/Feet/Ankle/Wrist) Uncontrolled Environment General Population Controlled Environment Occupational 1.60 W/kg 0.08 W/kg 4.00 W/kg 8.00 W/kg 0.40 W/kg 20.00 W/kg Table 4. RF exposure limits Notes:

1. Uncontrolled environments are defined as locations where there is potential exposure of individuals who have no knowledge or control of their potential exposure. 2. Controlled environments are defined as locations where there is potential exposure of individuals who have knowledge of their potential exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 2. Summary of Results Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 26 of 38 2.1 Decision rules Reported measurement data comply with IEEE 1528-2013:

Determining compliance shall be based on the results of the compliance measurement, not taking into account measurement instrumentation uncertainty. 2.2 Summary of Results Mode Position Distance

(mm) CH Freq.

(MHz) Max. Rated Avg. Power + Max. Tolerance (dBm) Measured Avg. Power

(dBm) Scaling Averaged SAR over 1g

(W/kg) Measured Reported Plot page WLAN 802.11b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WLAN 802.11 ac(80M) 5.2G Front sdie Front tilt side Front tilt side Front tilt side Left side Front sdie Front tilt side Front tilt side*

1 1 6 11 1 42 42 42 42 58 58 58 155 155 155 2412 2412 2437 2462 2412 5210 5210 5210 5210 5290 5290 5290 5775 5775 5775 0.054 0.087 0.083 0.080 0.025 0.953 0.961 0.950 0.229 0.730 0.741 0.142 0.767 0.755 0.152

* - repeated at the highest SAR measurement according to the KDB 865664 D01 Note:

143.88%

143.88%

147.23%

144.54%

143.88%

146.55%

146.55%

146.55%

146.55%

142.56%

142.56%

142.56%

142.23%

142.23%

142.23%

0.037 0.061 0.056 0.055 0.018 0.650 0.656 0.648 0.156 0.512 0.520 0.100 0.539 0.531 0.107 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 11.92 11.92 11.82 11.90 11.92 11.84 11.84 11.84 11.84 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.97 11.97 11.97

10 Scaling = Left side Front sdie Front tilt side Left side Front sdie Front tilt side WLAN 802.11 ac(80M) 5.3G WLAN 802.11 ac(80M) 5.8G Left side Reported SAR = measured SAR * (scaling) Where P2 is maximum specified power, P1 is measured conducted power

-

28

-

-

-

-

29

-

-

-

30

-

31

-

-

2.3 Reporting statements of conformity The conformity statement in this report is based solely on the test results, measurement uncertainty is excluded. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 3. Instruments List Manufacturer Device Type SPEAG Dosimetric E-Field Probe EX3DV4 Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 27 of 38 Serial number 7466 Date of last Date of next calibration calibration Feb.04,2019 Feb.03,2020 SPEAG System Validation Dipole D2450V2 869 Jun.19,2019 Jun.18,2020 D5GHzV2 1023 Jan.30,2019 Jan.29,2020 Data acquisition ELI N/A 1336 DAE4 Phantom DASY 52 V52.8.8 Electronics Software Aug.06,2018 Aug.05,2019 Calibration Calibration not required not required Calibration Calibration not required not required Network Analyzer E5071C MY46107530 Feb.23,2019 Feb.22,2020 Calibration 85070E MY44300677 Calibration not required not required 772D MY52180142 Jul.04,2018 Jul.03,2019 778D MY52180302 Jul.05,2018 Jul.04,2019 Dielectric Probe Kit Dual-directional N/A coupler RF Signal Generator Power Meter ML2496A N5181A MY52180142 Jul.04,2018 Jul.03,2019 1326001 Aug.09,2018 Aug.02,2019 Power Sensor MA2411B 1315048 Aug.09,2018 Aug.02,2019 1315049 Aug.09,2018 Aug.02,2019 thermometer DTM-303A TP131515 Jul.17,2018 Jul.16,2019 Digital SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent TECPEL Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Date: 2019/4/25 Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 28 of 38 4. Measurements WLAN 802.11b_Head_Front tilt_CH 1_0mm Communication System: WLAN 2.45G; Frequency: 2412 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 2412 MHz; = 1.778 S/m; r = 38.709; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.4C; Liquid temperature: 22.8C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(7.66, 7.66, 7.66); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Area Scan (131x71x1): Interpolated grid: dx=12 mm, dy=12 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 0.0911 W/kg Zoom Scan (7x7x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=5mm, dy=5mm, dz=5mm Reference Value = 1.274 V/m; Power Drift = -0.02 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 0.126 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 0.061 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 0.028 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 0.0931 W/kg 0 dB = 0.0931 W/kg = -10.31 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 29 of 38 Date: 2019/4/26 WLAN 802.11ac(80M) 5.2G_Head_Front tilt_CH 42_0mm Communication System: WLAN 5G; Frequency: 5210 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 5210 MHz; = 4.763 S/m; r = 35.773; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 21.7C; Liquid temperature: 22.1C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(5.56, 5.56, 5.56); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Area Scan (161x71x1): Interpolated grid: dx=10 mm, dy=10 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 1.30 W/kg Zoom Scan (7x7x12)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=4mm, dy=4mm, dz=2mm Reference Value = 1.255 V/m; Power Drift = -0.13 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 2.83 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 0.656 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 0.208 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 1.32 W/kg 0 dB = 1.32 W/kg = 1.21 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 30 of 38 Date: 2019/4/26 WLAN 802.11ac(80M) 5.3G_Head_Front tilt_CH 58_0mm Communication System: WLAN 5G; Frequency: 5290 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 5290 MHz; = 4.865 S/m; r = 35.616; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.5C; Liquid temperature: 22.2C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(5.41, 5.41, 5.41); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Area Scan (161x71x1): Interpolated grid: dx=10 mm, dy=10 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 1.14 W/kg Zoom Scan (7x7x12)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=4mm, dy=4mm, dz=2mm Reference Value = 1.099 V/m; Power Drift = -0.12 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 2.30 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 0.520 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 0.164 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 1.09 W/kg 0 dB = 1.09 W/kg = 0.37 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 31 of 38 Date: 2019/4/26 WLAN 802.11ac(80M) 5.8G_Head_Front side_CH 155_0mm Communication System: WLAN 5G; Frequency: 5775 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 5775 MHz; = 5.465 S/m; r = 34.209; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.1C; Liquid temperature: 22.3C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(5.06, 5.06, 5.06); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Area Scan (161x71x1): Interpolated grid: dx=10 mm, dy=10 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 1.10 W/kg Zoom Scan (7x7x12)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=4mm, dy=4mm, dz=2mm Reference Value = 1.852 V/m; Power Drift = -0.18 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 2.58 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 0.539 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 0.173 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 1.10 W/kg 0 dB = 1.10 W/kg = 0.41 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Date: 2019/4/25 Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 32 of 38 5. SAR System Performance Verification Dipole 2450 MHz_SN:869 Communication System: CW; Frequency: 2450 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 2450 MHz; = 1.814 S/m; r = 38.557; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.4C; Liquid temperature: 22.8C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(7.66, 7.66, 7.66); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Pin=250mW/Area Scan (51x61x1): Interpolated grid: dx=12 mm, dy=12 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 21.5 W/kg Pin=250mW/Zoom Scan (7x7x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=5mm, dy=5mm, dz=5mm Reference Value = 102.1 V/m; Power Drift = 0.07 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 27.2 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 13.2 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 6.16 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 20.2 W/kg 0 dB = 20.2 W/kg = 13.05 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 33 of 38 Date: 2019/4/26 Dipole 5200 MHz_SN:1023 Communication System: CW; Frequency: 5200 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 5200 MHz; = 4.753 S/m; r = 35.803; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 21.7C; Liquid temperature: 22.1C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(5.56, 5.56, 5.56); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Pin=100mW/Area Scan (51x51x1): Interpolated grid: dx=10 mm, dy=10 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 16.1 W/kg Pin=100mW/Zoom Scan (7x7x12)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=4mm, dy=4mm, dz=2mm Reference Value = 59.91 V/m; Power Drift = -0.04 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 37.7 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 7.79 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 2.13 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 16.6 W/kg 0 dB = 16.6 W/kg = 12.20 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 34 of 38 Date: 2019/4/26 Dipole 5300 MHz_SN:1023 Communication System: CW; Frequency: 5300 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 5300 MHz; = 4.871 S/m; r = 35.534; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.5C; Liquid temperature: 22.2C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(5.41, 5.41, 5.41); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Pin=100mW/Area Scan (51x51x1): Interpolated grid: dx=10 mm, dy=10 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 17.4 W/kg Pin=100mW/Zoom Scan (7x7x12)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=4mm, dy=4mm, dz=2mm Reference Value = 60.49 V/m; Power Drift = 0.12 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 42.2 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 8.38 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 2.31 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 18.4 W/kg 0 dB = 18.4 W/kg = 12.65 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 35 of 38 Date: 2019/4/26 Dipole 5800 MHz_SN:1023 Communication System: CW; Frequency: 5800 MHz; Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium parameters used: f = 5800 MHz; = 5.494 S/m; r = 34.171; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.1C; Liquid temperature: 22.3C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN7466; ConvF(5.06, 5.06, 5.06); Calibrated: 2019/2/4;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1336; Calibrated: 2018/8/6 Phantom: ELI DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373)) Pin=100mW/Area Scan (51x51x1): Interpolated grid: dx=10 mm, dy=10 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 17.6 W/kg Pin=100mW/Zoom Scan (7x7x12)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=4mm, dy=4mm, dz=2mm Reference Value = 60.58 V/m; Power Drift = -0.05 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 43.0 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 7.98 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 2.19 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 17.4 W/kg 0 dB = 17.4 W/kg = 12.41 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 36 of 38 6. Uncertainty Budget Measurement Uncertainty evaluation template for DUT SAR test (3-6G) A Source of Uncertainty c Tolerance/

Uncertainty D e f g Probability Distributio Div Div Value ci (1g) ci (10g) h=c * f / e Standard uncertainty i=c * g / e Standard uncertainty k vi, or Veff Measurement system Probe calibration Isotropy , Axial Isotropy, Hemispherical Modulation Response Boundary Effect Linearity Detection Limits Readout Electronics Response time Integration Time Measurement drift

(class A evaluation) RF ambient condition -

noise RF ambient conditions -

reflections Probe positioner Mechanical restrictions Probe Positioning with respect to phantom shell Post-processing Max SAR Eval Test Sample related Test sample positioning Device Holder Uncertainty Drift of output power Phantom and Setup Phantom Uncertainty Liquid permittivity (mea.) 6.55%

3.50%

9.60%

2.40%

1.00%

4.70%

1.00%

0.30%

0.80%

2.60%

1.75%

3.00%

3.00%

0.40%

2.90%

1.00%

1.00%

2.90%

3.60%

5.00%

4.00%

3.20%

Liquid Conductivity (mea.) 4.25%

N R R R R R R N R R R R R R R R R N N R R N N Combined standard uncertainty Expant uncertainty (95%

confidence interval), K=2 RSS 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1 1 1.732 1.732 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.64 0.6 0.43 0.49 6.55%

2.02%

5.54%

1.40%

0.58%

2.71%

0.58%

0.30%

0.46%

1.50%

1.01%

1.73%

1.73%

0.23%

1.67%

0.58%

0.58%

2.90%

3.60%

2.89%

2.31%

2.05%

6.55%

2.02%

5.54%

1.40%

0.58%

2.71%

0.58%

0.30%

0.46%

1.50%

1.01%

1.73%

1.73%

0.23%

1.67%

0.58%

0.58%

2.90%

3.60%

2.89%

M-1 M-1 2.31%

1.38%

M M 2.55%

2.08%

12.16%

24.33%

11.97%

23.94%

Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 37 of 38 Measurement Uncertainty evaluation template for DUT SAR test (0.3-3G) A Source of Uncertainty c Tolerance/

Uncertainty D e f g Probability Distributio Div Div Value ci (1g) ci (10g) h=c * f / e Standard uncertainty i=c * g / e Standard uncertainty k vi, or Veff Measurement system Probe calibration Isotropy , Axial Isotropy, Hemispherical Modulation Response Boundary Effect Linearity Detection Limits Readout Electronics Response time Integration Time Measurement drift

(class A evaluation) RF ambient condition -

noise RF ambient conditions -

reflections Probe positioner Mechanical restrictions Probe Positioning with respect to phantom shell Post-processing Max SAR Eval Test Sample related Test sample positioning Device Holder Uncertainty Drift of output power Phantom and Setup Phantom Uncertainty Liquid permittivity (mea.) 6.00%

3.50%

9.60%

2.40%

1.00%

4.70%

1.00%

0.30%

0.80%

2.60%

1.75%

3.00%

3.00%

0.40%

2.90%

1.00%

1.00%

2.90%

3.60%

5.00%

4.00%

1.85%

Liquid Conductivity (mea.) 0.82%

N R R R R R R N R R R R R R R R R N N R R N N Combined standard uncertainty Expant uncertainty (95%

confidence interval), K=2 RSS 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1.732 1 1 1.732 3 1.732 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.64 0.6 0.43 0.49 6.00%

2.02%

5.54%

1.40%

0.58%

2.71%

0.58%

0.30%

0.46%

1.50%

1.01%

1.73%

1.73%

0.23%

1.67%

0.58%

0.58%

2.90%

3.60%

2.89%

2.31%

1.18%

6.00%

2.02%

5.54%

1.40%

0.58%

2.71%

0.58%

0.30%

0.46%

1.50%

1.01%

1.73%

1.73%

0.23%

1.67%

0.58%

0.58%

2.90% M-1 3.60% M-1 2.89%

2.31%

0.80%

M M 0.49%

0.40%

11.49%

22.98%

11.44%

22.89%

Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2019/40030 Page : 38 of 38 Appendixes Refer to separated files for the following appendixes. EN201940030 SAR_Appendix A Photographs EN201940030 SAR_Appendix B DAE & Probe Cal. Certificate EN201940030 SAR_Appendix C Phantom Description & Dipole Cal. Certificate

- End of report -

Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group